1985_Mitsubishi_Microprocessors_And_Peripheral_Circuits 1985 Mitsubishi Microprocessors And Peripheral Circuits

User Manual: 1985_Mitsubishi_Microprocessors_And_Peripheral_Circuits

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 344

Download1985_Mitsubishi_Microprocessors_And_Peripheral_Circuits 1985 Mitsubishi Microprocessors And Peripheral Circuits
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
MITSUBISHI
~

0

0

MICROPROCESSORS AND
PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI

SEMICONDUCTORS
MICROPROCESSORS AND
PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS

o

~

J7

CD

o
o
A

. • MITSUBISHI

~ELECTRIC

All values shown in this catalogue are subject to change for product improvement.
The information, diagrams and all other data included herein
are believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation for their use, nor
for any infringements of patents or other rights belonging to third
parties which may result from their use.

GUIDANCE

NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS

D
D
D

CMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS

II

MELPS 85 MICROPROCESSORS
MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS

APPLICATION

0

MITSUBISHI LSls

CONTENTS

DGUIDANCE

Page

Index by Function ................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Ordering Information ............................................................................................................................... 1-5
Package Outlines .................................................................................................................................... 1-7
Letter Symbols for the Dynamic Parameters ............................................................................................... 1-13
Symbology ............................................................................................................ ·································1-16
Quality Assurance and Reliability Testing ................................................................................................... 1-19
Precautions In Handling MOS ICs ............................................................................................................. 1-21

EJ
EJ

D

EJ

MELPS 85 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8085AP

8-Bit Parallel Microprocessor .............................................................. ···············2-3

M5L8212P

8-Bit Input/Output Port with 3-State Output ......................................................... 2-17

M5L8216P/M5L8226P

4-Bit Parallel Bidirectional Bus Drivers ...................................................... ··········2-21

MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8282P/M5L8283P

Octal Latch ............................................................ ·········································3-3

M5L8284AP

Clock Generator and Driver for 8086/8088/8089 Processors .................................. 3-7

M5L8286P/M5L8287P

Octal Bus Transceiver ...................................................... ································3-16

M5L8288S
M5L8289P

Bus Controller for 8086/8088/8089 Processors ..................................................... 3-20
Bus Arbiter for 8086/8088/8089 Processors ......................................................... 3-28

NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
M5L8155P

2048-Bit Static RAM with I/O Ports and Timer ...................................................... 4-3

M5L8156P

2048-Bit Static RAM with I/O Ports and Timer ...................................................... 4-11

M5L8251AP-5

Programmable Communication Interface ...................................................... ·······4-19

M5L8253P-5

Programmable Interval Timer ...................................................... ·······················4-36

M5L8255AP-5

Programmable Peripheral Interface .................................................................... 4-44

M5L8257P-5
M5L8259AP

Programmable DMA Controller .......................................................................... 4-62

M5L8279P-5

Programmable Keyboard/Display Interface ......................................................... 4-86

Programmable Interrupt Controller ...................................................... ················4-72

CMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
M58990P, -1

8-Bit 8-Channel A-D Converter ...................................................... ····················5-3

M5M82C37AP, -4, -5

CMOS Programmable DMA Controller ................................................................ 5-14

M5M82C37AFP, -4, -5

CMOS Programmable DMA Controller ...................................................... ··········5-35

M5M82C51AP

CMOS Programmable Communication Interface ................................................... 5-44

M5M82C51AFP

CMOS Programmable Communication Interface ................................................... 5-60

M5M82C54P, -6

CMOS Programmable Interval Timer ...................................................... ············5-61

M5M82C54FP, -6

CMOS Programmable Interval Timer .................................................................. 5-72

M5M82C55AP-5

CMOS Programmable Peripheral Interface .......................................................... 5-73

M5M82C55AFP-5

CMOS Programmable Peripheral Interface .......................................... ················5-86

M5M82C59AP

CMOS Programmable Interrupt Controller ........................................................... 5-87

M5M82C59AFP

CMOS Programmable Interrupt Controller .................................... ·······················5-101
CMOS CRT Controller ...................................................................................... 5-102

M58992P

m

APPLICATION

Notice for CMOS Peripherals ............................................................................................................ ·······6-3
M5W1791-02P

Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller ...................................................... ·················6-10

M5W1793-02P

Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller ....................................................................... 6-40

Contact Addresses for Further Information

•

MITSUBISHI

.... ELECTRIC

GUIDANCE

D

MITSUBISHI LSls

INDEX BY FUNCTION

Electrical characteristics

Supply
Type

Structure

Circuit function and organization

voltage

(V)

Typ
Max.
Min.
pwr access cycle
dissipation time
(mW) (ns)

Max.
fre-

Package

quency
(ns) (MHz)

time

Interchangeable

products

Page

.MELPS 85 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8085AP
M5L8212P
M5L8216P
M5L8226P

8-Bit Parallel Microprocessor
8-Bit Input/Output Port with
3-State Output
4-Bit Parallel Bidirectional Bus
Driver (Non Inverting)
4-Bit Parallel Bidirectional Bus
Driver (Inverting)

N,Si,ED

5±5%

600

-

-

3

40P4

i8085A

2-3

B,LS

5±5%

450

30*

-

-

24P4

i8212

2-17

B,LS

5±5%

475

30*

-

-

16P4

i8216

2-21

B,LS

5±5%

425

25*

-

-

16P4

i8226

2-21

.MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8282P

Octal Latch (Non Inverting)

B,LS

5±10%

250

5±10%

250

-

3-3

B,LS

-

i8282

Octal Latch (Inverting)

-

20P4

M5L8283P

20P4

i8283

3-3

-

18P4

i8284

3-7

-

20P4

i8286

3-16

M5L8284AP

Clock Generator and Driver for

8086/8088/8089 Processors

B,LS

5±10%

490

-

-

5±10%

400

-

-

M5L8286P

Octal Bus Transceiver
(Non Inverting)

B,LS

M5L8287P

Octal Bus Transceiver (Inverting)

B,LS

5±10%

400

-

-

-

20P4

i8287

3-16

B,LS

5±10%

500

-

-

-

20S1

i8288

3-20

B,LS

5±10%

350

-

-

-

20P4

i8289

3-28

N,Si,ED

5±5%

500

-

-

-

40P4

i8155

4-3

N,Si,ED

5±5%

500

-

-

-

40P4

i8156

4-11

N,Si,ED

5±5%

M5L8288S
M5L8289P

Bus Controller for

8086/8088/8089 Processors
Bus Arbiter for

8086/8088/8089 Processors

.NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
M5L8155P
M5L8156P

2048-Bit Static RAM with 1/0
Ports and Timer (CE="L" active)
2048-Bit Static RAM with 1/0
Ports and Timer (CE="H" active)

Programmable Communication

300

-

-

3

28P4

i8251A

4-19

M5L8253P-5

Programmable Interval Timer

N,Si,ED 5±10%

300

-

-

2

24P4

i8253-5

4-36

M5L8255AP-5

Programmable Peripheral Interface

N,Si,ED

250

-

-

-

40P4

i8255A-5

4-44

M5L8257P-5

Programmable DMA Controller

N,Si,ED

300
275

-

-

40P4

i8257-5

4-62

-

-

3
-

28P4

i8259A

4-72

650

-

-

3

40P4

i8279-5

4-86

M5L8251AP-5

M5L8259AP
M5L8279P-5

Interface

5±5%

5±5%
Programmable Interrupt Controller N,Si,ED 5±10%

Programmable Keyboard/Display
Interface

B = Bipolar.

C= CMOS.

N = N-channel.

Si

=

N,Si,ED 5±10%

ED = Enhancement depletion mode.

Silicon gate.

*Indicates propagation time.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

1-3

a

MITSUBISHI LSls

INDEX BY FUNCTION

I

Electrical characteristics

Type

Circuit function and organization

Structure

Supply
voltage
(V)

I
Typ
Max.
Min.
Max.
Package \ Interchangeable
frepwr access cycle
products
dissipatioll time
time quency
(mW) (ns)
(ns) (MHz)

Page

i

.CMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
MS8990P
MS8990P-1
M5M82C37AP
M5M82C37AP-4
M5M82C37AP-5
M5M82C37AFP
M5M82C37AFP-4
M5M82C37AFP-5
MSM82C51AP
M5M82C51AFP
MSM82C54P-6
M5M82C54P
M5M82C54FP-6
MSM82C54FP

..
..
..
..
..
·
..
..·
..·

CMOS Programmable

M5M82C5SAFP-5 •

M5M82C59AFP
M58992P

·
..
..

C,Si

Controller

..

·

C,Si

CMOS Programmable DMA

CMOS Programmable DMA

M5M82C55AP-5

M5M82C59AP

8-Bit 8-Channel A-D Converter

C,Si

Controller

Communication Interface

CMOS Programmable

Communication Interface
CMOS Programmable Interval
Timer
CMOS Programmable Interval
Timer

CMOS Programmable Peripheral
Interface
CMOS Programmable Peripheral
Interface
CMOS Programmable Interrupt
Controller

CMOS Programmable Interrupt
Controller
CMOS CRT Controller

5±5%

5±10%

5±10%

I -

-

-

-

-

-

-

3
4

-

-

5

-

-

-

3

-

-

-

4

-

-

-

5

-

, -

•

Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller
Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller

: New product.

• • : Under development.

= CMOS.

B = Bipolar.

C

N = N-channel.

LS = LSTTL

1-4

40P4

-

5-14

40P2R

-

5-35

-

-

-

3

28P4

-

5-44

C,Si

5±10%

-

-

-

3

28P2W

-

5-60

-

5±10%

-

-

C,Si

6

-

-

24P4

-

8

5-61

C,Si

5±10%

-

-

-

24P2W

-

8

5-72

C,Si

5±10%

-

-

-

-

40P4

-

5-73

C,Si

5±10%

-

-

-

-

40P2R

-

5-86

C,Si

5±10%

-

-

-

-

28P4

-

5-87

C,Si

5±10%

-

-

-

-

28P2W

-

5-101

5±10%

-

-

-

-

64P4B

-

5-102

ED = Enhancement depletion mode.
Si

5-3

5±10%

.APPLICATION
M5W1793-02P

ADC0808

C,Si

C,Si

M5W1791-02P

28P4

= Silicon gate.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

6

MITSUBISHI LSls

ORDERING INFORMATION

FUNCTION CODE
Mitsubishi integrated circuits may be ordered using the following simplified alphanumeric type-codes which define the function of the ICs and the package style.

For Mitsubishi Original Products
Example: M

T

5

-89r -

-

90
-

P - 1
M

: Mitsubishi integrated circuit prefix

Temperature range
5 : Standard industrial/commercial (0 to 70175"C or -20 to 85"C)
9 : High reliability
Series designation using 1 or 2 alphanumeric characters.
: CMOS
1
: Linear circuit
3
: TTL
10~19 : Linear circuit
32~33 : TTL (equivalent to Texas Instruments' SN74 series)
41~47 : TTL
01~09

81

: P-channel aluminum-gate MOS

84
85
86

: CMOS
: P-channel silicon-gate MOS
: P-channel aluminum-gate MOS

87

: N-channel silicon-gate MOS

88
89

: P-channel aluminum-gate ED-MOS
: CMOS

9

: DTL

SO~S2 : Schottky TTL (equivalent to Texas Instruments' SN74S series)

Circuit function identification code using 2 digits.
~

t-- Package style
K : Glass-sealed ceramic
P : Molded plastic

5 : Metal-sealed ceramic
SP : Molded plastic (Dill
FP : Molded plastic (FLAT)
'--

Electrical characteristic identification code using 1 or 2 digits.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

1-5

a

MITSUBISHI LSls

ORDERING INFORMATION

For Second Source Products
Example: M

T

5

T

L

-

8251

-r-

A

P - 5
r

M

I

: Mitsubishi integrated circuit prefix

Temperature range
5 : Standard industrial/commercial (0 to 70/75'C or -20 to 85'C)
9 : High reliability
Series designation of original source using 1 or 2 alphabetical characters.
C : Motorola's MC series
G : General Instrument's series
K : Mostek's MK series
L : Intel's series
T : Texas Instruments' TMS series
W : Western Digital's series
M : Mitsubishi electric
Circuit function identification code of the original source type name
Consists of a single letter which indicates the difference of outer appearance
or some part of the device specifications as listed below.
(1) For linear circuits, this is one letter of the alphabet, chosen in alphabetical
order but not including I or 0, which is used to flag devices for which parts
of the specifications differ.
(2) For devices with identical specifications having only pin bending direction
differences, an R is assigned to this group.
(3) When this group designation is not required, the next group is shifted to
the lef! to follow the group (4) immediately.
L--

I-- Package style

K
P
S
SP

Glass-sealed ceramic
Molded plastic
Metal-sealed ceramic
Molded plastiC (OIL)
FP : Molded plastic (FLAT)

~

:
:
:
:

Electrical characteristic identification code using 1 or 2 digits.

PACKAGE CODE
Package style may be specified by using the following simplified alphanumeric code.
Example: 40
P 2
R .
L---+-+----11----" Number of pins

L--+_+-_ Package structure
K
P
S

: Glass-sealed ceramic
: Molded plastiC
: Metal-sealed ceramic

Package outline
1 : OIL without fin
2 : Flat without fin
4 : OIL without fin (improved)
48 : Shrink OIL without fin
Outline supplement symbol

1-6

, •. 'MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

PACKAGE OUTLINES

TYPE 16P4 16-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC DIL

a

Dimension in mm

0.27":~:~~
2.S4±0.2S

O.S±O.l

7.6-10

1.5~g:~

Dimension in mm

TYPE 18P4 18-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC DIL

7 62± 0 3

f ,____
4.SMAX

J

\

i ~,--_-../J

3MIN

O.S±O.l

7.6-10
2.S4±0.2S

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

1-7

MITSUBISHI LSls

PACKAGE OUTLINES

TYPE 20S1

20-PIN METAL-SEALED CERAMIC OIL

Dimension in mm

24.9MAX

.11.O.46±O.05

2. 54±O. 15

Dimension in mm

TYPE 20P4 20-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC 01 L

I

24:t:n

I

~::::::: :0]]
7 62±0 3

{
4.5MAX

3 MIN

,

,

i\
O.27:t:g· ~~

O.5±O.1
2 .54± 0 .25

1-8

7.6 -10

• . MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

\
Ji

MITSUBISHI LSls

PACKAGE OUTLINES

..

Dimension in mm

TYPE 24P4 24-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC OIL

15.24tO.3

I~

027:':~~S

2.54 to. 25

15.2-17

-t-----+--

TYPE 24P2W

Dimension in mm

24-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC FLAT

o

o
1.27±O.2

o
+1.,.

J

I"O.4±O.1

lS±O.2

o
+1

O.S±O.2

"''"o

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

.

~16~

~t1 t1 nH H t1 n n n t1 n d

00

t'

11. 93±O. 3

"'

1-9

MITSUBISHI LSls

PACKAGE OUTLINES

Dimension in mm

TYPE 28P4 28·PIN MOLDED PLASTIC OIL

I'

36.7~g:~

I

~ ~: :::::::::~~]
15,24+0,3

~
~~
"

0.5MIN

ll,54±~5

~l
\

TYPE 28P2W

o

5,5MAX

i

0,27

~gg~

2.8MIN

O.5±0.1
1.2+ 0 ,3
·-0.1

_~

15,2-17

Dimension in mm

28-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC FLAT

o
8. 4±O. 2

~IIEO,4±0.1

c;;
+1

N

!'-co
00

00

+1
co

11. 93±O. 3

1-10

• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

PACKAGE OUTLINES

TYPE 40P4

Dimension in mm

40-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC DIL

15.24±0.3

~ .. '"" ,.. ""
~5j
\

S.SMAX

2.54±O.2S

~g~

Dimension in mm

40-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC FLAT

o

o
"I 1<: O. 8 ± O. 1 5

En.n.n.DJ.UIlWWUL~1 J
__.

~gris

15.2-17

0.S±0.1
12

TYPE 40P2R

0.25

17.5i-O.2

_~

+1

+1

'"
r COII:ITlrl ddclrpss stroiJp

th (CAS·RAS)
th (CAS·W)

th(CAS·WR)

Write hold tlille alli:r colurlln address str()bE'

th (D)

th (DA)

Data-In hold time

th(D·PR)

th(DA·PRO)

Program hold time afler data-In

th (E)

th(CE)

Chip enable hold tinw

th (E·D)

th(CE·OA)

Dato-In hold time after chir enablf'

th (E·G)

th(CE·OE)

Output enable hold tllne alter chip e"able'

th (R)

th (RD)

Rr.ad hold time

th(RAS·CA)

Column address hold t,me af ter row dddrr~ss strohe

t h (RAS·CAS)

Column address strob" holritllTlp alter

th (RAS·D)
th(RAS·W)

th (RAS.DA)

Itl

·WR)

<--Iddress \trolJf'

Data-Ill hold ,irne after row ilrJdress s1rrllw
Write hold trrne after row address strobe
Chip select hold time

th (S)

th(es)

th (W)

th (WR)

Wrl1e hold time

th(W·CAS)

th (WR·CAS)

Colurnn address strobe hold time alter wrl\('

th (W·O)

th (WR·OA)

Data-In hold time after write

th (W·RAS)

th(WR·RAS)

Row Cjrlrirpss hold tllTle ;'lftf'r wrltp.

tpHL

High-level to low-level propagation time

tpLH

Low-level to high-level propagation time

}

the time interval between
output IS gOing to the low
of stated type

reference
level and

on the
the device is

and on the output pulses when the
and loaded by tYPICal devices

Rise time

tr
trec(w)

twr

Write recovery time-the time interval between the termination of a write pulse and the initiation of a new cycle

tree (PD)

tR(PD)

Power-down recovery lime
Setup time-the time Interval between the application of a signal which is maintained at a specrifed input terminal and a consecutive active

tsu

tarnsition at another specified input terminal

tSU(A)

tSU(AD)

Address setup tirne

tsu (A-E)

tsu (AD-CE)

Chip enable setup lime before address

tSU(A-W)

tSU(AD-WR)

Wrltesetuptirnebeloreaddress
Row address strobe setup time before column address

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

1-17

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

SYMBOLOGY

New symbol

Para meter -def init i on

Former symbol

tsu (DA)

Data-in setup time

tsu (D-E)

tsu (DA-GE)

Chip enable setup time before data-in

tsu (D-W)

tsu (DA-WR)

Write setup time before data-in

tsu (E)

tsu (CE)

Chip enable setup time

tSU(E-P)

tsu (CE-P)

Precharge setup I ime before chip enable

tsu (G-E)

tsu (OE-CE)

Chip enable setup time before output enable

tsu (P-E)

tsu (P-CE)

Chip enable setup IIrne before precharge

tSU(RD)

Read setup time

tsu (D)

Power-down setup

tsU(PO)

tsu (R)

!lrYle

tsu (R-CAS) tsu IRA-CAS)

Column address strobe setup time before read

tsu (RA-CAS)

Colu!nn address strobe setup time before row address

tsu (S)

tSU(CS)

Chip select setup time

tSU(S-W)

tsu

Write setup lime hf"fore chip selecl

tSU(W)

tSU(WR)

(CS-WR)

Write se\llp

trHL

High-level to low-level transition time

tTLH

Low-Ievel- to high-level transition time

l

j

the time interval between
reference
on the
going to the low (high)
and when a
Input
the output is loaded by another specified network

Oatil valid lime after ilddress

tV(A)

tdv (AD)

tv IE)

tdv (CE)

Daw valid time after chip enable

tV(E)PR

tV(CE)PR

Data valid tlrrlP. aftf,r chip enable In proqram mode

tv (G)

tv (OE)

Data valid tlrne after OIJtput enable

tv (CS)

DAta valin wne after chip seleel

tv (PR)
tv (S)

O(l\a v(lild tnne after program

Pilise VI/ldth (pulse duration) the time interval between specified reference points on the leading and training edges of the wa\leforms

tw
tW(E)

tW(CE)

Chip enable pulse width

tW(EH)

tW(CEH)

Chip enable high pulse width

tW(EL)

tW(EL)

Chip enable low pulse width
Proqrarn [Julse Width

tW(PR)
tW(R)

tW(RD)

Read pulse width

tW(S)

tWICS)

Chip select pulse width

t wlW )

t wIWR )

tWI ¢)

Wrtie pulse width
Clock pulse width

Ta

Ambient temperature

Topr

Operating temperature

Tstg

Storage temperature

VBB

VBB supply voltage

VCC

Vee supply voltage

VDD

VDO supply voltage

VGG

VGG supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

V,H

High-level input voltage-the value of the permitted high-state voltage at the input

V,L

Low·level input voltage-the value of the permiHed low-state voltage at the input

Va

Output voltage

VOH

High-level output voltage-the value of the guaranteed high·state voltage range at the output

VOL

Low-level output voltage-the value of the guaranteed low"state voltage range at the output

VSS

Vss supply voltage

1-18

of the output pulse when the
applied through a specified

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

IS

and

MITSUBISHI LSls

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND RELIABILITY TESTING

1. PLANNING
In recent years, advances in integrated circuits have been
rapid, with increasing density and speed accompanied by
decreasing cost. Because of these advances, it is now
practical and economically justifiable to use these devices
in systems of greater complexity and in which they were
previously considered too expensive. All of these advances
add up to increased demand.
We at Mitsubishi foresaw this increased demand and
organized our production facilities to meet it. We also
realized that simply increasing production to meet the
demand was not enough and that positive steps would have
to be taken to assure the reliability of our products.
This realization resulted in development of our Quality
Assurance System. The system has resulted in improved
products, and Mitsubishi is able to supply its customers'
needs with ICs of high reliability and stable quality. This
system is the key to future planning for improved design,
production and quality assurance.

procedures developed in §2.2 are continued. The closest
monitoring assures that they are complied with.

3. RELIABILITY CONTROL
3.1 Reliability Tests
The newly established Reliability Center for Electronic
Components of Japan has established a qualification system
for electronic components. Reliability test methods and
procedures are developed to mainly meet MI L-STD-883
and J IS C 7022 specifications. Details of typical tests used
on Mitsubishi ICs are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Typical reliability test items and conditions

2. QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM
The Quality Assurance System imposes quality controls
on Mitsubishi products from the initial conception of a
new product to the final delivery of the product to the
customer. A diagram of the total system is shown in Fig. 1.
For ease of understanding, the system is divided into three
stages.

2.1 Quality Assurance in the Design Stage
The characteristics of the breadboard devices are carefu"Y
checked to assure that all specifications are met. Standard
integrated circuits and high-quality discrete components are
used. During the design stage, extensive use is made of a
soph isticated CAD program, which is updated to always
include the latest state-of-the-art techniques.

2.2 Quality Assurance in the LimitedManufacturing Stage
Rigid controls are maintained on the environment, incoming material and manufacturing equipment such as tools
and test equipment. The products and materials used are
subjected to stringent tests and inspections as they are
manufactured. Wafer production is closely monitored.
Finally, a tough quality assurance test and inspection is
made before the product is released for delivery to a
customer. Th is final test includes a complete visual inspection and electrical characteristics tests.
A sampling
technique is used to conduct tests under severe operating
conditions to assure that the products meet reliability
specifications.

3.2 Failure Analysis
Devices that have failed during reliability or acceleration
tests are analyzed to determine the cause of failure. This
information is fed back to the process engineering section
and manufacturing section so that improvements can be
made to increase reliability. A summary of failure analysis
procedures is shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Summary of failure analysis procedures
t--

[)(~S(JII}tl(J(l

+------o

1. External

examination

------ -

o !n~;pf?c!ICJrl uf Icaus piJtlJlY soldcrlnq cHid welding
Insp(~r:tlon

of

rlld1E~rlals,

sealing, package and marking

0 Visual 111SP()ctlllr'· of uther Iterns uf tnf; sp()cifICB11l'nS
0 Use uf stcr(;o rncru:;copcs metallurgical mlUuscopes X-ray
photographiC (;qUlprnen1. fine leakage and gross leakage

deuradatlorl bv electrical parameter filcasurement
o OLY;crvJllun uf

2. Electrical tests

~;hilrac!(?rlstlcs

oy a synchroscope or (] curve

HaCi:r and ch(:cklrl\j 01 'rnpurtant phYSical characteristiCS
t.lV f.'it:c:lrlcal dl(]racterlstlCS

() Strt'SS tests such ,lS cnvrronm(;nlal Of lif(: tests. If reqUired
o Rem()val

(II

the

oi tht: deVice the optical Inspection

of th(' Illtr:rnal structure of the deVice

Internal

C 0.1'(:,(,11\1 (Ii lilt: Slilc:Orl ("~l:P surface

examination

0

MI'd',1111'111I'111

ul l'II'ctr,(",,1 cil(]rdcterIS\ICS bv probes

II appliCdlJll'

2.3 Quality Assurance in the Full Production Stage
Full production of a product is not started until it has been
confirmed that it can be manufactured to meet quality and
reliability specifications. The controls, tests and inspection

o U,;p (If ScM XMA and Infrared microscanner If reqUired

o U,p (II IlictailuISJ1cai analvsl" techniques to supplement

4. Chip analysis

o

a

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

SllClrlSJ for cruss S8C\lonal IrlSpeC\IOn

o ArlolYSIS uf OXide frim defects

AnalySIS uf diffUSion defect,

1-19

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND RELIABILITY TESTING

, Fig. 1 Quality assurance system
MARKETING

WAFER AND
ASSEMBLY
DIV

ENGINEERING

PRODUCTION PLANNING

M ARKET

DIV

& PURCHASING DIVS

OUALITY
CONTROL
DIV

OUALITY
ASSURANCE
DIV

MANUFUCTURING
CONTROL
DIV

PURCHASING SPEC

®-~

DEVELOPMENT
PLANNING

)-

MARKET RESEARCH

JIS. MIL SPECS

DEVELOPMENT ORDER
!NEW PRODUCT~
DEVELOPMENT

l

-

(PRE.PRODUCTION ORDER

l

·C

0-

r---.-t

1ST

TYPE T[ST

J

COUNCIL'foR PREPRODUCTION

-1

)--

PREPRODUCTION

2ND

PRODUCT DRAWIN G

TYPE TEST

jJ

(

~

L
)

PURCHASE ORDER

j

vi

fi'!>~

"'"

ffi

U)

QUAlITY

""

I

PLANNING

~NTROL

(

(

i2

"-'

RECEIVING J
IIINSPECTION

INCOMING MATERIALS

V

l

U)

,.

WAFER
PROCE SS

t

f-

0
0a:

F\.iAl UA TlON

:r ASSEMBL Y
\

EVALUATION

PROCESS

J

z

l
u

STOREROOM

SHIPPING ORDER

~

0

WRAPPING AND
SHIPPING

TEST

' - ' AC [ION [0 ABNORMAL

u

l

RETURNED MATERIALS

Q

Q

Q

RE~RT

'-'

MAIN DIVISION

1-20

'"

0
0
gc

2

TEST

o

CONCERNED DIVISION

-

•

MITSUBISHI

I'ElECTRIC

a:

'>

~
z
z

'3

~

1--r--')

PLANNING Of
SHIPPING

COMPLAINT
RESOr TION

_

c

til


(H) """"<83>

Where. M=(H) (Ll

x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x

X

x

X

X

X

(r)

0

M.

(M)
(82)

I
1

M4
M.

(82)

,

Ms

I
I

M3

(82)

I

Ml



LXI

w

SP,m

SPHL
STAX B
STAX 0

ro
ro

o

LDAX
LDAX

B
0

STA

m

o

(D) --<83)

Where.

m =

m =

0

0
0
0

0
0

<."
<.s>

1 1 0

<."
<.s>

1 1 1
000
o 1 0

a a

1

a a

1
010
0 1 0

3 1

10

3

1
1

0
0

1 0
1 0

1 1 0

0

1 0

F 9
6
1
1
02
7
1
2
1 2
7
1
2
o A 7 1 2
1 A
7
1
2
321334

0

1 0

3 A

13

3

4

0

1

a

2 2

16

3

5

o
o

0
1

(82)

X X X X X

(82)

(B3)

<83> <82>

<83)

x x

X

x x

(82)
(83)

Where. m = <83> (82)

x

(SPl--m

3

X X

(83) (82)

<.s>

11

o
o
o
o
o

Where.

(8) --(83)

1 0
(82)

c
ro

x x x

(C)--
5HlD

m

o a


1 0 0

(m +-1)

<82>
lHlD

m

o


0

1 0

1

a

1 0

2 A

16

(U~lm)

3

(H)

(82)

<---emf

m

m+1
XXXXX
1)

m
m 1-1

0

M.
MS

<83>

~:~~~LC'G---+~:~:-~~:~~ -ci---H+ ~~-,:;-t-,"'~+-':'+~:+·--1'~~"l~iOo~i-l:-'-'.7:07;(~"'~E,)')e-.,Oil'('(SNP")')--------r-~"-~"-~"-~"-~o-t'(-;OSP;cI,--j-'M;:'-t'('(s;:CpO;-;)")T,cT-CM
CO,::-1
(SP

I:~g

~

1 0
1 0

ADI

n

11

ADC
ADC
ACI

r
M
n

1 0
1 0
11

4
1
,
000
555
00011086712
000110C6722
~O~.''.''.~--+'~~l+,~r----~(A~)~'--(~A')~A7Ie,)--------------------rO~'0~0~~0 ,t~~--cT--~------r-r---~
ANA
ANI

M
n

1 0
1 1

1 0 0
1 0 0

61' ~

1 lOA
1 1
E 6

a

7

1
2

2
2

(A)"
(A)"

(A) A(M)
(A) 1\ n

Where.

M - (H) (L)

0
0

0

0
0

0
0

1
1

0
0
0

0
0
0

M

000 0 0
000 0 0
000 0 0

M

00000
00000
00000

M

a

M

M.

1M)

M.
M.

(82)

(82)

XRA
XRA
XR'
ORA
ORA
ORI

M

r

M

n

r

, 0
1 0

101
5 S S
4
1
1
101
1 lOA E
7
1
2
11
1 0 1
1 1 0
E E
7
2
2
(82)
10110555
411
1011011088712
11110110F6722
(82)
1 a
"
1
1 0
1 1 0
• E
11'
1 1
1 , 0
F E

•••

CMP
CMP
CPI

M
n

t NR

rOO

"

<. >

1

DOD

100

hD~'~~=~~M~r--_t~g~g--~~-~~<-i~-~ ~ ~ ~
DCR
I NX
I NX
I NX
INX

M
8
0

H

a a
a a
0 a
a a

5P

00

g~~

~

~ ~ o

DCX
DCX

H
SP

0 0
0 0

RL C O O

1

,

o
o

0 0
1 0
0 0

,

0

1

1 0

o

0 1
1 1

1 0

1

1 0
o 1
o 1
o 1
o 1
o 1
o 1

o ,

-'

'0
6
6

1
1

',1

1,

3

2 3

6

1

1

,

1

1

2 •

6
6
6
6

111

o ,

1

"

1

~ I~

CAl '"'~ (Al \, (r)
(A)"--(A) v eM)
(A)" CAl \ 11

Where.

(e)
(~)

IA)

I
I Compare: Where.

(H)(L)

M=(H)

CLl

M--- (H) (l)

(A)
(r)<-(r)+1

000
0 0 0

(M)--CM1-l

M

(H)(L)

000 x 0

Where. M

(H)(L)

000 x 0

Where.

(8) (0)'
(D) (El"
(H){L)'

eSP)'

(6) (e) I 1
(D) (E) • 1
(H)(L)ll

X
X
x

X
X
x

X
X
X

X
X
x

(SP) I 1

X

X

X

X

(M)

M.
M.

(82)

M.

(M)
(82)

,
,

(M)

M.
M.

M.
M.

(82)

!

-~t:::"
M4 /-._CMLr-L __M~ __
M4

M

x

(M)

I

M4

J

x
x
X

x x x x x

00
o 0

1 0 1
1 0 0

1 1 1
1 1 1

2 F
2 7

4
4

1
1

~~

00

1

1 0

1

1

1

37

4

1

1

00

1

1 1

1

1 1

3 F

4

1

1

00000
CY2 •

(CY2)

<-.

1

x x

OY2

X

X

1

X

x i" 0 x
•

2-6

M.

1

Accumu CMA
campen DAA
Carry set

Where. M

(A)

000

f- J.--"---'(T~'fi-=:cii",~",:-=+-c:-------"==--""---'-'=hL-t g g--g--~--g

3 3
O.
1 B

o

0 0

41'

lQ

1
1
1
,
1
,
,

3 5
o 3
, 3

(A)-(A)V(r)
(A)--(A)V(M)
CA) <- (A) V n

'1YIlfSU~ISHI

.... ELECTRIC

State IS Tl

* * . State IS Tz

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL808SAP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR
I~em

~·i·~

Instruction code
Mnemonic

s"

0106

Instr
class

JMP

I

m

I

050403

0201 Do

o

0

0 0

I

I

C3

10

0

Z
3

Functions

0

s z

Z

x

(PC)- m

3

Mach
Contents cycle- ;Contents t/O

P CY2CYl

x x

X

x x x x

X

Data bus

Address bus

Flags

'5 '5 '5
16mal 0
notatn z

(82)

<83>

<82}


I

If condition (s true

0

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

,

!

JNZ

m

1 I

M,
MJ

I
I

M,
MJ

I
I

M,
MJ
M.
M;
M.

If condition is true

(PC)~--m



<83>

(82)

I

C~~'~~.

I
I



CP

m

I

CM

m

,,

CPE

m

I

I

CPO

m

I

I

I

I

m

RET
RC
RNC
c
RZ
RNZ
a:
RP
RM
RPE
RPO
Input/ ! IN

"

,,

n

I

n

I

I

I

u
ro

0
<82>
<83>
00 I
<82>
<83>
o 0 0
<82>
<83>
I I 0
<82>
<83>
I
1
<82>




I

(SP)

1

M.

(PC)

3

0

M'
MJ
M.

(SP)

2

M;

(PC) 1-3

0

M;

( (SP))
M.
t 1
M;
«SP) +1)
If condition is true

I
I

M.
M;

M.
M;

x x x x x

Z )= 0

(

(SP)- eSP)
I

o

0

F •

18/9 3 5/2

2

x x x x

S ) "'- 0

(

M;

x x x

I

(93)

~

X
I

,o0

F C 18/9

3

5/2 ( S ) =

1

o

0

E C 18/9

3

5/2

( P )= 1

X

I

o

0

E •

18/9

3

5/2

( P )= 0

x x x x x

o

0

,

C9

'0

,

3

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I

08
DO
C8
CO
F 0
F 8
E8
EO
DB

o

I

I

03

1

x x x x x

If cond1t10n IS false
(PC)---(PC) I 3

12/6

12/6

1
1

10

2

3/1
3/1
3

10

2

3

If condition is false
( P ) = 1 (pc)- (pC) 1 1
P )- 0
(A) --- (Input buffer) --- (Input deVICe of number n)
(Input data)
(Output deVice of number n) • (A)

F B
F 3
F 0

,o

12

I

CO

12

, ,
I i~~~) .-_l()S;/~~·
,

12

,

1

o

I

DO

4
4

3

3
3

«SP) - 1), (8).
-(sp) -2
(SP)
«SP) -I} ,-- (D).
(SP) --(SP)-2
«SP)-1) <- (H).
(SP) --(SP)-2
(F)
-- (sp)).
(SP) --(SPJ 1-2
(C)
<-- ( (SP) ).
(SP) .- eSp) +2
IE)
--( (SP».
(SP) <-- eSP) I 2
e (SP) 1.
SP +2
(PC) -- (pC) + 1
(PC) <- (PC) I 1

3

10

,
,

10

1

3

01

10

1

3

I

E ,

10

4

,, , I :~~

1

o

I

I

I 0

o

0

I

F I

o

0 0

o

0

I

C I

o

I

0

o

0

I

I

o

0

o

0

I

I

EO

12

3

1

3

o

I 0
0 0

o

I 0
0 0

78
00

c

RIM

00

I

o

0

000

20

•

1

1

~t;
:;,c

SIM

00

I

I

0

00 0

3

4

1

1

~'~

5

1

«SP)

2)' (F,

«SP) - 2)
«sp)

<-

2) •

X

X

X

X

X

x

x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x X x x
x x x X
x x x X
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x

x x x x x

(C)

x x x x x

(E)

«SP) - 2)-- IL)

x x x x

(Al -- «sp) + 1)

00000

«SP) 11)

x x x x x

(0)'--( (SP)+I)

x x x x x

(eSP) I I)

x x x x x

(B)'

(H)'

I

(SP)
(SP)

(SP)
(SP) + 1

M.
M;

(82) 82)

M;

x x x x x
x x X x x
x x x x X
x X X X x

(INTE)--- 1
(INTE}--- 0

1

1
1

x

(PC)- ( (SP) I 1) ( (SP) )
(SP)---(SP) 1-2

1
I
I

I
I

X

+--xx-

" - - _ . _ - - - ---

If condition IS true

o

0
0
I

x

(PC) ---{ (SP) I 1) {(Sp»), (SP)--(SP) t 2

12/6 1 3'1 (CY2) _1
12/6 1 3/1 (CYz) = 0
12/. 1 311 ( Z ) = 1
12/6 I 3 / 1 I Z ) = 0
12/6 I 3/1 ( S ) = 0
12/6 1 3;'1 ( S ) = 1

1
0

X

X
X

X

x x

X x x

X X

x

X X

Meaning

I

<8z)
{Input da1a)
(82)

0

M;

A

M.
M;

(A)

x

X
X

I

(SP) 1
(SP) - 2
(SP) - 1
(SP) - 2
(SP) 1
(SP) - 2
(SP)-1
(SP)- 2
(SP)
eSp) +-1
(SP)
eSP) + 1
esP)
eSp) + 1
(SP)
SP

x
x

((SP) )

((SP) +1)



I

,, ,,
,, ,,

.

~

I

"""
<82>
LK~1)
)i

T

T3

'-

\

K

ADDRESS

~tdIALE

td(CONT-AOl

DA):,"

K

]j

ADDRESS
tdIALE-AD)

tWCALEl

ALE

TWAIT

T2

T
CLK

I

-

-'t~

td(WR-OA}

td(OA-WR)

~ tdlwRHL-DA)

J
tW(CONTl

td(ALE-GONT~

td{CONT-JE)

I

td(AO-CONTl

th(RDY-CLK)

tSU(RDY-AD)

~SU{ADY

READY

eLK)

I

f

Read Cycle
T

CLK

,

\

T2
tdIALE-eLl}

)

td(CONT-Aol

X

ADDRESS
SU(OA-AOl

)

-'

td(OA-ROJ

\\\\)

ADDRESS
tW(ALEJ

ALE

T,

T3

TWAIT

deALE-AD)

ItOXZ(RD
1+

AD)

tSU(OA

td(CONT-ALEl

ALE}

CONT)

I

tW(CONTl

~

..

CONT)

tSU(RDY-AO)

th(ROY

eLK)
(

READY

2-12

"'"

DATA IN

tSU(OA-ROl

td(ALE

AD)

Y-

d(AD-ALE)

td(AD

DZX(RD

\tSU(ADY

elK)l

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL808SAP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR

Hold Cycle
T,
CLK

\

HOLD

T HOLD

T3

""\

\

,

t
l

td~

t

th( HLD-CLK)

HLDA

\.l

tDXZ(HLDA-BlJS)

I

tOZX(HlDA-BUS)

I

~

(ADDRESS, CONTROLS)

BUS

\

'j~

L

tSU( HLD-elK;

T,

T HOLD

II

Interrupt and Hold Cycle

ADo_ 7

CALL INST
BUS FLOATING

ALE

INTR

tsu (INT-_C_L_K,+--++_t_hl_'NT-CLK)

tOZX(HLOA-BUS)

HOLD

.

\

,,"_J

I

I

ttthIHLO_CLKI

HLDA
---------------'

toxzlHLOA-Busl

td(CLK-HLDAl

Clock Output Timing Waveform
X, INPUT

CLOCK OUTPUT

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

2-13

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8085AP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR

TRAP INTERRUPT AND RIM INSTRUCTIONS
TRAP generates interrupts regardless of the interrupt enable
filp-flop (INTE FF). The current state of the INTE FF is
stored in flip flop A (AFF) of the CPU and then the INTE FF
is reset. The first RIM instruction after the generation of a
TRAP interrupt differs in function from the ordinary RIM instruction. That is, the bit 3 (INTE FF information) in the accumulator ((A) 3) after the execution of the RIM instruction
contains the contents of the A FF, regardless of the state of
the INTE FF at the time the RIM instruction is executed.
These details are shown in Fig.2, Tables 1 and 2 .

Table

TRAP interrupt and RIM instructions

~mber
Condition

1

2

3

4

5

6

instruction in address a-1

EI

EI

EI

DI

DI

DI

Instruction in address a+2

EI

NOP

DI

EI

NOP

DI

Contents of (A) 3 after the exacutian of the RIM instruction in

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

address a+3
State of INTE FF after the execution of the RIM instruction in

address a+3
Contents of (A) 3 after the execution of the RIM instruction in

address a+4
State of INTE FF after the execution of the RIM instruction in

address a+4

a-2
a-1
TRAP
a
INTERRUPT - -

(0

a+1

Note 3:

The contents of (A), after the excution of the RIM instruction IS
an information of the INTE FF. The INT.E FF assumes state "1"
when it is in the EI state. and "0" when it is in the DI state.

Table

2 TRAP interrupt and INTE FF processing

MEMORY
ADDRESS

~24'6
NOP
NOP

~

RET

a+2

Fig. 2

a+3

RIM

a+4

RIM

TRAP interrupt processing

Below are the explanations of Fig. 2 .
1. The TRAP interrupt request is issued while the instruction in address a is being executed.
2. The TRAP interrupt causes the same action as an RST
instruction and then jumps to address 24 ,6.
3. It returns to address a + 1 after executing the RET instruction.
Table 1 shows the information in the INTE FF at address
a +3 and a +4 when the instructions EI and/or DI are executed at addresses a -1 and a +2.
Fig. 3 is a flow chart of the TRAP interrupt processing
routine.

PUSH'" } SAVING REGISTER

P~~~
TRAP
INTERRUPT- a
REQUEST

} SAVING INTE FF

~SW

CALL

i
i

(x)
(y)
RET

lTRAP INTERRUPT

JPROCESSING

PROGRAM

POP
PSW
ANI

08'6

,
,
\----

INTE FF RETURN PROCESSING

JZ
(xa)
(xb)
POP .. -- } RETURNING REGISTER
EI
RET

\xbxa POP --. - } RETURNING REGISTER
c__
RET

Fig. 3

2-14

TRAP interrupt processing routine

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL808SAP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR

PULL-UP OF THE RESET IN INPUT
In order to increase the noise margin, the RESET IN input
terminal is pulled up by about 3k!1 (typ) when the condition
VI;;;;V,H(RESiN) is satisfied. Fig. 4 is a connection diagram of
the RESET IN input, and Fig. 5 shows the relation between
input voltage and input current.

INSIDE CPU
Vee

Figs. 6 and 7 are typical connection diagrams for a crystal
and CR circuit respectively.

Conditions for Using a Quartz Crystal Element
1. Quartz Crystal Specifications
•
•

Parallel resonance
The frequency is 2 times the operation frequency ( 2 6.25MHz)

•
•
•

Internal load capacitance: Approx. 16pF
Parallel capacitance: Below 7pF
Equivalent resistance: Below 75!1 (for operation above
4MHz)

•

For operation in the range 2 - 4MHz, the resistance
showld be made as small as possible.
Drive capability: Above 5mW (the power at which the
crystal will be destoryed)

•

2. External Circuitry
Fig. 4

Connections of RESET IN input

M5L8085AP

(rnA)

C's: Writing capacitance of pin X,
C's: Writing capacitance of pin'X,
C's: External capacitance at pin X,

0.6

C'l: External capacitance at pin X,
C'lr C,sI C,=C'l+C,S
C,=C'l+C,S

IZ

W
II:
II:

::J
U
I-

::J
0..

~

•
V'H
INPUT VOLTAGE

Fig. 5

(V)

•

RESET IN input current vs input voltage

For operation above 4MHz:
CI=C2=10pF
For operation below 4MHz:
CI=C2=15pF

DRIVING CIRCUIT OF X1 AND X2 INPUTS
Input terminals, Xl and X2 of the M5L8085AP can be driven
by either a crystal, RC network, or external clock. Since the
driver clock frequency is divided to 112 internally, the input
frequency required is twice the actual execution frequency
(6MHz for the M5L8085AP which is operated at 3MHz). Figs.

10pF

±

i

1

12

,-----~__=_j

lOpF

----I

x,

1

~o---+---<-----jX,

x,
M5L8085AP

x,

OSCILLATION FREQUENCY
1-6MHz PARALLEL
RESONANT CRYSTAL
OSCILLATOR IS USED

Fig. 6

External Clock Driver Circuit

Connections when
crystal is used for
X 1 and X 2 inputs

roo,!

470n

~lOkn

~

'----+---1 x,

x,

OSCILLATION FREQUENCY
ABOUT 3M Hz

Fig. 7

Pullup resistors are required to assure that
the high level voltage of the input is at least

4V.

Connections when
RC network is used
for X 1 and X 2 inputs

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

2-15

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8085AP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR

WAIT STATE GENERATOR
Fig. 8 shows a typical1-wait state generator for low speed
RAM and ROM applications.

The contents of the accumulator after the execution of a
81M instruction is shown in Table 4.
Table

4

Relation of the 81M instruction
with the accumulator

, - - - - - - - - - - - S E R I A L OUTPUT DATA
'---~READY

, - - - - - - - - - - - - SOD SET ENABLE
VALUE IN BIT 7 IS TRANSFERRED TO SOD LATCH
WHEN SSE IS T

M5L8085AP

, - - - - - - - - - ' NOT USED
, - - - - - - · R S T 7.5 PENDING RESET
PENDING FLIP-FLOP OF
RST 7.5 IS RESET WHEN
R7.5 is "1"

Fig. 8

ll-'
f[ Ij

. - - - - - · M A S K SET ENABLE
ENABLES SET fRESET OF MASKS
FDR BITS O~2, WHEN MSE IS T

l-wait state generator

MASK SET !RESET OF RST7.5
MASK SET fRESET OF RST 6.5
'MASK SETIRESET DF RST 5. 5
SET~l:INTERRUPT DISABLE
RESET~O:INTERRUPT ENABLE

RELATION OF RIM AND SIM INSTRUCTIONS
WITH THE ACCUMULATOR
(SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION).
The contents of the accumulator after the execution of a RIM
instruction is shown in Table 3.

~~~~~-.~~~
IsoolSSEI X IR7. 5IMSEIM7.~M6.5IM5~ ~g~~~~TL~T06R

76543210

Table

3

Relation of the instruction RIM
with the accumulator
SERIAL INPUT DATA (SID)
STATE OF UNFULFILLED
INTERRUPT REQUEST
17.5:STATE OF PENDING
FLIP-FLOP
16.5):STATE OF TERMINALS
15.5 RST 6.5 AND RST 5.5
STATE OF INTERRUPT ENABLE

C~ ,='~G ,-,- W<" "',,"

STATE OF INTERRUPT MASK

r - - ( T WHEN THE MASK IS SET)
~

,----"-------,
I SID 117.5116.5115.51 IE
7

2-16

6

5

4

3

IM7.~M6.5IM5.51
2

1

CONTENTS OF
ACCUMULATOR

0

• ':' MITSUBISHI

Iht.. ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8212P
8-BIT INPUT/OUTPUT PORT WITH 3-STATE OUTPUT

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8212P is an input/output port consisting of an B-bit
latch with 3-state output buffers along with control and device selection logic. Also a service request flip-flop for the
generation and control of interrupts to a microprocessor is
included.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

DEVICE SELECT DS,- 1

FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•

Vcc (5V)

MODE INPUT MO- 2

Parallel B-bit data register and buffer
Service request flip-flop for interrupt generation
Three-state outputs
Low input load current: IlL =absolute=250,uA(max.)
High output sink current: IOL=16mA(max.)
High-level output voltage for direct interface to a
M5LBOBOAP, S CPU: VOH=3. 65V(min.)

-

DATA OUTPUT DO, ~

DATA INPUT

4
- 01, DATA INPUT
-DO, DATA OUTPUT
~Ol,

DATA INPUT

7-00, DATA OUTPUT
6 ~ 015 DATA INPUT
005 DATA OUTPUT

-

~CLR

APPLICATIONS
•
•
•

~J~~~grTSIGNAL

INT

22~01,

'------'-

Input/output port for a M5LBOBOAP, S
Latches, gate buffers or multiplexers
Peripheral and input/output functions for microcomputer
systems

FUNCTION

~

CLEAR

OS, DEVICE SELECT

Outline 24P4

Device select 1 (OSl) and device select 2 (OS2) are used
for chip selection when the mode input MO is low. When
OSl is low and OS2 is high, the data in the latches is transferred to the data outputs 001 - 008, and the service request flip-flop SR is set. Also, the strobed input STB is active, the data inputs 011- 018 are latched in the data latches,
and the service request flip-flop SR is reset.

When MO is high, the data in the data latches is transferred to the data outputs. When OSl is low and OS2 is high,
the data inputs are latched in the data latches. The lOW-level"
clear input CLR resets the data latches and sets the service
request flip-flop SR, but the state of the output buffers is not
changed.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

r---------------STROBE INPUT STS 11
MODE INPUT MO 2

INTERRUPT
CONTROL
SIGNAL

DEVICE SELECT
DEVICE SELECT

01,
012
013
01,
DATA INPUTS

015
01,
01,
01,
CLEAR

CLR

}------------------------------i--~:qr--r_t--~------------~4

DO,

5}-----------------------------~--~~F=~_+--t>------------~6

DO,

,}-----------------------------~==~~F=~_+==t>------------~8
g}-----------------------------~--~~f=~_+--C>------------~10

16}-----------------------------~--~~F=~_+--t>------------~15
18 ~----------------------------_+--1D~f=4-~~~------------~17
20~----------------------------~==~~F=~_+==t>------------~19
22~----------------------------~--~~F=~----C>------------~21
14' -________________________ - . J

003
DO,

005

DATA
OUTPUTS

DO,
DO,
DO,

I

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

2-17

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8212P
8- BIT INPUT jOUTPUT PORT WITH 3- ST ATE OUTPUT

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS

(Ta=0-75"C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Unit

Vcc

Supply voltage

7.0

V

V,

Input voltage DSI. MD inputs

Vcc

V

V,

Input voltage all other inputs except OSI, MD

5.5

V

Vo

Output voltEtge

Vcc

V

Pd

Power dissipation

800

mW

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

0-75

"C

T stg~

Storage temperature range

-55-125

"C

Symbol

Conditions

Parameter

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

(Ta=0-75"C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Min

Nom

Max

4.75

5.0

Unit

Vcc

Supply voltage

5.25

V

10H

High-level output current

-1

mA

10L

Low-level output current

16

mA

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

(Ta=0-75"C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Test conditions
Min

V'H

High-level input voltage

V'L

Low-level input voltage

V,c

Input clamp voltage
High-level output voltage

VOL

Low-level output voltage

102

Three-state output current

102

Three-state output current

Max

Vcc =4.75V, V'H=2V
VIL=0.85V.loH=-lmA

'OL =

0.85

V

-1

V

3.65

V

Vcc=4. 75V. V'H=2V,
VIL =0. 85V.

0.45

15mA

Vcc=5. 25V. V'H=2V,

V

20

I"A

-20

I"A

Vcc=5.25V, V,=5.25V

10

I"A

VIL =0. 85V, Vc=5. 25V
Vcc=5. 25V. V'H=2V,
VIL =0. 85V. Vo=O. 45V

High-level input current, STB 052, CLR,

Unit

V

2
Vcc=4.75V, l,c=-5mA

V OH

"H

Typ

011-ole inputs

"H

High-level input current. MD input

Vcc=5.25V, V,=5.25V

30

I"A

"H

High-level input current, DS1 input

Vcc=5. 25V. V,=5. 25V

40

I"A

Low-level input current. STB, DS2, CLR,
III

DI,-DI, inputs

Vcc=5. 25V. V,=O. 5V

-0.25

mA

III

Low-level input current. M D input

Vcc=5.25V, V,=O. 5V

-0.75

mA

III

Low-level input current. OSl input

Vcc=5. 25V. V,=O. 5V

-1

mA

los

Short-circuit output current (Note 3)

Vcc=5.0V

-75

mA

Icc

Supply current from Vee

Vcc=5.25V

130

mA

Note 1

-15

All voltage are with respect to GND terminal. Reference voltage (pin 12) is considered as OV and all maximum and minimum values are defined in absolute values.
Current flowing into an Ie is positive, o~t is negative. The maximum and minimum values are defined in absolute values.

All measurements should be done quickly, and two outputs should not be measured at the same time.

TIMING REQUIREMENTS

(Ta=0-75"C • Vcc=5V±5%. unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Test conditions
Min

Typ

Max

Unit

t W (DS2)

Input pulse width, DS1. DS2 and STB

30

ns

tSU(OA)

Data setup time with respect to DS1, DS2 and STB

15

ns

th(oA)

Data hold time with respect to DS1. DS2 and STB

20

ns

-

2-18

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8212P
8-BIT INPUT/OUTPUT PORT WITH 3-STATE OUTPUT

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

(T a=O-75'C , Vcc =5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)

Limits
Symbol

Unit

Test conditions (Note 4)

Parameter

Min
tPHL(OI-DO)

High~to-Iow-\eve'

tpLH(OI_DO)

time, from input 01 to output DO

Typ

Max

and low-to-high-Ieve\ output propagation

30

ns

40

ns

40

ns

45

ns

45

ns

55

ns

CL=30pF, RLI=3000, RL2=6000
tPHL(oS2-DO}

High-to-Iow-Ievel and low-to-high-Ievel output propagation

t plH ( DS2-DO}

time, from input DS1, DS2 and STB to output DO

tPHL(STB-INT)

High-Io-Iow-Ievel output propagation time, from input STB to output tNT

tpZL(MD-DOl

Z-to-Iow-Ievel and Z-to-high-Ievel output propagation

CL =30pF, RLI =3000, RL2=26000

t PZH ( MD-DO)

time, from inputs MD, DSl and DS2 to output DO

CL=30pF, RLI=10kO, RL2=lkO

tPHZ(MD-DO)

High-to-Z-Ievel and low-to-Z-Ievel output propagation

CL=5pF, RLI=10kO, RL2=lkO

tPLZ(MD-ool

time, from inputs MD, OSl and DS2 to output DO

CL=5pF, RLI =300 0, RL2=600 0

High-to-Iow-Ievel output propagation time, from input
tPHL(CLR-OO)

CL=30pF, RLI=3000, RL2=6000
CLR to output DO

Note 4

Test circuit

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

2-19

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8212P
8·BIT INPUT/OUTPUT PORT WITH 3·STATE OUTPUT

TIMING DIAGRAMS

REFERENCE LEVEL=1.5V

,,-------------------',

01,-01,

,-------------------------

----------------~~~~~
OS"

OS" STS

00,-00,

-----.,..-~~ ~-----------------.-------------_____________________________ J

~

________________ i

,

,,-------------------,
SU(OA)

OS"

OS" STS

~

,~

_________________________ _

h(OA)

tPHl(OI_DOl
tPLH(OI-DOl

, , ,--------------------------------------

00,-00,

------------------------~

OS"

OS" MO

___
00,-00,

~r-...

/"

-------------------'

tpzUMD_DO)

~------------------------------tPHZ(MD-DoJ
tPLZ{MD-DOJ _:;j..l.
O.5VV
_________________________
OH

tPZH(MD_DOl

~Xj,~

• ___________________ J

li-----------------t

,~

V~

O.5V

STS

{

tw

1

:q;HLlSTB-iNT)

INT

CLR

1;

tw

;v
~HL(CLR-DO)

00,-00,

2-20

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8216P / MSL8226P
4-BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8216P and M5L8226P are 4-bit bidirectional bus
drivers and suitable for the 8-bit parallel CPU M5L8080AP, S
(8080A).

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

Vee

FEATURES

DATA OUTPUT 000-

•
•

Parallel 8-bit data bus buffer driver
Low input current OlEN, CS:
01, DB:

•

High output current M5L8216P
DB:
DO:
M5L8226P
DB:

II

I'L =-500,uA( max.)
I'L =-250,uA(max.)

IOL=55mA(max.)
IOH=-10mA(max.)
IOH=-lmA(max.)
IOL=50mA(max.)
IOH=-10mA(max.)
IOH=-l mAt max.)

•

DO:
Outputs can be connected with
VoH =3.65V(min.)
the CPU M5L8080AP, S:

•

Three-state output

APPLICATION
Bidirectional bus driver/receiver for various types of microcomputer systems.

FUNCTION
The M5L8216P is a non-inverting and the M5L8226P is an inverting 4-bit bidirectional bus driver.

DATA INPUT 01, ~
GND

9 -

012 DATA INPUT

Outline 16P4

When the terminal CS is high-level, all outputs are in
high-impedance state, and when low-level, the direction of
the bidirectional bus can be controlled by the terminal OlEN.
The terminal OlEN controls the data flow. The data flow
control is performed by placing one of a pair of buffers in
high-impedance state and allowing the other to transfer the
data.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

DATA INPUT

DATA INPUT 010

DATA OUTPUT 000 2 r---+--a--f~

DATA OUTPUT
DATA INPUT Db

DATA INPUT 01,

DATA OUTPUT DO, 5>---+-"""'(l--+.-J
DATA INPUT Db

9>---+--0"-+--,

BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

DATA OUTPUT 00 2 11>---+-"""'(l--+.-J
DATA INPUT 013

4 )------£)0----+--,

DATA INPUT 013

BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

9)--+---Coo---+-.
l1)--t--O<:I---+~

12J---t--COO--+-.

DATA OUTPUT

DATA OUTPUT 003 14>---+--.......(l--+.-J

"----If-+----{ 1 CS

DATA INPUT 012

DATA OUTPUT DO,

12>---+--0"-+--,

J)---t--1)OO--j----,

DATA OUTPUT DO, 5 )--+---001:1----+---"

~~i~CT INPUT

~---If-+-------\ I

ENABLE

I~~~~ D"iEN 15J----<>-----~

CS

~~i~CT INPUT

M5L8226P

M5L8216P

• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC

2-21

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8216P jMSL8226P
4-BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

(Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Conditions

Parameter

limits

Unit

7

V

5.5

V

Vee

Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage, CS. OlEN. 01 inputs

V,

Input voltage. DB input

Vee

V

Va

High-level output voltage

Vee

V

700

mW

0-75

'c
'c

With respect to GND

Ta=25'C

Pd

Power dissipation

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

Tstg

Storage temperature range

-65-+150

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITONS

(Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Unit

Parameter

Symbol

Min

Nom

Max

5

-

Vee

Supply voltage

5,25

V

10H

High-level output current. DO output

-1

10H

High-level output current. DB output

-10

10L

Low-level output current. DO output

15

10L

Low-level output current. DB output

25

mA
mA
mA
mA

4.75

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

(Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Conditions

Parameter

Min

V ,H

High-level input voltage

V ,L

Low-level input voltage

V,e

Input clamp voltage

V OH

High-level output voltage. DO output

V OH

High-level output voltage. DB output

VaLl

Low-level output voltage. DO output

VaLl

Low-level output voltage. DB output

V OL2

Low-level output voltage. DB output

r---='--

IOZH

Off-state output current. DO output

IOZH

Off-state output current. DB output

t---

Vcc =4. 75V, l,c=-5mA

-1

Vcc =4.75V
V,H =2V
VIL=O.95V

10H=-IOmA

~_ZL

Off-state output current. DB output

V

0.45

V

0.6

V

IOL=55mA

VIL =OV, V,=5. 25V

I'L

Low-level input current. OlEN CS inputs

Vcc=5. 25V, V'H=4. 5V

I'L

Low-level input current. DI, DB input

VIL =OV, V,=O. 45V

los

Short-circuit output DO output (Note 2)

los

Short-circuit output. DB output (Note 2)

lee

Supply current

2-22

pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA

-100
20
10
-500
-250
-15

-65

-30

-120

Vcc=5.25V, Vo=OV

M5L8216P

2

V

20
100

100

M5L8226P
M5L8216P

0.6

-20
Vo=O.45V

High-level input current. DI, DB inputs

Note 1

.-

Vcc=5.25V

I'H

V

IOL=25mA

IOL=50mA

Vcc=5. 25V, V'H=4. 5V

Iccz

2.4
0.45

M5L8226P

High-level input current. DIEN. CS inputs

Vcc=5.25V

100
120

Supply current z

M5L8226P

100

Current flowing into an IC is postive, out is negative.
All measurements should be done quickly, and not more than one output should be shorted at a time.

• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC

V

IOL=1SmA

M5L8216P

I'H

V

V

3.65

Vo=5.25V
Off-state output current. DO output

V
0,95

IOH=-lmA

Unit

Max

2

-~

IOZL

--

Typ

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8216P /MSL8226P
4.BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol

(Vee=5V±5%, Ta=25'C , unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Parameter

Conditions

tPHL(DB-DO)

High-ta-Iow and low-ta-high output propagation time.

tPLH(OB-DO)

from input DB to output DO

tPLH(DI_DB}

tPHZCCS-DO)

High-to-Z and low-to-Z output propagation time.

C L =5pF, RLI=10kll, R,,=lkll

t P12 CCS-DO)

from inputs OlEN. CS. to output DO

C L =5pF, RL1=30011, R,,=60011

M5L8216P

Typ

C L =300pF, RL1=9011, R,,=18011

M5L8226P

35

ns

-----

35

ns

65

ns

M5L8226P

54

ns

M5L8216P

65

ns

54

ns

C L =5pF, RL1=10kll, R,,=lkll

tPLZCCS-DB)

output DB

C L =5pF, RL1=9011, R,,=18011
M5L8216P

C L =300pF, RLI=9011, R,,=18011

(Reference level=L5V)

Note

ns

---

--

C L =300pF, RL1=10kll, R,,=lkll

-

M5L8226P

TIMING DIAGRAM

ns

ns

Output disable time. from inputs OlEN. CS. to

OlEN_ CS. to output DB

ns

25

65
54

C L =30pF, RL1=30011, RL2=60011

tPHZ(Cs-DBl

I - - - - - i Output enable time. from inputs

30

ns

M5L8226P

tPZHCCS-DB)

ns

ns

M5L8216P

tPZLCCS-DO)

25

65

C L =30pF, RLI= lOkll, R,,=lkll

M5L8226P

Output enable time.
from inputs OlEN. CS to output DO

Max

54

M5L8216P

1------1

Min

C L =30pF, RL1=30011, R,,=60011

High-to-Iow and low-to-high output
propagation time. from input 01 to
output DB

tPHL(OI_DB)

Unit

(Note 3)

3: Test circuit

DBo-DB3
0 10- 01 3 _ _ _ _oJ "'_-:-_ _ _..,._~---_

Vee

tplH(OB-OO), tpLH{DI-OB)

000-003 ------'1.1

'tPHL{DB-DOl, tPHL(DI-DB)

DBa-DB, _ _ _ _ _- ' ' -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

tPHZ(Cs_DO), tPHZ(Cs-DB)
tPLZ{CS-DO), tPLZ(CS-DB)

m.------.fu

DBIN

APPLICATION EXAMPLES
DBo

Fig. 1 shows a pair of M5L8216Ps or M5L8226Ps which are
directly connected with the M5L8080A CPU data bus, and
their control signaL Fig_ 2 shows an example circuit in which
the M5L8216P or M5L8226P is used as an interface for memory and I/O to a bidirectional bus_

DB,

DB,

DB3
SYSTEM DATA BUS

DB,
DB5

DB,;
DB,

Fig. 1

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

Data bus buffer

2-23

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8216P /MSL8226P
4- BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS

1/0
INTERFACE

MEMORY

i

a

a

15

MEMR-~

I

I

14 f4

14 14

14 f4

14 f4

01

01

01

01

DO
CS

OlEN

1 15

r<

DO

M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P

CS
DIEN
M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P

DB

DB

BUSEN

4

1 _
IIOR

f>--

4

DO

15
>--C

CS

Memory and 110 interface to bidirectional data bus

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
When the M5L8216P data input or two-way data bus is set to
high to disable-output from the two-way bus or data output,
car,e is required as a low glitch of approximate width lOns
will be generated.

•

MITSUBISHI

1

CS t>---

OlEN

M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P

M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P

DB

DB

a

6.. ELECTRIC

DO

1 15
OlEN

BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS

Fig. 2

a

fa

4

4

MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH

DESCRIPTION

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

The M5L8282P and M5L8283P are semiconductor integrated
circuits consisting of sets of eight 3-state latches for use with
various types of microprocessors.

Dlo~

Dh

-+

FEATURES
•

3-state, high-fanout output
........................................... (I OL =32mA,l oH =-5mA)

•

Low power dissipation

DATA INPUTS
DATA OUTPUTS

APPLICATION

II

Data latches for various microcomputer systems
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT

FUNCTION
The M5L8282P and M5L8283P are latches with non-inverted
and inverted outputs, respectively.
When the strobe input STB is high, the data inputs DlaDI 7 are passed through the data outputs DOa - D07
(M5L8282P) or to the data outputs -DO o- 007 (M5L8283P),
changes in the Dl a- DI7 signals being reflected in the data
outputs.
If the STB is changed from high to low, the data Dlo-D17
just before the change is latched. If the DI data is changed
while STB is low, this change is not reflected in the data

11 -

GND

Outline

STB STROBE INPUT

20P4

DATA INPUTS
DATA OUTPUTS

outputs.
When OE is made high, all the data outputs go into the
high-impedance state, the data latched prior to OE going
high being held.
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT

STROBE INPUT

GND

Outline

20P4

BLOCK DIAGRAM

DATA INPUTS

DATA INPUTS

DATA OUTPUTS

DATA OUTPUTS

STROBE INPUT
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT

STROBE INPUT
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

3-3

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

(Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)

limits

Conditions

Parameter

Unit

-0.5-+7

Vee

Supply voltage

VI

Input voltage

Va

Output voltage

-0,5- V ec

V

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

'c

Tstg

Storage temperature range

0-+75
-65-+150

V

--

-0,5-+5.5

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

V

·C

(Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Unit

Parameter
Min

4.5

Nom

Max

5

Vee

Supply voltage

10H

High-level output current

I VOH62.4V

0

5.5
-5

10L

Low-level output current

I VoL;;;;O.4SV

0

32

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

V
-~

mA
mA

(Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Test conditions

Parameter

Min

,-

V IH

High-level input voltage

V IL

Low-level input voltage

,----~

Unit

Typ

Max

~----

----- - , -

2

r-:

Ilc=~SmA

VIC

Input clamp voltage

Vcc=4. SV.

V OH

High-level output voltage

Vcc=4. SV, 10H= ~SmA

V

'c------ - - -

0.8
-1
--

VOL

Low-level output voltage

Vcc=4. SV, 10L=32mA

0.45

IOZH

Off-state output current, high-level applied to the output

Vcc=S. SV, V I=2V, Vo=5, 25V

IOZL

Off-state output current, low-level applied to the output

Vcc=S. SV, V,=2V, Vo=O. 4V

50
-50

IIH

High-level input current

Vcc=S, SV, VI=5. 2SV

III

Low-level input current

Vcc=5. 5V, VI=O. 4SV

Icc

Supply current

Vcc=S.5V

-~

GIN

--

F=I MHz, VBIAS=2. SV
Vcc=5V, Ta=25'C

Input capacitance

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Parameter

t pLH
t pHL

V
V

--

---~

-~'

pF

(V cc=5V±10%, Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Alternate

Test

M5L8283P

symbol

conditions

- - - - - - - - - -- -

Limits

Limits
Min

t pLH
t pHL

-----~~

-~~~-.

"A
- - -"A
-,-50
"A- -0.2
mA
------80
mA
12

M5L8282P

Symbol

--

--

V

~-~-

2.4

--

V

Typ

Max

Min

Typ

Unit

Max

,----

Propagation time from 01 input to DO
or DO for low-ta-high or high-ta-Iow

5

T 1vov

30

5

22

change

ns
- -

Propagation time from STS input to

DO or DO for low-to-high and high-

T SHOV

to-low change

10

45

10

40

ns

10

30

10

30

ns

(Note 2)
~

t PZH
t PZL

Propagation time from OE input to DO
or DO output when output is enabled

T ELOV

--t pHZ
t pLZ

Propagation time from OE input to DO
or DO output wh'en the output is dis-

TEHOV

5

18

5

18

abled

ns

- f-------

tr

Output rise time

T OLOH

From O. SV
t02V

20

20

ns

tf

Output fall time

TOHOL

From 2V
toO.SV

12

12

ns

3-4

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH

TIMING REQUIREMENTS

(Vcc =5V±10%, Ta=O-75'C , unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Alternate

Symbol

Parameter

r----------' --

Unit

Test conditions

symbol

Typ

Min

Max

--,----------,----,-~~--~-

tW(STBH)

Strobe STB high pulse width

tsu

Strobe STS setup time for

TSHSL

-~------+--~~~~--

Dlo~Dh

r----------'---~'--------

th

STB hold time for DID-Db

tr

Input rise time

tf

Input fall time

T 1VSL

------~--_+__--'-----

T SLiX

15

ns

o

ns

25

ns

r--~-~--~----+----_+_--_+_-"----~

Note 1

__ ,________+__T_,_Ll_H ______

Vee

OUTPUT

TEST ITEM

,

,r----'
P.G,

1----;----;

ns

12

II

Note 2 :

Test Circuit
INPUT

F_r_o_m_O._B__
V_to_2_V___---1_ _ _ _-r--____ ~ 20. ___ ~n_s __
From 2V to 0. BV

T'LiH

2.14V

DEVICE
'LOAD
I
UNDER TEST 1----<>----.1, CIRCUIT:
I (Note 3),

,

50fl

,

J-

,
I

L ____ .J

tpLH • tpHL

LOAD CIRCUIT

~",m
r300PF

TIMING DIAGRAM

tpLZ , tpZL

tpHZ , tpZH

-------I

1.5V

!33fl

1~"

1.5V

~oo,
J,300 PF

(Reference voltage=t,5V)

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
Care should be taken to accommodate the glitch that is
generated when STB goes from low to high with the output
low for the M5L8283P.

• .MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

3-5

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH

APPLICATION EXAMPLES
(1) Use in the maximum mode
Vee

......

r

~D~ ~

MSL8284AP
CLOCK
GENERATOR
RES

f-o.
f-o.

t
MN/MX

~

CLK
READY
RESET

CLK

I7lr-

S,

-S,

52

52 MS~~~8S

ROY

~

I

MRDC f--Miiii'fC ~

Sd

..----8086
CPU
LOCK f--NC

A16--A'9

BHE

~

A

R

DT

f---

COMMAND BUS

r---

AIOWC f--INTA ,----

STB
OE
MSL8282P
LATCH
(20R3)

~DDR DATA

I--

4>=

10RC

DEN CTRLR 10WC

,-- ALE

'---00

ADo~AD15

AMWC ~

l-MEGABYTE
-V ADDRESS BUS

T
OE
MSL8286P
TRANSCEIVER
(2)

16-BIT DATA BUS

(2) Use in the minimum mode
Vee

1-1

r

rD~
MSL8284AP
MN MX --Vee
CLOCK
~
-1--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
GENERATOR .~ ClK
M 10
RES
-.READY I N T A I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

RESET

ROY

RDJ----------------WRJ-----------------

i

DT

R- - - -

DEN
8086
CPU

--1

-----, I
I I

r-----'

I I

I

I :

I

ALE I-----l-...;--,.j STB
II
I I

A

_
r - OE

7tr ,

ADo~AD151,,.--AQDR DATA
A16~A191 ' I
BHE~

I
I

MSL8282P
LATCH
20R3

:-

- - - - - \ l-MEGABYTE
,I ADDRESS BUS

J

I I
I I

r-----'
r ----, I
:I IL_--,~
I I
I I

~----IOE

*

I I

M5L8286P I
L-,-------tITRANfSEIVERI

j;1

\
j\l..-____ ,I16-BIT

DATA BUS

I I
IL _____ .JU

* : Option
Required when the number of devices
driving the bus increases

3-6

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8284AP is a clock generator and driver for use with
the 8086, 8088 and 8089 processors.
It has a synchronous delay circuit and synchronous control circuit capable of controlling two Multibus (Intel
trademark) circuits.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

CLOCK
SYNCHRONIZATION CSYNC INPUT

vee (5V)

Cl(jl~lb~f~Ci PCLK ~

Xl

FEATURES

AODRESS f~tSii AEN

x2

•
•

READY INPUT 1 RDY 1 -

Crystal controlled stable output frequency
Capable of synchronous operation with other
M5L8284APs

1-

s::

READY OUTPUT READY ~ 5

• External frequency input
• A power-on reset by means of an external capacitor and
resistor

READY INPUT 2 RDY 2 ADDRESS f~t~g AEN

1

2

15

~ ASYNC ~~rMJ~\~~~fIZATION

""ex>

14

~ EFI ~6"t~~PUT

"

12 -OSC

'"
r
ex>
»"""

2-

CLOCK OUTPUT ClK

¥~~~i~~L
¥~~~i~~l

~

Ie

13 ~ F

11

~

10 -

(OV)GND

f~~u~K SELECTION

g~W~~TOR

RES RESET INPUT
RESET RESET OUTPUT

APPLICATION
Clock driver and generators and driver for 8086, 8088, and
8089.
Outline

18P4

FUNCTION
The M5L8284AP is a clock generator/driver for the 8086, 8088
and 8089 microprocessors.
The clip contains a crystal controlled oscillator, a dividedby-3 counter, a peripheral clock output provided divided-by2 counter, a reset circuit and ready circuit to ensure synchronization to the ClK signal.
The reset input RES is used to generate the reset output
RESET as the CPU reset synched to the ClK signal. A
Schmitt trigger is used at the input side.
Thus, a reset signal can be output at power on by connecting a capacitor and resistor to the RES input.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

The frequency/crystal selection input F/C can be used to
select the crystal oscillator circuit output or an external clock
input as the input for the divide-by-three counter.
By using these pins, the M5l8284AP output can be used
to drive multiple M5l8284AP devices.
The clock synchronization input CSYNC is used to operate multiple M5l8284APs in sync.

r---------------I

RESET INPUT

RES 1 1 } - - - - - - - - - - < l m o _ - _ - - - - - - - - j

TE~~I~SATt~

RESET OUTPUT

Xl
OSCILLATOR OUTPUT

CRYSTAL
TERMINAL 2

CLOCK OUTPUT
CLOCK SELECTION INPUT
EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT

PERIPHERAL
CLOCK OUTPUT

CLOCK SYNCHRONIZ~~~~~ CSYNC 1 } - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - j r - - - - - t - READY INPUT 1
ADDRESS ENABLE INPUT 1 AEN

1

3 }-----<>.......

ADDRESS ENABLE INPUT 2 AEN

2

7 l-----<>r--..
5 READY READY OUTPUT

READY I N PUT 2

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

3-7

..

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS

PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Pin

Name

AEN1,

Address enable

AEN2

input

RDY1,
RDY2

--ASYNC

Input
oroutput

Function
When AENl and AEN2 are set low, ROYl and RDY2 are enabled, respectively. By using these two inputs
~

Input

separately, the CPU can be used to access two Multibusses. When not used as a multimaster, AEN should
be set to low. These inputs are active low.
These inputs are connected to the output signal indicating the completion of data reception from a system

Bus ready input

Input

bus device or, indicating that data is valid. ROYl and RDY2 are enabled when AENl and AEN2 are low, respectively. These inputs are active high.
This signal is used to select the synchronization mode 01 the READY signal generation circuit. When the

Active low input

Input

ASYNC signal is set low, the READY signal is generated in two synchronization steps. When the ASYNC
signal is set high, the READY signal is generated in one step.

---

The state of RDY appears at this output in synchronization with the CLK output. This is done to synchronize
READY

Ready output

Output

the READY output to the M5L8284AP internal clock because the RDY input generation is unrelated to the
ClK signal. This pin is normally connected to the CPU ready input and cleared after the required hold CPU
time has elapsed.
-~,---.----------------.~,-

---~----

X" X2

Crystal element
terminals

These pins are used to connect the crystal. The crystal frequency is 3 times of CPU clock frequency. The
Input

crystal should be in the 12-25MHz range with the series resistance as possible as small. Care should be
taken that these pins ara not shorted to ground.

--

~

F/C

Clock selection input

Input

-----~-----~.--.,-------.--~.

When F/C is set low, ClK and PClK outputs are driven from the crystal oscillator circuit. When it is set
high, they are driven from the EFI input.
---~----------

EFI

External clock input

Input

When F/C is set high, CLK and PCLK output signals are driven from this pin. A TTL level rectangular signal
and three times of the CPU frequency should be used.

--

This output is connected to the clock inputs of the CPU and the peripheral devices on the local bus. The
ClK

Clock output

Oulput

output waveform is 1/3 the frequency of the crystal oscillator connected at Xl and X2 or the signal applied
to the FEI input, and has a duty cycle of 1/3. Since for Vcc=5V, VOH=4. 5V, this output can be directly drive
the CPU clock input

PClK

OSC

Peripheral clock
output
Oscillator output

Output

Output

-

This output provides a clock signal for use with peripheral devices. The output waveform is 50% duty cycle
TTL level rectangular waveform with a frequency 1/2 that of the clock output.

---

This output is a TTL level crystal oscillator output. The frequency is the same as that of the crystal connected at Xl and X2, but care should be taken as the frequency will be unstable if these pins are lett open.
-~~----~-----~~-~~-~-~--

-~

RES

Reset input

Input

RESET

Reset output

Output

This active low input' is used to generate the reset output signal for the CPU. The input is a schmitt trigger
input so that by connecting a capacitor and a reSistor, the CPU reset Signal can be generated at power on.
~

CSYNC

3-8

Clock
input

synchronization

This pin is connected to the CPU reset input. The signal at this pin is synchronized the RES input with the
elK Signal. This output is active,high.
When using multiple M5L8284AP devices, this input is used as a clock synchronization input. When CSYNC

Input

is high, the internal counter of the M5L8284AP is reset and when CSYNL is Jaw, it begins operation. CSYNC
must be synchronized with EFt. See application notes.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
1----Vcc
f-----

Parameter

Conditions

Limits

-0.5-7
-------~------~-

r-~

Vo

---------

---~--------

-----~-

----

I
-~

--

-

~~-~~-

V

~--------~-----~--

t---~----

Parameter
-~~

V cc

-----------------

J

- -M-;;;--N~-Max-l
-~~

~--~----~--~~~---

Supply vOltage
High-level output current

Other outputs VOH=2. 4V

ELECTRIC CHARACTERISTICS

5

5,5

..

Unit

o

-1

V

rnA
rnA

----f--------+---+-------J

o

Vo l ,,;O,45V

Low-level output current

10L

'c

--~----l----~

4.5
elK VoH =4V

---1-------

~~------ --~---+-----

(T a =O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

--

.~-,,---------

-65-150

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

v

--+-----~~

___ =_0_.5_- Vc:cc=--__+--__V__-I
0-75
'c

Output voltage

~?pr __ I-=

V ADDRESS BUS

T
OE
M5l6286P
TRANSCEIVER
(2)

16-BIT DATA BUS

(2) Use in the minimum mode
24MHz

Vee

rO~
M5l6264AP

MN/MX r---Vee

GE~~~X~OR -

f---

r

RES

ClK
~ READY

MlT6I-------------INTAI--------------

RESET

RDI-------------

~

ROY

COMMAND BUS

WR

i

DT/R
DEN
6086
CPU

-----1
I
I I
I I
I
I I

----.,

r-----'
1
I

ALE I---~~--~STB

I
I

1----''\
I

l-MEGA BYTE
.; ADDRESS BUS

.J
I I
I I
I I

I I

r

.c-----,
----, I

: L_---,~

1I
1
i;1
'\
j\I_____116-BIT

-----tOE
I
M5l8286P 1
L------tI,TRANfSEIVER,

*

I

DATA BUS

, I
W

L. _____ ..J

* : Option
Required when the number of devices driving the bus increases

• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC

3-1.5

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8286P/MSL8287P
OCTAL BUS TRANSCEIVER

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8286P and M5L8287P are semiconductor integrated
circuits consisting of a set of eight 3-state output bus transceivers for use with a variety of microprocessor systems.

PIN CONFIGURATIONS (TOP VIEW)
Vee

FEATURES
•

•

3-state, high-fanout outputs (l oL = 16mA, IOH = -1 mA for
the A outputs and IOL = 32mA, IOH = - 5mA for the B
outputs)
Low power dissipation

LOCAL BUS
DATA
SYSTEM BUS
DATA

APPLICATION
Two-way bus transceivers for microcomputer systems

~~mJ INPUT GND

FUNCTION
The M5L8286P and M5L8287P are two-way bus transceivers
with non-inverted and inverted outputs respectively.
When the output enable input OE is high, the local bus
data pins Ao ~ A7 and system data pins Bo ~ B7 are both
placed in the high-impedance state.
When the output enable input OE is low, the input and
output states are controlled by the transmit input T.
When T is high, Ao~A7 are input pins and Bo~B7 are output pins. When T is low, Bo ~ B7 are input pins and Ao ~ A7
are output pins.

11 ..... T TRANSMIT INPUT

Outline 20P4
Vee

LOCAL BUS
DATA
SYSTEM BUS
DATA

~~I~~J INPUT

11 ..... T TRANSMIT INPUT

GND

Outline 20P4

BLOCK DIAGRAM

LOCAL BUS
DATA

SYSTEM BUS
DATA

)-~======:::.L--
ex>

6

en

MEMORciu~~t~ MRDC~

Low power dissipation

s::

01

14

INTERRUPT

~ INTA ACKNOWLEDGE

COMMAND OUTPUT

i\OV,4,NCEO _ _
MEMORY WRITE AMWC
COMMAND OUTPUT

4-

13 ~IORCggM~~~D OUTPUT

co~J~~b~~~1

~

12 - AIOWC

Bus controller and bus driver for maximum mode operation
of th e 8086 an d 8088

MWTC

(OV)GND

11

'--------'

Outline

¢?R~~~~~OM~~ND
OUTPUT

~ 10WC ggJt~~~ OUTPUT

2081

FUNCTION
The M5L82888 is a bus controller and driver for maximum
mode operation of the 8086 and 8088 processors.
The command signals and control signals are decoded
by means of the 80- 82 outputs from the CPU and the control signals for I/O devices and memory are output.
The device can be used in the Multimaster mode in
which several CPUs acting as masters are connected to one
data bus. An input pin for the control signal AEN from an
8289 bus. arbiter is provided.
By using the M5L82888 as a bus controller, a highperformance 16-bit microcomputer system can be configured.

BLOCK DIAGRAM
vee
I----------~
I

STATUS INPUTS

1r ~s,

I

7 MRDC MEMORY READ COMMAND OUTPUT

STATUS
DECODER

8 AMWC

COMMAND
SIGNAL
f-------IGENERATOR

~gv:~;~g ~~~p~~Y

WRITE

9

MWfC

MEMORY WRITE COMMAND OUTPUT

11

iC5WC

1/0 WRITE COMMAN D OUTPUT

12 AIOWC

COMMAND
OUTPUTS

~gXf~.f~g g8T~tfr
1/0 READ COMMAND OUTPUT

INTERRUPT ACKNOWLEDGE
COMMAND OUTPUT
1/0 BUS MODE INPUT lOB

I

CLOCK INPUT ClK

2

ADDRESS· ENABLE INPUT AEN

6

COMMAND ENABLE INPUT CEN

15

DATA TRANSMITIRECEIVE OUTPUT
CONTROL 1-_ _--1 C~~~~~L
lOGIC
GENERATOR

DATA ENABLE OUTPUT
16 DEN

17 MCE/PDEN

I

L-----------4
GND

3-20

ADDRESS LATCH ENABLE OUTPUT

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

~:~~~~RCA~S~~~~ ~~~~t~ ~~i~~il

CONTROL
) OUTPUTS

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS

PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Pin

Input of

Name
~--~~-~-,-

- -So, S" S2

r-----

-~

~--

These are connected to the CPU status output $0 ...... 5;.

Status input

Input
-~

~------~~-~

--_.
Input

Clock input

CLK

Functions

output

----

--_._.-_..

. --,--------

The M5L828BS uses these signals to generate the proper timing command signals and control signals.
All pins are provided with internal pull-up resistors.
Used to connect the clock generator M5L8284AP clock output elK.
All outputs of the M5L8288S change in synchronization with the clock input.
Provides the strobe signal output for the address latches.
This pin is connected to the STB pin of the M5L8282P or M5L8283P and used to latch the address from the

Address latch enable

ALE

Output

output

CPU. When using any other address latch, the fonowing conditions must be satisfied.

l. The enable input must be active high.

2. Data reading is always performed while the enable input is high.
3. The latching operation is performed as the enable input goes from high to low.
DEN

Output

Data enable

--

Provides the data enable signal for the local bus or a data transceiver on the system bus.
Operates in active high mode.

- - f - - - - - r------------~---

Controls the flow of data between CPU and memory or peripheral t/O devices.

-

Data transmit/receive

DTIR

Output

control output

+~~-~~-

When this pin is high, the CPU can write data to the peripheral devices. When it is low, it can read data
from the peripheral devices.
It is connected to the transmit input T of the M5L8286P or M5L8287P bus transceivers.

-~~--~---

1------------

When the lOB input is low and the AEN input is set to high, all command outputs are put in the high--

--~

AEN

Input

Address enable input

c-------

~-------

CEN

--lOB

Input

Command enable input
I------.~---

Input/output bus mode
input

--

------

impedance state. When the lOB input is high, there is no effect on the tORC, 10WC, AIOWC, and INTA out.puts, the command output other than these four going into the high-impedance state.
None of the command outputs will go low until at least 115ns after AEN transits from high to low.

----

~---

When this pin is set to low, all command outputs and DEN are prohibited by the PDEN control output (not
high-impedance state). When set to high, the above outputs are enabled.
~~~

--~

I When this pin is set to high, the M5L8288S fUnctions in the I/O bus mode, and when set to low it functions in

I

Input

the system bus mode. (The 1/0 bus mode and system bus mode are described in the functional
description)

-~

--AIOWC

--10WC

-10RC

Advanced I/O write

Output

command output
I/O write command

Output

output
I/O read command

Output

output

The AIOWe issues an lID Write Command earlier in the machine cycle to give I/O devices an early indication of a write instruction its timing is the same as a read command signal. Active low.

Instructs an I/O device to drive its data onto the data bus. Active low.

-~-

---

AMWC

Advanced write

f------rThe AMWC
Output

command output

-

--MWTC

Memory write command
output
----~---,-.-----~

---

Memory read command

--

Interrupt acknowledge

MRDC

INTA

output

command output

Output

c--

i~sue;-;;;'emory

write command earlier in the machine cycle to give memory devices an

Output

~-;;;;;

• indication of a write instruction. Its timing is the same as a read command signal. Active low.

I Provides a write instruction to memory for the current data on the bus.
Active low.
-

Output

--

Instructs an 110 device to read the data on the data bus. Active low.

~~-

Provides an output instruction to memory for the present data on the bus.
Active low.
This output informs an interrupting device that it has accepted the interrupt. outputting a vector address out--

put instruction to the data bus. IORC operates in the same manner for interrupt cycles. Active low.

----

This output pin has two functions.

1. When the lOB input is set to low:
The MCE function is enabled. The signal acts as the enable signal which allows a slave PIC
(M5L8259AP) to read the cascade address output to the bus by the master PIC during an interrupt sequ-

Master cascade

MCEI

--PDEN

Enable output!
Peripheral data
Enable output

Output

ence. Active high.

2. When the lOB input is set to high:
--

The PDEN function is enabled. This output provides the enable signal to the data bus transceiver con-

nected to the liD interface bus when an instruction occurs (lORC, lOWe, Alowe, INTA). Operates the
same way as DEN with respect to the system bus.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

3-21

a

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The state of the command outputs and control outputs are
determined by the CPU status outputs Sa - 82. The table
summarizes the states of the outputs 80 - 82 and their cor-

responding valid command output names.
Depending upon whether the M5L82888 is in the I/O bus
mode or system bus mode, the command output sequence
will vary.

STATUS INPUTS AND COMMAND OUTPUTS RELATIONSHIPS
S,

5,

So

L

L

L

Interrupt acknowledge

L

L

H

Data read from an 110 port

IORC

L

H

L

Data write to an I/O port

IOWC,AIOWC

L

H

H

Halt

-

H

L

L

Instruction fetch

MRDC

H
H
H

.

8086, BOB8 status

Valid command output name

INTA

L

H

Read data from memory

MRDC

H

L

Write data to memory

MWTC, AMWC

H

H

Passive state

-

1. 1/0 bus mode operation
When lOB is high, the M5L82888 function in the 1/0 bus
mode.
In the I/O Bus mode all I/O command lines (IORC, 10WC,
AIOWC, INTA) are always enabled (i.e., not dependent on
AEN). When an 1/0 command is initiated by the processor,
the 8288 immediately activates the command lines using
PDEN and DT/R to control the 110 bus transceiver. The 110
command lines should not be used to control the system bus
in this configuration because no arbitration is present. This
mode allows one 8288 Bus Controller to handle two external
busses. No waiting is involved when the CPU wants to gain
access to the 1/0 bus. Normal memory access requires a
"Bus Ready" signal (AEN LOW) before it will proceed. It is
advantageous to use the lOB mode if 1/0 or peripherals dedicated to one processor exist in a multi-processor system.

the AEN Line is activated (LOW). This mode assumes bus
arbitration logic will inform the bus controller (on the AEN
line) when the bus is free for use. Both memory and 1/0
commands wait for bus arbitration. This mode is used when
only one bus exists. Here, both 1/0 and memory are shared
by more than one processor.

3. AMWC and AIOWC outputs
With respect to the normal write control Signals MWTC and
10WC, the advanced-write command signals AMWC and
AIOWC transit low one clock cycle earlier and remain low
for two clock cycles.
These Signals are used with peripheral devices or static
RAM devices which require a long write pulse, so that the
CPU does not go into an unnecessarily wait cycle.

2. System bus mode operation
When lOB is set to low, the M5L82888 enters the system bus
mode. In this mode no command is issued until 115 ns after

3-22

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

(Ta =0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)

Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Va

Output voltage

Pd

Power dissipation

~

..

----------

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

Tstg

Storage temperature range

Limits

Unit

-0.5-+7

V

-0.5-+5.5

V

Conditions

Parameter

Vee

-O.5- V ee

V

1.5

W

0-75

'c
'c

-65-+150

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

II

(Ta =0-75'C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Unit

Parameter

Min
Vee
IOH

taL

4.5

Supply voltage

Nom

Max

5

5.5

High-level output

Command outputs

-5

current

Control outputs

-1

Low-Jevel output

Command outputs

32

current

Control outputs

16

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

V

rnA
mA

(Ta =0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Test conditions

Parameter

Unit

Typ

Min

V'H

High-level input voltage

V'L

Low-level input voltage

V,e

Input clamp voltage

V OH

High-level output voltage

VOL

LOW-level output voltage

Max

2

V
0.8

V

-1

V

Command outputs

Vcc=4. SV, V,=2V

IOH=-5mA

2.4

Control outputs

V,=O.8V

IOH=-lmA

2.4

Command outputs

Vcc=4. SV, V,=2V

IOL=32mA

0.5

Control outputs

V,=O.8V

IOL=16mA

0.5

V

V

I'H

High-level input voltage

Vcc=S. SV, V,=S. SV

III

Low-Ieve) input voltage

Vcc=S. SV, V,=O. 4SV

IOZH

Off-state output current with high-level applied to output Vcc=S. SV, Vo=S. 2SV

IOZL

Off-state output current with lOW-level applied to output

Vcc=S. SV, Vo=O. 4V

lee

Supply current

Vcc=S. SV

50

/-lA

-0.7

rnA

100

/-lA

~

• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

-100

/-lA

160

rnA

3-23

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol

Parameter

t pLH

Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK input to DEN output

t pHL

Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From elK input to PDEN output

t pLH

Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK Input to DEN output.

t pHL

Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From elK input to PDEN output

t pLH

Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK input to ALE output

t pLH

Output low-level to high-level propagaton time
From elK input to MCE output

t pLH

Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From

SO-Sl inputs to ALE output

Test conditions

symbol

Limits

Min

Typ

Max

Unit

TCVNV

5

45

ns

TCVNX

10

45

ns

TCLLH

20

ns

TCLMCH

20

ns

TSVLH

20

ns

TSVMCH

20

ns

Output
From

tpHL

Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From ClK input to ALE output

TCHLL

4

15

ns

tpHL

Output high~level to low~level propagation time
From ClK input to MRDC, IORC, INTA,
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWC, and lowe outputs

TCLML

10

35

ns

t pLH

Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From ClK input to MRDC, IOAC, INTA.
AMWC, MWTe, AIOWe, and lowe outputs

TCLMH

10

35

ns

t pHL

Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From ClK input to DT/R output

TCHDTL

t pLH

Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK inptJt to DTiR output

t pzH

High-level output enable time
From AEN input to MADC, IOAC, INTA.
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWC, and IOWC outputs

t pHZ

High-level output disable time
From AEN input to MADC, IORC, INTA,
AMwe, MWTC, A10WC, and lowe outputs

TAEHCZ

high~level

propagation time

Alternate

t pLH

low~level

to

(Vcc=5V±10%, Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)

SO-s, inputs to MCE output

---

--(Note 1)

50

ns

TCHDTH

30

ns

TAELCH

40

ns

40

ns

200

ns

20

ns

25

ns

35

ns

~-

t pHL

Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From AEN input to MADC, IORC, INTA,
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWC, and IOWC outputs

TAELCV

115

---~--

t pLH
t pHL

Output low-level to high-level and high-level to
low-level propagation time
From AEN input to DEN output

TAEVNV

t pLH
t pHL

Output low-level to high-level and high-level to
low-level propagation time From CEN input to
DEN and POEN outputs

TCEVNV

Output low-level to high-level and high-level to
low-level propagation time.
From CEN input to MADC, IOAC, INTA,
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWe and lowe outputs

TCELRH

t pLH

t pHL

TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol

---

(Vcc =5V±10%, Ta=0-75'C , unless otherwise noted)

Parameter

Alternate

symbol

Test conditions

Limits
Min

Typ

Max

Unit

te

Clock CLK cycle time

TCLCL

100

ns

tW(CLKL)

Clock CLK low pulse width

TCLCH

50

ns

tWCCLKH)

Clock CLK high pulse width

TCHCL

30

ns

tSU ("§o-S2)

5o-S, setup time with respect to
T for the T, state

TSVCH

35

ns

TCHSV

10

ns

TSHCL

35

ns

TCLSH

10

th
I\)
ex>

INIT-

<0

\l

BREO

<-

<-

CLK CLOCK INPUT
LOCK LOCK INPUT
COMMON
CROLCK BUS LOCK
INPUT

16

<-

15

<-

14

<-

ANYROST~Ep2 of T1 and before 1>1 of T4 should be stable.
AEN negative-edge is related to ClK, positive-edge to ClK.
ANE positive-edge is generated after as ricrity is lost.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

3-35

NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81SSP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH 1/0 PORTS AND TIMER

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8155P is a 2K-bit RAM (256-word by 8-bit) fabricated with the Nchannel silicon-gate EO-MOS technology.
This IC has 3 I/O ports and a 14-bit counter/timer which
make it a good choice to extend the functions of an 8-bit
microcomputer. It is incased in a 40-pin plastic OIL package
and operates with a single 5V power supply.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
jPC3- 1
I/O PORT C ) PC, ~ 2

RESET INPUT RESET -

3
4

1/0 PORT C PC s -

5

TIMER INPUT TIMER IN -

110

1PORT

C

TIMER OUTPUT TI MER OUT ~ 6

SELEC~E~~Bt

FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Compatible with MELPS 85 devices
Static RAM: 256 words by 8 bits
Programmable 8-bit I/O port: 2
Programmable 6-bit I/O port: 1
Programmable counter/timer: 14 bits
Multiplexed address/data bus

CHIP ENABLE INPUT CE -

10/M -

7
8

READ INPUT RD -

9

WRITE INPUl WR

I/O
PORT B

-10

ADmllBSLSE l~~b~ ALE - 11
ADo-12
AD I

-13

BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESSIDATA BUS

I/O
PORT A

APPLICATION
Extension of I/O ports and timer function for MELPS 85 and
MELPS 8-48 devices

(av)v ss
Outline 40P4

FUNCTION
The M5L8155P is composed of RAM, I/O ports and counter/
timer. The RAM is a 2K-bit static RAM organized as 256
words by 8 bits. The I/O ports consist of 2 programmable 8bit ports and 1 programmable 6-bit port. The terminals of the
6-bit port can be programmed to function as control terminals for the 8-bit ports, so that the 8-bit ports can be operated

BLOCK DIAGRAM

(5V)V

cc

in a handshake mode. The counter/timer is composed of 14
bits that can be used to count down (events or time) and it
can generate square wave pulses that can be used for
counting and timing.

@ ---- - - - - ---- - - - - -----

(av)vss ~
STATIC RAM

(256 WORDS X 8 BITS)

I/O
PORT A

BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESS/DATA BUS

I/O
PORT B

RESET INPUT RESET 4
MEMORY SELECT INPUT 10/M
CHIP ENABLE INPUT
CE
READ
WRITE
ADDRESS
ENABLE

INPUT
INPUT
LATCH
INPUT

RD

I/O
PORT C

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

4-3

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8155P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

Pin assignment of control signals of port C

Table

OPERATION
Data Bus Buffer

PC5
PC.
PC3
PC2
PC,

ReadlWrite Control Logic
The read/write control logic controls the transfer of data by
interpreting I/O control bus output signals (RD, WR, 10/M
and ALE) along with CPU signal (CE). RESET signal is also
used to control the transfer of data and commands.

Bidirectional AddresslData Bus (AD o-AD 7 )
The bidirectional address/data bus is a 3-state 8-bit bus.
The 8-bit address is latched in the internal latch by the failing edge of ALE. Then if 10/M input signal is at high-level,
the address of I/O port, counter/timer, or command register
is selected. If it is at low-level, memory address is selected.
The 8-bit address data is transferred by read input (RD)
or write input (WR).

Chip Enable Input (CE)
When CE is at low-level, the address information on
address/data bus is stored in the M5L8155P

Read Input (RD)
When RD is at low-level the data bus buffer is active. If 10/
M input signal is at low-level, the contents of RAM are read
through the address/data bus. If 10/M input is at high-level,
the selected contents of I/O port or counter/timer are read
through the address/data bus.

Write Input (WR)
When WR is at low-level, the data on the address/data bus
are written into RAM if 10/M is at low-level, or if 10/M is at
high-level they are written into I/O port, counter/timer or
command register.
Address Latch Enable Input (ALE)
An address on the address/data bus along with the levels of
CE and 10/M are latched in the M5L8155P on the falling
edge of ALE.

10lMemory Input (101M)
When 10/M is at low-level, the RAM is selected, while at
high-level the I/O port, counter/timer or command register
are selected.
1/0 Port A (PAo-PA1)
Port A is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Inputloutputsetting is controlled by the system software.
1/0 Port B (PB o-PB 7)
Port B is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Input/output setting is controlled by the system software.
1/0 Port C (PCo-PC s)
Port C is a 6-bit I/O port that can also be used to output
control signals of port A (PA) or port B (PB). The functions
of port C are controlled by the system software. When port C
is used to output control signals of ports A or B the assignment of the signals to the pins is as shown in Table 1.

4-4

Function

Pin

ThiS 3-state bidirectional 8-bit buffer is used to transfer the
data while input or output instructions are being executed by
the CPU. Command and address information is also transferred through the data bus buffer.

PCa

B STB
B BF

(port B strobe)
(port B buffer full)

BINTR

(port B interrupt)

A STB

(port A strobe)

A BF

(port A buffer full)

AINTR

(port A interrupt)

Timer Input (TIMER IN)
The signal at this input terminal is used by the counter/timer
for counting events or time. (3M Hz max.)

Timer Output (TIMER OUT)
A square wave signal or pulse from the counter/timer is output through this pin when in the operation mode.

Command Register (8 bits)
The command register is an 8-bit latched register. The
loworder 4 bits (bits 0-3) are used for controlling and determination of mode of the ports. Bits 4 and 5 are used as interrupt enable flags for ports A and B when port C is used
as a control port. Bits 6 and 7 are used for controlling the
counter/timer. The contents of the command register are rewritten by output instructions (address I/O XXXXXOOO).
Details of the functions of the individual bits of the command register are shown in Table 2.

Table

2

Bit

Symbol

a

PA

I

PB

2

PC,

3

PC2

4

Bit functions of the command register
Function

PORT A 1/0 FLAG

I: OUTPUT PORT A
0: INPUT PORT A

PORT B 1/0 FLAG

I: OUTPUT PORT B
0: INPUT PORT B

PORT C FLAG

00: ALTI
II: ALT2
01: ALT3

lEA

5

IEB

6

TMI

10: ALT4
PORT A INTERRUPT
ENABLE FLAG
PORT B INTERRUPT
ENABLE FLAG

I: ENABLE INTERRUPT
0: DISABLE INTERRUPT
I: ENABLE INTERRUPT
0: DISABLE INTERRUPT

COUNTERITIMER CONTROL
00: NO INFLUENCE ON COUNTERITIMER OPERATION
01: COUNTERITIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED (IF
NOT ALREADY STOPPED)
10: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED AF-

7

TM2

•. MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

TER THE CURRENT COUNTERITIMER OPERATION
IS COMPLETED
II: COUNTERITIMER OPERATION STARTED

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81SSP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH 1/0 PORTS AND TIMER

Status Register (7 bits)
The status register is a 7-bitlatched register. The loworder 5
bits (bits 0-4) are used as status flags for the 1/0 ports. Bit
6 is as a status flag for the counter/timer. The contents of
Table

3

the status register are transferred into the CPU by reading
(INPUT instruction, address 1/0 XXXXXOOO). Details of the
functions of the individual bits of the status register are
shown in Table 3.

Bit functions of the status register

Bit

Symbol

Function

0

INTR A

PORT A INTERRUPT REQUEST

1

A BF

PORT A BUFFER FULL FLAG

2

INTE A

PORT A INTERRUPT ENABLE

3

INTR B

PORT B INTERRUPT REQUEST

4

B BF

PORT B BUFFER FULL FLAG

5

INTE B

PORT B INTERRUPT ENABLE

6

TIMER

COUNTER/TIMER INTERRUPT

7

-

(SET TO 1 WHEN THE FINAL LIMIT
OF THE COUNTER/TIMER IS REACHED

II

AND IS RESET TO 0 WHEN THE
STATUS IS READ)

THIS BIT IS NOT USED

1/0 Ports
Command/status registers (8 bits/7 bits)
These registers are assigned address XXXXXOOO. When executing an OUTPUT instruction, the contents of the command register are rewritten. When executing an INPUT instruction the contents of the status register are read.
Port A Register (8 bits)
Port A Register is assigned address XXXXX001. This register
can be programmed as an input or output by setting the
appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table
2.
Port A can be operated in basic or strobe mode and is
assigned 1/0 terminal PAa-PA7.

Table

4

State
Terminal

PCs
PC.
PC3
PC2
PC,
PCa

Port B Register (8 bits)
Port B register is assigned address XXXXX010. As with Port
A register, this register can be programmed as an input or
output by setting the appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table 2. Port B can be operated in basic or
strobe mode and is assigned 110 terminals PBa-PB7·
Port C Register (6 bits)
Port C register is assigned address XXXXXOll. This port is
used for controlling inputloutput operations of ports A and B
by selectively setting bits 2 and 3 of the command register
as shown in Table 2. Details of the functions of the various
setting of bits 2 and 3 are shown in Table 4. Port C is
assigned 1/0 terminals PCa - PC5 and when used as port
control signals, the 3 low-order bits are assigned for port A
while the 3 high-order bits are assigned for port B.

Functions of port C
ALT 1

ALT 2

Input

Output

Output

ALT 3

Input

Output

Output

Input

Output

Output

Input

Output

A STB (port A strobe)

B STB (port B strobe)
B B F (port buffer full)
B INTR (port B interrupt)
A STB (port A strobe)

Input

Output

A BF (port A buffer full)

A BF (port A buffer full)

Input

Output

A INTR (port A interrupt)

A INTR (port A interrupt)

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

ALT4

4-5

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL815SP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

Configuration of ports
A block diagram of 1 bit of ports A and B is shown in Fig. 1.
While port A or B is programmed as an output port, if the
port is addressed by an input instruction, the contents of the
selected port can be read. When a port is put in input mode,
the output latch is cleared and writing into the output latch is

disabled. Therefore when a port is changed to output mode
from input mode, low-level signals are output through the
port. When a reset signal is applied, all 3 ports (PA, PB, and
PC) will be input ports and their output latches are cleared.
Port C has the same configuration as ports A and B in modes AL T1 and ALT2.

M5L8155P

EXTERNAL PIN
( PORT A OR)
PORT B

1. WR PORT=IOiM"WR'CE'
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)

2. RD PORT=IOiM"RD'CE'
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)

3. MULTIPLEX CONTROL
*1 STROBE INPUT MODE
*2 INPUT MODE

MD

Fig. 1
Table

Configuration for 1 bit of port A or B
5

The basic functions of the 1/0 ports are shown in Table 5.
The control signal levels to ports A and B, when port C is
programmed as a control port, are shown in Table 6.

Basic functions of I/O ports

Address

Function

RD

WR

0

1

AD bus - status register

1

0

Command register - AD bus

0

1

AD bus - port A

1

0

Port A - AD bus

0

1

AD bus - port B

1

0

Port B - AD bus

0

1

AD bus - port C

1

0

Port C - AD bus

XXXXXOOO

"

XXXXXOOI

XXXXX010

XXXXX011

Table

4-6

*3 OUTPUT MODE
4. MD= 1 : OUTPUT MODE
o : INPUT MODE

6 Port control signal levels at ALT3 and ALT4

Control Signal

Output mode

Input mode

STS

Input

Input

SF

"L"

"L"

INTR

"H"

"L"

CounterlTimer
The counterltimer is a 14-bit counting register plus 2 mode
flags. The register has two section&: address I/O XXXXX100
is assigned to the low-order 8 bits and address I/O
XXXXX101 is assigned to the high-order 8 bits. The laworder bits O~ 13 are used for counting or timing. The counter
is initialized by the program and then counted down to zero.
The initial setting can range from 2'6 to 3FFF,6. Bits 14 and
15 are used as mode flags.
The mode flags select 1 of 4 modes with functions as
follow:
Mode 0: Outputs high-level signal during the former
half of the counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half
of the counter operati on

• MITSUBISH,I
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81SSP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Table

7

Format of counter/timer

Mode 1:
Mode 2:

Outputs square wave signals as in mode 0
Outputs a low-level pulse during the final
count down
Mode 3: Outputs a lOW-level pulse during each final
count down
Starting and stopping the counter/timer is controlled by
bits 6 and 7 of the command register (see Table 2 for
details). The format and timer modes of the counter/timer
register are shown in Table 7 and Table 8.
The counter/timer is not influenced by a reset, but counting
is discontinued. To resume counting, a start command must
be written into the command register as shown in Table 2.
While operating 2n+ 1 count down in mode 0, a high-level
signal is output during the n+ 1 counting and a low-level signal is output during the n counting.

Bit Number
Function

Address

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

XXXXXIOO T7 T6 Ts T4 T3 T z T, To

TH E LOW-ORDER 8 BITS
OF THE COUNTER REGISTER

Ml,M2: TIMER MODE
THE HIGH·ORDER 6 BITS
XXXXX101 M2 M, T13 T'2 T11 TlO Tg T8
T,-T13: OF THE COUNTER REGISTER

Table

8 Timer mode
M,

Timer operation

0

0

Outputs high-level signal during the former half of Ina counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half of the counter operation
{mode O}

0

1

Outputs square wave signals in mode 0

1

0

M2

1

1

(mode 1)

Outputs a low-level pulse during the final count dowm

II

(mode 2)
Outputs a lOW-level pulse during each final count down

(mode 3)

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Parameter

Vee

Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Va

Output voltage

Pd

Maximum power diSSipation

T apr

Operating free-air temperature range

Tstg

Storage temperature range

Conditions

With respect to vss

Limits

Unit

-0.5-7

V

-0.5-7

V

-0.5-7

V

------

Ta=25'C

W

1.5

-~

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

-20-75

"C

-65-150

'c

(Ta=-20-75"C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Unit
Min

Vee

Supply voltage

Vss

Power-supply voltage

4.75

V ,L

LOW-level input voltage

-0.5

V 1H

High-Ieve! input voltage

2

Nom

Max

5

5.25

V

0.8

V

Vcc+O.5

V

V

0

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

(Ta=-20-75"C, Vcc=5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Unit

Test conditions
Min

Typ

Max

V OH

High-level output voltage

Vss=OV, IOH=-400,uA

VOL

LOW-level output voltage

Vss=OV, 10L=2mA

I,

Input leak current

VsS=OV,V,=O-VCC

-10

10

/-I A

-100

100

/-I A

-10

10

/-I

10

pF

It(CE)

Input leak current, CE pin

Vss=OV, V,=O-VCC

loz

Output floating leak current

Vss=OV, V,=O. 45-Vcc

Ci

Input capacitance

VIL =OV, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25'C

Cilo

Input/output terminal capacitance

VIIOL=OV, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25'C

lee

Supply current from Vee

Vss=OV

Note 1

V

2.4
0.45

V

A

20

pF

180

mA

Current flowing into an IC is positive, out is negative.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-7

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8155P
2048·BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

TIMING REQUIREMENTS

(T a=-20-75·C, Vcc=5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

Limits

Unit

Test conditions

symbol

Min

Typ

Max

tSU(A-U

Address setup time before latch

tAL

50

ns

theL-A)

Address hold time after latch

tLA

80

ns

thCL-RWH)

Read/write hold time after latch

tLc

100

ns

tw(U

Latch pulse width

tLL

100

ns

theRw-u

Latch hold time after read/write

tCL

20

ns

tW(RWL)

Read/Write low-level pulse width

tcc

250

ns

tSU(D-W)

Data setup time before write

tow

150

ns

theW-D)

Data hold time after write

two

0

ns

tW(RWH)

Read/write high-level pulse width

tRY

300

ns

tSU(P-R)

Port setup time before read

tpR

70

ns

th(R_P)

Port hold time after read

IRP

50

ns

tW(STS)

Strobe pulse width

Iss

200

ns

tSU(P-STB)

Port setup time before strobe

tpss

50

ns

th(STB-P)

Port hold time after strobe

t pHS

120

ns

tW<¢H)

Timer input high-level pulse width

12

120

ns

tw(';U

Timer input low-level pulse width

t,

80

ns

Icc 1)

Timer input cycle time

teye

320

ns

Ire" )

Timer input rise time

Ir

30

ns

Ife

Timer input faU time

If

30

ns

1 )

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

(Ta=-20-75·C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

Limits
Unit

Test conditions

symbol

Min

Typ

Max

tPXV(R-DQ)

Propagation time from 'read to data output

IRD

170

ns

tPZX(A-OQ)

Propagation time from address to data output

lAD

400

ns

tPVZ(R-OQ)

Propagalion lime from read to data floating (Nole 2)

100

ns

400

ns

tRDF

0

Iwp

tPHL(W_P)
Propagation time from write to data output

twp

tPLH(W_P)
tPlH(STB-BF)

Propagation time from strobe to SF flag

tSBF

400

ns

tPHL(A-BF)

Propagation time from read to SF flag

tRBE

400

ns

IpLH(STB-INTR)

Propagation time from strobe to interrupt

lSI

400

ns

tPHL[R.INTR)

Propagation time from read to interrupt

tRo'l

400

ns

tPHL(STB-BF)

Propagation time from strobe to SF flag

tSBE

400

ns

tPLH(W.SF)

Propagation time from write to SF flag

tWBF

400

ns

tPHUW-INTR)

Propagation time from write to interrupt

IWI

400

ns

400

ns

tpHu f-OUT)

Propagation time from timer input to timer output

tTH

tpLH ( f -OUT}
tPZX(R_DQ)

Nole 1

2

4-8

ITL

propagation time from read to data enable

tRDE

Measurement conditions C=150pF
Measurement condilions of nole 1 are not applied.

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

10

ns

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8155P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

TIMING DIAGRAM

(reference level, high-level=2V, low-level=O.8V)

Basic output

~

PORT

tpHL{W-P)

tPlH(W-P)

~

I

l

th(w-oJ

th(L-RWHl

101M

lL-

tW(RWH)

tW(RWU

\

V

\

\

V

\

)

K

ADDRESS

)

~

DATA
th(RW-Ll

tSU(o-w)

th(L-A)

tSU(A-Ll

..

ALE
tW(Ll

Basic input

)

PORT

K
tSU(P-R}

-I-- I-- thlR-pi

jZftW(RwLl

te(l-Rwl

tpXV(R-DQ)

i'-

_I

tW(RWH)

tC(Rw-Ll

~DQ)

f---tPXZ(R-OOJ

101M

'\
\

'"'
)t

lJ

\

/

\

tplX(A-O)

7.l

ADDRESS
tSU(A-Ll

ALE

/

!hIL-Ai

~

DATA

>--<=
/

1\ . .
tw(ll

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-9

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81SSP
2048·BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

Strobed output
PORT __........................................~~............................................................_
tpLH(W-P)
tpHuw-p)

INTR

SF

Strobed input

Timer (Note 1)
TIMER IN

TIMER OUT
PULSE MODE

\.. ____ J

(Note2)

TIMER MODE
OUT _________ ~-.J' (Note 2)
SQUARE WAVE
Note 1

2

4-10

The wave form is shown counting down from 5 to 1.
As long as the M1 mode flag of the timer register is at
high-level, pulses are continuously output.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81S6P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8156P is a 2K-bit RAM (256-word by 8-bit) fabricated with the N-channel silicon-gate EO-MOS technology.
This IC has 3 I/O ports and a 14-bit counter/timer which
make it a good choice to extend the functions of an 8-bit
microcomputer. It is incased in a 40-pin plastic OIL package
and operates with a single 5V power supply.

FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Compatible with MELPS 85 devices
Static RAM: 256 words by 8 bits
Programmable 8-bit I/O port 2
Programmable 6-bit I/O port 1
Programmable counter/timer: 14 bits
Multiplexed address/data bus

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
J PC3- 1
110 PORT C ) PC, _ 2
TIMER INPUT TIMER IN -

3

RESET INPUT RESET -

4
5

I/O PORT C PC5 -

1/0

1PORT

C

TIMER OUTPUT TIMER OUT ~ 6

SELEC~E~~~t 10/M CHIP ENABLE INPUT CE -

8

READ INPUT RD -

9

WRITE INPUl WR

ADE~Jl1;lSE 1~~~~

7
I/O
PORT B

-10

ALE - 11
ADo-12

BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESS/DATA BUS

I/O
PORT A

APPLICATION
Extension of I/O ports and timer function for MELPS 85 and
MELPS 8-48 devices

(OV)vss

Outline 40P4

FUNCTION
The M5L8156P is composed of RAM, I/O ports and counter/
timer. The RAM is a 2K-bit static RAM organized as 256
words by 8 bits. The I/O ports consist of 2 programmable 8bit ports and 1 programmable 6-bit port. The terminals of the
6-bit port can be programmed to function as control terminals for the 8-bit ports, so that the 8-bit ports can be operated

BLOCK DIAGRAM

(5V)Vcc~
(ov) vss

in a handshake mode. The counter/timer is composed of 14
bits that can be used to count down (events or time) and it
can generate square wave pulses that can be used for
counting and timing.

-----------------

~

STATIC RAM

(256 WORDS X 8 BITS)

I/O
PORT A

DATA BUS
BUFFER

BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESS/DATA BUS

I/O
PORT B

RESET INPUT RESET 4
MEMORY SELECT INPUT 10iM 7
CHIP ENABLE INPUT
CE
READ
WRITE
ADDRESS
ENABLE

INPUT
INPUT
LATCH
INPUT

RD

READ/
WRITE
CONTROL
CIRCUIT

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

I/O
PORT C

4-11

a

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81S6P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

OPERATION

Pin assignment of control signals of port C

Table

Data Bus Buffer
Pin

This 3-state bidirectional 8-bit buffer is used to transfer the
data while input or output instructions are being executed by
the CPU. Command and address information is also transferred through the data bus buffer.

Bidirectional Address/Data Bus (ADo-AD 7 )
The bidirectional address/data bus is a3-state 8-bit bus.
The 8-bit address is latched in the internal latch by the failing edge of ALE. Then if 10/M input signal is at high-level,
the address of I/O port, counter/timer, or command register
is selected. If it is at low-level, memory address is selected.
The 8-bit address data is transferred by read input (RD)
or write input (WR).

Chip Enable Input (CE)
When CE is at high-level, the address information on
address/data bus is stored in the M5L8156P

Read Input (RD)
When RD is at lOW-level the data bus buffer is active. If 10/
M input signal is at low-level, the contents of RAM are read
through the address/data bus. If 10/M input is at high-level,
the selected contents of I/O port or counter/timer are 'read
through the address/data bus.

Write Input (WR)
When XR is at low-level, the data on the addressldata bus
are written into RAM if 101M is at low-level, or if 10/M is at
high-level they are written into I/O port, counter/timer or
command register.
Address Latch Enable Input (ALE)
An address on the address/data bus along with the levels of
CE and 10/M are latched in the M5L8156P on the falling
edge of ALE.

10/Memory Input (101M)
When 10/M is at low-level, the RAM is selected, while at
high-level the I/O port, counter/timer or command register
are selected.

I/O Port A (PAo-PA 1)

(port B strobe)

B BF
BINTR

(port B buffer full)

A STB

(port A strobe)

PC,.

A BF

(port A buffer full)

PCa

AINTR

(port A interrupt)

PC.
PC 3

(port B interrupt)

Timer Input (TIMER IN)
The signal at this input terminal is used by the counter/timer
for counting events or time. (3MHz max.)

Timer Output (TIMER OUT)
A square wave signal or pulse from the counter/timer is output through this pin when in the operation mode.

Command Register (8 bits)
The command register is an 8-bit latched register. The
loworder 4 bits (bits 0-3) are used for controlling and determination of the mode of the ports. Bits 4 and 5 are used
as interrupt enable flags for ports A and B when port C is
used as a control port. Bits 6 and 7 are used for controlling
the counter/timer. The contents of the command register are
rewritten by output instructions (address I/O XXXXXOOO).
Details of the functions of the individual bits of the command register are shown in Table 2.
Table

2

Bit

Symbol

a

PA

1

PB

2

PC,

3

PC 2

4

5

Bit functions of the command register
Function

PORT A I/O FLAG

PORT B I/O FLAG

-_.-

1: OUTPUT PORT A
0: INPUT PORT A
1: OUTPUT PORT B
0: INPUT PORT B

PORT C FLAG

00: ALTl
11: ALT2
01: ALT3

lEA

IEB

- - - _00. __ 00.-

Port A is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Input/output setting is controlled by the system software.

10: ALT4
PORT A INTERRUPT
ENABLE FLAG
PORT B INTERRUPT

1: ENABLE INTERRUPT
0: DISABLE INTERRUPT

1: ENABLE INTERRUPT

0: . __
DISABLE
INTERRUPT
_ _ _ENABLE
_ _ _ .FLAG
_ _ _ ._._00 ____
.. _ _ _ . _
_____
COUNTER/TIMER CONTROL

6

TMl

I/O Port B (PB o-PB 7 )

00: NO INFLUENCE ON COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION
01: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED (IF

Port B is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Input/output setting is controlled by the system software.
I/O Port C (PCo-PC s)
Port C is a 6-bit I/O port that can also be used to output
control signals of port A (PA) or port B (PB). The functions
of port C are controlled by the system software. When port C
is used to output control signals of ports A or B the assignment of the signals to the pins is as shown in Table 1.

4-12

--

PC 2

ReadlWrite Control Logic
The read/write control logic controls the transfer of data by
interpreting I/O control bus output signals (RD, WR, 10/M
and ALE) along with CPU signal (CE). RESET signal is also
used to control the transfer of data and commands.

Function
B STB

PCs

•

NOT ALREADY STOPPED)
10: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED AF-

7

TM2

MITSUBISHI

IIhI.. ELECTRIC

TER THE CURRENT COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION
IS COMPLETED
11: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION STARTED

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8156P
204S-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

Status Register (7 bits)
The status register is a 7-bit latched register. The loworder 5
bits (bits 0-4) are used as status flags for the liD ports. Bit
6 is as a status flag for the counter/timer. The contents of

Table

Bit functions of the status register

3

Bit

Symbol

0

INTR A

--'-'-'

the status register are transferred into the CPU by reading
(INPUT instruction, address liD XXXXXOOO). Details of the
functions of the individual bits of the status register are
shown in Table 3.

1-------

i
·--1----·

...

-------~-----,-----~

1

A BF

PORT A BUFFER FULL FLAG

2

INTE A

PORT A INTERRUPT ENABLE

4

B BF

PORT B BUFFER FULL FLAG

5

INTE B

PORT B INTERRUPT ENABLE

- - - _.
3
INTR B

6

Function

PORT A INTERRUPT REOUEST
-

PORT B INTERRUPT REQUEST

.-

r----

.-

(SET TO 1 WHEN THE FINAL LIMIT
OF THE COUNTER/TIMER IS REACHED

COUNTER/TIMER INTERRUPT

TIMER

AND IS RESET TO 0 WHEN THE
STATUS IS READ)

-7

THIS BIT IS NOT USED

-

I/O Ports

Port B Register (8 bits)

Command/status registers (8 bits/7 bits)
These register~ are assigned address XXXXXOOO. When executing an OUTPUT instruction, the contents of the command register are rewritten. When executing an INPUT instruction the contents of the status register are read.

Port B register is assigned address XXXXX01 O. As with Port
A register, this register can be programmed as an input or
output by setting the appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table 2. Port B can be operated in basic or
strobe mode and is assigned liD terminals PBa-PB7.

Port A Register (8 bits)

Port C Register (6 bits)

Port A Register is assigned address XXXXX001. This register
can be programmed as an input or output by setting the
appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table

Port C register is assigned address XXXXXOll. This port is
used for controlling input/output operations of ports A and B
by selectively setting bits 2 and 3 of the command register
as shown in Table 2. Details of the functions of the various
setting of bits 2 and 3 are shown in Table 4. Port C is
assigned liD terminals PCa - PC 5 and when used as port
control signals, the 3 low-order bits are assigned for port A
while the 3 high-order bits are assigned for port B.

2.
Port A can be operated in basiC or strobe made and is
aSSigned liD terminal PAa-PA7.

Table

4

Functions of port C

State
Terminal

ALT 1

PC5
PC,
PC 3
PC 2
PC,
PCo

Input

Output

Output

Input

Output
Output

Output

B BF (port buffer full)

Input

Output

B I NTR (port B interrupt)

Input

Output

A STB (port A strobe)

A STB

Input

Output

A BF (port A buffer full)

A BF (port A buffer full)

Output

A INTR (port A interrupt)

A INTR (port A interrupt)

Input

_.

I

ALT 2

ALT 3

- - - - - - - - , - - --------

- .-----_.-._------- ---

----"--._--

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

-+--=B

ALT 4
STB (port B strobe)

(port A strobe)

4-13

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8156P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

Configuration of ports
A block diagram of 1 bit of ports A and B is shown in Fig. 1.
While port A or B is programmed as an output port, if the
port is addressed by an input instruction, the contents of the
selected port can be read. When a port is put in input mode,
the output latch is cleared and writing into the output latch is

disabled. Therefore when a port is changed to output mode
from input mode, low-level signals are output through the
port. When a reset signal is applied, all 3 ports (PA, PB, and
PC) will be input ports and their output latches are cleared.
Port C has the same configuration as ports A and B in modes AL T1 and ALT2.

M5L8156P

Q

INTERNAL
DATA BUS

c--J
I

D

CLK

STB

1*1

I

EXTERNAL PIN
( PORT A OR)
PORT B
.

RD PORT

~------------------~D

Q

WR PORT

1. WR PORT=IOiWi·WR·CE·
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)

2. RD PORT=IO/M·RD·CE·
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)

3. MULTIPLEX CONTROL
1 STROBE INPUT MODE
*2 INPUT MODE

*

MD

Fig. 1
Table

Configuration for 1 bit of port A or B
5

Basic functions of I/O ports

Address

1--------.

The basic functions of the I/O ports are shown in Table 5.
The control signal levels to ports A and B, when port C is
programmed as a control port, are shown in Table 6.

RD

WR

0

1

AD bus - status register

1

0

Command register - AD bus

0

1

AD bus

1

0

Function

--

XXXXXOOO

-XXXXXOO1

1
- - - - - _ ..
0

XXXXX010

f---

XXXXXOll

4-14

6

-

~

port A

._-

Port A ~ AD bus
AD bus

~

port B

0

Port B ~ AD bus

0

1

AD bus

1

0

Port C ~ AD bus

1_.

Table

*3 OUTPUT MODE
4. MD= 1 : OUTPUT MODE
o : INPUT MODE

~

port C

Port control signal levels at ALT3 and ALT4

Control Signal

Output mode

Input mode

STB

Input

Input

BF

"L"

"L"

INTR

··H"

··L"

Counter/Timer
The counterltimer is a 14-bit counting register plus 2 mode
flags. The register has two sections: address 1/0 XXXXX100
is assigned to the .Iow-order 8 bits and address 1/0
XXXXX101 is assigned to the high-order 8 bits. The loworder bits 0-13 are used for counting or timing. The counter
is initialized by the program and then counted down to zero.
The initial setting can range from 216 to 3FF16 .. Bits 14 and 15
are used as mode flags.
The mode flags select 1 of 4 modes with functions as
follow:
Mode 0: Outputs high-level· signal during the former
half of the counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half
of the counter operation

• MITSUBI.SHI
..... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81S6P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

Table

7

Format of counter/timer

1:

Mode

Mode 2:
Bit Number

Address

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

XXXXX100 T7 Ts T5 T. T3 T2 T, To

XXXXX101 M2 M, T'3 T'2 T" TlO Tg T8

Outputs a low-level pulse

3:

Mode
THE LOW-ORDER 8 BITS
OF THE COUNTER REGISTER

Outputs a low-level pulse during each final
count down

Starting and stopping the counter/timer is controlled by

Ml ,M2: TIMER MODE
THE HIGH-ORDER 6 BITS
T,-T13: OF THE COUNTER REGISTER

bits

6 and 7 of the command register (see Table 2 for

details). The format and timer modes of the counter/timer
register are shown in Table

Table

8

is discontinued. To resume counting, a start command must
be written into the command register as shown in Table 2.

M2

M,

Timer operation

0

0

Outputs high-level signal during the former half of the counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half of the counter operation
(mode 0)

0

1

1
1

0
1

7 and Table 8.

The counter/timer is not influenced by a reset, but counting

Timer mode

r-----

0

during the final

count down

Function

0

Outputs square wave signals as in mode

Outputs square wave signals as in mode

a

While operating 2n + 1 count .down in mode 0, a high-level
signal is output during the n+l counting and a low-level signal is output during the n counting.

(mode 1)

II

Outputs a low-level pulse during the final count dowm

(mode 2)
Outputs a low-level pulse during each final count down

(mode 3)

ABSOI::UTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Parameter

Vee

Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Vo

Output voltage

Pd

Maximum power dissipation

Conditions

With respect to Vss

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

Tstg

Storage temperature range

Ta=25"C

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Parameter
Min

Vee

Supply voltage

Vss

Power-supply voltage

4.75

Nom

Max

5

5.25

V

-0.5-7

V

l.5

W

-20-75

"C

-65:""'150

"C

V'L

Low-level input voltage

-0.5

V'H

High-level input voltage

2

Unit
V
V

0

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

V

-0.5-7

(Ta=-20-75"C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Unil

Limits_ ..

-0.5-7

0.8

V

Vcc+O.5

V

(Ta=-20-75"C, Vcc=5V+5%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Test conditions
Min

Typ

Max

Unit
V

VOH

High-level output voltage

vss=OV,loH=-400tlA

VOL

Low-level output voltage

vss=ov, 10L=2mA

I,

Input leak current

vss=ov,v,=O-vcc

-10

10

t-

I
,

-~

ns
-ns
ns
--------ns

Timer input high-level pulse width

12

120

t w ( '" L)

Timer input low-level pulse width

I,

80

le(. )

Timer input cycle time

tCYC

t r ( '" )

Timer input ris,e time

Ir

30

If( • )

Timer input fall time

If

30

H)

--

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

ns

-ns
--ns

(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted.)
Alternative

Symbol

i

320

Limits

Parameter

Test conditions
Min

symbol
tPXVCR-OQ)

Propagation time from read to data output

lAD

tpzxCA-OQ)

Propagation time from address to data output

lAD

tPVZCR-OQ)

Propagation time from read to data floating (Note 7)

tRDF

tPHL(W_P)
Propagation time from write to data output

Typ

Max

0

I

Iwp
twp

tPLH(W_P)

i

I

Unit

170

-ns

400

ns

100

ns

400

ns

400
400

ns
-ns

tPLH(STB-BF)

Propagation time from strobe to SF flag

tSBF

tPHLCR-BF)

Propagation time from read to BF flag

tABE

tPLH(STB-INTR)

Propag.ation time from strobe to interrupt

lSI

400

ns

tpHL( R-INTRl

Propagation time from read to interrupt

tRDI

400

ns

tPHL(STB-BF)

Propagation time from strobe to BF flag

tSBE

400

ns

tPLH(W-BF)

Propagation time from write to BF flag

tWBF

400

ns

tPHL(\rV-INTR)

Propagation time from write to interrupt

IWI

400

ns

400

ns

tpHL( ¢ -OUT)
Propagation time from timer input to timer output

tpLH ( if. -OUT)
tpzxCR-OQ)

Nole

4-16

i

I

ITL
ITH

propagation time from read to data enable

tRDE

Measurement condilions C=150pF
Measuremenl condilions of nole 6 are not applied_

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

10

ns

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL81S6P
204S-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER

TIMING DIAGRAM

(reference level, high-level=2V, low-level=08V)

Basic output

)(

PORT

tPHUW-p)

tPlH(W-P)

~

II

I

~
tW(RWH)

tW{RWL)

th{W-Dl

th(L-RWHl

101M

CE

\

/

J

~\.

~

\

~

K

ADDRESS

V-

DATA

th(l-Al

tSU(A-Ll

II

/

th(RW-U

tSU{D-W)

ALE
tw(U

Basic input

K

)

PORT

--r--

tSU(P-R)

th(R~P)

'-

jl
tW(RWL)

te(l-Rwl

-I
tW(RWH)

tC(RW-U

tPXV(R-OQ)

I tPZX (R-DQ)
<4

i------tpXZ(R-DQ)

101M

CE

'\

I

V

\.

f\

/

tpZX(A-O}

)

ADDRESS
th(L~A)

tSU(A-Ll

ALE

/l

i

)

DATA

~

r-c=
V

I\~
tw(U

. • MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

4-17

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8156P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Strobed output
PORT

tpLH(W-P)
tPHL(W-P)

INTR

BF

Strobed input
PORT

BF

INTR

Timer (Note 1)
TIMER IN

TIMER OUT
PULSE MODE

\.. ____ J

(Note 2)

TIMER OUT
,
SQUARE WAVE MODE - - - - - - - - - - - - ' (Note2)
Note 1
The wave form is shown counting down from 5 to 1.
2 : As long as the M1 mode flag of the timer register is at
high-level, pulses are continuously output.

4-18

• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8251 AP-5 is a universal synchronous/asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (USART) IC chip designed for data
communications use. It is produced using the N-channel silicon-gate ED-MaS process and is mainly used in combination with 8-bit microprocessors.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

r

BIDIRECTIONAL
02 ....
DATA BUS" 03 ....

RECEIVERiH~8~ Rx D ~
(OV) Vss

FEATURES
•
•

•
•
•

Single 5V supply voltage
Synchronous and asynchronous operation
Synchronous:
5~8-bit characters
Internal or external synchronization
Automatic SYNC character insertion
Asynchronous system:
5~8-bit characters
Clock rate-1, 160r 64 times the baud rate
1, 11/ 2 , or 2 stop bits
False-start-bit detection
Automatic break-state detection
Baud rate: DC~64k-baud
Full duplex, double-buffered transmitter/receiver
Error detection: parity, overrun, and framing

APPLICATIONS
•
•

Modem control of data communications using microcomputers
Control of CRT, TTY and other terminal equipment

FUNCTION
The M5L8251 AP-5 is used in the peripheral circuits of a
CPU. It permits assignments, by means of software, of operations in all the currently used serial-data transfer systems

BLOCK DIAGRAM
RESET INPUT

BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

04

....

05

....

II

Outline 28P4

including IBM's 'bi-sync'. The M5L8251 AP-5 receives parallel-format data from the CPU, converts it into a serial format,
and then transmits via the TxD pin. It also receives data sent
in via the RxD pin from the external circuit, and converts it
into a parallel format for sending to the CPU. On receipt of
parallel-format data for transmission from the CPU or serial
data for the CPU from external devices, the M5L8251 AP-5 .
informs the CPU using the TxRDY or RxRDY pin. In addition,
the CPU can read the M5L8251 AP-5 status at any time. The
M5L8251 AP-5 can detect the data received for errors and inform the CPU of the presence of errors as status information.
Errors include parity, overrun and frame errors.

---------,

CLOCK INPUT
CONTROL/DATA-CONTROL
INPUT
READ-DATA CONTROL INPUT
WRITE-DATA CONTROL INPUT

TRANSMITTER-DATA OUTPUT

CHIP-SELECT INPUT
TRANSMITTER-READY OUTPUT
TRANSMITTER-EMPTY OUTPUT

DATA-SET READY INPUT
DATA-TERMINAL READY OUTPUT

TRANSMITTER-CLOCK INPUT

CLEAR-TO-SEND INPUT
REQUEST-TO-SEND OUTPUT

RECEIVER-READY OUTPUT
25 RxC
RECEIVER-CLOCK INPUT
16 SYNDET/BD SYNC DETECT/BREAK DETECT
BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS

DATA
BUS
BU FFER t---P-----I
3 RxD

RECEIVER-DATA INPUT

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ---.JI

• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

4-19

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

OPERATION

Table

The M5L8251 AP-5 interfaces with the system bus as shown
in Fig.1, positioned between the CPU and the modem or terminal eqUipment, and offers all the functions required for
data communication.

16

ADDRESS BUS
An

4

M5LB251AP-5 Access Methods

C/D

RD

WR

CS

L

L

H

l

L

H

L

L

Function

Data

Data

bus -

in

USART - Data

USART
bus

H

L

H

L

H

H

L

L

Control

X

H

H

L

3-State - Data

bus

X

X

X

H

3-State - Data

bus

Data bus
+-

+-

Staus

Data bus

CONTROL BUS
IIOR

8

IIOW RESET

~

2(TTl

ReadlWrite Control Logic

DATA BUS

This logic consists of a control word register and command
word register. It receives signals from the CPU control bus
and generates internal-control signals for the elements.

8
CID

CS

Do"""" 07

Modem Control Circuit

RD WR RESET ClK

M5LB251AP-5

Fig. 1 M5LB251AP-5 interface to BOBOA standard system bus
When using the M5L8251 AP-5, it is necessary to program, as
the initial setting, assignments for synchronous/asynchronous
mode selection, baud rate, character length, parity check,
and even/odd parity selection in accordance with the communication system used. Once programming is completed,
functions appropriate to the communication system can be
carried out continuously.
When initial setting of the USART is completed, data
communication becomes possible. Though the receiver is
always in the enable state, the transmitter is placed in the
transmitter-enable state (T xEN) by a command instruction,
and the application of a lOW-level signal to the CTS pin
prompts data-transfer start-up. Until this condition is satisfied, transrhission is not executed. On receiving data, the receiver informs the CPU that reading for the receiver data in
the USART by the CPU has become possible (the RxRDY
terminal has turned to '1'). Since data reception and the entry of the CPU into the data-readable state are output as status information, the CPU can assess USART status without
acceSSing the RxRDY terminal.
During receiving operation, the USART checks errors and
gives out status information. There are three types of errors:
parity, overrun, and frame. Even though an error occurs, the
USART continues its operations, and the error state is retained until error reset (ER) is effected by a command instruction. The M5L8251 AP-5 access methods are listed in
Table 1.

This is a general-purpose contrOl-signal circuit designed to
simplify the interface to the modem. Four types of control
signal are available: output signals DTR and RTS are controlled by command instructions, input signal DSR is given to
the CPU as status information and input signal CTS controls
direct transmission.

Data-Bus Buffer
This is an 8-bit 3-state bidirectional bus through which control words, command words, status information, and transfer
data are transferred. Fig. 2 shows the structure of the databus buffer.

~ID7
Do

D1

IBUFFER
H RECEIVE-DATA
HCONTROL BUFFER rLJ TRANSMIT-DATA
BUFFER
~

Fig.

TO INT ERNAl
0 ATA BUS

I STATUS BUFFER :
I

Do

2

I---

Data-bus-buffer structure

Transmit Buffer
This buffer converts parallel-format data given to the databus buffer in to serial data with addition of a start bit, stop
bits and a parity bit, and sends out the converted data
through the TxD pin based on the control signal.

Transmit-Control Circuit
This circuit carries out all the controls required for serial
data transmission. It controls transmitter data and outputs the
signals required by external devices in accordance with the
instructions of the read/write control logic.

4-20

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Receive Control Circuit

Read-Data Control Input (RD)

This circuit offers all the controls required for normal reception of the input serial data. It controls receiver data and outputs signals for the external devices in accord ace with the
instructions of the read/write control logic.

Receiver data and status information are output from the
CPU by a low-level input for the CPU data bus.

Receive Buffer
This buffer converts serial data given via the RxD pin into a
parallel format, checks the bits and characters in accordance with the communication format designated by mode
setting, and transfers the assembled characters to the CPU
via the data-bus buffer.

Receiver-Data Input (RxD)
Serial characters sent from another device are input to this
pin and converted to a parallel-character format to serve as
data for the CPU. Unless the '1' state is detected after a
chip-master reset procedure (this resetting is carried out to
prevent spurious operation such as that due to faulty connection of the RxD to the line in a break state), the serial
characters are not received. This applies to only the asynchronous mode. When the RxD line enters the low state instantaneouslybecause of noise, etc, the mis-start prevention
function starts working. That is, the start bit is detected by its
falling edge but in order to make sure that it is the correct
start bit, the RxD line is strobed at the middle of the start bit
to reconfirm the low state. If it is found to be high a faultystart judgment is made.
Transmitter-Clock Input (f~C)
This clock controls the baud rate for character transmission
from the T xD pin. Serial data is shifted by the falling edge of
the T xC signal. In the synchronous mode, the T xC frequency
is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode,
the frequency is specified as 1,16, or 64 times the baud rate
by the mode setting.
Example When the baud rate is 110 bauds:
T xC=110Hz(lX)
TxC=l. 76kHz(16X)
T xC=7. 04kHz(64X)

Write-Data Control Input

(WR)

Data and control words output from the CPU by the lowlevel
input are written in the M5L8251 AP-5. This terminal is usually
used in a form connected with the control bus U6W of the
CPU.

Chip-Select Input (CS)
This is a device-select signal that enables the USART by a
low-level input. Usually, it is connected to the address bus
directly or via the decoder. When this signal is in the high
state, the M5L8251 AP-5 is disabled.

Control/Data Control Input (C/O)
This signal shows whether the information on the USART
data bus is in the form of data characters or control words,
or in the form of status information, in accordance with the
RD and WR inputs while the CPU is accessing the
M5L8251 AP-5. The high level identifies control words or status information, and the low level, data characters.

Receiver-Ready Output (RxRDY)
This signal indicates that the received characters have entered the receiver buffer, and further, the receiver-data buffer in the data-bus buffer shown in Fig,2. It is possible to
confirm the RxRDY status by using this signal as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing the CPU to read the
0 1 bit of the status information by polling. The RxRDY is
automatically reset when a character is read by the CPU.
Even in the break state in which the RxD line is held at low,
the RxRDY remains active. It can be masked by making the
RxE( D2 ) of the command instruction O.

Transmitter-Ready (TxRDY)
This signal shows that the data is ready for transmission. It is
possible to confirm the status of serial-data transmission by
using it as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing
the CPU to read the Do bit of the status information by polling. Since the TxRDY signal shows that the data buffer is
empty, it is automatically reset when a transmission character is loaded by the CPU. The T xRDY bit of the status information means that the transmit-data buffer shown in Fig. 2
has become empty, while the T xRDY pin enters the highlevel state only when the transmit-data buffer is empty, T xEN
equals '1', and a lowlevel input has been applied to the CTS
pin.
Status (Do): When transmit-data buffer (TDB) is empty, it
becomes '1 '.
TxRDY terminal: When (TDB is empty)' (T xEN=l)' (CTS
=0)=1 or resetting, it becomes active.

Sync Detect/Break Detect Output-Input
(SYNDET/BD)
In the synchronous mode this pin is used for input and output
operations. When it is specified for the internal synchronous
mode by mode setting, this pin works as an output terminal.
It enters the high state when a SYNC character is received
through the RxD pin. If the M5L8251 AP-5 has been programmed for double SYNC characters (bi-sync), a high is entered in the middle of the last bit of the second SYNC character. This signal is automatically reset by reading the status
i nformati on.
On designation of the M5L8251 AP-5 to the external synchronous mode, this pin begins to serve for input operations.
Applying a high signal to this pin prompts the M5L8251 AP-5
to begin assembling data characters at the next rising edge
of the RxC. For the width of a high-level signal to be input, a
minimum RxC period is required.
Designation of the asynchronous mode causes this pin to
function as a SD (output) pin. When the start, data, and parity bits and stop bits are all in the low state for two characters period, a high is entered. The SD (break detect) signal
can also be read as the D6 bit of the status information. This
signal is reset by resetting the chip master or by the RxD
line's recovering the high state.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-21

..

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Clear-To-Send Input (CTS)
When the TxEN bit (Do) of the command instruction has
been set to '1' and the CTS input is low serial data is sent
out from the TxO pin. Usually this is used as a clear-to-send
signal for the modem.
Note: CTS indicates the modem status as follows:
ON means data transmission is possible;
OFF means data transmission is impossible.
Transmitter-Empty Output (TxEMPTY)
When no transmisison characters are left in the transmit buffer, this pin enters the high state. In the asynchronous mode,
the following transmission character is shifted to the transmit
buffer when it is loaded from the CPU. Thus, it is automatically reset. In the synchronous mode, a SYNC character is
loaded automatically on the transmit buffer when no transferdata characters are left. In this case, however, the TxEMPTY
does not enter the low state when a SYNC character has
been sent out, since TxEMPTY = H denotes the state in
which there is no transfer character and one or two SYNC
characters are being transferred or the state in which a
SYNC character is being transferred as a filler. TxEMPTY is
unrelated to the TxEN bit of the command instruction.
Transmi.ssion-Data Output (TxD)
Parallel-format transmission characters loaded on the
M5L8251 AP-5 by the CPU are assembled into the format designated by the mode instruction and sent in serial-data form
via the TxO pin. Data is output, however, only in cases
where the Do bit (TxEN) of the command instruction is '1'
and the CTS terminal is in the low state. Once reset, this pin
is kept at the mark status (high level) until the first charac-'
ter is sent.
Clock Input (ClK)
This system-clock input is required for internal-timing generation and is usually connected to the clock-output (CLK)
pin of the M5L8085AP. Although there is no direct relation
with the data-transfer baud rate, the clock-input (CLK) frequency is more than 30 times the TxC or RxC input frequency in the case of the synchronous system and more than 4.5
times in the case of the asynchronous system.
Reset Input (RESET)
Once the USART is shifted to the idle mode by a high-level
input, this state continues until a new control word is set.
Since this is a master reset, it is always necessary to load a
control word following the reset process. The reset input requires a minimum 6-clock pulse width.
Data-Set Ready Input (DSR)
This is a general-purpose input signal, but is usually used as
a data-set ready signal to test modem status. Its status can
be known from the status reading process. The 07 bit of the
status information equals '1' when the OSR pin is in the low
state, and '0' when in the high state.
OSR=L.... 07 bit of status information=l
OSR=H .... 07 bit of status information=O
Note: OSR indicates modem status as follows:

4-22

•

ON means the modem can transmit and receive;
OFF means it cannot.
Request-To-Send Output (RTS)
This is a general-purpose output signal but is used as a request-to-send signal for the modem. The RTS terminal is
controlled by the 0 5 bit of the command instruction. When 0 5
is equal to '1', RTS=L, and when 0 3 is 0, RTS=H.
Command register 05=1 .... RTS=L
Command register 05=0.... RTS=H
Note: RTS controls the modem transmission carrier as follows:
ON means carrier dispatch;
OFF means carrier stop.
Data-Terminal Ready Output (DTR)
This is a general-purpose output Signal, but is usually used
as a data-terminal ready or rate-select signal to the modem.
The OTR pi!) is controlled by the 01 bit of the command instruction; if 01=1, OTR=L, and if 01=0, OTR=H.
0, of the command register=1 .... 0TR=L
0, of the command register=O .... OTR=H
Receiver-Clock Input (RxC)
This clock signal controls the baud rate for the sending in of
characters via the RxO pin. The data is shifted in by the rising edge of the RxC signal. In the synchronous mode, the
RxC frequency is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode, the frequency is specified as 1, 16, or 64
times the baud rate by mode setting. This relationship is parallel to that of TxC, and in usual communication-line systems the transmission and reception baud rates are equal.
The TxC and RxC terminals are, therefore, used connected
to the same baud-rate generator.

PROGRAMMING
It is necessary for the M5L8251 AP-5 to have the control word
loaded by the CPU prior to data transfer. This must always
be done following any resetting operation (by external RESET pin or command instruction IR). There are two types of
control words: mode instructions specifying general operations required for communications and command instructions
to control the M5L8251 AP-5 actual operations.
Following the resetting operation, a mode instruction
must be set first. This instruction sets the synchronous or
asynchronous system to be used. In the sysnchronous system, a SYNC character is loaded from the CPU. In the case
of the bi-sync system, however, a second SYNC character
must be loaded in succession.
Loading a command instruction makes data transfer
possible. This operation after resetting must be carried out
for initializing the M5L8251AP-5. The USART command instruction contains an internal-reset IR instruction (Osbit) that
makes it possible to return the M5L8251 AP-5 to its reset
state. The initialization flowchart is shown in Fig. 3 and the
mode-instruction and command-instruction formats are
shown in Figs. 4 and 5.

MITSUBISHI

~ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

SYNC
SINGLE CHARACTER

I
I

CHARACTER

I
I

SYNC

I=SINGLE
O=DOUBLE

SYNC DETECTION

II =EXTERNAL
10=INTERNAL

EXTERNAL SYNC DETECT

PARITY CHECK
EVEN PARITY

I

I

I-EVEN
O=ODD

I

PARITY

I

PARITY ENABLE. I I = ENABLE
I O=DISABLE

CHARACTER LENGTH
o 0 I I
oTITo111
SYNCHRONOUS
MODE

I scs I ESD I EP I PEN I

I
L2

I

I

L,

5 6 7 8

I

0

I

0

I

•

EVEN PARITY

PARITY ENABLE

CHARACTER LENGTH

o0

I I
I 0 I
5 6 7 8

o

Fig.

3

Initialization flow chart

ASYNCHRONOUSr-~r-~~~~~~-r~~~-r~,
MODEL-__L-~~~__~__-L__~~-L~~

Fig.

4

Mode-instruction format

( C/5=1 )
WR =0

I
I
I
I
I

I ENTER HUNT MODE

ENTER HUNT MODE

,I-ENABLE SEARCH FOR
SYNC CHARACTERS

INTERNAL RESET

_I INTERNAL RESET
II-TO INITIALIZATION

J TRANSMISSION

REQUEST TO SEND

CARRIER

I CO.t!Itl OL
I-RTS~O

JI ERROR
RESET
(\-CLEAR ALL ERROR FLAGS

ERROR RESET

PE OE. FE)

SEND BREAK

SEND BREAK CHARACTER
II-TxD~LOW

Rx ENABLE

I EH I
D7

Fig.

5

IR lRTS
D6

D5

RECEIVER ENABLE
I =ENABLE
O=DISABLE

I

DATA
TERMINAL
READY
I DATA-TERMINAL READY
II-DTR=Q

I

I~ TRANSMISSION ENABLE
T ENABLE I = ENABLE
x
Q=DISABLE

~

LER ISBRK I RxE I DTR ITxENI
D,

D,

D,

D,

Command-instruction format

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

J
I

Do
(C/D=I. WR=O)

4-23

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Asynchronous Transmission Mode
When data characters are loaded on the M5L8251 AP-5 after
initial setting, the USART automatically adds a start bit (low)
, an odd or even parity bit specified by the mode instruction
during initialization, and a specified number of stop bits
(high). After that, the assembled data characters are transferred as serial data via the TxD pin if, transfer is enabled
(TxEN = l'CTS= L). In this case, the transfer data (baud
rate) is shifted by the mode instruction at a rate of lX, l/16X,
or 1164X the TxC period.
If the data cha.racters are not loaded on the M5L8251 AP5, the TxD pin enters a mark state (high). When SBRK is
programmed by the command instruction, break characters
(low) are output continuously through the TxD pin.

Asynchronous Reception Mode
The RxD line usually starts operations in a mark state (high),
triggered by the falling edge of a low-level pulse when it
comes to this line. This signal is again strobed at the middle
of the bit to confirm that it is a perfect start bit. The detection of a second low indicates the validity of the start bit
(restrobing is carried out only in the case of l6X and 64X) .
After that, the bit counter inside the M5L8251 AP-5 starts
operating; each bit of the serial information on the RxD line
is shifted in by the rising edge of RxC, and the data bit, parity bit (when necessary), and stop bit are sampled at the
middle position.
The occurrence of a parity error causes the setting of a
parity-error flag. If the stop bit is in the low state, a frame
error flag is set. Attention should be paid to the fact that the
receivenequires only one stop bit even though the program
has designated 1'1, or 2 stop bits.
Reception up to the stop bit means reception of a complete character. This character is then transferred to the receiver-data buffer shown in Fig.2, and the RxRDY becomes
active. In cases where this character is not read by the CPU

and where the next character is transferred to the receiverdata buffer, the preceding character is destroyed and an
overrun-error flag is set.
These error flags can be read as the M5L8251 AP-5 status
information. The occurrence of an error does not stop
USART operations. The error flags are cleared by the ER(D 4
bit) of the command instruction.
The asynChronous-system transfer formats are shown in
Figs. 6 and 7.

Synchronous Transmission Mode
In this mode the TxD pin remains in the high state until initial
setting by the CPU is completed. After initialization, the state
of CTS=L and TxEN =,1 enables serial transmission of characters through the TxD pin. Then, data characters are sent
out and shifted by the falling edge of the TxC signal. The
transmission rate equals the TxC rate.
Thus, once data-character transfer starts, it must continue
through the TxD pin at the same rate as that of TxC. Unless
data characters are provided from the CPU before the transmitter buffer becomes empty, one or two SYNC characters
are automatically output from the TxD pin. In this case, it
should be noted that the TxEMPTY pin enters the high state
when there are no data characters left in the M5L8251 AP-5
to be transferred, and that the low state is not entered until
the USART is provided with the next data character from the
CPU. Care should also be taken over the fact that merely
setting a command instruction does not effect SYNCcharacter insertion, because the SYNC character insertion is
enabled after sending out the first data character.
In this mode, too; break characters are sent out in succession from the TxD pin when SBRK is designated (D 3 =1)
by a command instruction.

CPU-USART (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)
DATA

CH~RACTER

ASSEMBLED
!§TARTIDATA
~IT

.

DATA

CH~RACTER

!

I

FORMAT

RECEIPTION FORMAT

ISTBAITRTI
-"'-'-J..L.._ _....:;;....,;;.;...._ _-'-~-'-(;;.,1.1,2:.ill

STO'PiiiTI

(5-8) PARITY STOr BITSI
BIT
(1.'5.2)

L.

TRANSMITTER DATA OUTPUT (TxD)

USART-CPU (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)

I

DATA

Note

CHARA~TER

(5-8)

I

: When the data character is 5, 6, or 7 bits/character
length, the unused bits (tor USART- CPU) are set to
zero.

Fig. 6 Asynchronous transmission format I
( transmission)

4-24

Fig.

7

Asynchronous transmission format II (reception)

• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Synchronous Reception Mode
Character synchronization in this mode is carried out internally or externally by initial-setting designation.
Programming in the internal synchronous mode requires
that an EH instruction (D7= 1, enter hunt mode) is included
in the first command instruction. Data on the RxD pin is sampled by the rising RxC signal, and the receiver-buffer contents are compared with the SYNC character each time a bit
is input. Comparison continues until an agreement is
reached. When the M5L8251 AP-5 has been programmed in
the bi-sync mode, data received in further succession is
compared. The detection of two SYNC characters in succession makes the USART end the hunt mode, setting the SYNDET pin to the high state. This reset operation is prompted
by the reading of the status information. When the parity has
been programmed, SYNDET is not set in the middle of the
last data bit but in the middle of the parity bit.
In the external synchronous mode, the M5L8251 AP-5 gets
out of the hunt mode when a high synchronization signal is
given to the SYNDET pin. The high signal requires a minimum duration of one RxC cycle. In the asynchronous mode,
however, the EH signal does not affect th.e operation at all.
Parity and overrun errors are checked in the same way
as in the asynchronous system. During hunt-mode operations
the parity bit is not checked, but parity checking is carried
out even when the receiver is disabled.
The CPU can command the receiver to enter the hunt
mode, if synchronization is lost. This prevents the SYNC
character from erroneously becoming equal to the received
data when all the data in the receiver buffer is set to '1'
Attention should be paid to the fact that the SYNDET F/F is
reset each time status information is read irrespective of the
synchronous mode's being internal or external. This, howev-

er, does not return the M5L8251 AP-5 to the hunt mode. Synchronism detection is carried out even though it is not the
hunt mode. The synchronous transfer formats are shown in
Figs. 8 and 9.

Command Instruction
This instruction defines actual operations in the communication mode designated by mode setting. Command instructions include transmitter/receiver enable error-reset, internal-reset, modem-control, enter-hunt and break transmission
instructions.
The mode is set following the reset operation. A SYNC
character is set as required, and the writing of high-level
signals on the control/data pin (C/O) that follows it is regarded as a command instruction. When the mode is set all
over again from the beginning, the M5L8251 AP-5 can be reset by using inputting via the reset terminal or by internal resetting based on the command instruction.
Note 1: The command error reset (ER), internal reset (IR)
and enter-hunt-mode (EH) operations are only
effective when the command instruction is loaded,
so that these bits need not be returned to '0'.
2: When a break character is sent out by a command,
the TxD enters the low state immediately irrespective of whether or not the USART has sent out data.
3: Operations of the USART's receiver section which is
always in the enable state cannot be inhibited. The
command instruction RxE = 0 does not mean that
data reception via the RxD pin is inhibited; it means
that the RxRDY is masked and error flags are inhibited.

CPU~USART (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)

I

DATA

SERIAL INPUT DATA (RxD)

CH:~RACTER I
USART~CPU (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)

I
Fig. 8 Synchronous transmission format I
( transmission)

Note

DATA

C:~ARACTER I

When the data character is 5, 6. or 7 bits/character
length, the unused bits (for USART ~ CPU) are set to

zero.

Fig.

9

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

Synchronous transmission format II (reception)

4-25

4

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

FE:

Status Information
The CPU can always read USART status by setting the C/O
to '1' and RO to '0',
The status information format is shown in Fig, 10, In this
format RxROY, TxEMPTY and SYNOET have the same definitions as those of the pins, This means that these three
pieces of status information become '1' when each pin is in
the high state, The other status information is defined as follows:
When the OSR pin is in the low state, status inOSR:
formation OSR becomes '1',

The occurrence of a frame error in the receiver
section makes the status information FE '1',
The occurrence of an overrun error in the receiver
section makes the status information OE '1',
The occurrence of a parity error in the receiver
section makes this status information PE '1',
This information becomes '1' when the transmitdata
buffer is empty, Be careful because this has a
different meaning from the TxROY pin that enters
the high state only when the transmitter buffer is
empty, when the CTS pin is in the low state, and
when TxEN is '1',

OE:
PE:
TxROY:

11

FOR DSR

LOW

LEVEL

a FOR

DSR

HIGH

LEVEL

I SAME DEFINITION AS SYNDET/BDPIN
I FE IS SET WHEN A VALID STOP BIT IS NOT DETECTED AT THE END OF EVERY CHAR·
I ACTER (ASYNC ONLY)

IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE COMMAND INSTRUCTION
FE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5L8251Ap·5

I ~~c!3~n ':::'~II~ATBHL~ 7f~s ~~~~TN~J f~t~t~~~Rl.pJ~~gIT~:~DT~Es~~GMi~~
OE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5L8251AP·5

.1 PE IS SET WHEN A PARITY ERROR IS DETECTED IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE
I COMMAND

INSTRUCTION PE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5L8251AP·5

SAME DEFINITION AS TxEMPTV PIN
SAME DEFINITION AS RxRDY PIN

I I 5~~ I I
DSR
D7

Fig.

10

D6

FE

OE

D5

D,

I

PE
D3

I

TxE
D2

I

I
=OY
D,

1---1
I ~OY I

I
I
I
I
I

I

Do

Status information (C/D=l, RD=O)

APPLICATION EXAMPLES
Fig, 11 shows an application example for the M5L8251 AP-5
in the asynchronous mode, When the port addresses of the
M5L8251 AP-5 are assumed to be 00 # and 01 # in this figure,
initial setting in the asynchronous mode is carried out in the
following manner:
MVI
A, B6#
Mode setting
OUT
01 #
Command instruction
MVI
A,27#
OUT
01 #
In this case, the following are set by mode setting:
Asynchronous mode
6 bits/character
Parity enable (even)
11/2 stop bits
Baud rate: 16X
Command instructions set the following
RTS=1""RTS pin=L
RxE=1
OTR=1""OTR pin=L
TxEN =1
When the initial setting is complete, transfer operations are
allowed. The RTS pin is initially set to the low-level by setting RTS to '1', and this serves as a CTS input with TxEN

4-26

1 FOR TRANSMIT DATA BUFFER IS EMPTY

1
1

being equal to '1', For this reason the same definition applies
to the status and pin of TxROY, and '1' is assigned when the
transmit-data buffer is empty, Actual transfer of data is carried out in the following way:
IN
01 ;I:
Status read
The IN instruction prompts the CPU to read the USART's
status. The result is; if the TxROY equals '1' transmitter data
is sent from the CPU and written on the M5L8251 AP-5,
Transmitter data is written in the M5L8251 AP-5 in the following manner:
MVI
A,2D#
20'6 is an example of transmitter data,
OUT
USART~(A)
00#
Receiver data is read in the following manner:
IN
00#
(A)~USART
In the above example, the status information is read and
as a result, the transmitter data is written and read, Interruption processing by using the TxROY and RxROY pins is also
possible,
Fig, 12 shows the status of the TxO pin when data written
in the USART is transferred from the CPU, When the data
shown in Fig,12 enters the RxO pin, data sent from the
M5L8251 AP-5 to the CPU becomes 20 16 and bits 0 6 and 0 7
are treated as '0',

• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

rr-rl DI-r11

j
L

BAUD RATE
GENERATOR
(DIVIDER)

C

TxC
RxC
RTS
CTS

x,

DTR
DSR

RD

RD

WR

WR

TO TRANSMISSION

CS

FROM

RESET IN
RESET OUT

RESET

P--- EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT

CPU
M5l8085AP

USART
M5l8251 AP-5
TO EXTERNAL CIRCUIT {

x,

ClK

ClK

P----c-

cio I---

10iM

ADDRESS
DECODER

A'5-Ag

T,D
LINE {
RxD

D7---Do

AD7- ADo

8
8

8

ALE

J
TO MEMORY AND OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICES

Fig,

11

Example of circuit using the asynchronous mode

STOP BIT (1.5 BITS)

START

BIT~ f--...~~.-o.DA...TA ------J

I-l-.j

PARITY BIT

Fig,

12

I--

START BIT

Example of data transmission

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Conditions

Parameter

Vee

Power-supply vollage

V,

Inpul voltage

Vo

Oulput vollage

Pd

Power dissipation

With respect to vss

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

TSlg

Storage temperature range

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

Limits

Unit

-0.5-7

V

-0.5-7

V

-0.5-7

V

1000

mW

-20-75

·C

-65-150

·C

(Ta=-20-7S·C, unless olherwise noled)
Limits

Symbol

Unit

Parameter
Min

Nom

Max

5

5.25

4.75

V

Vee

Supply vollage

Vss

Power-supply vollage

V'H

High-level inpul vollage

2.0

Vee

V

V'L

Low-level input vollage

-0.5

0.8

V

0

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

V

(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc=5V±S%, Vss=OV, unless olherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Test conditions

Unit
Min

V OH

High-level outpul voltage

IOH=-400,uA

VOL

low-level output voltage

IOL=2.2mA

Icc

Supply current from Vee

All outpuls are high

Typ

Max

2.4

V

0.45

V

100

mA

I'H

High-level input current

VI=VCC

-10

10

J-lA

III

low-level input current

V,=O.45V

-10

10

J-lA

loz

Off-state input current

Vss=OV, V,=O. 45-5. 25V

-10

10

J-lA

C,

Input capacitance

Vcc=Vss, f=lMHz, 25mV rms , Ta=25'C

10

pF

GIIO

Input/output capacitance

Vcc=Vss, f=lMHz, 25mV rms . Ta=25'C

20

pF

4-~

.... 'MITSUBISHI
.... ELE:CTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

TIMING REQUIREMENTS(T a=-20-75'C

, Vcc=5V±5%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise notedJ

I

Limits

Alternative

I

Symbol

Test conditions

Parameter

Symbol

------1----------------r--

Unit

Min

Typ

Max

ns
_tel '- ,-_~IDCk cycle _~me ~~~~~___________ _+-tc-y----____1--------____1--3-2-0____1---_t_-13-5-O_t__---___j
tw ( • I
Clock high pulse width
t.
120
ns
---- .. _ - - - - - t w (,- I
Clock low pulse width
t..
90
ns

_

--.--

_I,

-.!t_. __

-. --.-.-- ..--

.----.----------.---+-----------+-----1----+-------+-------1

_Clock ":etime____
~IOCk fall time

ns
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~----.-____t---------____1---+---t_-2-0-t__---___j
ns
tF
20
lX baud rate

DC

64

kHz

DC

310

kHz

DC

615

Transmitter input clock

16X baud rate

hx

frequency

64X baud rate
~ 1X baud rate

Transmitter input clock low

pulse width

I Rx

15

l,'

te( • I

pulse width
15X, 64X baud rate
tTPO
3
tet. I
- . - -..- . - . - - - .---------.--__+--=------+-----------I------I-----I'-----f--~-~--1
64
kHz
Receiver input clock
1X baud rate
__ fIRRxx---.-------I,
DC
16X baud rate
DC
310
kHz

1

l

I.' frequency

~IRx--'~---'1

64X baud rate
I

I

tW(RPwLl

_

tTPD

1X baud rate

R€C8lver Input clock low

_

tet. )

.

Transmitter input clock high

kHz
te(' I

16X, 64X baud rate

~-,.---~,.------.~.~..

tW(TPWH)

12

pulse Width

-------

15X, 64X baud rate __ ~~ _ _

I 1X baud rate

Receiver mput clock high

12

kHz
tet. I

tet. I
-----------+---+---I-----+---=--'-'--'----j

tRPO

15

tet. )

f-----'-"-.c.....----I

tW(RPWH)

_ _ _ _ _ .""Is" Width _ _ _ _

615

DC

t HPW

1X baud rate

tet. )
I 1~ 6~_balJd rl>t_(j/IJ~ote~

ns ---1
+ ______+ __0---1'---_--+___-+___

tAR _ _ _ _

ns
A~d~es~_hol~me al_te_r_re,,~~CS, C_I_D._l __i_N_o_t_e_3_J_ _--+_tRccA
c. _ _ _ __ + - - - - - - - - - - + - - -0f----L---__+---t---------I

th(R-A)
tW ( RI

Read pulse width

--------.---- -.
tSU(A-W)

250

ns

tAW

0

ns

0

ns

tRR

----.---------- -+------+----------+----+-------+---c-----j

~_~_~=~~_.time_befo~ewr~~ ___________

theW-A)

Address hold time after write

tWA

tw(w)

Write pulse width

tww

--

--_._----_._-------_._.\-----------+----+----+----+-------j
ns

250

- - - - ----.- . -- -----.------- -.---,,----- . - - " . - - - 1--------------+-----+------+---+-----1
~~-W) _

~a~tlJ.tJ..lim_"__beforew~te_______

two
20
ns
-----.------.---- . - - - - - - - - -------1----------+----+-----+----+-----1
t ES
18
tet. )

thl

}

tW(f)

-------

Transmitter Clock & data
10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TxC(16X)

II
Receiver Clock & data
Rx-BIT COUNTER STARTS HERE
Rx D

DATA BIT

START BIT

DATA BIT

RxC(16X)

INTERNAL
SAMPLING
PULSE
tSU(RxD-ISl

•

MITSUBISHI

~ELECTRIC

4-31

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Write Control Cycle (CPU-USART)

\
c/o

I

tSU(A~W)

~v

l"\hIW-A~ ~

tSU(A-W)

tW(W)

~tSU{DQ_W)

~

0 7 -00
(DATA INPUT)

l~hIW-D'i!.

K

VALIb

tPHUw_c)

}
Read Control Cycle (USART-CPU)
tSU(C A}

OSR, CTS

}
\

tSU(A-R)

thIR_A)

/

tSUIA-R)

th{R_A)

C/i)

tWIRl

¥

~DQ)

tPZV(R_DQ)

/IJ

07- DO

(DATA OUTPUT)

4-32

\~

• --MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

VALID

/

\

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Write Data Cycle (CPU--+USART)
heW-A)

SU(A-W)

c/o

t

Ih(WOAi

Isut'owl

tW(W)

tSU(OQ-W)

07 ........ 00
(DATA INPUT)

th(W_DQ)

VALID

>-

II

K

TxRDY

I

Read Date Cycle (USART--+CPU)

tSU(A-R)

c/o

Dr-Do
(DATA OUTPUT)

Rx RDY

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-33

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Transmitter Control & Flag Timing (Async Mode)

c/o

-J

~ l
l ____~-L~------~/
l____- J~ _ _~
~ 0
~L-~~~~
~

\~---

____________________
W_R,-SB~R~K~_____

WR

CTS

TxRDY
(PIN)

TxRDY
(STATUS)

TxEMPTY

TxD
DATA 1
Note 8
Note 9
Note 10

DATA 4

DATA 3

DATA 2

BREAK STATE

Example format = 7 bits/character with parity & 2 stop bits
TxRDY(pin)= 1 -(Transmit-data buffer is emoty) • (TxEN = 1) • (CTS= 0)= 1
TxRDY(status)= 1 -(Transmit-data buffer is emoty)= 1

Receiver Control & Flag Timing (Async Mode)

c/o

=oJ \'-_______'.1--1.-1__________---1....\--L....JI! \.....___'.Lo.--...l-l _ _....J!

Vt

____________________~R~D DATrA__1__________________~R~D DATrA~3________~R~D~A;LLOrD~A~TA~-----------------

WR-RxE WR-RxE

WR-Rrx~E________________~--------------------------~--~ ~------~----------,

BD
(PIN)
DATA 2
LOST
OE
(STATUS)

RxRDY

S

RxD

S

BREAK STATE

Note 11·: Example format = 7 bits/character with parity

4-34

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

S

0123456P~S0123456P ~

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Transmitter Control & Flag Timing (Sync Mode)

o

:=J

c/o

WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
DATA 1 DAT?A_2_________D~AT~A-3----D~ATA?_4----------S,BRK

u

,\

WR
SBRK

WR

DATA~:--------------------

TxRDY
(PIN)

Tx RDY
(STATUS)

TxEMPTY

II

Tx D
MARK
STATE

DATA 1

DATA 2

SYNC
CH 1

SYNC
CH 2

BREAK
STATE

DATA 3 DATA 4

MARK
STATE

DATA 5

SYNC
CH 1

SYNC
CH 2

Note 12: Example format = 5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters.

Receiver Control & Flag Timing (Sync Mode)
INTERNAL

C/O

J

\~

SYNC

EXTERNAL SYNC MODE

MODE

__________________~I~1

L.J
CH 2

WR-ER

WR-EH-Rx E

SYNDET
(PIN)

RD STATUS

r

RD DATA

WR-EH-Rx E

EXTERNAL
SYNC
(INPUT)

INTERNAL
SYNC
(OUTPUT)

--+-----~

SYNDET
(STATUS)
DATA 2
LOST ri---'j

OE
(STATUS)

Rx RDY

RXD

SYNC
CH 1

-

SYNC:: DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 SYNCCH 2 : :
CH 1

EXITS HUNT MODE
SYNDET SET

j

SYNC
CH 2

l CHARACTER
ASSEMBLY BEGINS

EXITS HUNT MODE
SYNDET SET
(STATUS)

Note 13: Example format = 5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters.

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

4-35

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8253P-5 is a programmable general-purpose timer
device developed by using the N-channel silicon-gate EDMOS process. It offers counter and timer functions. in systems using an 8-bit parallel-processing CPU.
The use of the M5L8253P-5 frees the CPU from the execution of looped programs, count-operation programs and
other simple processing involving many repetitive operations, thus contributing to improved system throughputs.
The M5L8253P-5 works on a single power supply, and
both its input and output can be connected to a TTL circuit.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

vee (5V)
23 -WR WRITE INPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

00 -

8

•
•
•
•
•
•

cg~~~~~

Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Clock period: DC-2MHz
3 independent built-in 16-bit down counters
6 counter modes freely assignable for each counter
Binary or decimal counts

RD READ INPUT

21 _

CS ~~~;.SELECT

20 19 -

A,
Ao

18 -

CLK2 CLOCK INPUT

17

CLOCK INPUT ClKO~ 9

FEATURES

22 -

l ADDRESS
r INPUTS

~OUT2 gS~~JiR

16 -GATE2 GATE INPUT

OUTO- 10

15 -ClKI CLOCK INPUT

GATE INPUT GATEO~ 11

14 -GATEl GATE INPUT

(OV) GND

12 _ _ _ _--1"13
-....

Outline

~OUTl g8¥~JfR

24P4

APPLICATION
Delayed-time setting, pulse counting and rate generation in
microcomputers.

FUNCTION
Three independent 16-bit counters allow free programming
based on mode-control instructions from the CPU. When
roughly classified, there are 6 modes (0-5). Mode 0 is mainly used as an interruption timer and event counter, mode I
as a digital one-shot, modes 2 and 3 as rate generators,
mode 4 for a software triggered strobe, and mode 5 for a

hardware triggered strobe. The count can be monitored and
set at any time. The counter operates with either the binary
or BCD system.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT

READ INPUT

CLOCK INPUT

WRITE INPUT

GATE INPUT

CHIP-SELECT INPUT

COUNTER OUTPUT
INTERNAL ~---'
_ _ _ _ _ _ _D_A_T_A :U_S_ _ _ _

4-36

.• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

~

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8253P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS

CONTROL WORD AND INITIAL-VALUE LOADING

Data-Bus Buffer
This 3-state, bidirectional, 8-bit buffer is used to interface
the M5L8253P-5 to the system-side data bus. Transmission
and reception of all the data including control words for
mode designation and values written in, and read from, the
counters are carried out through this buffer.

The function of the M5L8253P-5 depends on the system software. The operational mode of the counters can be specified by writing control words (Ao, Al = 1, 1) into the controlword registers.
The programmer must write out to the M5L8253P-5 the
programmed number of count register bytes (1 or 2) prior to
actually using the selected counter.
Table 2 shows control-word format, which consists of 4
fields. Only the counter selected by the 07 and 0 6 bits of the
control word is set for operation. Bits 0 5 and 04 are used for
specifying operations to read values in the counter and to initialize. Bits 0 3 ~ 01 are used for mode designation, and 00
for specifying binary or BCD counting. When 00 = 0, binary
counting is employed, and any number from 0000 16 to FFFF16
can be loaded into the count register. The counter is
counted down for each clock. The counting of 0000 16 causes
the transmission of a time-out signal from the count-output
pin.
The maximum number of counts is obtained when 0000 16
is set as the initial value. When 00=1, BCD counting is employed, and any number from 000010 to 9999 10 can be loaded
on the counter.
Neither system resetting nor connecting to the power
supply sets the control word to any specific value. Thus to
bring the counters into operation, the above-mentioned control words for mode designation must be given to each counter, and then 1 ~ 2 byte initial counter values must be set.
The following is an example of this programming step.
To designate mode 0 for counter 1 ,with initial value 825316
set by binary count, the following program is used:
MVI
A, 70'6
Control word 70 16
OUT
n,
nl is control-word-register address
MVI
A, 53'6
Low-order 8 bits
OUT
n2 is counter 1 address
MVI
High-order 8 bits
OUT
n2
n2 is counter 1 address
Thus, the program generally has the following sequence:
(ll Control-word output to counter i (i=O, 1,2).
(2) Initialization of low-order 8 counter bits
(3) Initialization of high-order 8 counter bits
The three counters can be executed in any sequence. It is
possible, for instance, to designate the mode of each counter and then load initial values in a different order. Initialization of the counters designated by RL 1 and RL 0 must be
executed in the order of the low-order 8 bits and then the
high-order 8 bits for the counter in question.

Read/Write Logic
The read/write logic accepts control signals (RD, WR) from
the system and generates control signals for each counter. It
is enabled or disabled by the chip-select signal (CS); if CS
is at the high-level the data-bus buffer enters a floating
(high-impedance) state.
Read Input (RD)
The count of the counter designated by address inputs Ao
and Al on the lOW-level is output to the data bus.
Write Input (WR)
Data on the data bus is written in the counter or control word
register designated by address inputs Ao and Al on the lowlevel.
Address Inputs (Ao, A1)
These are used for selecting one of the 3 internal counters
and either of the control-word registers.
Chip-Select Input (CS)
A low-level on this input enables the M5L8253P-5. Changes
in the level of the CS input have no effect on the operation
of the counters.
Control-Word Register
This register stores information required to give instructions
about operational modes and to select binary or BCD counting. Unlike the counters, it allows no reading, only writing.
Counters 0,1 and 2
These counters are identical in operation and independent
of each other. Each is a 16-bit, presettable, down counter,
and has clock-input, gate-input and output pins. The counter
can operate in either binary or BCD using the falling edge of
each clock. The mode of counter operation and the initial
value from which to start counting can be designated by
software. The count can be read by input instruction at any
time, and there is a "read-on-the-fly" function which enables
stable reading by latching each instantaneous count to the
registers by a special counter-latch instruction.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-37

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

Table

Basic Functions

CS

RD

WR

A,

a

1

a

1

a
a

a
a

a

1

a

1

a

1

a

1

1

Data bus-Control-word register

a

a

1

a

a

Data bus-Counter 0

a
a

a
a

1

a

1

Data bus-Counter 1

1

1

a

Data bus-Counter 2

a

a

1

1

1

3-state

1

X

X

X

X

3-state

a

1

1

X

X

3-state

Table

2

Function

"'a"

Data bus-Counter 0

1

Data bus-Counter 1

a

Data bus-Counter 2

Control-Word Format

r--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-

.SC(Select Counter)

,--~~~~~~~~~~~~.

SCl
a

sca
a

a

1

1

a

Select counter 2

1

1

Prohibited combination

Select counter

a

Select counter 1

RL( Read/Load)

RLl

RLa

a
a

a

Counter Latch Command
Read/load low-order 8 bits only

a

Read/load high-order 8 bits only
Read/load low-order 8 bits and then high-order 8 bits

,--------.M(Mode)
Ma
a

ModeO

1

Model

1

a

Mode2

1

1

Mode3

1

a

a

Mode4

1

a

1

ModeS

M2

Ml

a
a

a
a

X
X
~

i · BCaD
I

Binary counter (16 bits)

r-_D~7~;-_D~6-,___D~5__,-_D_4~,-__D~3__r-_D~2~;-_D~'__r-_D~O~ ~___1____~B_in_a~~_-c_o_d_ed__d_eC_i_m_a_lc_o_u_nt_e_r_(4__
de_c_a_d_es_)____________~

I SCl I sca
~

4-38

sc

RLl

--r-~

I RLa

RL

M2

Ml

---I~~~-M

MO

I

BCD
BCD--1

• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8253P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

MODE DEFINITION
Mode 0 (Interrupt on Terminal Count)
Mode set and initialization cause the counter output to go
low-level (see Fig. 1). When the counter is loaded with an
initial value, it will start counting the clock input. When the
terminal count is reached, the output will go high and remain
high until the selected count register is reloaded with the
mode. This mode can be used when the CPU is to be interrupted after a certain period or at the time of counting up.
Fig.1 shows a setting of 4 as the initial value. If gate input
goes low, counting is inhibited for the duration of the lowlevel period.
Reloading of the initial value during count operation will
stop counting by the loading of the first byte and start the
new count by the loading of the second byte.
Mode 1 (Programmable One-Shot)
The gate input functions as a trigger input. A gate-input rising edge causes the generation of low-level one-shot output
with a predetermined clock length starting from the next
clock. Fig. 2 shows an initial setting of 4. While the counter
output is at the low-level (during one-shot), loading of a new
value does not change the one-shot pulse width, which has
already been output. The current count can be read at any
time without affecting the width of the one-shot pulse being
output. This mode permits retriggering.
Mode 2 (Rate Generator)
LOW-level pulses during one clock operation are generated
from the counter output at a rate of one per n clock inputs
(where n is the value initially set for the counter). When a
new value is loaded during the counter operation, it is reflected on the output after the pulses by the current count
have been output. In the example shown in Fig. 3, n is given
as 4 at the outset and is then changed to 3.
In this mode, the gate input provides a reset function.
While it is on the low-level, the output is maintained high;
the counter restarts from the initial value, triggered by a rising gate-input edge. This gate input, therefore, makes
possible external synchronization of the counter by hardware.
After the mode is set, the counter does not start counting
until the rate n is loaded into the count register, with the
counter output remaining at the high-level.
Mode 3 (Square Rate Generator)
This is similar to Mode 2 except that it outputs a square
wave with the half count of the set rate. When the set value
n is odd, the square-wave output will be high for (n 1) 12
clock-input counts and low for (n-1) 12 counts. When a new
rate is reloaded into the count register during its operation, it
is immediately reflected on the count directly following the
output transition (high-to-Iow or low-to-high) of the current
count. Gate-input operations are exactly the same as in
Mode 2. Fig. 4 shows an example of Mode 3 operation.
Mode 4 (Software Triggered Strobe)
After the mode is set, the output will be high. By loading a

number on the counter, however, clock-input counts can be
started and on the terminal count, the output will go low for
one input-clock period and then will go high again. Mode 4
differs from Mode 2 in that pulses are not output repeatedly
with the same set count. The pulse output is delayed one
clock period in Mode 2, as shown in Fig. 5. When a new
value is loaded into the count register during its count operation, it is reflected on the next pulse output without
affecting the current count. The count will be inhibited while
the gate input is low-level.
Mode 5 (Hardware Triggered Strobe)
This is a variation of Mode 1. The gate input provides a trigger function, and the count is started by its rising edge. On
the terminal count, the counter output goes low for on one
clock period and then goes high. As in Mode 1, retriggering
by the gate input is possible. An example of timing in Mode
5 is shown in Fig. 6.
As mentioned above, the gate input plays different roles
according to the mode. The functions are summarized in
Table 3.

Table

3

~

Gate Operations

Low or going low

Rising

High

Mode

0

Enables
counting

Disables counting
(l) Initiates counting
(2) Resets output
after next clock

1

2

(1) Disables counting
(2) Sets output high
immediately

(1) Reloads counter

(2) Initiates counting

Enables
counting

3

(1) Disables counting
(2) Sets output high
immediately

(1) Reloads counter
(2) Initiates coun.ting

Enables
counting

4

Disables counting

5

Enables
counting
Initiates counting

+

• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

4-39

a

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

OUT(GATE="H")
WR

---"L.j

:. L-...J

GATE

:4

OUT

Fig. 1

I
I
I

4

4

I

I

:3
I
I

2

1

0

1

Mode 0

Fig. 4

Mode 3

elK
GATE _ _ _ _ _

r:--::--::--:--------

WR

OUT
OUT
GATE

U

GATE
1 _ _ _ _ _ _--J
OUT _ _ _2_ _

Fig. 2

OUT

Mode 1

Fig. 5

elK

elK

WR

GATE

Mode 4

0
OUT(n=4)
GATE

4

3 13

1

Fig. 3

1

U

OUT

4

1

4

4

3

LJ"

Mode 2

OUT(n=4)

Fig. 6

COUNTER MONITORING
Sometimes the counter must be monitored by reading its
count or using it as an event counter. The M5L8253P-5 offers
the following two methods for count reading:
Read Operation
The count can be read by designating the address of the
counter to be monitored and executing a simple 1/0 read
operation. In order to ensure correct reading of the count, it
is necessary to cause the clock input to pause by external
logic or prevent a change in the count by gate input. An example of a program to read the counter 1 count.is shown below. If RLl, RLO=l, 1 has been specified in the control word,
the first IN instruction enables the low-order 8 bits to be read
and the second IN instruction enables the highorder 8 bits.
IN
n 2 .... n2 is the counter 1 address
MOV
D, A
IN
n2
MOV
E, A
The IN instruction should be executed once or twice by the
RLl and RLO designations in the control-word register.

4-40

LJ

GATE
3

0

Lr-

Mode 5

Read-on-the-Fly Operation
This method makes it possible to read the current count
without affecting the count operation at all. A special counter-latch command is first written in the control-word register. This causes latching of all the instantaneous counts to
the register, allowing retention of stable counts. An example
of a program to execute this operation for counter 2 is given
below.
A, 1000XXXX .... D5 = D4 = 0 designates counter
MVI
latching
OUT
n1 .... n1 is the control-ward-register address
IN
n3 .... n3 is the counter 2 address
MOV
D,A

IN

n3

MOV
E,A
In this example, the IN instruction is executed twice. Due to
the internal logic of the M5L8253P-5 it is absolutely essential
to complete the entire reading procedure. If two bytes are
programmed to be read, then two bytes must be read before
any OUT instruction can be executed to the same counter.

. • ·MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8253P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Parameter

Vee

Power supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Va

Output voltage

Pd

Maximum power dissipation

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

Tstg

Storage temperature range

Conditions

With respect to GND

Ta=25'C

Limits

Unit

-0.5-7

V

-0.5-7

V

-0.5-7

V

1000

rnW

-20-75

'C

-65-150

'C

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Limits

Symbol

----------

Parameter

--

--Vee

Power supply voltage

Vss

Supply voltage (GND)

~-----

_.

Min

Nom

Max

5

5.5

4.5

------

------------------_._-

High-level input voitage

V'L

Low-level input voltage

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

V
-~

0

V'H

Unit

-""

2.2

I

II

V

-------f----Vcc+O.5

V

0.8

V

-0.5

(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V±10%, unless otherwise noted.)
Limits

Symbol

Unit

Test conditions

Parameter

Min

V OH
f--VOL
---I'H

Typ

Max

High-level output voltage

Vss =OV,loH=-400,uA

Low-level output voltage

vss=OV, IOL=2_ 2mA

0.45

V

High-level input current

Vss=OV, V,=5, 5V

±10

J-lA

2.4

V

Low-level input current

Vss=OV, V,=OV

±10

loz

Off-state output current

Vss=OV, VI=O--VCC

±10

lee

Power supply current

I'L

-

J-lA

--

140

J-lA
rnA

VIL =Vss, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrmS, Ta=25'C

10

pF

V'!OL =Vss, 1=1 MHz,25mVrms.T a=25'C

20

pF

--- f----------Vss=OV

- - -

C,

C,iO

Input capacitance

------

Input/output capacitance

-

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

4-41

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

TIMING REQUIREMENTS

(T a=-20~75°C, Vcc= 5 V±10%, Vss= 0 V)

Read cycle
Alternative
Symbol

Parameter

Limits
Unit

Test condition

symbol

Min

Typ

Max

tWCRl

Read pulse width

tRR

300

ns

tSUCA-R)

Address setup time before read

tAR

30

ns

th(R~A)

Address hold time after read

tRA

5

ns

treCCR)

Read recovery time

tRV

1000

ns

CL =150pF

Write cycle
Limits

Alternative

Symbol

Unit

Test condition

Parameter

Min

symbol

Typ

Max

~-~

twU

Clock low pulse width

t PWL

150

tcc. )

Clock cycle time

teLK

tWCGHl

Gate high pulse width

tGW

tW(Gu

Gate low pulse width
Gate setup time before clock
Gate hold time after clock

tW

(1)H)

Typ

Max

ns
ns

~~

tsu(G-

~ )

the. ~G)

DC

380

ns

150

sn

tGL

100

ns

tGS

100

ns

tGH

50

ns

C L =150PF

)
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

(Ta=-20~75'C, Vcc= 5 V±10%, Vss= 0 V)

Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

Limits
Test condition

symbol

Typ

Max
200

ns

100

ns

t ODG

300

ns

too

400

ns

tPZV(R_Q)

Propagation time from read to output

tRO

tPVZ(R_Q)

Propagation time from read to output floating

tOF

tpxv(G_Q)

Propagation time from gate to output

t pxv ( 1>_0)

Propagation time from clock to output

4-42

Unit
Min

.MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

-25
C L =150pF

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8253P-5
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER

TIMING DIAGRAMS

(Reference Voltage: High=2.2V, low=O.8V)

Read Cycle
A" Ao, CS

~

K
thCA_A)

tSUCA_R)

~

~~

:1

tWCRl

f--

9

11

'\Sk

~
tPZV(R_Q}

~
tPVZ(R_Q)

Write Cycle
A" Ao, CS

)(

~~

II

~

tSUCA-wl

I
¥
I

tW(W)

I

~ft'

0,-00

K
t hew- DJ

tSU(D-W)

(recov:~

::e_)__________\""_ _ _- ' } ""'"' ".".'

/r---------

\ ' -_ _ _....

Clock and Gate Cycle
tW(GU

GATE

N

/
~

I.
OUT

1\

thl; -GI

tSU(G-f)

ClK

.J

y

tSU(G-¢ )

\
tel;)

JI
tw{{>U

r\

J
X

I

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

t w (1)Hl

l

th(;-G)

V
tpxv(G-Q)

l1-

4-43

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

DESCRIPTION

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

This is a family of general-purpose programmable input/
output devices designed for use with an 8-bit/16-bit parallel
CPU as input/output ports. Device is fabricated using Nchannel silicon-gate ED-MOS technology for a single supply
voltage. They are simple input and output interfaces for TTL
circuits, having 24 input/output pins which correspond to
three 8-bit input/output ports.

INPUT/OUTPUT ( : : : :
PORT A PA,-

INPUT/OUTPUT
PORT A

PAoREAD INPUT RD ~
CHIP

S~~~~~ CS~

35

~ RESET RESET INPUT

(OV) GND
PORT ADDRESS { A, ~
INPUTS Ao~

FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•

Single 5V supply voltage
TTL-compatible
Darlington drive capability
24 programmable I/O pins
Direct bit set/reset capability

PC,-

10

BI·DIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

INPUT/OUTPUT
PORT C

APPLICATION
Input/output ports for MELPS85 microprocessor

FUNCTION
These PPls have 24 input/output pins which may be individually programmed in two 12-bit groups A and B with
mode control commands from a CPU. They are used in three
major modes of operation, mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2.
Operating in mode 0 , each group of 12 pins may be programmed in sets of 4 to be inputs or outputs. In mode 1, ihe 24
1/0 terminals may be programmed in two 12-bit groups,
group A and group B. Each group contains one 8-bit data
port, which may be programmed to serve as input or output,
and one 4-bit control port used for handshaking and interrupt
control signals. Mode 2 is used with group A only, as one 8-

Outline

40P4

bit bidirectional bus port and one 5-bit control port. Bit set!
reset is controlled by CPU. A high-level reset input (RESET)
clears the control register, and all ports are set to the input
mode (high-impedance state).

BLOCK DIAGRAM
1------------------.
I

READ INPUT RD
WRITE INPUT WR
ADDRESS
INPUTS

1Al

6

t=:
8

Ao 9

Sy~~St CS

~EAD/WRITE
CONTROL
LOGIC

i

DATA BUS

(5V) Vee

28~
29~
30~ DATA BUS

31)-3
4)--

t

(OV) GND 7

4-44

GR~UP

a
a

I

!--

--;;.

...,.

~~

4

I

),l~_~r-....I.-,
(?:
0,
0,
0,
03
02
0,
Do

a

CONTROL

1

6

GR~UP

--;..

X

RESET INPUT RESET ~
CHIP

3

~'

B

a-BIT
INTERNAL
DATA BUS

4

GROUP
B
CONTROL

PAs

~~:

1
2
3
4

PA3 PORT A
PA2
PA,
PAo

INPUT/OUTPUT

1 PC,
DPC,
1 PC,
~ PC, INPUT/OUTPUT

PC3 PORT C

GROUP
PORT CB
- FEAST SIGNIFI

-!1'iii PC,
-'15> PC,
L=t~:;:·CA:N:T:4:B:IT:S)~======~1~PCO

, - - - - - - - - 1 - - 1L

I

GROUP A I
PORT C
(MOST SIGNIFI.:·
CANT 4 BITS)

PA,

40

4 ...........
_I

~+-----r----~

BUFFER

_I

PORT A
(a-BIT)

3

a

a

PB,

--;;.

GROUP
B
PORT B
(B-BIT)

a

c_____________________________

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

PB,
PB,
PB, INPUT/OUTPUT
2 PB3 PORT B
PB2
~

8 PBo

-.J

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL825SAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Table

1

Basic Operations

RD (Read) Input
At low-level, the status or the data at the port is transferred
to the CPU from the PPI. In essence, it allows the CPU to
read data from the PPI.

A,

AJ

CS

RD

WR

0

0

0

0

1

Data bus - Port A

Operation

0

1

0

0

1

Data bus - Port B

WR (Write) Input

1

0

0

0

1

Data bus - Port C

At low-level, the data or control words are transferred from
the CPU and written in the PPI.

0

0

0

1

0

Port A - Data bus

0

1

0

1

0

Port B - Data bus

1

0

0

1

0

Port C - Data bus

1

1

0

1

0

Control register - Data bus

X

X

1

X

X

Data bus is in high-impedance state

1

1

0

0

1

illegal condition

Ao, A1 (Port address) Input
These input signals are used to select one of the three
ports: port A, port B, and port C, or the control register. They
are normally connected to the least significant two bits of the
address bus.

RESET (Reset) Input
At high-level, the control register is cleared. Then all ports
are set to the input mode (high-impedance state).

CS (Chip-Select) Input
At low-level, the communication between the PPI and the
CPU is enabled. While at high-level, the data bus is kept in
the high-impedance state, so that commands from the CPU
are ignored. Then the previous data is kept at the output
port.

Where, "0" indicates low level
"1" indicates high-level

Bit Set/Reset
When port C is used as an output port, anyone bit of the
eight bits can be set (high) or reset (low) by a control word
from the CPU. This bit set/reset can be operated in the
same way as the mode set, but the control word format is
different. This operation is also used for INTE set/reset in
mode 1 and mode 2 .

ReadIWrite Control Logic
The function of this block is to control transfers of both data
and control words. It accepts the address signals (Ao, A"
CS), I/O control signals (RD, WR) and RESET signal, and
then issues commands to both of the control groups in the
PPI.

Bit setlreset flag

I

Active -

I

a

Don't care

Bit selection code

Data Bus Buffer

Port C
Bit selected

This three-state, bidirectional, eight-bit buffer is used to
transfer the data when an input or output instruction is executed by the CPU. Control words and status information are
also transferred through the data bus buffer.

PC7
PC6

03 02 0,

1 1 1
1 1 0

PCs

1 0

PC,

1
0
1
0
1
0 0

Group A and Group B Control

PC3

Accepting commands from the read/write control logic, the
control blocks (Group A, Group B) receive 8-bit control
words from the internal data bus and issue the proper commands for the associated ports. Control group A is associated with port A and the four high-order bits of port C. Control group B is associated with port B and the four low-order
bits of port C. The control register, which stores control
words, can only be written into.

PC2
PC,

1 0
0 1
0 1
0 0

PCo

0

jsetlreset code
Set (high)
10710610510,1031021011001

1

Reset (low) = 0

I

Fig. 1 Control word format for port C set/reset

Port A, Port B and Port C
The PPI contains three 8-bit ports whose modes and input/
output settings are programmed by the system software.
Port A has an output latch/buffer and an input latch. Port
B has an I/O latch/buffer and ,!n input buffer. Port C has an
output latch/buffer and an input buffer. Port C can be divided into two 4-bit ports which can be used as ports for
control signals for port A and port B.
The basic operations are shown in Table 1.

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

4-45

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

BASIC OPERATING MODES
The PPI can operate in anyone
modes.
Mode 0: Basic input/output
Mode 1: Strobed input/output
Mode 2: Bidirectional bus
The mode of both group A and
independently. The control word
shown in Fig. 2.

of three selected basic
(group A, group B)
(group A, group B)
(group A only)
group B can be selected
format for mode set is

0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do

0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do

11101010101011101

11101010101011111

Mode set flag

I

Active

I

PA,~PAo

I

=1

Group A mode set

0:
1.

0, 0
0, 1
= 1, X

Mode
0" 05 _
Mode
0" 05 Mode 2: 0" 05

I
I

Por! A input/output set

I

I
0
=1
I
1= 1
Ild}~::·:m;'
I
Ir= I 0 I

D, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do

0, D, 05 0, 03 D, 01 Do

11101010111010101

11101010111010111

0
=1

output Input

' - ' _ ' _ Port C (hlgh·order four bits) input/output set
output input

...'

Mode

PA,~PAo

0, D, 05 0, 0 3 02 01 Do

0, 0, 05 0, 03 02 01 Do

11101010111011101

\1101010111011111

Port B input/output set
Port C (Iow·order four bits) input/output set

,--'--.,

output
10,10,10510,1031021011001. input

=1

•

0, 0, 05 0, 03 02 01 Do

Fig. 2

1.

11101011101010101

Control word format for mode set

0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do

\1101011101010111

Mode 0 (Basic Input/Output)

This functional configuration provides simple input and output operations for each of the three ports. No "handshaking"
is required; data is simply written in, or read from, the specified port. Output data from the CPU to the port can be held,
but input data from the port to the CPU cannot be held. Any
one of the 8-bit ports and 4-bit ports can be used as an input
port or an output port. The diagrams following show the
basic input/output operating modes.

07 06 05 D4 03 02 01 Do

07 06 Os D4 03 D2 0, Do

11101011101011101

11101011101011111

PA,~PAo

0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do

0, 0, 05 D, 03 0, 0, Do

11101011111010101

11101011111010111

PA,~PAo

4-46

0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do

0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do

0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 0, Do

0, 0, 05 0, 0 3 0, 01 Do

11101010101010101

11101010101010111

11 10 10 1111 I 01110 1

11101011111011111

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

MODE 1 (PORT B)

8
OBFa
ACKa

OBF--+--'"'\

INTRa

ACK

--+----+-----'"'\

INTR
CONTROL WORD

CONTROL WORD
D, De D5 D, D, D, D, Do

111xlxlxlxll1olxl

Mode 1 output example

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _J

When INTE is low-level. then the output of INTR is
aways low-level.

Fig. 6 Timing diagram

OBFA

STB.

RD

ACKA

IBFA

INTRA

INTRA

1/0

1/0

STBa
PC,

IBFa

PCo

INTRa

PORT A (STROBED OUTPUT)
PORT B (STROBED INPUT)

(Nme2)

OUTPUT----~~-----------------------

Nme 2:

O=OUTPUT

Fig. 5

~_~

PORT----~',_----------­

OBFa

WR

ACK a
PORT A (STROBED INPUT)
PORT B (STROBED OUTPUT)

PCo

INTRa

CONTROL WORD

O=OUTPUT

Fig. 7

Mode 1 port A and port B 1/0 example

Fig. 8

. • . MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

Mode 1 port A and port B 1/0 example

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

3.

Mode 2 (Strobed Bidirectional Bus Input!
Output)

Mode 2 can provide bidirectional operations, using one 8-bit
bus for communicating with terminal units. Mode 2 is only
valid with group A and uses one 8-bit bidirectional bus port
(port A) and a 5-bit control port (high-order five bits of port
C). The bus port (port A) has two internal registers, one for
input and the other for output. On the other hand, the control
port (port C) is used for communicating control signals and
bus-status signals. These control signals are similar to mode
1 and can also be used to control interruption of the CPU.
When group A is programmed as mode 2, group B can be
programmed independently as mode 0 or mode 1. When
group A is in mode 2, the following five control signals can
be used.

IBF

OBF (Output Buffer Full Flag Output)
The OBF output will go low-level to indicate that the CPU
has sent data to the internal register of port A. This signal
lets the terminal units know that the data is ready for transfer
from the CPU. When this occurs, port A remains in the floating (high-impedance) state.

ACK (Acknowledge Input)

DATA FROM
TERMINAL UNIT

DATA FROM
CPU

-------------(::::~_(::::~-----

PORTA

Fig. 9

Mode 2 timing diagram

Note 3:

INTR=IBF' MASK, STB' RD

+ OBF' MASK· ACK' WR

A low-level ACK input will cause the data of the internal register to be transferred to port A. For a high-level ACK input,
the output buffer will be in the floating (high-impedance)
state.

STB (Strobe Input)
When the STB input is low-level, the data from terminal units
will be held in the internal register, and the data will be sent
to the system data bus with an RD signal to the PPI.

IBF (Input Buffer Full Flag Output)
When data from terminal units is held on the internal register, IBF will be high level.

INTR (Interrupt Request Output)
This output is used to interrupt the CPU and its operations
the same as in mode 1. There are two interrupt enable flags
that correspond to INTEA for mode 1 output and mode 1
input.
INTE, is used in generating INTR signals in combination
with OBF and ACK. INTE, is controlled by bit setting of PCs.
INTE2 is used in generating INTR signals in combination
with IBF and STB. INTE2 is controlled by bit setting of PC4.
Fig. 9 shows the timing diagram of mode 2, and Fig. 10 is
an example of mode 2 operation.

I/O
IBFA STB A ACK A OBFA I/O INTRA
CONTROL WORD

0, 0, 05 0, 03 02 0, Do

Ll I ll x l x lxll/011/011/01

I

L--_ _

PC2-PCO
1 =INPUT
O=OUTPUT

L--_ _ _ _ _

PORT B
1 =INPUT
O=OUTPUT
GROUP B MODE

'-----____ a =MOOE a
1 =MOOEl

Fig. 10

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

An example of mode 2 operation

4-49

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

4.

Control Signal Read

Table

In mode 1 or mode 2 when using port C as a control port, by
CPU execution of an IN instruction, each control signal and
bus status from port C can be read.

Read-out control sIgnals

~
Mode

5. Control Word Tables

Mode 1, input

Control word formats and operation details for mode 0, mode
1, mode 2 and set/reset control of port C are given in Tables
3, 4, 5 and 6, respectively.
Table

2

Ds

D7

D6

I/O

I/O

OBFA INTE,

D3

Da

D,

Dz

IBFA INTEA INTRA INTEs IBFs INTRs

Model. output OBFA INTEA
Mode 2

D.

I/O

I/O

INTRA INTEs OBFs INTRs

IBFA INTEz INTRA

By group B mode

3

Mode 0 control words

D7

D6

D5

D,

D3

D2

D,

Do

Hexadecimal

Port A

Port C (high order 4 bits)

Port C (low order 4 bits)

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

80

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

81

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

82

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

1

0

a

0

a

0

1

1

83

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

1

0

0

0

1

0

a

0

88

OUT

IN

OUT

OUT

Port B

1

0

a

0

1

0

0

1

89

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

8A

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

8B

OUT

IN

IN

IN

1

0

0

1

0

90

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

1

0

0

1

1

0

a

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

a 0 0
a 0 0
a 0 1
a a 1
1
a a
1
a a

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

a

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

91

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

0

92

IN

OUT

OUT

IN

1

93

IN

OUT

IN

IN

0

98

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

1

99

IN

IN

IN

OUT

0

9A

IN

IN

OUT

IN

9B

IN

IN

IN

IN

Note 4:

OUT indicates output port, and IN indicates input port.

Table

4

Mode 1 control words
Control words

D7 D6 D5 D, D3 D2 D,

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

a

1

0

1

0

a

1

0

0

1

0
0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

Do

a x

Port C

Port A
decimal

A4
A5
A6

0

1

1

X

1

1

0

X

1

1

1

X

0

1

a

X

1

X

A7

Note 5:
6:

0

1

1

PC6

OUT

-OBFA

-ACKA

OUT

-o,BFA

OUT

OUT

AC
AD

1

1

1

0

AF

1

1

1

PortC

PCs

B5
B6
B7

PCz

PC,

PCa

OUT

INTRA

-ACK s

-OBFa

INTRs

OUT

-ACKA

OUT

INTRA

-STBs

IBFs

INTRs

IN

-OBFA

-ACKA

IN

INTRA

ACK s

OBFs

INTRa

OUT

-OBFA

-ACKA

IN

INTRA

-STBa

IBFs

INTRa

IN

IN

OUT

IBFA

-STBA

INTRA

ACKs

-OBFa

INTRa

OUT

IN

OUT

IBFA

-STBA

INTRA

-STBs

IBFs

INTRs

IN

IN

IN

IBFA

-STBA

INTRA

-ACK s

-OBFa

INTRa

OUT

IN

IN

IBFA

-STBA

INTRA

-STBa

IBFa

INTRa

IN

BC
X

BE
X

BF

Port B

PC3

PC.

B4

BD
1

PC7

AE

0

Group B

Group A

Hexa-

4-50

Group B

Group A

Control words

Mode of group A and group B can be programmed independently.
It is not necessary for both group A and group B to be in mode 1.

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

~--

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

Table

5

Mode 2 control words

D7 DB Ds D, D3 D2 D,

Group B

Group A

Control words

Do

Port C

Hexadecimal

PortC
Port 8

Port A

(Ex)

PC 7

PC 6

PCs

PC,

PC 3

PC2

PC,

I

I

PCa

1

1

X

X

X

0

0

0

CO

bus

OBF A

=-- IBFA
ACKA

STBA

INTRA

OUT

--OUT

1

1

X

X

X

0

0

1

C1

Bidirectional

OBFA

ACK A

IBFA

STBA

INTRA

IN

OUT

1

1

X

X

X

0

1

0

C2

Bidirectional

bus

OBFA

ACKA

IBFA

STBA

INTRA

OUT

IN

1

1

X

X

X

0

1

1

Bidirectional

OBF A

ACKA

IBFA

1

1

X

X

X

1

----0 X

C3

1

1

X

X

X

1

1

Table

6

X

C4
C6

Bidirectional

bus

=-- r - -

bus

OBFA

INTRA
1----------- - - -------IBFAACKA
STBA
INTRA

Bidirectional

OBF A

ACK;

bus

STBA

IN

IN

ACKB j OBFB jlNTRB

OUT

STBB

~.----

Bidirectional

bus

IBFA

STBA

INTRA

I

IBFB

IINTRB

IN

Port C set/reset control words
PortC

Control words

D, D6 D5 D, D, D2 D,

Do

Hexadecimal

0

X

0

00

0
0

X

X

0

0

0

X

X

X. 0

0

0

1

01

X

X

X

0

0

1

0

02

0

X

X

X

0

0

1

1

03

0

X

X

X

0

1

0

0

04

0

X

X

X

0

1

0

1

05

0

X

X

X

0

1

1

0

06

PC 7

PC 6

PCs

PC,

Remarks

PC,

PC2

PC,

PCa

--

0

--

1

---

--

--

0
1
----

0

INTEB set/reset for mode 1 input

1

INTEB set/reset for mode 1 output

0

X

X

X

0

1

1

1

07

0

X

X

X

1

0

0

0

08

0

INTEA set/reset for mode 1 input

0

X

X

X

1

0

0

1

09

1

INTE2 set/reset for mode 2

0

X

X

X

1

0

1

0

OA

1

0

0

X

X

X

1

0

1

1

OB

0

X

X

X

1

1

0

0

OC

0

INTEA set/reset for mode 1 output

0

X

X

X

1

1

0

1

OD

1

INTEl set/reset for mode 2

0

X

X

X

1

1

1

0

OE

0

0

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

OF

1

Note 7:
8:

--

0

1

The terminais of port C should be programmed for the output mode, before the bit set/reset operation is executed.
Also used for controlling the interrupt enabie flag(INTE)

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-51

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Parameter

Vee

Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Vo

Output voltage

Pd

Power dissipation

Topr
Tstg

Operating free-air temperature range

Conditions

With respect to GND

Ta=25'C

Storage temperature range

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol

Min

Nom

Max

5

5.25

Supply voltage

GND

Supply voltage

V ,H

High-level input voltage

2

Vee

V

V ,L

Low-level input voltage

-0.5

0.8

V

Symbol

4.75

V

1000

mW

-20-75
65 150

°C
°C

V

(T a=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, GND= 0 V, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Test conditions
Data bus

High-level output voltage

V

-0.5-7

V

0

Parameter

V OH

V

-0.5-7

Unit

Vee

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit

(T a =-20-75°C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Parameter

limits
-0.5-7

Port
Data bus

GND=OV

Min
IOH=-400",A
IOH=-200"A

GND=OV

Typ

Max

2.4

Unit
V

IOL=2.5mA

I

VOL

Low-level output voltage

10H

High-level output current (NoteIO)

GND=OV, VOH=1. 5V, R'XT=750n

Ice

Supply current from Vee

GND=OV

I'H
III

High-level input current

GND=OV, V,=5. 25V

Low-level input current

GND=OV, V,=OV

±1O

loz

Off-state output current

GND=OV, V,=O-5. 25V

±10

mA
mA
J.lA
J.lA
J.lA

Cj

Input capacitance

VIL=GND, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms Ta=25°C

10

pF

Cilo

Input/output terminal capacitance

VI/DL =GND, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms Ta=25'C

20

pF

Note

9:

10:

Port

10L=1. 7mA
-1

0.45
-4
120
±10

V

Current flowing into an IC is positive: out is negative.
It is valid only for any 8 input/output pins of PB and PC.

TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol

(Ta =-20-75'(, Vcc=5V±5%, GND=OV, unless otherwise noted)

Prameter

Alternative

symbol

Limits
Test conditions
Min

Typ

Max

Unit

tW(R)

Read pulse width

tRR

300

ns

tSU(PE-R)

Peripheral setup time before read

t,R

0

ns

th(R-PE)

Peripheral hold time after read

tHR

0

ns

tSU(A-R)

Address setup time before read

tAR

0

ns

thCR-A)

Address hold time after read

tRA

0

ns

tw(w)

Write pulse width

tww

300

ns

tSU(DQ-W)

Data setup time before write

tow

100

ns

'th(W-DO)

Data hold time after write

two

30

ns

tSU(A-W)

Address setup time before write

tAW

0

ns

thCW_A)

Address hold time after write

twA

20

ns

tW(ACK)

Acknowledge pulse width

tAK

300

ns

tW(STS)

Strobe pulse width

tST

500

ns

tSU(PE-STB)

Peripheral setup time before strobe

t ps

0

ns

th(sT8-PE)

Peripheral hold time after strobe

t pH

180

ns

tC(RW)

Read/write cycle time

tRV

850

ns

4-52

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

(Ta =-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative

Symbol
---

Limits

Parameter

- f-

Test conditions

symbol
---

tPZV(R-DQ)

Propagation time from read to data output

tRO

tPVZ(R-OQ)

Propagation time from read to data floating (Notel 1)

tOF

Propagation time from write to output

tWB

_.-

-----.---~

f---~M;;;-r-TYP1=~

Unit

200

----ns

100

ns

350

ns

I-10

tPHUW_PE)
tPLH(W_PE)
---~-,--.------.--~~--

_.

Propagation time from strobe to ISF flag

~~-18F)

---,-.-~

~~T8-INTR)

Propagation time from strobe to interrupt

=-:0;~

Propagation time from read to interrupt

tPHL(R-IBF)

Propagation time from read to ISF flag

tPHUW-INTR)

Propagation time from write to interrupt

tPHUW-OBF)

Propagation time from write to OBF flag

IplH(ACK-OBF)

Propagation time from acknowledge to OBF flag
Propagation time from acknowledge to interrupt

tPZV{ACK_PE)

Propagation time from acknowledge to data output

tPVZ(ACK-PE)

~-tWOB

-

tAOS
tAIT

- - f--tAD

Propagation time from acknowledge to data floating (Note 11 )

Test conditions are not applied
A.C Testing waveform
Input pulse level
Input pulse rise time
Input pulse fall time
Reference level input
output

_.-

-"-

0.45-2.4V
20ns
20ns
V'H=2V, VIL =0. SV
VoH=2V, VOL =0. BV

t KO

-ns
300
------300
ns
- _.. _- 1---- r-------I-~
400
ns
f---- f----. -----300
ns
--,---

tSIT

ttT

-

tPLH(ACK-INTA)

Note 11
12 .

-

---I

I
~--I
- - - I : - B -~

- - - - _ . _ - - , , - _..

tPHL(R-INTR)

---,

CL =150pF

~--------

-'"--~--

r--r-

f---

I
I

i

2.4
0.45

i

650

f-----

350

~

I

--

850
-----

--------

350
-~

300
20

250

ns

1-----ns

--

ns

_._--

ns
--------ns
-ns

""'12
2Y-A...O",.S,--_O"",,,,-s.A..

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

4-53

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

TIMING DIAGRAM
Data Bus Read Operation

w(Rl

.V

~,

-' ~

~
CS, Ao, A,

~

~

:K

X~

-"or

tPVZ(R_DQ)

tPZV(R_OQ)

ff

~

~:

~

.If

Data Bus Write Operation

Ihlw-A)

CS, Ao, A,
tSU(OQ-W)

Do-D,

ModeO Port Input

PORT INPUT

ModeO, 1 Port Output

w(w)

'\",

,:.1

ftPHL(W-PE)
tPLH(W-PE)

~

PORT OUTPUT

4-54

• MITSUBIS.HI
;"ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

Mode1 Strobed Input

tW(STsl

\ <-

_V

tPlH(STS-IBF2.J

-I

\

IBF

tPHLtR_IBF}

(
.~

\

~

tPHL(R-INTA)

tPlH(STB-INTR]1

-I

~

\~

INTR

II

th(STB-PE)
tSU(PE-STB)

PORT INPUT

~

~\\

J'--

-'

It-

""~//

Mode1 Strobed Output
tw(w)

tPLH(ACK-OBF)

tPLH(ACK-INTR)

INTR

tPHL(W-PE)

tPlH(W-PE)

PORT OUTPUT

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-55

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL825SAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

Mode2 Bidirectional
~

l~-

'\

tPHLCW-OBF)

\

\

J
tpLH(ACK-OBF)

INTR

tW(ACK)

~

\ ~/y
tW(STS)

f-

\r
tPLH(STB-IBF)

-Y
~

..,fIBF

--'
tPLH(R_IBF)

~

--.'th(STB-PE)
tSU(PE-STB)

PORT A

,~//

~

Note 13: INTR=IBF' MASK· STB • RD

4-56

I7J

~\\

/h

\\~

tPZV{ACK-PE)

~

\\).

+ OBF • MASK· ACK' WR

• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

tPVZ(ACK-PE)

~

~~\\
..., ~//

~

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

Circuit Examples for Applications
1.

Mode 0

An example of a circuit for an application using mode
shown in Fig. 11.

a is

t
PA7
PORT A

\

RESET

1r

RESET

OUT

PAD
RD

RD

WR

WR

II

RESET IN
PC7
PORT C

\
PC,

PORT C

CS

AQ, Al
PPI
M5L8255AP-5
PC3

ADDRESS

loiM

DECODER

CPU
M5L8085AF

\
PCo
ALE
PB7

PORT B

\
PSo

Fig. 11

AD7

D7

\

\

Do

ADo

Circuit example for an application using mode O.

In this example, the PPI is in mode 0, and the control
word should be 10010000 (90,6).

MVI

A,90#

OUT
03#
The PPI Will be initialized by executing the above two instructions.
Then, for example, to read data from port A and to output
data to port Band C, the following three instructions can be
used.

CPU A register ~ Port A
Port B ~ A register
01 #
MVI
A, 01 # Bit-setting control word for PCa
Outputting to control address
OUT
03#
(CS = "0", A, = Aa = "1")
The other bits of port C, in this case, are not affected.

IN

00#

OUT

IN
00# CPU A register ~ Port A
OUT
01 # Port B ~ A register
OUT
02 # Port C ~ A register
After setting the mode, each port operates as a normal port.
After setting the mode, as shown in Fig. 11, to read data
from port A, to output to port B, and to set the first bit of port
C "1 ", the following four instructions can be used.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-57

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

2.

Mode 1

The actual program for the circuit of Fig. 12 is as follows:

An example of a circuit for an application using mode 1 is
shown in Fig. 12.

FROM
FROM
FROM
FROM

INPUT{
DATA

ADDRESS Al
ADDRESS Ao
DECODER
CPU

1

MVI

A,BO#

OUT
MVI
OUT
EI
HLT

03#
A,09#
03#

Control word is 1011 0000, port A is
the mode 1 input and the others are
output
Outputting to the control address
PC 4 bit-set 00001001
Outputting to the control address
Interrupt enable
Halt

If the data has been set in a terminal unit, and the
strobe signal has been input, then the data will be latched in
port A and the CPU RST7.5 goes high-level. In the case of
Fig. 11, a jump to 003C16 is executed to continue the program as follows:

TO DATA

D,
PC,

D,

003C'6 IN

;SUS

D6
PBo-P87

EI

D7

RET
~~-~~~~-

Fig. 12

CPU
TO RST7.5
(INTERRUPT INPUT)

A circuit for an application using mode 1

Transferring data from a terminal unit to port A and sending a strobe signal to PC 4 will hold the data in the internal
latch of the PPI, and PC5 (IBF input buffer full flag) is set to
"1" If a bit-set of PC 4 has been executed in advance, the
CPU can be interrupted by the INTR signal of PC3 when the
input data is latched in the PPI. In this way, port A becomes
an interrupting port; and at the same time, port B can select
its mode independently.

4-58

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

00# CPU register A +- Port A
PC3 interrupt signal becomes low-level

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8255AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

3.

Mode 2

4. When the slave CPU senses that OBF has become low-

An example of a circuit for an application using mode 2 is
shown in Fig. 13.
In Fig. 13, the data bus of the slave system is connected
with the corresponding PPI A bit of the master station. The
input port consists of a three-state buffer and gate B which
allow the slave CPU to read flag outputs (IBF, OBF) of the
PPI as data.
When the following instruction is executed in this example, the action is as described:
IN 01 # (reading in from 01 16 input port)
The data which is made up of the least significant bit
(Do), the OBF (output buffer full flag output) and the next
least significant bit (D 1) , the IBF (input buffer full flad
output)will be read into the slave CPU.
When the following instruction is executed, the action is
as described:
IN 00# (reading in from 00 16 input port)
ACK (PC6) of the PPI becomes low-level by gate C,
and the contents of the port A output latch will be read into
the slave CPU.
When the following instruction is executed, the action is
as described:
OUT 00# (writing out to 0016 output port)
STB (PC4) of the PPI becomes low-level by gate D, then
the contents of the slave CPU register A will be written into
the port A input latch of the PPI.
Actual operations are as follows:
1. PPI is set in mode 2 by the master CPU (03 address).
2. The master CPU writes the data, which is transferred to
the slave CPU, into port A of the PPI (in turn, OBF becomes low-Ievell.
3. The slave CPU continues to read the state of flags (OBF
and IBF) as data while OBF is high-level (i.e. no datd
from the master CPU).

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

level, the slave CPU starts to read the data from 00 16
(Which is the input address for the preceding data)
which is in the output latch of port A (in turn, OBF returns
to high-level).
During this period, the master CPU reads the status flags
(reading in from 02 of port C) and checks the states of
both the bit 7 (bBF) and bit 5 (IBF). If OBF is low-level,
it indicates that the slave CPU has not yet received the
data; so the maser does not write new data. If OBF is
high-level, the master CPU writes the next data.
When data is to be transferred to the master CPU, the
contents of the slave CPU A register will be transmited to
the port input latch of the PPI. The slave CPU transfers
the data to address 00 16 (in turn, the IBF becomes highlevel).
The master CPU transfers data to port C and then checks
the status flag. If the input latch contains data from the
slave CPU, which is indicated by IBF having a high-level
output, the data is read from port (00 16 ) (in turn, the IBF
returns to low-level).
The slave CPU reads the status flag from 01 16 to determine if IBF has returned to low-level. If it has not, new
data will not be written as long as IBF is high-level.
In this way, data can be exchanged. Since there are two
sets of independent registers, input latch and output
latch, used by port A of the PPI, it is not necessary to
alternate input/output transfers.

A program which has operating functions as described
above, is explained as follows.
The operation, in mode 2, for group A of the PPI is considered here.

PPI MODE SET ADDRESS

0316

!-.':m,-,"1');:---~::":":~~=-C::"'--'~"-'--Fo=-----; ~D7

10iM

ADo
ALE

MASTER
CPU

SLAVE
CPU

ALE

10iNi
0,
RD~----~~RD

WR

MASTER SYSTEM

Fig. 13

'----------1 RD

PPI

L-_ _ _ _ _--j

WR

WR

SLAVE SYSTEM

TO CPU
INT INPUT

A circuit for an application using mode 2

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

4-59

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

1. Master CPU subroutine for transmitting data to the slave
CPU.

2. Subroutine for receiving data from the slave CPU.

Program example

Program example

MIN

IN

02#

02#

ANI

20#

80#

JZ

MIN

JNZ

OBF

IN

00#

POP

PSW

RET

OUT

00#

MOUT

PUSH

PSW

OBF

IN
ANI

RET

R8

R8

3. Slave CPU subroutine for transmitting data to the master
CPU.

4. Subroutine for receiving data from the master CPU.

Program example

Program example

SOUT

PUSH

PSW

IN

01#

IBF

IN

01

#

ANI

01

SIN

ANI

02#

JNZ

SIN

JZ

IBF

IN

00#

POP

PSW

RET

OUT

00#

RET

RET

4-60

#

RET

• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE

4. Address Decoding
Address decoding with multiple PPI units is shown in Figs.
14 and 15. These are functionally equal.
The same address data is output to both the upper and
lower 8-bit address bus with the execution of IN or OUT instruction by the CPU.

5. PPI Initialization
It is advisable to rest the PPI with a system initial reset and
to select the mode at the beginning of a system program.
The initial state of the PPI used as an output port is shown in
Fig. 16.

POWER
SUPPLY Vee

M74LS373P

r---

CPU
M5L8085AP

A7
A,

RESET
SIGNAL

r-

A5----··~

AD7

\
ADo

~

101M

Ao

TO
ADDRESS
BUS

ALE~

j

PORT

OUTPUT PORT OUTPUT ="1··

UNSTA~
FLOATING
(INPUT MODE)

Fig. 16

r

Note 14:

B C E2 E:/
'---.,--J M74LS138P
TO PORT ADDRESS INPUT E, 0 1
6 7
Ao AND Al OF EACH PPI

r

~
:
SELECTING MODE AT THE
:

r-

A4
A3
A2
A,
E Oc

~ OV

II

PPI initialization
Period of reset pulse must be at least 50"s during or after power on. Subsequent reset pulse can be 500ns
minimum.

n-n

~

TO THE CHIP SELECT INPUT CS OF
EACH PPI

Fig. 14

PPI address decoding (case 1)

CPU
M5L8085AP
A'5 fA'4
Al3
A12
All
AID
Ag

Aa
101M

I

Jl

TO PORT ADDRESS INPUT
Ao AND A, OF EACH PPI

I

TO
ADDRESS
BUS

I
I
J.
IABCE2E31
M74LS138P
E, 0 1
6 7

lrr- orr

~

TO THE CHIP SELECT INPUT CS OF
EACH PPI

Fig. 15

PPI address decoding (case 2)

.• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-61

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8257P-5 is a programmable, 4-channel direct memory access (DMA) controller. It is produced using the Nch'annel silicon-gate ED-MaS process and is specifically
designed to simplify data transfer at high speeds for microcomputer systems.
The LSI operates on a single 5V power supply.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

INPuif8u~~t9

INPUV?Os;.n~

1/'oR ADDRESS
OUTPUTS

I/OW-

MEMOR6u~~t9 MEMR ~

MEMOR'S~~8~

MEMW

~

4-7
4

TERMINAL
COUNT
OUTPUT

MARK OUTPUT MARK ~ 5
READY INPUT READY ~ 6

HOLDE~8~~2m;:

FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

HLDA

~

ADDRESS
INPUTI
OUTPUTS
0-3

7

STOROBlg8~~B¥ ADSTB ~ 8
ENABLEAg8~~~¥ AEN ~ 9

Single 5V supply voltage
Single TTL compatible
Priority DMA request logiC
Channel-masking function
Terminal count and Modulo 128 outputs
4-channel DMA controller
Compatible with MELPS85 devices

HOLD

R63Y~crt

HRQ ~ 10

CHIP ST~~8t CS ~ 11
CLOCK INPUT CLK ~ 12

DMA
ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT 2.3

i

DATA
INPUTI
OUTPUTS

DACK, ~ 14
__
DACK) ~ 15
DRQ3~16

APPLICATION
DMA control of peripheral equipment such as floppy disks
and CRT terminals that require high-speed data transfer.

DMA'
REQUEST
INPUT 0-3

GROUND

FUNCTION
The M5L8257P-5 controller is used in combination with the
M5L8212P 8-bit input/output port in 8-bit microcomputer systems. It consists of a channel section to acknowledge DMA
requests, control logic to exchange commands and data with
the CPU, read/write logic, and registers to hold transfer
addresses and count the number of bytes to be transferred.
When a DMA request is made to an unmasked channel from
the peripherals after setting of the transfer mode, transferstart address and the number of transferred bytes for the
registers, the M5L8257P-5 issues a priority request for the
use of the bus to the CPU. On receiving an HLDA signal

GND

Outline 40P4
from the CPU, it sends a DMA acknowledge Signal to the
channel with the highest priority, starting DMA operation.
During DMA operation, the contents of the high-order 8 bits
of the transfer memory address are transmitted to the
M5L8212P address-latch device through pins Do ~ 0 7 . The
contents of the low-order 8 bits are transmitted through pins
Ao ~ A7 . After address transmission, OMA transfer can be
started by dispatching read and write signals to the memories and peripherals.

----------------------,

BLOCK DIAGRAM
(5V) Vee 3

DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-O
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH-O

(OV) GND

DATA INPUTS/OUTPUTS

li~<1o---~----'

DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-1
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH-I

02 ""8"-----'

0, 9

Do~==~===~

DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-2
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH-2

1/0 READ INPUT/OUTPUT I/O R ij
I/O WRITE INPUT/OUTPUT I/O W"2"-----'
CLOCK INPUT
CLK I
RESET INPUT RESET 3
ADDRESS INPUTS/OUTPUTS

{~A021 CI2)-~~-I
A30;3g}----L..."..._ _.J

CHIP SELECT INPUT
ADDRESS OUTPUTS

3-BIT
INTERNAL
BUS

IT-I-ITI~r---.J

CS 11

{~:Ao 389
A, ('iO}-----I

READY INPUT READY 6
HRQ OUTPUT
HRQ 10

RE~~~~~=~~ ;~~~ ,,~;------. MO~~DSET 1 - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '

MEMORY
MEMORY WRITE OUTPUT

'iiifEMW

4

ADDRESS ENABLE OUTPUT
AEN 9
ADDRESS STROBE OUTPUT ADSTB 8

4-62

REGISTER

DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-3
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH·3

1-'---+---------------'

-----------~
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC

TC

TERMINAL COUNT
OUTPUT
MARK OUTPUT

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

OPERATION

Hold Request Output (HRQ)

I/O Read Input/Output (I/OR)

This output requests control of the system bus. HRQ will normally be applied to the HOLD input on the CPU.

When the M5L8257P-5 is in slave-mode operation, this
threestate, bidir~ctional pin serves for inputting and reads
the upper/lower bytes of the 8-bit status register or 16-bit
DMA address register and the high/low order bytes of the
terminal counter.
In the master mode, the pin gives control output and is
used to obtain data from a peripheral equipment during the
DMA write cycle.

I/O Write Input/Output

(UOW)

This pin is also of the three-state bidirectional type. When
the M5L8257P-5 is in slave-mode operation, it serves for inputting and loads the contents of the data bus on the upper/
lower bytes of the 8-bit status register or 16-bit DMA
address register and the upper/lower bytes of the terminal
counter.

Memory Read Output (MEMR)
This active-low three-state output is used to read data from
the addressed memory location during DMA read cycles.

Chip-Select Input (CS)
This pin is active on a low-level. It enable the lORD and
IOWR signals output from the CPU, when the M5L8257P-5 is
in slave-mode operation.
In the master mode, it is disabled to prevent the chip
from selecting itself while performing the DMA function.

Clock Input (ClK)
This pin generates internal timing for the M5L8257P-5 and is
connected to the ~ 2 (TTLl output of the M5L8224P-5 clock
generator.

Reset Input (RESET)
This asynchronous input clears all registers and control lines
inside the M5L8257P-5.
DMA Acknowledge Outputs (DACKO~DACK3)
These active-low outputs indicate that the peripheral equipment connected to the channel in question can execute the
DMA cycle.

Memory Write Output (MEMW)

DMA Request Inputs

This active-low three-state output is used to write data into
the addressed memory location during DMA write cycles.

These independent, asynchronous channel-request inputs
are used to secure use of the DMA cycle for the peripherals.

(DRQO~DRQ3)

Mark Output (MARK)

Data-Bus Buffer

This signal notifies that the DMA transfer cycle for each
channel is the 128th cycle since the previous MARK output.

This three-state, bidirectional, 8-bit buffer interfaces the
M5L8257P-5 to the CPU for data transfer. During a DMA cycle the upper 8 bits of the DMA address are output to the
M5L8212P latch device through this buffer.

Ready Input (READY)
This asynchronous input is used to extend the memory read
and write cycles in the M5L8257P-5 with wait states if the
selected memory requires longer cycles.

Hold Acknowledge Input (HlDA)
This input from the CPU indicates that the system bus is
controlled by the M5L8257P-5.

Address Strobe Output (ADSTB)
This output strobes the most significant byte of the memory
address into the M5L8212P 8-bit input/output port through
the data bus.

Address Inputs/Outputs

(Ao~A3)

The four bits of these input/output pins are bidirectional.
When the M5L8257P-5 is in slave-mode operation, serve to
input and address the internal registers. In the case of master operation, they output the low-order 4 bits of the 16-bit
memory address.

Terminal Count Output (TC)
This output signal notifies that the present DMA cycle is the
last cycle for this data block.
(A4~A7)

Address Enable Output (AEN)

Address Inputs/Outputs

This signal is used to disable the system data bus and system control bus by means of the bus enable pin on the
M5L8228P system controller. It may also be used to inhibit
non-DMA devices from responding during DMA cycles.

These four address lines are three-state outputs which constitute bits 4 through 7 of the memory address generated by
the M5L8257P-5 during all DMA cycles.

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

4-63

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

Register Initialization
Two 16-bit registers are provided for each of the 4 channels.

DMA Address register

a

15

DMA TRANSFER STARTING ADDRESS

Terminal count register
15

a

1413

~------------------~----------~--------

DMA MODE

NUMBER OF TRANSFERRED BYTES-l

The DMA transfer starting address, number of transferred
bytes, and OMA mode are written for each channel in 2
steps using the 8-bit data bus. The lower-order and upperorder bytes are automatically indicated by the firstlast flipflop for the writing and reading in 2 continuous steps.
The OMA mode (read, write, or verify) is indicated by
the upper 2 bits of the terminal count register. The read
mode refers to the operation of peripheral devices reading
data out of memory. The write mode refers to data from
peripheral devices being written into memory. The verify
mode sends neither the read nor the write signals and performs a date check at the peripheral device.
In addition to the above-mentioned registers, there is a
mode set register and a status register.

Mode set register (write only)
7

0

=A:L=I=T:c:s~I=E:w=:1=R:p::I,::E:N:3==E:N:2=:::E:N:l::1:E:N:O~_

MODESET:
MVI A,ADDl
OUT 00 *1::
Channel
MVI A, ADDH
OUT 00 *1::
Channel
MVI A, Tel
OUT 01 *1::
Channel
OUT 01 *1::
Channel
MVI A, XX

OUT 08 *1::

0 lower-order address

0 upper-order address
0 terminal count lower-order
0 terminal count upper-order

Mode set resister

As can be seen from the above example, until the contents
of the address register and terminal count register become
valid, the enable bit of the mode set register must not be
set. This prevents memory contents from being destroyed by
improper ORO signals from peripheral devices.

DMA Operation Description
When a DMA request signal is received at the DRO pin from
a peripheral device after register initialization for a channel
that is not masked, the M5L8257P-5 outputs a hold request
signal to the CPU to begin DMA operation (S1)'
The CPU, upon receipt of the HRO signal, outputs the
H LDA signal which reserves capture of the bus after it has
executed the present instruction to place this system in the
hold state.
When the M5L8257P receives the HLOA signal, an internal priority determining circuit selects the channel with the
highest priority for the beginning of data transfer (So).
Upon the next S1 state, the address signal is sent. The

lower-order 8-bits and upper-order 8-bits are sent by means
of the Ao-A7 and 0 0 - 07 pins respectively, latched into the
CHANNEL ENABLE BITS
ADDED FUNCTION SETTING BITS
M5L8212P and output at pins As-A15. Simultaneous with this,
Status Register (read only)
the AEN signal is output to prohibit the selection of a device
7
a not capable of DMA.
In the S2 state, the read, extended write, and DACK siga
a
a
UP
TC3
TC2
TCl
TCO 1
nals are output and data transferred from memory or a
The upper-order 4-bits of the mode set register are used to peripheral device appears on the data bus.
select the added function, as described in Table 1. The lowIn the S3 state, the write signal required to write data
er-order 4-bits are mask kits for each channel. When set to from the bus is output. At this time if the remaining number
1, DMA requests are allowed. When the reset signal is input, of bytes to be transferred from the presently selected chanall bits of the mode set and status registers are reset and nel has reached 0, the terminal count (TC) signal is output.
OMA is. inhibited for all channels. Therefore, to execute Simultaneously with this, after each 128-byte data transfer a
OMA operations, registers must first be initialized. An exam- mark signal is output as required. In addition, in this state
ple of such an initialization is shown below.
the READY pin is sampled and, if low, the wait state (Sw) is
entered. This is used to perform OMA with slow access
memory devices. In the verify mode, READY input is
ignored.

....:1

4-64

• .MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

In the 54 state, the ORQ and HLOA pins are sampled at
the end of a transferred byte as the address signal, control
signals, and OACK signal are held to determine if transfer
will continue.
As described above, transfer of 1 byte requires a minimum of 4 states for execution. For example, if a 2MHz clock
input is used, the maximum transfer rate is SOak byte/so

Memory Mapped I/O
When using memory mapped I/O, it is neccessary to change
the connections for the control signals.

RESET

1/0 RD

MEM RD

1/0 WR

MEM WR

MEM RD

1/0 RD

MEM WR

1/0 WR

SYSTEM BUS

Fig.

2

M5L8257P-5

Memory mapped liD

Also, the read mode and write mode specifications for setting the mode of the terminal count are reversed.

Fig.

DMA Operation state transition diagram

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

4-65

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

INTERNAL REGISTERS OF THE M5L8257P-5
Upper
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Lower
D2

D,

Do

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D,

Do
DMA address

channel-O
terminal count

DMA address
channel-l
terminal count

DMA address
channel-2
terminal count

DMA address
channel-3
terminal count

Mode setting (tor write only)

I 0 I 0 I 0 I UP ITC*c2 1TC1I Tcol
Ao-A"

CO........ C13
Rd. Wr

AL
EW
TCS
RP

: Address of the memories for which DMA will be carried out from now on. In initialization, DMA start addresses must be wrihen.
: Terminal counts-in this IC (the number of remaining transfer bytes minus 1 )
: Used for DMA-mode.setting by the following convention:
Rd

Wr

Mode to be set

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

DMA verify
DMAwrite

DMA read
Prohibition

: Automatic load mode. When this bit has been set, contents of the channel 3 register are written, as are on the channel 2 register when
channel 2 DMA transfer comes to an end. This mode allows quick, automatic chaining operations without intervention of the software.
: Extended write signal mode. When this bit has been set, write signals can be transmitted in advance to memories and peripheral equipment requiring long access time.
: Terminal count stop. When a DMA transfer process is complete, with terminal-count output, the channel-enable mask of that channel is reset, prohibiting subsequent DMA cycles.
: Rotating priority mode. The setting of this mode allows the priority order to be rotated by each byte transfer.
CH-O

CH-l

CH-2

1

CH-l

CH-2

CH-3

CH-O

2

CH-2

CH-3

CH-O

CH-l

3

CH-3

CH-Qi

CH-l

CH-2

4

CH-O

CH-l

CH-2

CH-3·

Channel used for the present data transfer

Priority list for the next cycle

ENO-EN3

UP
TCO-TC3

4-66

Status (tor read only)

CH-3

Channel-enable mask. This mask prohibits or allows the DMA requesl.
Update flag. This is set when register contents are transferred in an automatic load mode from channel 3 to channel 2.
Terminal-count status flags. At the time of terminal-count output, the flag corresponding to the channel is set.

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S7P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

REGISTER ADDRESS
Address input

F/L
A,

A2

0

0

0

0

AI

0

Register

AD
0

0

channel 0 DMA address Low-order

..

_._-

'---~

f-----

0

0

1

channel 0 DMA address High-order

-----~

-

-~-------------------

aterminal count Low-order
aterminal count High-order

0

0

0

1

0

channel

0

0

0

1

1

channel

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

a

channel 3 DMA address Low-order

0

1

1

0

1

channel 3 DMA address High-order

0

1

1

1

0

channel 3 terminal count Low-order

0

1

1

1

1

channel 3 terminal count High-order

1

0

0

0

0

Mode Setting (for Write Only)

1

0

0

0

0

Status (for Read Only)

I--~---

c---

0

channell DMA address Low-order

-

--

- ------------

---~-

---

1

channel 1 DMA address High-order

0

channell terminal count Low-order

1

1

channell terminal count High-order

0

0

channel 2 DMA address Low-order

1

I channel 2 OMA address High-order

--

-----

-~

1---F/L

0
1
o ~nnel2 terminal count Low-order
- - f----~
cha~~eI2 terminal count High-order
0
1 1-----

1-"

--.~

II

----

----------------------------

First/last flip-flop. This is toggled when program and register-read operations for each channel are finished, and specifies whether the next
program or read operation is to be for the upper bytes or the lower bytes. This means that write and read operations for each register must be
carried out for a set of lower and higher bytes.

• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

4-67

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Parameter

Conditions

Power-supply voltage

Vcc
V,

Input voltage

Vo

Output voltage

Pd

Power dissipation (max.)

Topr
Tstg

Operating free-air temperature range

With respect to GND
Ta=2S'C

Unit

V

-0.5-7

V

-0.5-7

V

1000

mW

-20-75

'c
·c

-65-150

Storage temperature range

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol

Limits

-0.5-7

(Ta=-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Parameter

Min

Nom

Max

5

5.25

4.75

Vcc

Power-supply voltage

Vss
V ,H

Power-supply voltage (GND)

V'L

Low-level input voltage

Unit

---

V
-.-~--,-.

0

High-level input voltage

--_.

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol

__.,--

2
Vcc +O,5
- - -- - -0.5
0.8

Low-level output _voltage

IOL=1.6mA

VOH'

High-level output voltage lor AB, DB and AEN

IOH=-150"A

V OH2

High-level output voltage for HRQ

V OH3

High-level output voltage for others

Icc
I,

Power-supply current from Vcc

IOH=-BO"A
,,--,--,--

Input current

V,=Vcc- OV
VI=VCC ........ OV

C,

Input capacitance

Ta=25'C, Vcc=Vss=OV

CliO

Input/output terminal capacitance

, , -

TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol

1--

Min

Typ

----,-

V

2.4

Vee

V

3.3

Vce

V

2.4

Vee
120

mA

-10

10

J.l.A

-10

10

I'A

10

pF

20

pF

(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±5%, Vss=ov, V,H=V OH =2V, V IL =VOL=0.8V, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative

Test conditions

J

symbol

- - - - ---

Rea~ pulse _~. _ _ _ _ _ ~_~ ___ ~ .. __

TRR

!

Limits
Min

Typ

250

ns

0

ns

Address or CS setup time before read
Address or CS hold time after read

TRA

0

tSUCR-DO)

Date setup time before read

TRD

0

200

thCR-DO)

Data hold time after read

20

100

twCw)

White pulse width

r----'-"
TAR

'-

_TDF

-I

__

Tww

200

tSUCA~W)

Address setup time before write

TAW

20

theW-A)

Address hold time after write

a

tSU(DQ~W)

Data setup time before write

TWA
T DW

thCW-DQ)

Data hold time after write

tWCRST)

Reset pulse width

TWD
T RSTW

tSUCVcc-RST)

Supply voltage setup time before reset

T RSTD

tr

Input signal rise time

Tr

tf

Input signal fall time

tSU(RST-W}

Reset setup time before write
Clock cycle time

Clock pulse width

-

tSU(DRQ- ~)

ORO setup time before clock

thCHlDA-DRQ)

DRQ hold time after HLDA

tSU(HlDA- "'}

HLDA setup time before clock

tSU(RDY- "')

Ready setup time before clock

thc '" -RDY)

Ready hold time after clock

Note I

4-68

CL=150pF

Tf
T RSTS
Tcy

- - - - - - - - ~----Tos
TOH
T HS
T RS
T RH

Measurement conditions: M5LB257P CL=IOOpF, M5L8257P-5 CL=150pF

",,". MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

Unit

Max

twCR)
tsu(A-R)
ts (CS-R)
th(R-A)
th(R-CS)

tec "')

V

Pins ather than that under measurement are set

to OV, Ic=1 MHz

Parameter

twl' )

Unit

Max
0,45

,------

Off-state output current

r--

Limits

Test conditions
-------.~---,,----------.-

VOL

~-

V
V

(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted)

Parameter

r-----'--

V

ns
ns
ns

-"~
ns
ns

-- --

200

-

0

ns
ns

300

ns

500

I'S

20

r---- t-----

20

2
0.32

4

O. Btell)

80

ns
ns
tcc. )
I'S
ns
ns

70

a
lOa

---

ns
i

ns

30

ns

20

ns

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

(T a =-20-75·C, Vcc =5V±5%, Vss=OV, VoH =2V, Vol =O,8V, unless otherwise noted) (Note2)
Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

Limits

Unit

Test conditions

symbol

Typ

Min

Max

--

~-~-

t pLH (

¢ "-HRQ)

~---=HRQl
t pLH ( 1> ~HRQ)

Propagation time from clock to HRQ (Note3)

Too

Propagation time from clock to HRQ (NoteS)

160

ns

f

T DOI

250

ns

tpHL(

t pLH (

of -AEN)

Propagation time from clock to AEN (Note3)

TAEL

300

ns

t pHL ( 1> -AEN}

Propagation time from clock to AEN (Note3)

TAET

200

ns

Propagation time from AEN to address active (Note6)

TAEA

--

-HRQ)

--------------

tPZV(AEN-A)

20

ns

~-

t pzv ( 1>

-A)

Propagation time from clock to address active (Note4)

TFAAB

250

ns

t pvz ( 1>

-A}

Propagation time from clock to address floating (Note4)

TAFAB

150

ns

Address setup time after clock (Note4)

TASM

250

ns

t pLH (

the

1> -Al

Address hold time after clock (Note4)

7>-A)

tpLH ( 1>-

TAH

ns

A)-50

~-

-

60

ns

theR-A)

Address hold time after read (Note6)

TAHR

thCW-A)

Address hold time after write (Note6)

T AHW

tpzvc '" -DO)

Propagation time from clock to data active

TFADB

t pvz ( 1> -DO)

Propagation time from clock to data floating (Note4)

TAFDB

tpHLlA-ASTB)

Propagation time from address 10 address strobe (Note4)

TASS

100

thcASTs-A)

Propagation time from address strobe to address hold (Note6)

T AHS

50

Propagation time from clock to address strobe (Note3)

TSTL

200

ns

Propagation time from clock to address strobe (Note3)

TSTT

140

ns

300

t pHL( ~

ns

-

AST,I+20

300

ns

170

ns
ns
ns

~-

tpLH ( ~ -ASTSl
-,-~.--

~_-AST8l

Address strobe pulse width (Note6)

tWCASTB)
tpHL(AS-Rl
tPHLCAS-WE)

(Note6)

thCDQ-R)

Read or extended write hold time after data

thCDO-WE)

(Note6)

tPLH(¢-DACK}
IpHL (1)-TcfMARKl

Propagation time from clock to DACK or TC/MARK

(Note3, 7)

-

tce. )
-100

ns

T ASC

70

ns

Tosc

20

ns

Tsw

Propagation time from address strobe to read or

I extended write

-

TAK

250

ns

TOCL

200

ns

TaCT

200

ns

T FAC

300

ns

150

ns

tpLH (1-TCfMARKl
t pHL( '"

-R)

tpHLC 1>

-w)

Propagation time from clock to read, write or extended

write (Note4, 8)

t pHL( '" -WE)

t pLH ( 1>

-R)

t pLH ( 1>

-w)

I Propagation time from clock to read or write
(Notes4,9)

-"

tpzvc 1> -Rl

Propagation time from clock to read active or write

t pzv ( 1>

-w)

active (Note4)

t pvz < 1>

-R)

~(1)-W)

Propagation time from clock to read floating or

write floating (Note4)

T AFC

twCRl

Read pulse width (Note6)

TRAM

twcw)

Write pulse width (Note6)

TWWM

tW(WE)

Extended write pulse width

TWWME

Note

Reference level is VoH =3, 3V
Load=lTTL
Load=lTTL+50pF
Load=lTTL+(R l =3, 3kD),
VoH =3,3V

Note

2tcil )+
tWill-50

ns ns

tce. )
-50

ns

2tce. I
-50

ns

Tracking specification
b.. t pLH ( ~ -DACKl <50ns, 6. tpHu ~ -TC/MARK)<50ns, b.. tpLHC <} -TC/MAAK)<50ns
t. tpHLi; -RI<50ns, t. tpHLi I -w) (

f---r-

tpHLi¢-HRO)

tSU(HC~.)+ I--r-

HRQ

~

th(HLDA-DRQ)

-

1

HlDA

tPLH (1)-AEN)....;:oo------r-

1

AEN

.-

tpzvl<~A) ~

~tSU(¢-A)

.........,tPVZC¢_A)

Ao~A7

'1&

(lOWER ADORE ss)

tpZV(1)-DQ)

...

!.o, t pvz ( iDa)

..;..

00 ....... 07
(UPPER ADORE ss)
tPLH(¢-ASTS} ~

--!

ADSTB

t~I

......;;.+27

... ~ tPLH(O-R)

tpHLI<~R) ~

'"

,

'-_.

------------

------------

TCIMARK

tSU(RDY

¢)~

f

tW(Rl

,

~

ri th(qI

~

1

~L(~tPLH(¢-W)

j..---oo

, -rh{

tPVZ(¢-R)

~

ROY)

tpLH('~TC/MARK) ~PHLi'~ TC/MARK)

/ \

/\

------------

Slave Mode

PHL(ASTB-R)

tPH UAS1B-WE)

1

\-

/u

~
tPHl(A-ASTB)

... ~~)~"'t

'\

tpZV(¢-R)

D/
th(¢-A),.., th(ASTB~A)

n
1

tPHL'I~ASTB)

~+ tpHu ¢-~ACK)

READY

\ ____ f
~HLi¢-AEN)

(Reference voltage: "H"=2V "l"=O.8V)

Read

Write

Ao~A7

________~r~__~------r_---+~'-~-------

Do~D7 ------------------"l<-r_---+--~'-----00 ...... 0 7

----------------------4(==~--------RESET

Vee

4-70

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

S,

I s, I

S3

I

S,

I s, I s, I

So

I s, I s, I

S3

I

SW

I sw I s, I s, I s, I s,
ClK

DROo-DRO,

HRO

\

\

HlDA

'-----AEN

~.,....-_ _

~

Ao-A7

____+ ____+ _____.....tU (lOWER ADDRESSES)

II

~------~-----~~~--.....t~t-----t-------(UPP!~
Do-D7
'=---"'"""fv
"
(UPPER ADDRESSES)
ADSTB

~-r------4---------------

......- - - - - MEMR/I/OR

tSU( RDY-¢)

'--------------

o

/

\

READY

TC/MARK

Note 1
The center line indicates a floating
(high-impedance) state.

•

MITSUBISHI

~ELECTRIC

4-71

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER.

DESCRIPTION
The M5LB259AP is a proqrammable LSI for interrupt control.
It is fabricated using N-channel silicon-gate ED-MaS technology and is designed to be used easily in connection with
an BOB5A, BOB6 or BOB8.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
CHIP

ST~~8t

CONTROL
CONTROL

I~~tl~ ~,D:

FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•

CS- 1

l¥.~;)f WR 06

Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
CALL instruction to the CPU is generated automatically
Priority, interrupt mask and vectored address for each interrupt request input are programmable
Up to 64 levels of interrupt requests can be controlled by
cascading with M5LB259AP
Polling functions

0,
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

I

1

Vc d5V)

27 - Ao ADDRESS INPUT
_ _ INTERRUPT
26 -INTAACKNOWLEDG

2

!

INPUT

~
~

~

INTERRUPT
REQUEST
INPUTS

0,
03 ~

I 02 ~
l Do ~ 11

18 -IRo

CASCADdCASo~ 12

LlNES\CAS,~
(OV)Vss

'NTERRUPT

17 -INT ~'0'i~5~T

13
14

16
15

~SP/EN~~~Y{~3+~~~
~CAS, CASCADE

" _ _ _ _ _.J -

LINES

APPLICATION
The M5L8259AP can be used as an interrupt controller for
CPUs 8085A, 8086 and 8088

Outline 28P4

FUNCTION
The M5L8259AP is a device specifically designed for use in
real time, interrupt driven microcomputer systems. It manages eight level requests and has built-in features for expandability to other M5L8259APs. The priority and interrupt
mask can be changed or reconfigured at any time by the
main program.
When an interrupt is generated because of an interrupt
request at 1 of the pins, the M5L8259AP based on the mask

and priority will output an INT to the CPU. After that, when
an INTA signal is received from the CPU or the system controller, a CALL instruction and a programmed vector address
is released onto the data bus.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

INTERRUPT
REQUEST OUTPUT

INT

DATA BUS
BUFFER

BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS

I Ro 180----1-'--....,
IR,

IR,
INTERRUPT
REQUEST INPUTS

IR3 21
IR,

READ/WRITE
CONTROL
LOGIC

IR,

IR6

2 WR WRITE CONTROL INPUT
3 RD READ CONTROL INPUT
27 Ao ADDRESS INPUT

:==~=~-(I

IR,

CS CHIP SELECT INPUT

12 CASO}

13 CAS,
15

L

4-72

CASCADE LINES

AS,

~---(16 SP/EN

- --- - --- - .--- - --- - --- -

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

SLAVE PROGRAM INPUT/
ENABLE BUFFER OUTPUT

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

PIN DESCRIPTION
Symbol

Input or

Pin name

Functional significance

output

CS

Chip select input

Input

This input is active at low-level, but may be at high-Jevel during interrupt request input and interrupt processing

WR

Write control input

Input

Command write control input from the CPU

RO

Read control input

Input

Data read control input for the CPU

Input!

Bidirectional data bus

0 7-00
CAS2CASo

output

Input!

Cascade lines

output

-------

Data and commands are transmitted through this bidirectional data bus to and from the CPU.

-These pins are outputs for a master and inputs for a slave. And these pins of the master will be able to
address each individual slave. The master will enable the corresponding slave to release the device routine

address during bytes 2 and 3 of INTA.
-----==--.~

--

Slave program input/
Enable buffer output

output

EN: In the buffered mode, whenever the M5L8259AP's data bus output is enabled, its

INT

Interrupt request output

Output

This pin goes high whenever a valid interrupt is asserted.

SP/EN

Input!

SP: In normal mode, a master is designated when SP/EN=l and a slave is designated when SP/EN=O.

Sf5iEN pin will go low.
-

The asynchronous interrupt inputs are active at high-level. The. interrupt mask and priority of each interrupt

IR7-IRo

Interrupt request input

Input

input can be changed at any time. When using edge triggered mode, the rising edge (low to high) of the

--

interrupt request and the nigh-level must be held until the first INTA. For level triggered mode, the high--

level must be held until the first INTA.
~-

--

Interrupt acknowledge

INTA

Input

input

Ao address input

Ao

I

Input

When an interrupt acknowledge (INTA) from the CPU is received, the M5L8259AP releases a CALL instruction or vectored address onto the data bus.
This pin is normally connected to one of the address lines and acts in conjunction with the the

OPERATION
The M5L8259AP is interfaced with a standard system bus as
shown in Fig. 1 and operates as an interrupt controller.

ADDRESS BUS

Ao

0,

D3

RD WR

CS

0

- - c-~ f-- f--- - ]
0
0

]

0

]

0

Input operation (read)
IRR, ISR or interrupting level-data bus
IMR-Data bus
Output operation (write)

CONTROL BUS

DATA BUS

Ao

07-00

RD

WR

M5L8259AP

INT

INTA
CASo
CAS,

---

0

0

0

]

0

0

Data bus-OCW2

0

0

1

1

0

0

Data bus-OCW3

0

]

X

1

0

0

Data bus-ICW]

1

X

X

1

0

0

Data bus-OCW], ICW2, ICW3, ICW4

X

X

X

]

]

0

Data bus-High-impedance

X

X

X

X

X

1

Data bus-High-impedance

Disable function

CS

and

Table 1 M5LB259AP basic operation
-

]6

es, WR

I RD when writing commands or reading status registers.

.-

]c'"" "
LINES

CAS,

SLAVE PROGRAM
INPUTI

INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS

ENABLE

BUFFER OUTPUT

Fig.

The M5LB259AP interfaces to standard system
bus.

• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC

4~73

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

Interrupt Sequence
1. When the CPU is an 8085A:
(1) When one or more of the interrupt request inputs are
raised high, the corresponding IRR bit(s) for the highlevel inputs will be set.
(2) Mask state and priority levels are considered and, if
appropriate, the M5L8259AP sends an INT signal to
the CPU.
(3) The acknowledgement of the CPU to the INT signal,
the CPU issues an INTA pulse to the M5L8259AP.
(4) Upon receiving the first INTA pulse from the CPU, a
CALL instruction is released onto the data bus.
(5) A CALL isa 3-byte instruction, so additional two
INTA pulses are issued to the M5L8259AP from the
CPU.
(6) These two INTA pulses allow the M5L8259AP to release the program address onto the data bus. The
low-order 8-bit vectored address is released at the
second INTA pulse and the high-order 8-bit vectored
address is released at the third INTA pulse. The ISR
bit corresponding to the interrupt request input is set
upon receiving the third INTA pulse from the CPU,
and the corresponding IRR bit is reset.
(7) This completes the 3-byte CALL instruction and the
interrupt routine will be serviced. The ISR bit is reset
at the trailing edge of the third INTA pulse in the
AEOI mode. In the other modes the ISR bit is not reset until an EOI command is issued.

IR~IRRSET

IRU"IRR SET

INTA~

1

~

2

r-

/L--J\!~~

L--J

RESET
ISR RESET (AEOI MODE)

ISR SET

The interrupt request input must be held at high-level until the first INTA pulse is issued. If it is allowed to return to
low-level before the first INTA pulse is issued, an interrupt
request in IR7 is executed. However, in this case the ISR bit
is not set.
This is a function for a noise countermeasure of interrupt
reguest inputs. In the interrupt routine of IR7, if ISR is checked by software either the interrupt by noise or real interrupt
can be acknowledged. In the state of edge trigger mode
normally the interrupt request inputs hold high-level and its
input low-level pulse in the case of interrupt.

Interrupt sequence outputs
1. When the CPU is an 8085A:
A CALL instruction is released onto the data bus when
the first INTA pulse is issued. The low-order 8 bits of the
vectored address are released when the second INTA
pulse is issued, and the high-order 8 bits are released
when the third INTA pulse is issued. The format of these
three outputs is shown in Table 2.

Table 2 Formats of interrupt CALL instruction and vectored address
First iNTA pulse (CALL instruction)
06

0,

o
2. When the CPU is an 8086 or 8088:
(1) When one or more of the interrupt request inputs are
raised high, the corresponding IRR bit(s) for the highlevel inputs will be set.
(2) Mask state and priority levels are considered and if
appropriated, the M5L8259AP sends an INT signal to
the CPU.
(3) As an acknowledgement to the INT signal, the CPU
issues an INTA pulse to the M5L8259AP.
(4) Upon receiving the first INTA pulse from the CPU,
the M5L8259AP does not drive the data bus, and the
data bus keeps high-impedance state.
(5) When the second INTA pulse is issued from the
CPU, an 8-bit pointer is released onto the data bus.
(6) This complete~ the interrupt cycle and the interrupt
routine will be serviced. The ISR bit is reset at the
trailing edge of the second INTA pulse in the AEOI
mode. In the other modes the ISR bit is not reset until an EOI command is issued from the CPU.

4-74

o

Do

o

Second INTA pulse (low-order 8-bit of vectored address)

IR

Interval= 4

07

06

05

04

03

02

0,

Do

IRa

A7

A6

A5

0

0

0

0

0

IR,

A7

A6

A5

0

0

1

0

0

IR2

A7

A5

0

1

0

0

0

1R3

A7

A5

0

1

1

0

0

IR4

A7

As
A6
A6

A5

1

0

0

0

0

IR5

A7

A6

A5

1

0

1

0

0

IR6

A7

A6

A5

1

1

0

0

0

IR7

A7

A6

A5

1

1

1

0

0

• .MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

,

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

IR

Interval=8

07

Da

Os

0,

03

O2

0,

Do

IRa

A7

Aa

0

0

0

0

0

0

IR,

A7

Aa

0

0

1

0

0

0

IR2

A7

Aa

0

1

0

0

0

0

1R3

A7

Aa

0

1

1

0

IR,

A7

Ao

1

0

0

0

IRs

A7

Aa

1

0

1

0

0
0
- -- - 0
0
..0
0

IRa

A7

Aa

1

1

0

0

0

0

IR7

A7

Aa

1

1

1

0

0

0

-

Third INTA pulse (high-order 8 bits of vectored address)
0,

A"

0,

Do

Ag

As

mode. After that an INT signal is released and the interrupt
request signal is latched in the corresponding IRR bit if the
high-level is held until the first INTA pulse is issued. It is important to remember that the interrupt request signal must
be held at high-level until the first INTA pulse is issued.
The interrupt request latching in the IRR causes a signal
to be sent to the priority resolver unless it is masked out.
When the priority resolver receives the signals it selects the
highest priority interrupt request latched in IRR. The ISR is
set when the last INTA pulse is issued while the corresponding bit of IRR is reset and the other bits of IRR are unaffected.
The bit of ISR that was set is not reset during the interrupt routine, but is reset at the end of the routine by the EOI
command (end of interrupt) or by the trailing edge of the last
INTA pulse in AEOI mode.

Priority Resolver
2. When the CPU is a 8086 or 8088:
The data bus keeps a high-impedance state when the
first INTA pulse is issued. Then the pointer T7~To is released when the next INTA pulse is issued. The content
of the pOinter T7~To is shown in Table 3. The T2~To are
a binary code corresponding to the interrupt request
level, AlO ~ A5 are unused and ADI mode control is
ignored.
Table 3 Contents of interrupt pointer
Second I NTA pulse (8-bit pointer)

The priority resolver examines all of the interrupt requests
set in IRR to determine and selects the highest priority. The
ISR bit corresponding to the selected (highest priority) request is set by the last INTA pulse.

Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
The contents of the interrupt mask register are used to mask
out (disable) interrupt requests of selected interrupt request
pins. Each terminal is independently masked so that masking a high priority interrupt does not influence the lower or
higher priority interrupts. Therefore the contents of IMR
selectively enable reading.

Interrupt Request Output (INT)
The interrupt request output connects directly to the interrupt input of the CPU. The output level is compatible with
the input level required for the CPUs.

07

Da

Os

0,

03

02

0,

Do

IRa

T7

Ta

Ts

T,

T3

0

0

0

IR,

T7

Ta

Ts

T.

T3

0

0

1

IR,

T7

Ta

Ts

T.

T3

0

1

0

IR3

T7

Ta

Ts

T,

T3

0

1

1

IR,

T7

Ta

Ts

T,

T3

1

0

0

Data Bus Buffer

IRs

T7

Ta

Ts

T,

T3

1

0

1

IRa

T7

Ta

Ts

T4

T3

1

1

0

IR7

T7

Ta

Ts

T,

T3

1

1

1

The data bus buffer is a 3-state bidirectional data bus buffer that is used to interface with the system bus. Write commands to the M5L8259AP, CALL instructions, vectored
addresses, status information, etc. are transferred through
the data bus buffer.

-

Interrupt Request Register (IRR), In-service Register
(ISR)
As interrpt requests are received at inputs IR7~IRo, the corresponding bits of IRR are set and as an interrupt request is
serviced the corresponding bit of ISR is set. The IRR is used
to store all the interrupt levels which are requesting service,
and the ISR is used to store all the interrupt levels which are
being serviced. The status of these two registers can be
read. These two registers are connected through the priority
resolver.
An interrupt requst received by I Rn is acknowledged on
the leading edge when in the edge triggered mode or it is
acknowledged on the level when in the level triggered

Interrupt Acknowledge Input

(ii,iTA)

The CALL instruction and vectored address are released
onto the data bus by the INTA pulse.

ReadlWrite Control Logic
The read/write control logic is used to control functions such
as receiving commands from the CPU and supplying status
information to the data bus.

Chip Select (CS)
The M5L8259AP is selected (enabled) when CS is at lowlevel, but during interrupt request input or interrupt processing it may be high-level.

Write Control Input (WR)
When WR goes to low-level the M5L8259AP can be written.

Read Control Input (RD)
When RD goes low status information in the internal register
of the M5L8259AP can be read through the data bus.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-75

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

Address Input (Ao)
The address input is normally connected with one of the
address lines and is used along with WR and RD to control
write commands and reading status information.

Cascade Buffer/Comparator
The cascade buffer/comparator stores or compares identification codes. The three cascade lines are output when the
M5L8259AP is a master or input when it is a slave. The identification code on the cascade lines select it as master or
slave.

PROGRAMMING THE M5L8259AP
The M5L8259AP is programmed through the Initialization
Command Word (ICW) and the operation command word
(OCW) . The following explains the functions of these two
commands.

Initialization Command Words (ICWs)
The initialization command word is used for the initial setting
of the M5L8259AP. There are four commands in this group
and the following explains the details of these four commands.

ICW1
The meaning of the bits of ICWI is explained in Fig. 3 along
with the functions. ICWI contains vectored address bits A7As. a flag indicating whether interrupt input is edge triggered or level triggered. CALL address interval. whether a
single M5L8259AP or the cascade mode is used. and
whether ICW4 is required or not.
Whenever a command is issued with Ao = 0 and D4 = 1.

this is interpreted 'as ICWI and the following will automatically occur.
(a) The interrupt mask register (IMR) is cleared.
(b) The interrupt request input IR7 is assigned the lowest
priority.
(c) The special mask mode is cleared and the status read
is set to the interrupt request register (IRR).
(d) When IC4=O all bits in ICW4 are set to zero.

ICW2
ICW2 contains vectored address bits A'5 - As or interrupt
type T7-T3 • and the format is shown in Fig. 3.

ICW3
When SNGL= 1 it indicates that only a single M5L8259AP is
used in the system. in which case ICW3 is not valid. When
SNGL=O. ICW3 is valid and indicates cascade connections
with other M5L8259AP devices. In the master mode. a " 1 .. is
set for each slave.
When the CPU is an 8085A the CALL instruction is released from the master at the first INTA pulse and the vectored address is released onto the data bus from the slave
at the second and third INTA pulses.
When the CPU is a 8086 the master and slave are in
high-impedance at the first INTA pulse and the pointer is released onto the data bus from the slave at the second INTA
pulse.
The master mode is specified when SP/EM pin is highlevel or BUF = 1 and MIS = 1 in ICW4. and slave mode is
specified when SP/EM pin is low-level or BUF= 1 and MIS

ICW1

ICW2

ICW3

ICW4

Fig. 2

4-76

Initialization sequence

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

J VECTOR ADDRESS LOW-ORDER BITS
1 (A,-A,)
11: LEVEL TRIGGERED MODE
1 0: EDGE TRIGGERED MODE
11:

CALL ADDRESS INTERVAL IS 4

L0:

CALL ADDRESS INTERVAL IS8

11:

SINGLE

I

0
Ao

I

I
A,
0,

I

A6

I

I
As
D,

06

I

1

I LTIM

D4

03

I

ADI

I SNGLl

IC4

0,

0,

Do

I
] (Note 1)

I

ICW4 NEEDED
NO ICW4 NEEDED

Note 1

(Note 1)

J

LO: CASCADE MODE
J1:
1 0:

I

8085A ONLY

J

ICW1

II

1 VECTOR ADDRESS HIGH-ORDER BITS

I (A,,-A,)OR INTERRUPT TYPE (T7-T3)

I

I

I

1

I A15/T 71

Ao

0,

I

A14/T61 A13/l sl A12/T41 AII/T3
0,

06

04

03

AlO

I

Ag

I

0,

D2

A,

I

Do

ICW2
11: IRn INPUT HAS A SLAVE
0: IRn INPUT DOES NOT HAVE A SLAVE

I

I

I

1

I

S,

I

07

Ao

I
S6

I

S,

I

I

0,

06

84

I

04

S3

S2

03

02

I

8,

I

0,

So

I

Do

SLAVE IDENTIFICATION CODE

ICW3 (MASTER DEVICE)

I

1

I

Ao

0

I

0

I

06

07

0
05

I

0
04

I

0

102

03

02

I

I
10,
0,

I

100

0

1

2 3 4

5

6

7

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

I

Do

ICW3 (SLAVE DEVICE)
11:
10:

0

X

NON BUFFERED MODE

1

0

BUFFERED MODE/SLAVE

1

1

BUFFERED MODE/MASTER

SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE
NOT SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE

J1:

L0:

.j ~
I

1
Ao

I

0

I

0,

0
06

I

0
0,

I SFNM I BUF
04

03

I

M/S
D2

AEOI MODE
NORMAL EOI MODE
8086, 8088 MODE
8085A MODE

I

I AEOI I ,uPM I
0,

Do

ICW4

Fi9_ 3

Initialization command word format

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-77

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

=0 in ICW4. In the slave mode, three bits ID2~IDo identify
the slave. And then when the slave code released on the
cascade lines from the master, matches the assigned ID
code, the vectored address is released 'by it onto the data
bus at the next INTA pulse.

M5L8259AP, the device is ready to accept interrupt requests.
There are three types of OCWs; explanation of each follows,
and the format of OCWs is shown in Fig. 4.

OCWl
The meaning of the bits of OCWl are explained in Fig. 4
along with their functions. Each bit of IMR can be independently changed (set or reset) by OCWl.

ICW4
Only when IC4=l in ICWl is ICW4 valid. Otherwise all bits
are set to zero. When ICW4 is valid it specifies special fully
nested mode, buffer mode master/slave, automatic EOI and
microprocessor mode. The format of ICW4 is shown in Fig. 3.

OCW2
The OCW2 is used for issuing EOI commands to the
M5L8259AP and for changing the priority of the interrupt request inputs.

Operation Command Words (OCW s)

OCW3

The operation command words are used to change the contents of IMR, the priority of interrupt request inputs and the
special mask. After the ICW are programmed into the

The OCW3 is used for specifying special mask mode, poll
mode and status register read.

, - _ - . -_ _.--_---._ _-.--_---._ _-,--_---._ _ _ _---11:
0:

INTERRUPT MASK SET
INTERRUPT MASK RESET

OCW1

0 0 1 NON-SPECIFIC EOI
0 1 1 SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BITS L2~Lo)
1 0 1 ROTATE ON NON-SPECIFIC EOI
1 0 0 SETS AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP
0 0 0 RESET AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP

} EOI

} AUTOMATIC ROTATION

1

1 1

ROTATE ON SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BIT L2~Lo)

1

1 0

SETS PRIORITY COMMAND (SET LOWEST PRIORITY BIT L,-Lo)

0

1 0

NO OPERATION

:J

} SPECIFIC ROTATION

10 LEVEL TO BE ACTED UPON

0

0

I

0

1

R

0,

Ao

1

SL

EOI

I

0

06

I

0
03

I

L2
0,

I

0
0

I

I

I

L,

0,

Lo
Do

1 2 3
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1

4 5 6

7

1

1

1 1

0 0 1 1
1 0 1

0

I

OCW2

0
1

X

NO OPERATION

0

RESET SPECIAL MASK MODE

1

1

SETS SPECIAL MASK MODE

J1

LO

L

0
Ao

I

0

X

NO OPERATION

1

0

SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN IRR

1

1

SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN ISR

I
0
0,

ESMM 1 SMM 1
D6

D5

0

1

1 '1
03

P

0,

1

RR

0,

I
1 RIS

Do

OCW3

Fig. 4

4-78

POLL COMMAND
NO POLL COMMAND

Operation command word format

• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSI!>

MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

FUNCTION OF COMMAND
Interrupt masks
The mask register contains a mask for each individual interrupt request. These interrupt masks can be changed by
programming using OCW1.

Special mask mode
When an interrupt request is acknowledged and the ISR bit
corresponding to the interrupt request is not reset by EOI
command (which means an interrupt service routine is
executing) lower priority interrupt requests are ignored.
In special mask mode interrupt requests received at interrupt request inputs which are masked by OCW1 are disabled, but interrupts at all levels that are not masked are
possible. This means that in the mask mode all level of interrupts are possible or individual inputs can be selectively
programmed so all interrupts at the selected inputs are disabled. The masks are stored in IMR and special mask is
set/reset by executing OCW3.

2. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced
the software must check ISR to determine if there are
additional interrupts requests to be serviced. If the ISR
bit is 0 the EOI command may be sent to the master too.
But if it is not 0 the EOI command should not be sent to
the master.

Poll mode
The poll mode is useful when the internal enable flip-flop of
the microprocessor is reset, and interrupt input is disabled.
Service to the device is achieved by a programmer initiative
using a poll command. In the poll mode the M5L8259AP at
the next RD pulse puts 8 bits on the data bus which indicates whether there is an interrupt request and reads the
priority level. The format of the information on the data bus is
as shown below.

Binary code of the highest priority

Buffered mode
The buffered mode will structure the M5L8259AP to send an
enable signal on SP/EN to enable the data bus buffer, when
the data bus requires the data bus buffer or when cascading
mode is used. In this mode, when data bus output of the
M5L8259AP is enabled, the SP/EN output becomes lowlevel. This allows the M5L8259AP to be programmed
whether it is a master or a slave by software. The buffered
mode is set/reset by executing ICW4.

Fully nested mode
The fully nested mode is the mode when no mode is specified and is the usual operational mode. In this mode, the
priority of interrupt request terminals is fixed from the lowest
IR7 to the highest IRa. When an interrupt request is acknowledged the CALL instruction and vectored address are released onto the data bus. At the same time the ISR bit corresponding to the accepted interrupt request is set. This ISR
bit remains set until it is reset by the input of an EOI command or until the trailing edge of last INTA pulse in AEOI
mode. While an interrupt service routine is being executed,
interrupt requests of same or lower priority are disabled
while the bit of ISR remains set. The priorities can be
changed by OCW2.

Special fully nested mode
The special fully nested mode will be used when cascading
is used and this mode will be programmed to the master by
ICW4. The special fully nested mode is the same as the fully
nested mode with the following two exceptiol1s.
1. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced,
this slave is not locked out from the master priority logic.
Higher priority interrupts within the slave will be recognized by the master and the master will initiate an interrupt request to the CPU. In general in the normal fully
nested mode, a serviced slave is locked out from the
master's priority, and so higher priority interrupts from the
same slave are not serviced.

D5

D,

Do

When 1=0 (no interrupt request), W 2-Wo is 111. The poll
is valid from WR to RD and interrupt is frozen. This mode
can be used for processing common service routines for interrupts from more than one line and does not require any
INTA sequence. Poll command is issued by setting P= 1 in
OCW3.

End of interrupt (EOI) and specific EOI (SEOI)
An EOI commal1d is required by the M5L8259AP to reset the
ISR bit. So an· EOI command must be issued to the
M5L8259AP before returning from an interrupt service
routil1e.
When AEOI is selected in ICW4, the ISR bit can be reset
at the trailing edge of the last INTA pulse. When AEOI is not
selected the ISR bit is reset by the EOI command issued to
the M5L8259AP before returning from an interrupt service
routine. When programmed in the cascade mode the EOI
command must be issued to the master once and to corresponding slave once.
There are two forms of EOI command, specific EOI and
non-specific EOI. When the M5L8259AP is used in the fully
nested mode, the ISR bit being serviced is reset by the EOI
command. When the non-specific EOI is issued the
M5L8259AP will automatically reset the highest ISR bit of
those that are set. Other ISR bits are reset by a specific EOI
and the bit to be reset is specified in the EOI by the program. The SEal is useful in modes other than fully nested
mode. When the M5L8259AP is in special mask mode ISR
bits masked in IMR are not reset by EOI. EOI and SEal are
selected when OCW2 is executed.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-79

I

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

Automatic EOI (AEOI)
In the AEOI mode the M5L8259AP executes non-specific
EOI command automatically at the trailing edge of the last
INTA pulse. When AEOI=l in ICW4, the M5L8259AP is put in
AEOI mode continuously until reprogrammed in ICW4.
The AEOI mode can only be used in a master M5L8259AP
and not a slave.

Automatic rotation
The automatic rotation mode is used in applications where
many interrupt requests of the same level are expected
such as multichannel communication systems. In this mode
when an interrupt request is serviced, that request is
assigned the lowest priority so that if there are other interrupt requests they will have higher priorities. This means
that the next request on the interrupt request being serviced
must wait until the other interrupt requests are serviced
(worst case is waiting for all 7 of the other controllers to be
serviced). The priority and serving status are rotated as
shown in Fig. 5.

BEFORE ROTATION
IS,

Is.,

Reading the M5L8259AP internal status
The contents of IRR and ISR can be read by the CPU with
status read. When an OCW3 is issued to the M5L8259AP and
an RD pulse issued the contents of IRR or ISR can be released onto the data bus. A special command is not required to read the contents of IMR. The contents of IMR can
be released onto the data bus by issuing an RD pulse when
Ao = 1. There is no need to issue a read register command
every time the IRR or ISR is to be read. Once a read register command is received by the M5L8259AP, it remains valid
until it is changed. Remember that the programmer must
issue a poll command every time to check whether there is
an interrupt request and read the priority level. Polling overrides status read when P=l, RR=l in OCW3.

ISs

IS,

IS,

IS,

IS,

ISo

HIGHEST PRIORITY

i

I

AFTER ROTATION
(IR3 WAS SERVICED AND ALL OTHER
PRIORITIES ROTATED CORRESPONDINGLY)
IS,

ISs

Is.,

IS,

IS,

IS,

ISo

I

HIGHEST PRIORITY

i

PRIORITY
STATUS

Fig. 5

IS,

I

ISR STATUS

LOWEST PRIORITY

l
7

I

An example of priority rotation

In the non-specific EOI command automatic rotation mode is
selected when R=l, EOI=l, SL=O in OCW2. The internal
priority status is changed by EOI or AEOI commands. The
rotation priority A flip-flop is set by R=l, EOI=O and SL=O
which is useful when the M5L8259AP is used in the AEOI
mode.

Specific rotation
Specific rotation gives the user versatile capabilities in interrupt controlled operations. It serves in those applications in
which a sp.ecific device's interrupt priority must be altered.
As opposed to automatic rotation which automatically sets
priorities, specific rotation is completely user controlled.

4-80

Selection of level or edge triggered mode 01 the M5L8259AP
is made by ICW1, When using edge triggered mode not only
is a transition from low to high required, but the high-level
must be held until the first INTA. If the high-level is not held
until the first INTA, the interrupt request will be treated as if
it were input on IR7, except that the ISR bit is not set. When
level triggered mode is used the functions are the same as
edge triggered mode except that the transition from low to
high is not required to trigger the interrrupt request.
In the level triggered mode and using AEOI mode
together, if the high-level is held too long the interrupt will
occur immediately. To avoid this situation interrupts should
be kept disabled until the end of the service routine or until
the IR input returns low. In the edge triggered mode this
type of mistake is not possible because the interrupt request
is edge triggered.

(IR3 THE HIGHEST PRIORITY

LOWEST PRIORITY
PRIORITY
STATUS

Level triggered mode/Edge triggered mode

REQUIRING SERVICE)

I

ISR STATUS

That is, the user selects the interrupt lelter'that is to receive
lowest or highest priority. Priority changes can be executed
during an EOI command.

Cascading
The M5L8259AP can be interconnected in a system 01 one
master with up to eight slaves to handle up to 64 priority
levels. A system of three units that can be used with the
8085A is shown in Fig. 6.
The master can select a slave by outputting its identification code through the three cascade lines. The INT output of
each slave is connected to the master interrupt request inputs. When an interrupt request of one of the slaves is to be
serviced the master outputs the identification code of the
slave through the cascade lines, so the slave will release
the vectored address on the next INTA pulse.
The cascade lines of the master are nomally low, and will
contain the slave identification code from the leading edge
--01 the first INTA pulse to the trailing edge of the last INTA
pulse. The master and slave can be programmed to work in
different modes. ICWs must be issued for each device, and
EOI commands must be issued twice: once for the master
and once for the corresponding slave. Each CS 01 the
M5L8259AP requires an address decoder.

..• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

16

ADDRESS BUS
CONTROL BUS
DATA BUS

8
3

3

3

8

8

8

CASo
CAS,

M5LB259AP
MASTER

CS

I t
7

6

Ao

INT

CASo
M5L8259AP
SLAVE

CAS,
CAS,

CAS,

SP/EN M, M6 M5 M, M, M, M,Mo

Vee

l

I

j

INT

Ao

CS

SP/EN

! ! !!

6

5 4 3 2 1 0

SP/EN

tll!!l!!

GrD

13!

7

L.. CAS,
'------+ CAS,

GrD

r-

INT

-CS Ao
CASo
M5LB259AP
SLAVE

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

!!!!!!t!

II

----------------------------------~y------------------------------------~

INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS

Fig. 6

Cascading the M5L8259AP

DEN
DATA BUS
ADDRESS BUS

Do -0,
(Note 1) ADo- AD,
RDOR-I
ORC

8

0 0-0,

~ Ao

WROR~
WC

-1-NTA

M/iO

I

10.

Ao
A,
A,
A,
A5
A6

.......

.Joo..y

.........
.......
....

AI

II

Fig. 7

REi

t5v

OE
TO BUS BUFFER

WR SP/EN

iN'fA

os

LS30
i..-

s::

»-----

' ' " "~[--REQUEST
INPUTS

Note 1

INTR

INT

-

r
'"
'"

-~

N

IRo
IR,
IR,
IR,
IR,
IR5
IR6
IR,

'"

<0

~
"1J

0 0-0, of the M5L8259AP are direct connected with ADD-AD, of the 8086.

Example of interfaCe with the 8086

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

4-81

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

INSTRUCTION SET

~
Number

Instruction code

Function

Mnemonic

Do ICW4 required?

AD

D7

D6

D5

D.

D3

D2

D,

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

A5
A5
A5
A5
0
0
0
0
A5
A5
A5
A5
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0

A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7

A6
A6
A6
A6
A6

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

leWl
leW1
leWl
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1

1

1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

17
18
19

ICW2
ICW3 M
ICW3 S

1
1
1

A'5
S7
0

A,.

A13
S5
0

A'2
S.
0

An
S3
0

Ala
S2
ID2

A9
S,
ID,

As
So
IDa

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

ICW4 A
ICW4 B
ICW4 C
ICW4 D
ICW4 E
ICW4 F
ICW4 G
ICW4 H
ICW4 I
ICW4 J
ICW4 K
ICW4 L
ICW4 M
ICW4 N
ICW40
ICW4 P
ICW4 NA
ICW4 NB
ICW4 NC
ICW4 ND
ICW4 NE
ICW4 NF
ICW4 NG
ICW4 NH
ICW4 NI
ICW4 NJ
ICW4 NK
ICW4 NL
ICW4 NM
ICW4 NN
ICW4 NO
ICW4 NP

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1

52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

OCW1
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW3
OCW3
OCW3
OCW3
OCW3

1

M7
0
0
1
1
1

M6

0

0

1

1
0
0
0
1
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8

o·

As
A6

As
A6
A6
A6
A6

As
As
As
As

Ss
0

0
1

0
1

0

Note:

4-82

E
SE
RE
RSE
R
CR
RS
P
RIS
RR
SM
RSM

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0

0

0

0

0
0

0
0
0

0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0

0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

M.

0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0

0
0

0

0

0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
M5
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1

0

0

0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

0

0
0
1
1

0
0
1
1
0

0
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
1

0
1
0
1

0
1

1
1
1
1

0
0

0

1
1

0

M3

M2

M,

Mo

0

0

0

0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1

L2
0
L2

L,

La

1
1

Single

Trigger

4
4
4
4
8
8
8

y
y

E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
y
y
N
N
y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N

8
4
4
4
4
8

8
8

8
8-bihvectored address

Slave connections (master mode)
Slave identification code (slave mode)

SFNM

0

Intervel

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
y,
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
y
Y
Y
y
y
y
y
y

BUF

AEOI

8086

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
Y
Y
N
N
y
y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
y
Y
N
N
Y
y
N
N
y
Y

N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
y
N
Y
N
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

y
Y
Y
y
y
y
y
y

S
S
S
S
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
S
S
S
S
M
M
M
M

Interrupt mask

EOI
SEOI

0

0

Rotate on Non-Specific EOI command (Automatic rotation)

L,

La

Rotate on Specific EOI command (Specific rotation)

0

0

0
L2
1

0
L,
0
1
1
0
0

0
0
La
0
1
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

Y: yes, N: no, E: edge, L: level, M: master, S: slave

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

Rotate in AEOI Mode (SET)
Rotate in AEOI Mode (CLEAR)
Set priority without EOI

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Parameter

-0.
---~

V,

Input voltage

Vo

Output voltage

Pd

Power dissipation

T opr

Operating

Tstg

Storage temper ature range

free~air

With respect to Vss

-

5~7

V

----~---

-0.

5~7

-0.

5~7

Ta=25°C

---~---

V
V

mW

1000
-20~75

'c

-65~150

°C

temperature range

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

Unit

Limits

Conditions

Supply voltage

Vcc

(Ta=~20-75°C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Unit

Parameter

Nom

Min

Max
--~-

4.5

5

V

5.5

Vec

Supply voltage

Vss

Supply voltage

V'H

High-level input voltage

2

Vcc +O.5

V

V'L

Low-level input voltage

-0.5

0.8

V

--

V

0

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol

' [ - - - -- - -

II

(Ta=~20-75°C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)

Parameter

Limits

'---

Test conditions

Unit

Typ

Min

High-level output voltage

V OH

-------

VOH(INT)

High-level output voltage, interrupt requset output

IOH=~400"A

2.4

IOH=~100"A

3.5

IOH=-400"A

2.4

--

Max

--

V
V

IOL=2.2mA

0.45

VOL

Low-level output voltage

Ice

Supply current from Vee

I'H

High-level input current

VI=VCC

-10

10

III

Low-level input current

V,=OV

-10

10

1-------

85

---

V

mA
f.lA
-~

f.lA
/-lA

---

Vss=O, V,=O. 45-5. 5V

-10

loz

Off-state output current

('H('R)

High-level input current, interrupt request inputs

Vr=Vcc

(.L(.R)

Low-level input current, interrupt request inputs

V,=OV

Output capacitance

Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C

Input/output capacitance

Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C

Ci

.-

Ci/o

TIMING REQUIREMENTS

10

-t--I
.- I
10

,-

-300

I

/-lA
/-lA

10

pF

20

pF

-

Unit

(T a=-20-75"C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative

Symbol

Limits

Parameter

Symbol

Typ

Min

Max

t WLWH

290

ns

tSU(A-W)

Address setup time before write

t AHwL

0

ns

thew_A)

Address hold time after write

tWHAX

0

ns

tSU(DQ_W)

Data setup time before write

t DVWH

240

ns

th(w-DQ)

Data hold time after write

tWHDX

0

ns

tW(R)

Read pulse width

tRLRH

235

ns

~w~

Write pulse width
.~-

--

tSU(A_R)

Address setup time before read

tAHRL

0

ns

th(R_A)

Address hold time after read

tRHAX

0

ns

tWC'R)

Interrupt request input width, low-level time, edge triggered mode

t JLJH

100

ns

tSU(CAS-'NTA)

Cascade setup time after INTA (slave)

t CV•AL

55

ns

trec(w)

Write recovery time

tWHRL

190

ns

Read recovery time

tRHRL

160

ns

500

ns

625

ns

treCCR)

--

End of command to next command (Not same command type)

td(RW)

End of INTA sequence to next INTA sequence

t CHCL

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

4-83

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

Limits

Symbol

Typ

Min

Unit
Max
200

ns

100

ns

tAHDV

200

ns

Propagation time from read to enable signal output

tRLEL

125

ns

tPLHCR-EN)

Propagation time from read to disable signal output

tRHEH

150

ns

t plH ( IR-INT)

Propagation time from interrupt request input to interrupt request output

tJHIH

350

ns

tPLV(INTA-CAS)

Propagation time from INTA to cascade output (master)

tlALGV

565

ns

t pzv ( CAS-DQ)

Data output enable time after cascade output (slave)

tCVDV

300

ns

tPZV(R_DQ)

Data output enable time after read

tRLDV

tpvzeA-DQ)

Data output disable time after read

tRHDZ

tpzvCA-DQ)

Data output enable time after address

tPHLCR-EN)

Notel:

INTA signal is considered read signal
CS signal is considered address sianal
Input pulse level
0.45-2, 4V
Input pulse rise time
20ns
Input pulse fall time
20ns
Reference level input
V,H =2V, V,l =0. 8V
output VoH=2V, Val =0. 8V
Load capacitance
Cl =100pF, where SP/EN
pin is 15pF

10

V-

2.4-y:

0.45-A.:;:~..: 8_ _ _.:;:0.~:A-

TIMING DIAGRAM
Write Mode

~

K
thlw-Ai

tSU(A-W)

~

\

tw(w)

r- '--

r

,l

~

---

thlw-bQi

tSU(DQ-W)

It

:~

Read Mode

CS, Ao

}:
thlR-Ai

tSU(A-Rl

K

tW(R)

\

JI
tPVZ(A-OQ)

tpZV(R-OQ)
tpZV(A-DQ}

/11

~\

~

W

tpHL(R-EN)

tPLH(R-EN)

I

\

4-84

r

• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

Interrupt Sequence
IR

tPlH(IR-INT)

INT

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

II

(Note 3)

tpLV(INTA-CAS)

I"'

~Note

2)

Other Timing

WR

RD
INTA

WR

RD
INTA

Note 1
2
3

8086, 8088 mode
8085A mode
8086,8088 mode is in high-impedance state, pOinter is released during the next INTA.
When in single 8085A mode, data is released by all INTAs. When master, CALL instruction is released during the first INTA, high impedance state...QLJ.ring the second and
third INTA. When slave, high impedance state during the firstlNTA, vectored address
is released during the second and third INTA.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-85

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

DESCRIPTION
The M5L8279P-5 is a programmable keyboard and display
interface device that is designed to be used in combination
with an 8-bitl16-bit microprocessor. This device is fabricated
with N-channel silicon-gate ED-MOS process technology
and is packed in a 40-pin OIL package. It needs only single
5V power supply.

RETURN LINE
INPUTS

•

R2 ~ 1
R3 ~ 2

Vee

15v)

CLOCK INPUT ClK ~ 3

REQud~T6n~~8t

Single 5V supply voltage
Keyboard mode
Sensor matrix mode
Strobed mode
Internally provided key bounce protection circuit
Programmable debounce time
2-key 10ckoutiN-key roUover
8-character keyboard FI FO
Internally contained 16 X 8-bit display RAM
Programmable right and left entry

~

4

R4~

5

R,

8

INT

~

SCAN TIMING
OUTPUTS

RESET INPUT RESET ~ 9
READ S~~~~f RD ~ 10
WRITE STI~~~f WR ~ 11
Do~

DISPLAY (8)
OUTPUTS

12

DISPLAY (A)
OUTPUTS

BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

APPLICATIONS
•
•

I

RETURN LINE
INPUTS

FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)

IOV) Vss

Microcomputer I/O device
64 contact key input device for such items as electronic
cash registers
Dual 8- or single 16-alphanumeric display

FUNCTION
The total chip, consisting of a keyboard interface and a display interface, can be programmed by eight 8-bit commands. The keyboard portion is provided with a 64-bit key

Outline 40P4

debounce buffer and an 8 X 8-bit FIFO/SENSOR RAM. It
operates in anyone of the scanned keyboard mode, scanned sensor matrix mode or strobed entry mode. The display
portion is provided with a 16 X 8-bit display RAM that can
be organized into a dual 16X 4 configuration. Also, an 8-digit
display configuration is possible by means of programming.

BLOCK DIAGRAM
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS

CONTROL/DATA SELECT INPUT
CHIP SELECT INPUT
WRITE STROBE INPUT
READ STROBE INPUT

I
I

RETURN LINE INPUTS

I
I

-~

4-86

• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

PIN DISCRIPTION
pin

Input or

Name

Functions

output

- - -f - - - - -

---------

----------

These are the return lines which are connected with the scan lines through the keys or sensor switches,
Ro~R7

and are used for 8-bit input in the strobed entry mode. They are provided with internal pullups to maintain

In

Return line inpuls

them high until a switch closure pulls one low. They become active at low-level.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --------------------- - - -

ClK

Clock input

Clock signal from the system which is used to generate internal timing.

in

_.-----------

--~.--~-----~--

When there is any data in the FIFO during the keyboard mode or the strobed mode, this signal turns high-

INT

Interrupt request output

--

-

Out

level so as to request interrupt to the CPU. It turns low each time data is read, but if any data remains in the
FIFO it will turn high again and request interrupt to the CPU. End Interrupt command resets INT signal.
---,-,,---------,-...

-~----~~----.--

--------,--.--,,---

Resets the chip when this signal is high. After the reset it assumes 16-digit, left-entry, encode display and

RESET

Reset input

RD

Read strobe input

WR

Write strobe 'input

2-key lockout mode, and the prescale value of the clock becomes 31. The display RAM, however, is not

In

cleared.

- - - - - - - - ------- t--------------- ... -.------

Do~D7

In

Functions to control data transfer to the data bus.

In

.-_._--------.----

-

In/out

Control/data select
input

-

BD

1

Blanking display output

In

When low, It indicates they are data (in/out).

-Out

----.-----"--_..- .

--

When this signal is high, it indicates that the signals in and out are either command (in) or status (out).

In

Chip select input
CS
f----- 1---------

-----

All data and commands between the CPU and the chip are transferred through these lines.
-

Ao

------------

Functions to control command/data transfer from the data bus.

--- - - -

Bidirectional data bus

-----------

------

Chip select is enabled when this signal is low.
-----------------------------------------~------

This signal is used in preventing overlapped display during digit swiching. It also may be brought to lowlevel by display blanking command.
~-----,---

, These output ports can be used either as a dual 4-bit port or a single 8-bit port depending on an applica-

OAo-OA3

Display (A) and

OBo-OB3

(8) outputs

Out

by means of clear command.

c----SO~S3

tion, and the contents of the display RAM are output synchronizing with the scan timing Signals. These two
4-bit ports may be blanked independently. Blanking may be activated with either high- or low-level signal

--

These signals are used to scan the key switch, the sensor matrix or the display digit. They can be either
Scan timing outputs

Out

----

1---

decoded or encoded, but it requres an external decoder in the encode mode. Signals SO'-"'S3 are all turned
to low-level when RESET is high.

----------

In the keyboard mode, the shift input becomes the second highest bit of the key input information and is

SHIFT

Shift input

In

stored in the FIFO. This input is ignored in the other modes. It is constantly kept at high-level by an internal
pull resistor. The signal is active at high-level.

1--

----'--

lin the keyboard mode, the control input becomes the most significant bit of the key input information and is

CNTl

Control input

In

stored in the FIFO. The signal is active at high-level. In the strobed entry mode, it becomes the strobe sig-

I nal and stores the', return

input data in the FIFO at the rising edge of the input. It affects nothing internal in

i the sensor mode. It is constantly kept at high-level by an internal pullup resistor.

OPERATION·
One of the three operating modes, the keyboard mode is
the most common, and allows programmed 2-key lockout
and N-key rollover. Encoded timing Signals corresponding
with key input are stored in the FIFO through the keydebounce logic, and the debouncing time of the key is also
programmable. In the sensor mode, the contents of the 8 X
8 key contacts are constantly stored in the FI FO/sensor
RAM, generating an interrupt Signal to the CPU each time
there is a change in the contents. In the strobed entry mode,
the CNTL input signal is used as a strobe for storing the B
return line inputs to the FIFO/sensor RAM.
The display portion is provided with a 16 X B-bit display
RAM that can be organized into a dual 16 X 4-bit configura-

tion. Also, an 8-digit display configuration is possible by
means of programming. Input to the register can be performed by either left or right entry modes. In the auto increment mode, read and write can be carried out after designating the starting address only.
Both the keyboard and display sections are scanned by
common scan timing signals that are derived from the basic
clock pulse. This frequency-dividing ratio is changeable by
means of programming. There are decode and encode modes for the scanning mode; timing signals that are decoded
from the lower 2 bits of the scan counter are output in the
decode mode, while the 4-bit binary output from the scan
counter is decoded externally in the encode mode.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

4-87

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

COMMAND DESCRIPTION

4.

There are eight commands provided for programming the
operating modes of the M5LB279P-5. These commands are
sent on the data bus with the signal CS in low-level and the
signal Ao in high-level and are stored in the M5L8279P-5 at
the rising edge of the signal WR. The order of the command
execution is arbitrary.
1. Mode Set Command
MSB

C~e:

LSB

lolololDIDIKIKIKI

~ (Display mode set command)

o0
o1

8-8-bit character display-left entry
16-8-bit character display-left entryl
8-8-bit character display-right entry
1 0
1 1 16-8-bit character display-right entry
KKK (Keyboard mode set command)
o 0 0 Encoded display keyboard mode - 2-key lockoutl
0 1 Decoded display keyboard mode - 2-key lockout
1 0 Encoded display keyboard mode - N-key rollover
o 1 1 Decoded display keyboard mode - N-key rollover
100 Encoded display, sensor mode
1 0 1 Decoded display, sensor mode
1 1 0 Encoded display, strobed entry mode
1 1 1 Decoded display, strobed entry mode

o
o

Note 1: Default after reset.

2.

Read Display RAM Command
MSB

LSB

1 0 1 ' I, 1AliA 1 A 1 A 1 A 1

Code :

This command is used to specify that the following data
readout (CS'Ao'RD) is from the display RAM. As long as
data is to be read from the display RAM, no additional commands are necessary.
The data AAAA is the value with which the display RAM
read/write counter is set, and it specifies the address of the
display RAM to be read or written next.
AI is the auto-increment flag. Turning AI to "1" makes the
address automatically incremented after the second read/
write operation. This auto-increment bit· does not affect the
auto-increment of FIFO readout in the sensor mode.
5. Write Display RAM Command
MSB
Code:

I,

LSB

1 0 1 0 1AliA 1 A 1 A 1 A 1

With this command, following display RAM read/write
addressing is achieved without changing the data readout
source (FIFO or display RAM). Meaning of AI and AAAA are
identical with read display RAM command.
6. Display Write inhibit/Blanking Command
MSB

LSB

1,101

Code:

1X

Program Clock Command
MSB
Code :

A

1 0 1 0 l i p 1 pip 1 pip 1

MSB

10

A

B

LSB
I,

1 0 1AI 1 X 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 X =

Don't care

The IW is a write inhibit bit to the display RAM that corresponds with the output A or B. Inhibit is activated by turning
the IW "1".
The BL is used in blanking the out A or B. Blanking is
activated by turning the BL "1 ". Setting both BL flags makes
the signal BD low so that it can be used in 8-bit display
mode.
Resetting the flags makes all IW and BL turn "0".
7. Clear Command
MBS
Code:

LSB

I, I,

10

IColColColcFlcAI

CD: Clears the display RAM.
CD CD CD

o

This command is used to specify that the following data
readout (CS'Ao'RD) is from the FIFO. As long as data is to
be read from the FIFO, no additional commands are necessary.
AI and AAA are used only in the sensor mode. AAA designates the address of the FIFO to be read, and AI is the
auto-increment flag. Turning AI to "1" makes the address
automatically incremented after the second read operation.
This auto-increment bit does not affect the auto-increment of
the display RAM.

4-88

B

LSB

The .external clock is divided by the prescaler value PPPPP
designated by this command to obtain the basic internal frequency.
When the internal clock is set to 100kHz, it will give a
5.1 ms keyboard scan time and a 10.3ms debounce time.
The prescale value that can be specified by PPPPP is from
2 to 31. In case PPPPP is 00000 or 00001, the prescale is set
to 2. Default after a reset pulse is 31, but the prescale value
is not cleared by the clear command.
3. Read FIFO Command

Code:

IlwllwlBLIBLI X=Don'tcare

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

X

X

o

X

a

No specific performance
Entire contents of the display RAM are
turned "0".
The contents of the display RAM are
turned 20H (00100000 = OA30A20AIOAo
OB30B2 0B10Bo) .
Entire contents of the display RAM are
turned "1 ".

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL82r9P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

CF

:

CA

:

Clears the status word and resets the interrupt signal
(INT).

Clears the display RAM and the status word and resets
the interrupt signal (INT).
Clearing condition of the display RAM is determined by
the lower 2 bits of the CD'
Clearing the display RAM needs some time (- 160
fl second) and causes the display-unavailable status (DU)
in the status word to be "1 ". The display RAM is not accessible for the duration of this time, even if the display mode
was in 8-digit display mode or a decoded mode.
As both C F and C A function to reset the internal keydebounce counter, the key input under counting is ignored,
and the internal FI FO counter is reset to make the interrupt
signal low-level.
C A resets the internal timing counter, forcing 80- 83 to
start from 83828180 = 0000 after the execution of the command.
8.

Status word
MSB

NNN:
F:

U:

0:

End Interrupt/Error Mode 8et Command
MSB
Code.

8/E:

~B

11 11 11 1 E 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 X 1

~=

Don't care

In the sensor matrix mode, an interrupt signal is generated
at the beginning of the next key scan time to inhibit further
writing to the FI FO when there is a change in the sensor
switch. The interrupt request output INT is reset when the
sensor RAM is read with the Auto-increment flag "0", or the
execution 01 this command.
When E is kept in "0", depression of any sensor makes
the second highest bit of the status word "1 ". When E is kept
in "1 ", the status is kept "0" all the time.
When E is programmed to "1" in the N-key rollover mode,
the execution of this command makes the chip operate in
special error mode, during which time depression of more
than two keys in a key debounce time causes an error and
sets the second highest bit of the status word "1".

LSB

IDulSIEI 0 1 u1 FIN 1 N1 NI

DU:

Note 2

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

Indicates the number of characters in the FIFO
during the keyboard and strobed entry modes.
Indicates that the FIFO is filled up with 8 characters.
The number of characters existing in the FIFO ( 0
- 8 characters) can be known by means of the
bits NNN and F (FNNN = OOOO-FNNN = 1000).
Underrun error flag
This flag is set when a master CPU tries to read
an empty FIFO.
Overrun error flag
This flag is set when another character is strobed
into a full FI FO.
The bits U and 0 cannot be cleared by status
read. They will be cleared by the clear command.
8ensorclosure/multiple error flag
When "111 EXXXX" is executed by turning E = 0 ,
the bit 8/E in the status word is set when there is
at least one sensor closure.
When "111 EXXXX" is executed by turning E = 1
(special error mode), the bit 8/E is set when
there are more than two key depressions made in
a key scan time.
Display unavailable
This flag is set when a clear display command is
executed, and announces that the display RAM is
not accessible.
The underrun, overrun and special error flags are reset by

either executing clear command (CF= 1 ) or reading status
word.

4-89

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

CPU INTERFACE
1. Command Write
A command is written on the rising edge of the signal WR
with CS low and Ao high.
2. Data Write
Data is written to the display RAM on the rising edge of the
signal WR with CS and Ao low.
The address of the display RAM is also incremented on
the rising edge of the signal WR if AI is set for the display
RAM.
3. Status Read
The status word is read when CS and RD are low and Ao is
high. The status word appears on the data bus as long as
the signal RD is low.
4. Data Read
Data is read from either the FIFO or the display RAM with
CS = RD = 0 and Ao = 0 . The source of the data (FIFO or
display RAM) is decided by the latest command (read display or read FIFO). The data read appears on the data bus
as long as the signal RD is low.
The trailing edge of the signal RD increments the
address of the FIFO or the display RAM when AI is set. After
the reset, data will be read from the FIFO, however.

for a maximum key matrix due to the Hmit of timing signals.
However, both the key scan cycleifancFthe key debounce
cycle are the same as in the encode'(if'm,ode.)
1. 2-Key Lockout (Scanned Keyb'O'ai'd mode)
The detection of a new key closure resets the internal debounce counter and starts counting, At the end of a key debounce cycle, the key is checked and entered into the FIFO
if it is still down. An entry in the FIFO sets the INT output
high. If any other keys are depressed in a key debounce cycle, the internal key debounce counter is reset each time it
encounters a new key. ThUs only a single-key depression
within a key debounce duration is accepted, but all keys are
ignored when more than two keys are depressed at the
same time.

Example 1 : Accepting two successive key depressions
KEY]

KEY2

t.

Note 3 :

KEY DEBOUNCE CYCLE
: Debounce counter reset

: Key input

CS

Ao

RD

WR

Operation

0

1

1

0

Command write

0

0

1

0

Data write

Example 2 : Overlapped depression of three keys
KEY]

0

]

0

1

Status read

0

0

0

1

Data read

1

X

X

X

No operation

._------

KEY2
KEY DEBOUNCE CYCLE

KEY3

t

KEYBOARD INTERFACE
Keyboard interface is done by the scan timing signals (So~
S3) , the return line inputs (Ro ~ R7), the SHIFT and the
CNTRl inputs.
In the decoded mode, the low order of two bits of the internal scan counter are decoded and come out on the timing
pins (So~S3). In the encoded mode, the four binary bits of
the scan counter are directly output on the timing pins, thus
a 3-to-8 decoder must be employed to generate keyboard
scan timing.
The return line inputs (Ro~R7), the SHIFT and the CNTl
inputs are pulled up high by internal pullup transistors until a
switch closure pulls one low.
The internal key debounce logic works for a 54-key matrix that is obtained by combining the return line inputs with
the scan timing.
For the keyboard interface, M5l8279P-5 has four distinctive modes that allow various kinds of applications. In the following explanation, a "key scan cycle" is the time needed to
scan a 54-key matrix, and a "key debounce cycle" needs a
duration of two "key scan" cycles. (In the decoded mode 32
keys, unlike 64 keys in the encoded mode, can be employed

4-90

u--u

Note 4

• 'MiTs1.tBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

Only key 2 is acceptable

t

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARDjDISPLA Y INTERFACE

2. N-Key Rollover (Scanned Keyboard Mode)
Each key depression is treated independently from all
others so as to allow overlapped key depression. Detection
of a new key depression makes the internal key debounce
counter reset and start to count in. a same manner as in the
case of 2-key lockout. But, in N-key rollover, other key closures are entirely ignored within a key debounce cycle so
that depression of any other keys would not reset the key
debounce counter. In this way, overlapped key depression is
allowed so as to enable the following key input:

KEY 1

KEY2

KEY3

The scanned key input signal does not always reflect the
actual key depressing action, as the key matrix is scanned
by the timing signal.
With N-key rollover, there is a mode provided with which
error is caused when there are more than two key inputs in
a key debounce cycle, which can be programmed by using
the end interrupt/error mode set command, In this mode
(special error mode), recognition of the above error sets the
I NT signal to "1" and sets the bit S/E in the status word.
In case two key entries are made separately in more
than a debounce cycle, there would be no problem, as key
depression is clearly identified. And no problem exists for 2key lockout, as the both keys are recognized invalid.

3. Sensor Matrix Mode
The key debounce logic is disabled in this mode. As the image of the sensor switch is kept in the FIFO, any change in
this status is reported to the CPU by means of the interrupt
signal INT. Although a debounce circuit is not used in this
mode, it has an advantage in that the CPU is able to know
how long and when the sensor was depressed.
In the sensor matrix mode with the bit E
of the end
interrupt/error mode set command, the second most significant bit of the status word (S/E bit) is set to "1" when any
sensor switch is depressed.
Any sensor change detected by the M5L8279P-5 in one
key scan cycle causes only once I NT generation at the 'first
timing of the next scan cycle.
4. Strobe Mode
The data is entered into the FIFO from the return lines (Ro~
R7 ) at the rising edge of a CNTL pulse. The INT goes high
while any data exists in the FIFO, in the same manner as in
the keyboard mode. The key debounce circuit will not
operate.
Formats of data entered into the FIFO in each of the
above modes are described in the following:

=a

Keyboard matrix
MSB

LSB

I ~ ~

I

CNTL

I
• ENCODED RETURN
INPUT
SHIFT SCAN TIMING SIGNALS (S,. S,. AND So)

Sensor matrix mode
Example of error (Special error mode)

KEY2

KEY1
KEY 2

I

M~

ur---.,Ur - - -

KEY1 ~

u

I

U

].,E;-----.
..j ~~6LSECAN

--U

u-

CNTL AND SHIFT INPUTS ARE IGNORED

Storobe mode
MSB

KEY SCAN
CYCLE

~B

I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I

LSB

I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I
CNTL AND SHIFT INPUTS ARE IGNORED

KEY DEBOUNCE CYCLE

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

4-91

II

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARDjDISPLA Y INTERFACE

DISPLAY INTERFACE
The display interface is done by eight display outputs (OAo
-OA3, OBo-OB3), a blanking signal (BO), and scan timing
outputs (8o-S3).
The relation between the data bus and the display outputs is as shown below:

Clearing the display RAM is not achieved by the reset
signal (9-pin) but requires the execution of the clear command.
The timing diagrams for both the encoded and decoded
modes are shown below.
For the encoded mode, a 3-to-8 or 4-to-16 decoder is required, according to whether eight or sixteen digit display
used.

Timing relations of So, BO, and display outputs (OAoOA3, OBo-OB3) are shown below.

So (Enc::lL_ _ _..J
mode)

II

So

s,

L

S3

L

(2) Decoded mode
So
S,
S,
S3

Note 5

4-92

iI

II

Note 6 : Values of the output data shown in the slanted line areas are
decided upon the clear command executed last to become
the value of the display RAM after the reset. The values in the
slanted areas after reset will go low. In the same manner, the
values OAo-OA3, OBo-OB3 are dependent on the clear command executed last. When the both A and B are blanked, the
signal BD will be in low-level.

(1) Encoded mode

So

II

Here Pw is 640" s if the internal clock frequency is set to
100kHz.

',. • MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

KEY ENTRY METHODS
1. Left
Address
position
address

Entry
0 in the display RAM corresponds to the leftmost
(83828,80 = 0000) of a display and address 15 (or
7 in 8-character display) to the rightmost position
(83828,80 = 1111 or 828,80 = 111). The 17th (9th) character
is entered back into the leftmost position.
Auto-increment mode

o
1st entry

ITI
14 15

L..:...l......l

o
2nd entry

1

1,'T11 -_ -_ -_ -_

1

-DISPLAY RAM

2. Right Entry
The first data is entered in the rightmost position of a display. From the next entry. the display is shifted left one character and the new data is placed in the rightmost position. A
display position and a register address as viewed from the
CPU change each time and do not correspond.
Auto-increment mode
1 2
14 15 0 -DISPLAY RAM'
1st entry

IT}

ADDRESS AS SEEN
FROM THE CPU

===

~~g~E~~EA~p~EN

-'-1---I.----l1_1...J1

2nd entry

14 15

[2DJ====ITI
3rd entry

o

16th entry

17th entry

II

14 15

[2DJ ====:GEJ
o
@DI ====:GEJ
~ ====:GEJ
o

18th entry

1

o

1

14 15

16th entry

1

14 15

17th entry

[2DJ===
~ ===
~ ===
2

14 15 0

1151161171

2

18th entry

13 14 15

1141151161

1

LEFT ENTRY

1

3

15 0

1

1161 17 118 1

Auto-increment mode
2

3

4

5

6

7

1st entry

-DISPLAY RAM
ADDRESS AS SEEN
FROM THE CPU

Auto-increment mode
1

1st entry

o
2nd entry

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

3

4

5

6

1

L-.l...-.L-...I--...I--..L-...l...-....l..-....J

-DISPLAY RAM
ADDRESS AS SEEN
FROM THE CPU

23456701

2nd entry
Execution of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
the command 11 1 2 1
10010101
L-.l...-.l...-.L-...I--..L-...l...-....l..-....J
ENTER NEXT AT LOCATIONS 5 AUTO-INCREMENT

1

0

I I

7

11 121

o

7

2

3

4

5

6

11 121

Execution of 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1
the command 1
11 121
10010101
L...-.L-...I--...I--..L--L-.....I-....I..-...J
ENTER NEXT AT LOCATIONS 5 AUTO-INCREMENT

7

3rd entry

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

4

5

6

701

2

3

3rd entry
01234567

4th entry

11 12 1

13 14 1

4th entry

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

13 1 4 1

11 121

4-93

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Conditions

Parameter

Vee

Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Va

Output voltage

Pd

Maximum power dissipation

With respect to Vss

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

Tstg

Storage temperature range

Ta=25'C

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

Limits

Unit

-0.5....:7

V

-0.5~7

V

-0.5~7

V

1000

rnW

-20~75

'c

-60~150

'C

(Ta=-20~75'C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Unit
Min

Vee

Supply voltage

Vss

Supply voltage

Nom

Max

5

5.5

4.5

0

V
V

2.2

V

V1H(RL)

High-level input voltage, for return line inputs

V ,H

High-level input voltage, aH others

V1L(RL)

Low-level input voltage, for return line inputs

Vss -O.5

1.4

V

V ,L

Low-level input voltage, all others

Vss -O.5

0.8

V

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

2

V

(T a=-20~75°C . Vcc =5V±10%. Vss=OV. unless otherwise noted.)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Unit

Test conditions
Min

V OH

High-level output voltage

IOH=-400,uA

2.4

VOHCINT)

Low-level output voltage, interrupt request output

IOH=-400,uA

305

VOL

low-level output voltage

IOL=2.2mA

Icc

Supply current from Vee

Typ

Max
V
V
0045

V

120

rnA

10

/-I A

Input current, return line inputs, shift input and control

VI=VCC

input

V,=OV

I,

Input current, all others

VI=VCC ...... OV

-10

10

/-I A

loz

Off-state output current

VI=VCC--" OV

-10

10

/-I A

C,

Input capacitance

VI=VCC

5

10

pF

Co

Output capacitance

Vo=Vcc

10

20

pF

II(AU

4-94

" . MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

-100

/-I A

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE

TIMING REQUIREMENTS

(T a=-20-75·C, Vcc=5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted.)

Read Cycle
Alternative

Limits

Parameter

Symbol

Test conditions

symbol
tC(Rl

Read cycle time

t RCY

tWCR)

Read pulse width

tRR

tSUCA-R)

Address setup time befor RD

th(R-A)

Address setup time after RD

--

Min

-_._-

Unit

Typ

Max

1000

ns

250

ns

tAR

0

ns

tRA

0

ns

- - (Note 7)

Write Cycle
Limits

Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

Test conditions

---

Unit
Min

symbol

Typ

Max

---

Tc(w)

Write cycle time

t wCY

1000

ns

TwREF( -).

REF(-)

Reference voltage( -)

>REF(-).

OE

Output enable signal

2'
\
2- 8

Digital signal

EOe

Input

The signal at this pin controls the digital output. When the signal is low~level, pins

r 1.-.., 2- 8 are

in a floating

state. When it is high-level, the data is output.

The analog signal, which was input through INo ....... IN7, is converted to digital data and is output from these

End of conversion
signal

Output

terminals. When DE is low~level, these terminals are floating. When OE is high-level, the converted digital
data is output. The MSB is 2- 1 and the LSB is T8.
This terminals is used to indicate the completion of an analog to digital conversion. It is reset by a START

Output

signal (high-level to low-level) and is set on completion of the conversion (low-level to high-level). This
output is normally used to generate an interrupt request for the CPU.
The input signal at this terminal is used to start·a conversion cycle by setting the successive approximation

START

Start conversion,signal

Input

register. The successive approximation register is reset by rising from low-level to high-level and conversion is started after being' set by falling from high-level to low-level.

elK

Clock input

Input

The signal at this terminal is the basic clocking signal used to determine internal timing.

5-4

•. .MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

M58990P,-1
a-BIT a-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER

Basic Function Blocks
8-channel Multiplexer

256R Ladder Network And Switch Tree

The M58990P has eight input pins (INo-IN?) used for entering analog signals. When analog signals are present at
INo - IN?, the 8-channel multiplexer selects one of those
signals and converts it into a digital signal.
The address decoder contains an input latch circuit which
functions to hold the input signal present at pins ADD AADD C. This circuit is illustrated in Fig. 1, while timing of
the address latch is shown in Fig. 2.
ALE
ALE

I

I
1

ALE

I

~

AL.E

•~S2~S4

ADD~S,

S3

To
} decoder

-ADD C

Fig.l

Address latch circuit

Fig. 3 shows the 256R resistor ladder and switch tree circuit. The 256R ladder network is created in the diffusion
process by forming 256 individual resistors into the substrate. 254 of these resistors have the same value R, while
the resistor on each end of the ladder carries the value 3/
2R and 1/2R respectively. The reference voltage source is
applied to both ends of the ladder, and the reference voltage used to compare analog input voltages is output at
each of the steps.
The reason for using different resistance values on the
ends of the ladder network is illustrated in Fig. 9 (a) showing the I/O characteristics of the A-D converter. The different resistance values provide symmetry between the zero
point and full scale point in the output characteristics transfer curve. As noted in this diagram, the width of the horizontal axis of each step is determined by the potential difference created by each ladder resistor. The step widths
for the zero and full scale pOints are respectively 1/2 and
Control code from successive approximation register
____
____
~A~

ALE _ _ _ _...J

'.

Address input latched here.
ADD A
-ADD C

REF~ffi~
R~~
R

When the ALE signal is "L", S1 and S4 (Fig. 1) are closed,
and S2 and S3 are open. At this time, external input is inhibited at S3. and the previous data is sent to the decoder.
When ALE transits from "L" to "H", S1 and S4 open, and S2
and S3 close. This simultaneously latches the address data,
and enables output to the decoder. At this point, the new
data arriving at ADD A - ADD C is blocked at S1' Subsequent transition of ALE from "H" to "L" does not produce a
change; the latched data remains held.
The method for determining selection of the analog input at
INo-IN? is by reading the value of the latched address signal. Value allocations are shown in Table 1.
Address signals as related to selected
analog signal pin

ADD C

ADD B

ADD A

Analog input

0
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1

INo
IN,
IN,
IN3
IN.
IN5
INs
IN7

0
0
1
1
1
1

I

I
I

:
I

:R:I

Address latch timing

Table 1

I

J!k
REF
•

0
1
0
1
0
1

:I

II

f

tR

(+)

256R

Fig.2

~

~::J- V REF to

comparator

---

Input

+~~

(-)

Fig.3

256R ladder network and switch tree

3/2-times that of the intermediate steps.
The switch tree is an analog switch network made up of
510 MOSFETs, and is used to output the ladder step voltage selected by successive approximation register
(S.A.R.) code to the comparator. The output voltage
obtained from the 256R ladder and switch tree is increased
or decreased in accordance with the S. A. R. code, with the
monotonicity of the 256R ladder.

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

5-5

MITSUBISHI LSls

M58990P,-1
I-BIT I-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER

Comparator
The comparator used in M58990P has a chopper type
amplifier used to minimize input offset voltage and drift.
This circuit is illustrated in Fig. 4. Fig. 6 shows the operational timing of the comparator.
At the start of the comparing cycle, 8 0 and 8, close on the
positive edge of ¢o and o;;,,;,M

¢>,

t'·,rl

~

from

'M'",;,:'~~ •. cl~-Fil! ~
J
rom
1
ladder output
V REF - - S2

f

_'>--

Fig.4

r-;-t

C
I
L ________ ...J
AC amplifier
I

To SAR.

Comparator

I/O characteristics
of CMOS inverter
"H"

1------,-..1

/
/

/

/

/

Q)

/

~

/~Input=output

~
:;
c.
:;

A//

o

/

/
/

When 6V>O

/

/

/
/

/
"l" It::..::.=..:=-=:..:=-=-~===

a

__
vee

Input voltage

Fig.5

AC amplifier I/O characteristics

ClK
I

-J

I

Comparing cycle

I

So closes,

short~circuiting

AC amplifier input and output

I

S, closes, entering

I

.J

analog signal in amplifier

I

I
I S2

closes. entering output from ladder in

I amplifier.

¢>2_--I-1__...-_______. . . 1.
:
C.,,,.,.« .~"......" '" & ....
¢>3=-i
Fig.6

5-6

Comparing cycle timing

:.... MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

I
I

I

I-I---rl---

'iJ_._1.....___

_n

MITSUBISHI LSls

MS8990P,-1
8-BIT 8-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER

Successive Approximation Register
(S.A.R.)
The S.A.R. takes the results from the comparator and converts them to an a-bit binary code for use in determining
the reference voltage value that should be used in the next
input comparison. The relationship between reference voltage V REF and the binary code is as follows:
VREF = (27C7+2sCs+"'2oCo) X

~;s;
+ REF(-) -

VFSR ......(1)
512

Where C7+C S +·+Co*0.
When C 7=CS ="'=Co=O, VREF=REF( -)
Here, VFSR stands for full scale range of analog voltage,
which indicates the range between minimum and maximum
value, or
VFSR =REF(+)-REF(-)"'(2)
C7, Cs'" Co are each represented by a or 1 digit in the
binary code, with C7 the MSB and Co the LSB. Consequently, from equati'on (1), we have:
1
1
1
VREF= (2C'+22Cs+'+2lfCo) XVFSR

°

+REF ( - ) -

VFSR
512······(3)

When each digit (bit) in the right half of equation (3) is
weighted from 1/2 to 1/2 8 , the value relative to full scale
can be obtained. With the successive comparator method,
successive approximations are made from MSB to LSB until reference voltage VREF is as close to VIN as it can get.
The following explanation provides more specifics.
When the start pulse entered at the START pin transitions
from "L" to "H", the S.A.R. sets only the MSB "1", the other
bits being reset to "0". As a result, the voltage selected for
reference voltage V REF is approximately one-half of VFSR,
and this is used to compare with analog input VIN .
The conversion is started when the start pulse transition
from "H" to "L", and the first comparing cycle is entered.
At this time, should V IN be smaller than VREF, MSB will be
reset to "0". If larger, the MSB will remain "1" and the next
comparing cycle will be entered. For this cycle, the bit next
to MSB, C s will be set, and the previous results will be carried up. In other words, taking the next selected reference
voltage as V REF , when
VIN>VREF, then:
,_ 1
1
VFSR
VI'lEF- (2+"4) vFsR- 512 +REF (-)

v

V
FSR

FSR

-

V'N

L...J---I

--

1/4VFSR
VREF f--

VREF

L-

-

LJ--I::=

V'N

1/4VFSR
0

1

2

3

I

4

0

1

Comparing cycle
C7 (MSB)
C.
C.
C,
C.
C2
C,
C.(LSB)

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(aJ

Fig.7

1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0

2

I

3

4

Comparing cycle

1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0

C7 (MSB)
C.
C.
C,
C.
C2
C,
C.(LSB)

............

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(bJ

When V'N>V REF

0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0

............

When V'N REF( - ) must be observed.
The reason for 1 and 2 is that for M OS switches located
near the V REF pin, their souces and substate PN junctions
are likely to forward bias, with the resulting current flow
changing ladder potentials.
In 3, (REF(
REF( -)) 12 is the potential for the center
of the ladder, and as shown in Fig. 13, this is the borderline
between p-channel and n-channel switch operations. Consequently, if this potential varies greatly from Vee/2, turn-on
resistance of the n-channel swiches near the center of the
ladder will increase. (See Fig. 14.) On the other hand, if
this value is smaller than Vee/2, the turn-on resistance of
the p-channel switches will increase.
Where turn-on resistance is high, the required settling time
after fully charging the comparator's input capacitor becomes too long, and accuracy cannot be maintained.
In 4, if REF (+) < REF( -), the up-down transients of the
control signals from the S.A.R. will be reversed relative to
the up-down transients of the reference voltage from ladder
to comparator. In this case, instead of the approximations
converging, the bits will diverge all Os or all 1s. Also, as
noted previously, where REF (+) and REF (-) approach
GND and Vee respectively, the switches will not turn on.

256R ladder network and switch tree
RON

Vg
Nch

Vee

Pch

GND

~~-------_-v~e-e--------~~---VD
-~2-

Fig.14

5-10

MOS switch turn-on resistance

• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

+) +

+) +

MITSUBISHI LSls

M58990P,-1
8-BIT 8-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol

Parameter

Vee

Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Va

Output voltage

Pd

Maximum power dissipation

Topr

Operating free-air temperature range

Tstg

Storage temperature range

Conditions

Limits

-0.

With respect to GND

3

V
V

500

I

0~70
-65~150

mW

-i~'e

(Ta~0-70'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Symbol

Parameter

Unit

Nom

Min

Vee

Supply voltage

GND

Supply voltage

4.75

Max
5

5.25

V

0

V

V ,H

High-level input voltage

2

Vee

V'L

Low-level input voltage

-0.3

0.8

V

V REF (+)

Max of reference voltage( +)

Vee Vee+0.1

V

VREFC-)

Min of reference voltage( -)

-0.1
Vee

VREF(+ltVREF( -)

2 - 0. 1

1

1
Analog input voltage

V

~+OI
1
.

V

5.25

V

VREF(+l

V

0

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

V

0
Vee
2
5.12

Defferential of reference voltage

V1(IN)

V

3~Vec+0.

O~Vee
Ta~25'C

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS

L::::.V REF

Unit

-0.3~7

(Ta~0-70'C . Vee~5V ±5%, unless otherwise noted)
limits

Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

.. -

Test conditions
symbol

Typ

Min

i

V ,H

High-level input voltage

VIN( T)

V'L

Low-level input voltage

VIN( 0)

V OH

High-level output voltage

V OUT ( T)

IOH=-360,uA, T a=70'e

--

Max

..

-

Unit

- -..

2
--_._- ------- - 0.8
Vee- 0. 4

Vee=5V

-.~

V
-----

V

--

V

VOL

Low-level output voltage, 2

V OUT ( 0)

IOL=1.6mA

0.45

VOUEOC)

Low-level output voltage, EOC output

V OUT ( 0)

IOL=1.2mA

0.4~~ __

I'H

High-level input current

IIN( 1 )

V,H =5.25V

I'L

Low-level input current

IINC 0)

V,L=OV

lozH

Off-state

lOUT

Vo=5V

1........ 2

8 output

V

-'-'-,-

1.0

,uA
----

. '

(high-imp~u~g~f~usrtr~~t)2-1_2-8 output

(high-im~~?p~tC~u~~~~1: r1.....,2-8 output

Vo=OV

IOZL

Off state

lee

Supply current from Vee input

liZ

Off-state input current, (lNo ........ IN7 input)

IOFF(+)

liZ

Off-state input current, (INo ........ IN7 input)

IOFF(-)

lOUT

Vec=5V, V,=5V

200

nA

Vec=5V, V,=OV

-200

--

M58990P

1-----

M58990P-1

c---VCC=VREFC+)=5.12V

Full-scale error

VAEFc-)=GND

I

M58990P

!

M58990P-1

,

Ladder resistances

C,

Input capacitance

G'N

v,~GND.

Co

Output capacitance

GOUT

Vo~GND, Vo~25mVrms, f~1

Vce=5V
Vo=25mVrms.

f~1

Bits

±+
±+
±+I
,

- - - - -- -

..

--~

±+

LSB

±1

LSB

±+
--±+
._±I

±1+

LSB
--.-~

LSB
._-LSB
LSB

.. -

k'o

MHz
MHz

.-

nA
~---

-

±-.t,

1

RLADDER

.-

8

I
\

Note 1

,uA

,u A

Zero error

Absolute accuracy

-3

---woo-

- -- - - -

-

,uA

----

~-

f e C¢)=500kH z , T a=70'e

Conversion resolution
Linearity error

-L~t;

- - - - - - - - ------ _ .
3
--~

.-~

i

8

pF

12

pF

-

Current flowing into an Ie is positive, and Min and Max show the absolute limit.

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

5-11

MITSUBISHI LSls

M58990P,-1
8~BIT

TIMING REQUIREMENTS

8-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER

(Ta=25"C, VCC=VREFI+)=5V, VREFI-)=GND unless otherwise noted)
Alternative

Symbol

Parameter

Limits
Test conditions

Symbol

Typ

Min

Unit

Max

tW(START)

Start pulse width

tws

200

ns

tW(ALE)

ALE pulse width

tWALE

200

ns

Isul A)

Address setup time

Is

50

ns

Ih(A)

Address hold time

IH

50

fel~)

Clock frequency

fe

10

640

1200

kHz

Clock cycle

-

100

1.56

0.83

!-,S

le(,,)
Nole 2:

ns

Inpul vollage level Is V'l =0. BV, V'H=2V

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS

(Ta=25"C,

vcc=V REF I+)=5V,

VREFI-)=GND, unless otherwise noted)
limits

Alternative

Parameter

Symbol

Test conditions

tpzx(OE-DO) Propagation time from OE to output

t H1 ,

tHO

tPXZ(OE-OQ)

Propagation time from OE to output floating

tiH .

tOH

Ie

Cycle time

Ie

IdlEoe)

EOC delay time

tEoe'

Unit

Typ

Min

Symbol

Max

C L =50pF

ALE

ADD A
-ADD C

START

STABLE ANALOG

~NPUT

X

~

J
j------

1\
tW(START)

EOC
tdIEOC)

"'t

J

-I

Ic
\

OE

2-'-2-8 -------------------j~----------~:+ ) READY setup time before clock

Tos
T RS

0

0

0

ns

100

60

60

ns

1> ~READY)

READY hold time before clock

TRH

20

20

20

ns

tSU(HLDA- "')

HLDA setup time before clock

T Hs

100

75

75

ns

tSUCDO-MEMA)

Data setup time before MEMR

T fDS

250

190

170

ns

th(MEMR-DQ)

Data hold time after MEMR

TIDH

0

0

0

ns

th(

Note

5-28

A.C Testing waveform
Input pulse level
Input pulse rise time
I nput pulse fall time
Reference level input
Output

O. 45-2. 4V
10ns
10ns
V ,H =2V, V,L =0. 8V
V oH =2V, VOL =0, 8V

.• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTIC
(i) SLAVE MODE
Symbol

(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)

Parameter

Alternate
symbol

tpZV(R~DQ)

Data enable time after read

T RDE

tPVZ(R-OQ)

Data disable time after read

TADF

(ii)

Limits
M5M82C37AP
-~--I--Max

i
0

I

200
100

---

M5M82C37 AP-4

M5M82C37 AP-5

Min

I
I

Max

Min

0

I

200
100

0

i

Max

I

140
70

I

Unit

ns

.-

ns

DMA MODE
Symbol

Parameter

Alternate
symbol

t pLH (

'" -AEN)

Propagation time from clock to AEN

TAEL

tpHLC

f -AEN)

Propagation time from clock to AEN

TAET

-A)

Propagation time from clock to address active

TFAAB

tpHLC

1> -A)

Propagation time from clock to address stable

TASM

t pvz (

¢ -A)

Propagation tJrne from clock to address floating

TAFAB

~ZV(¢-DQ)

Propagation time from clock to data bus

TFADB

t pvz ( -DO)

Propagation time from clock to data bus

TAFDB

t pzv ( '"

Limits
M5M82C37AP

M5M82C37 AP-4

M5M82C37AP-5

Min

Min

Min

Max

300
200
250
250
150
300
250
200
140

Max

225
150
190
190
120
225
190
150
110

tpLH { ~ -ADSTB)

Propagation time from clock to ADSTB

TSTL

tpHu ~ -ADSTB)

Propagation time from clock to ADSTB

TSTT

tsu< OB-ADSTS)

Data output setup time before ADSTB

TASS

thCADSTB-oo)

Data output hold time before ADSTB

T AHS

Propagation time from clock to read or write active

T FAC

200

150

Propagation time from clock to read or write

T DeL

270

200

t pLH ( '" -R)

Propagation time from clock to read

T DCTR

t pLH ( '"

Propagation time from clock to write

T DCTW

270
200

210
_._150

Propagation time from clock to read or write floating

T AFC

150

120

th(R-A)

Address output hold time after read

TAHR

te (; ,-100

th(W-A)

Address output hold time after write

T AHW

tc u,-50

tSU(DQ-MEMW)

Data output setup time before MEMW

T ODV

the MEMW-DO)

Data output hold time after MEMW

TODH

200
20

t pLH ( '" -DACK)

Propagation time from clock to DACK

TAK

tpHLC '"

-EOP)

Propagation time from clock to EOP

TAK

t pLH ( '"

-EOP)

Propagation time from clcok to EOP

TAK

t pzv { '" -R)
t pzv < '"

100
30

!

Unit

f-------ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns

..-

ns

f-----ns
ns

II

ns
ns

150

ns

190

ns

-w)

-w)

t pvz ( '" -R)
t pvz ( '"

200
130
170
----.170
90
200
170
130
90

100
40

-w)

tpHu '" -R)
tpHu '"

100
50

Max

-w)

t pLH ( .p -HAO)
tpHu '" -HAO)

Propagation time from clock to HRQ

I "H"1.0V

TDO I "H"3. 3V

--

le(;,-100
tc ( I)-50
125
20
250
250
250
160
250

• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC

220
190
190
120
190

.~-

..---

190
130
120

ns. _ ._
ns

--

ns

Ic (;,-100

ns

tc (;,-50

ns

125
10

ns

--

ns

170
170
170
120
120

ns
ns
ns
ns

5-29

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

TIMING DIAGRAMS
Reset timing
tSU(VCC-RESET)

Vcc

RESET

elK

tSU(RESET-R)

lOR

tSU(AESET-W)

Slave mode timing (READ)

es.

A,-Ao

)

-

es,

K

ADDRESS VALID

IhlR-csl
IhIR-AI

tSU(CS-R)
tSU(A_R)
tW(R)

-

tr-

tPZV(R_OQ)

tPVZ(R_OQ)

I-DATA VALID

•

MITSUBISHI

11"<& ELECTRIC

\
/

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

Slave mode timing (WRITE)

tsu(cs-w)

I

\

CS

Ih(w-A)

tSU(A-W)

~

~

ADDRESS VALID

tw(w)

lOW

\

-

th(W-DQ)

tsuCOQ-w)

)

INPUT DATA VALID

• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC

II

K

5-31

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

DMA transmit timing
S,

CLK

S,

So

So

S,

S2

S3

S4

S2

S3

S4

S,

S,

S,

--(1.-Jrv\}--Jh ~h ~f\-f\-/' ~f\..jO-rwFV"V\

*)

t~~Q_')

ts

DREQ

\'P+--+-+-+---

HRQ

~\

HLDA

_tTH(<-DACK)

f

~*-~~~+-~-+~~

DACK

tpLH(~AEN)

-

i

AEN
tpZV(.-ADSTB)

~~~r;I~~~--~_+~r_--+_--~--~----------th(ADSTB-DB)

tsu (DB-ADSTB) ---4--+---+1
DB,-DBa

~'--

--------------------------~~~~~
tPZV(¢-OQ)

_+------l-I

tpvz(.p..OQ)

tPLH(¢-R)

..-f--t-

R)~~~~~~ -~)

~)

_________________________t_pz_V_(<__

MEMR/IOR

tpzv~1--

1

~L·~:..-.,.(>--w. .,.)-----4.....J

tpHL(<_W)

-t----t--

I

J~~'-------------

tpLH(<_W)

L...J
l...IJl--

+--'~r----'rI-----"
\ ____ I'--- I#I'- ___

Ir---r,-...,

---------------------------'1
( - - - signifies expansion write)

1-------

1
tpHU¢-EOP)

tpLH(¢-EOP)

1

'0

EOP

(Internal)
tSU(EOP-¢)

EOP
(External)

j

\ \'
tw(eDP)

5--32

•. MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

I

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

READY input timing

ClK

READY

MEMR/IOR

MEMW/IOW

}-----I'------J
tpHL(¢>-W)

(- - -

II

I

signifies expansion write)

ClK

READY

MEMR/IOR

MEMW/IOW

• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC

5-33

MITSUBISHI LSls

M5M82C37AP ,.4,·5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

Inter-memory transmission

So

eLK

rurvu~~ rurv-L

S"

J\j

S13

S"

S'4

S"

S"

S'3

S,

S'4

~

tPHL(4)-A)

S,

tPVZ(<,6-A)

tpzv(_Al

)

A,-Ao

tpLH ( ~ADSTB)

-

tpHL( ~ADSTB)

r-

ADSTB

\

A,-Ao

j

thCADSTB-DQ)

I-

~

/~

~
tSUCOQ-MEMR)
tpvz(¢-OQ)

tPZV(tb-DQ)

tSU(OQ-MEMW)
JthCMEMR-OQ)

A15 -A. \

J

III
\\\

Data
input

t

~.r

A15 -Aa

output
;--:-1

t(MEMW-OQJ

I

-~

tPlH(¢-R)

tpzV(9'>-Rl

tpH d9'>-R)
tPVZ(¢-R)

\

-

~

,

/

tpzv(-wl

l - f-

tpvz(..w)

r-

/~

\

MEMW

tpHU¢-EOP)

tpLH(¢-EOP)

I

\~

EOP

(Internal)
tSUCEOP-¢)

EOP

(External )

5-34

\\\)

JI/I

twe eop)

..• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

DESCRIPTION
The M5M82C37AFP is a programmable 4-channel DMA
(Direct Memory Access) controller. This device is specially
designed to simplify data transfer at high trasfer rate for
microcomputer systems.
Fabricated using the silicon-gate CMOS technology, the
M5M82C37AFP operates using a single 5V power supply.

FEATURES
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

5V single supply, single TTL clock
Four channel DMA controls with priority DMA request
acknowledge functions
DMA enable/disable, automatic initialization enable/disable, address increment/decrement programmability for
each cannel
Programmable DREQ input and DACK output logic
polarity
Direct connecting permits easy DMA channel expansion.

PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
I/O READ
INPUT/OUTPUT

lOR -

1

:~~~~g~TPUT

lOW -

2

~fAMDO~GTPUT MEMR W~\"1-nYUTPUTMEMW NON-USABLE

NU -

READY INPUT READY HOLD
ACKNOWLEDGE INPUT HlDA ~~~~3~S STROBE ADSTB _

A'l

40 39 - As ADDRESS
38 _ Asj OUTPUTS

3

37 -

4
5

36 -

6

B

35 34 33 -

9

32 -

7

~E~~3~S ENABLE AEN HOLD REQUEST
OUTPUT
CHIP SELECT INPUT
CS CLOCK INPUT
ClK _

12

RESET INPUT RESET -

13

Ag~,;oWLEDGE J DAC K, -

14

OUTPUTS

I DACK3 -

15

DMA
REQUESTS
INPUTS

I

~~tu~:o~~g~iss

A, ADDRESS INPUTS/
A, j OUTPUTS

Ao
Vee (5V)

25 24 -

DREQ,- 17
DREQ,- 18

23 22 _

DREQo- 19
Vss (OV)

EOP

A3l

11

DREQ3- 16

Memory to memory data transfer
EOP input/output permits DMA operation completion
check as well as forcibly completing DMA operation.

A.

""-l_ _ _ _ _....r2....
1 -

Outline

DACK o l ~~:NOWLEDGE
DACK, [OUTPUTS
DBsl
DB
DATA INPUTS/
s [OUTPUTS
DB,

•

40P2R

APPLICATION
•

DMA control of peripheral equipment such as floppy
diskettes and CRT terminals that require high-speed
data transfer.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

::: f;: --- ----- --C-~-~-RRE-~'---!-~~~--------

-

DREQ o
DACKo
DREQ,

DMA
COUNT
REGISTER!
COUNTER

DACK,

COUNT
REGISTER!
COUNTER

DREQ,
DACK,
DREQ 3

DATA

15 DACK 3

BUS

ClK

BUFFER

A,

HlDA

As
As
A4
A3
A,

CURRENT
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

BUS

REGISTER!
COUNTER

BUFFER

BASE
ADDRESS

AEN
BUS

REGISTER

ADSTB
MEMW
MEMR

A,

lOW

Ao

lOR

- - - - - - -__ - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - l

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

5-35

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSM82C37AFP,·4,·S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

FUNCTION

received from the CPU, the DMA acknowledge signal is
sent to DMA requesting channel with the highest priority
and begins DMA operation.
During DMA operation, the contents of the low-byte of the
transfer memory address are output through A7 - Aa. Every
time a change in the high-order 8-bit values is necessitated
immediately after DMA operation has begun or due to borrowing or decrement during DMA operation, the change is
output via pins DB7 - DBa to the externally mounted latch
circuit. After the address is transmitted, read and write signals are sent to the memories and peripherals activating
DMA transfer.

M5M82C37AFP is a programmable DMA controller LSI
used in microprocessor systems.
This device basically consists of a DMA request control
block for acknowledging DMA requests, a CPU interface
for exchanging data and commands with the CPU, a timing
control circuit for controlling each of the various types of
timing, and a register for holding and counting DMA
addresses and number of transfer words.
After setting the transfer mode, starting address, and byte
number in each of the registers and when a DMA request
is made to an unmasked channel, the M5M82C37AFP requires use of the bus to the CPU. When the HLDA signal is

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Supply voltage

V,

Input voltage

Va

Output voltage

Top,

Operating free-air temperature range

Tsta

Storage temperature

With respect to vss

RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol

Parameter

Vee

Supply voltage

Vss

Supply voltagelGND)

Symbol

Unit
V

-0. 3-Vee+0. 3

V

-0. 3-Vee+0. 3

V

-20-75

°e

-65-150

°e

(Ta=-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits

Min

4,5

I
I

Typ

I

ELECTRICAL CHARCTERISTICS

Limits

-0.3-7

Conditions

Parameter

Vee

5
0

I
I

Max
5.5

I

Unit
V
V

(T a =-20-75°C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)

Parameter

Test conditions

Limits
Min

V ,H

Hign-Ievel input voltage

2.0

V ,L

LOW-level input voltage

-0.3

V OH

High·level output voltage

Typ

Max

Vcc +O.3
0.8

Unit
V
V

IOH=-200,uA

2.4

V

IOH=-100,uA(HRQ only)

3.2

V

10L=2. OmA( data bus)

VOL

LOW-level output voltage

0.45

V

I,

Input current

V,=O-VCC

-10

+10

/LA

loz

Off-state output current

V,=O-VCC

-10

+10

/LA

lee

Supply current

V,H=VCC, Vll =Vss, fCLK=l/tc( ¢)min.

15

rnA

5-36

10L=3. 2mA( other outputs)

• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI LSls

MSM82C37AFP,.4,·S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER

TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(i) SLAVE MODE

(T a=-20-75'C , Vcc=5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted)

Limits

Alternate

Symbol

Parameter

tSU(CS-R)

Address setup time before read

M5M82C37AFP

symbol

Min

TAR

50

M5M82C37 AFP-4

Max

Max

Min

M5M82C37 AFP-5
Min

Unit

Max

50(0)

50

ns

tSUCA-R)
tsu(CS-w)

cs setup time before write

Tcw

200

tSU(A-W)

Address setup time before write

TAW

200

tsu(OQ-w)

Data setup time before write

Tow

200

Address hold time after read

TRA

0

0

thcw-cs)

CS hold time after write

Twc

20

20

20 (0)

th(W-A)

Address hold after write

TWA

20

20

20(0)

theW-DQ)

Data hold after write

Two

30

30

tWCR)

Read pulse width

TRW

300

250

tw(w)

Write pulse width

Twws

200

200

160

tWCRESET)

Reset pulse width

T RSTW

300

300

300

tSU(VCC-RESET)

Vee setup time before to reset

T RSTD

500

500

tSU(RESET-R)

Reset setup time before read

2tc (.)

tSU(RESET-W)

Reset setup time before Write

2tc (. )

th(R-cs)
th(R-A)

(ii)

T RSTS

I

~H------ r--- 150
150

---

r---

1

150

ns _..ns
--1----.-ns - -

100

-

-~-~----

ns
----ns

30 (0)
200

--

._-

"---

ns

0

.. -

ns- - -_._
ns
- - ns
--~---

ns

500

ns

2tc (. )

ns

III

DMA MODE
Symbol

Parameter

Alternate

symbol

Limits

M5M82C37 AFP
Min

Max

M5M82C37AFP-4
Min

Max

M5M82C37AFP-5
Min

Unit

Max

tW (' )

Clock high-level pulse width

TCH

120

100

80

ns

t w (. )

Clock low-level pulse width

TCL

150

110

68

ns

tce. )

Clock period

Tcy

320

250

200

ns

tSU(EOP-

) tsu< READY- '" ) DREQ setup time before clock Tos 0 0 0 ns READY setup time before clock T Rs 100 60 60 ns 1> -READY) READY hold time before clock TRH 20 20 20 ns tSU(HLDA- "') HLDA setup time before clock T Hs 100 75 75 ns tSU(DQ-MEMR) Data setup time before MEMR TlDs 250 190 170 ns th(MEMR_DQ) Data hold time after MEMR TIDH 0 a 0 ns the Note - A.C Testing waveform Input pulse level Input pulse rise time Input pulse fall time Reference level input Output o. 45-2. 4V 10ns 10ns V,H =2V, V,L =0. 8V VoH =2V, VOL =0. 8V • MITSUBISHI ;"ELECTRIC 5-37 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER SWITCHING CHARACTERISTIC (i) SLAVE MODE (T a=-20-75"C , Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted) Parameter Symbol Alternate symbol tPZVCR-OQ) Data enable time after read T ROE tpvzeR-DQ) Data disable time after read TRDF (ii) Limits M5M 82C37 AFP Min 0 I I I Max M5M82C37AFP-4 Max Min 200 100 M5M82C37AFP-5 Unit I I I 140 ns 70 ns Min 200 100 0 0 Max DMA MODE Symbol Parameter Alternate symbol Limits M5M82C37AFP Min Max M5M82C37AFP-4 Min Max M5M82C37AFP-5 Min Unit Max j6 '-AEN) Propagation time from clock to AEN TAEL 300 225 200 ns tpHL< -AEN) Propagation time from clock to AEN TAET 200 150 130 ns t pzv ( '" -A) Propagation time from clock to address active TFAAB 250 190 170 ns t pHL ( Propagation time from clock to address stable TASM 250 190 170 ns Propagation time from clock to address floating TAFAB 150 120 90 ns '" -DO") Propagation time from clock to data bus TFADB 300 225 200 ns ~YZ(."'-DQ) Propagation time from clock to data bus TAFDB 250 190 170 ns tpLH ( ¢ .ADSTB) Propagation time from clock to ADSTB TSTL 200 150 130 ns tpHLt '" -ADSTB) Propagation time from clock to ADSTB TSTT 140 110 90 ns tSU(OB-ADSTB) Data output setup time before ADSTB TASS 100 100 100 th(ADSTB-OQ) Data output hold time before ADSTB TAHS 50 40 30 Propagation time from clock to read or write active T FAC 200 150 150 ns Propagation time from clock to read or write t pLH ( '" -A) t pvz ( '" t pZV ( t pzv( rp t pZV ( t pHL ( -A) -R) ns ns '" -w) 1> -R) t pHL( 1>-w) TOCL 270 200 190 ns t pLH ( f.-A} Propagation time from clock to read TOCTA 270 210 190 ns t pLH ( F·W) Propagation time from clock to write TOCTW 200 150 130 ns Propagation time from clock to read or write floating T AFC 150 120 120 ns t pvz ( '" -R) tpvze!>_w) thIR-A) Address output hold time after read TAHR tell)-100 tel I )-100 t ell)-100 ns thIW-A) Address output hold time after write TAHW tel II-50 tell )-50 tell )-50 ns tsu( OQ-MEMWl Data output setup time before MEMW T oDv 200 125 125 ns th(MEMW-OQ) Data output hold time after MEMW TacH 20 20 10 ns t pLH ( Propagation time from clock to DACK TAK 250 220 170 ns tpHLC '" -EOP) Propagation time from clock to EOP TAK 250 190 170 ns t pLH ( Propagation time from clcak to EOP TAK 250 190 170 ns t pLH ( '" -HRC) 160 120 120 t pHL{ '" -HRC) 250 190 120 5-38 '" -DACK) -EOP) Propagation time from clock to HRQ TOQ I"H"2.0V I "H"3,3V .• MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC ns MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER TIMING DIAGRAMS Reset timing tSU(VCC-RESET) Vee RESET CLK tSU(RESET-R) II lOR tSU(RESET-wl lOW Slave mode timing (READ) CS. A3 -Ao ~ CS, ADDRESS VALID tSU(CS-R) th{R-CS} tSU(A_R) th(R_A) I lOR K - tW(Rl lr- -, tPVZ(A_DQ} tPZV(A-OQ) DB,-CBo I---DATA VALID • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC \ / 5-39 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER Slave mode timing (WRITE) tSu-DACK} -I, ~ f' DACK tPLH(¢-AEN) tPHL(¢-AEN) -+AEN 1 ] , tPHL(¢_A) tPZV(o;I>_A) ~ A 7 ........ A o f ::T' II tPVZ(¢_A) ~/ A7- AO tPlH(¢.-ADSTB) ADSTB - t- th(ADSTB_DB) tsu( DB-ADSTS) i....-k. DB 7 -DB o ~~ t pzv ( ¢-DO} tpvZ(¢-OQ) ,- Ipzvl o'R) "">-- ~ Lzt) tPLH(¢_Rl -- f-t- ,...: ~ ......... MEMR/IOR Ipzv~ l-- MEMW/IOW 1 . \L tPVZ(O/>_R) Ir- J _~'#:W) tPHL(f-wl . -t-t- ff) t pLH ( ¢-A) ___ j L - - 1 tpvz(¢-wl ~ft:-W) (---sign ifies expansion write) rl u-~ ~--~ I t tPHjU ¢-EOP} tPLH(-EOP) I 'U EOP (Inlerna I) tSU(EOP-¢) EOP (Exlerna I) j \ \' tW(EOPl • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC 5-41 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER READY input timing ClK READY MEMR/IOR MEMW/IOW }-----r--------J tPHL(-W) I ( - - - signifies expansion write) s, S4 s, ClK READY MEMR/IOR MEMW/IOW 5-42 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC S4 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER Inter-memory transmission ru '\J\jru[\JUrururvL 5" eLK 5" 5" 5'3 J\j , A7-AO -- ~ th(ADSTB-OQl tpHu ..... ADSTB) rh l - I- J" tpVZ(~DQ) tPZV(¢.-OQ) tSU(OQ-MEMA) tSU(OQ-MEMW) th(MEMR-OQl A,s-A. \ DB7-DBo J III \\\ Data input A1S --As II outpuy 1-;--' t(MEMW_OQl I -f-- -r-t-- t-- tPHU';"A) , MEMR I v-----!---.J Data 1\ tPLH(';"R) tPZV(-A) J A7- AO AD5TB 5 23 tPHU';"A} tpZV(~_A) tpLH ( ..... ADSTS) 522 5" \-- tPVZ (t,6-R) 1/ - tpzv(fl.-wl tPHL(¢-wl l- t-- tPlH(¢-W) tpvz(¢-w) , In MEMW tpHU¢.-EOP) tpLH(¢-EOP) I , EOP t- t..-.l (Interna il tSU (EOP-4» EOP (Extern al) \\\\ J/// tW(EOP) • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC I 5-43 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE DESCRIPTION The M5M82C51 AP is a universal synchronous/asynchronous receiver/transmitter (USART) IC chip designed for data communications use. It is produced using the silicon-gate CMOS process and is mainly used in combination with 8-bit microprocessors. PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS RECEIVERi~~~~ Single 5V supply voltage TTL compatible Synchronous and asynchronous operation Synchronous: 5-8-bit characters Internal or external synchronization Automatic SYNC character insertion Asynchronous system: 5-8-bit characters Clock rate- 1 , 16 or 64 times the baud rate 1 , 1y" or 2 stop bits False-start-bit detection Automatic break-state detection Baud rate: DC-64K-baud Full duplex, double-buffered transmitter/receiver Error detection: parity, overrun, and framing • • • APPLICATIONS • • Modem control of data communications using microcomputers Control of CRT, TTY and other terminal eqUipment FUNCTION The M5M82C51 AP is used in the peripheral circuits of a CPU. It permits assignments, by means of software, of operations in all the currently used serial-data transfer systems BLOCK DIAGRAM 01- I 03- 2 RxD - (OV)V ss FEATURES • • • r l 2 - 0 1} 3 26 Vcc (5V) 4 25 - Rx C 2 - 00 BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS BIDIRECTIONAL DATE BUS ~tg~~~~PUT DATA-TERMINAL READY OUTPUT REQUEST-TOSEND OUTPUT 21 - DSR m~ys:lJpuT RESET RESET INPUT 2 - ClK CHIP-S~~~8i 18 - TxEMPTY ~~~~~5i-~~i- %~~~~~tPNA:CT 17 - CTS ~~~~~J~UT T x RDY ~~~~~~5i-~~T 2 - T~t~~~liJ~ST WRITE-DATA CONTROL INPUT CONT~Et~i~~~~ READ~Eg5~~ST RxRDY - 16 14 _ _ _ _r15 - ~ CLOCK INPUT TRANSMITTERDATA OUTPUT ~6NDET/ g~~KD6~~~6~ Outline 28P4 including IBM's 'bi-sync'. The M5M82C51 AP receives parallel-format data from the CPU, converts it into a serial format, and then transmits via the TxD pin. It also receives data sent in via the RxD pin from the external circuit, and converts it into a parallel format for sending to the CPU. On receipt of parallel-format data for transmission from the CPU or serial data for the CPU from external devices, the M5M82C51AP informs the CPU using the TxRDY or RxRDY pin. In addition, the CPU can read the M5M82C51 AP status at any time. The M5M82C51 AP can detect the data received for errors and inform the CPU of the presence of errors as status information. Errors include parity, overrun and frame errors. ------------l RESET INPUT CLOCK INPUT CONTROL/DATA-CONTROL INPUT READ-DATA CONTROL INPUT WRITE-DATA CONTROL INPUT TRANSMITIER-DATA OUTPUT CHIP-SELECT INPUT TRANSMITIER·READY OUTPUT TRANSMITIER·EMPTY OUTPUT TRANSMITIER·CLOCK INPUT DATA-SET READY INPUT DATA· TERMINAL READY OUTPUT CLEAR-TO-SEND INPUT REQUEST -TO-SEND OUTPUT RECEIVER-READY OUTPUT 25 Rxe RECEIVER-CLOCK INPUT 16 SYNDET/BD SYNC DETECT/BREAK DETECT BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS RECEIVER-DATA INPUT 5-44 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE OPERATION Table The M5M82C51 AP interfaces with the system bus as shown in Fig.l, positioned between the CPU and the modem or terminal equipment, and offers all the functions required for data communication. 1 M5MB2C51AP Access Methods c/o RO WR CS Function L L H L Data bus - Data in USART L H L L USART - Data bus H L H L H H L L Control - Data bus X H H L 3-State - Data bus X X X H 3-State - _.-.- Data bus - Staus ----.----------~ 16 ADDRESS BUS Ao 4 IIOR IIOW RESET 8 ~ 2(TTl ReadlWrite Control Logic DATA BUS This logic consists of a control word register and command word register. It receives signals from the CPU control bus and generates internal-control signals for the elements. 8 Modem Control Circuit C/D CS Do-D7 RD INR RESET ClK M5MB2C51AP Fig. Data bus CONTROL BUS M5MB2C51AP interface to 80BOA standard sys- tem bus This is a general-purpose control-signal circuit designed to simplify the interface to the modem. Four types of control signal are available: output signals DTR and RTS are controlled by command instructions, input signal DSR is given to the CPU as status information and input signal CTS controls direct transmission. Data-Bus Buffer When using the M5M82C51 AP, it is necessary to program, as the initial setting, assignments for synchronous/asynchronous mode selection, baud rate, character length, parity check, and even/odd parity selection in accordance with the communication system used. Once programming is completed, functions appropriate to the communication system can be carried out continuously. When initial setting of the USART is completed, data communication becomes possible. Though the receiver is always in the enable state, the transmitter is placed in the transmitter-enable state (TxEN) by a command instruction, and the application of a low-level signal to the CTS pin prompts data-transfer start-up. Until this condition is satisfied, transmission is not executed. On receiving data, the receiver informs the CPU that reading for the receiver data in the USART by the CPU has become possible (the RxRDY terminal has turned to '1 '). Since data reception and the entry of the CPU into the data-readable state are output as status information, the CPU can assess USART status without accessing the RxRDY terminal. During receiving operation, the USART checks errors and gives out status information. There are three types of errors: parity, overrun, and frame. Even though an error occurs, the USART continues its operations,. and the error state is retained until error reset (ER) is effected by a command instruction. The M5M82C51 AP access methods are listed in Table 1. This is an 8-bit 3-state bidirectional bus through which control words, command words, status information, and transfer data are transferred. Fig. 2 shows the structure of the databus buffer. %2ID7 , Do Do .1 STATUS BUFFER L H RECEIVE-DATA .BUFFER r CONTROL BUFFER ~ H Y Fig. 2 TRANSMIT-DATA BUFFER ~ TO INT ERNAl D ATA BUS f-- Data-bus-buffer structure Transmit Buffer This buffer converts parallel-format data given to the databus buffer in to serial data with addition of a start bit, stop bits and a parity bit, and sends out the converted data through the T xD pin based on the control signal. Transmit-Control Circuit This circuit carries out all the controls required for serial data transmission. It controls transmitter data and outputs the signals required by external devices in accordance with the instructions of the read/write control logic. • MITSUBISHI ;"ELECTRIC 5-45 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSIAP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Receive Control Circuit This circuit offers all the controls required for normal reception of the input serial data. It controls receiver data and outputs signals for the external devices in accordace with the instructions of the read/write control logic. Receive Buffer This buffer converts serial data given via the RxD pin into a parallel format, checks the bits and characters in accordance with the communication format designated by mode setting, and transfers the assembled characters to the CPU via the data-bus buffer. Receiver-Data Input (RxD) Serial characters sent from another device are input to this pin and converted to a parallel-character format to serve as data for the CPU. Unless the '1' state is detected after a chip-master reset procedure (this resetting is carried out to prevent spurious operation such as that due to faulty connection of the RxD to the line in a break state), the serial characters are not received. This applies to only the asynchronous mode. When the RxD line enters the low state instantaneously because of noise, etc, the mis-start prevention function starts working. That is, the start bit is detected by its falling edge but in order to make sure that it is the correct start bit, the RxD line is strobed at the middle of the start bit to reconfirm the low state. If it is found to be high a faultystart judgment is made. Transmitter-Clock Input (rxC) This clock controls the baud rate for character transmission from the TxD pin. Serial data is shifted by the falling edge of the TxC signal. In the synchronous mode, the TxC frequency is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode, the frequency is specified as 1, 16, or 64 times the baud rate by the mode setting. Example When the baud rate is 110 bauds: TxC=110Hz(1X) TxC=l. 76kHz(16X) T xC=7. 04kHz(64X) Write-Data Control Input (WR) Data and control words output from the CPU by the lowlevel input are written in the M5M82C51 AP. This terminal is usually used in a form connected with the control bus I/OW of the CPU. Chip-Select Input (CS) This is a device-select signal that enables the USART by a low-level input. Usually, it is connected to the address bus directly or via the decoder. When this signal is in the high state, the M5M82C51 AP is disabled. Control/Data Control Input (C/O) This signal shows whether the information on the USART data bus is in thEt form of data characters or control words, or in the form of status information, in accordance with the RD and WR inputs while the CPU is accessing the M5M82C51 AP. The high level identifies control words or status information, and the low level, data characters. 5-46 Read-Data Control Input (RD) Receiver data and status information are output from the CPU by a low-level input for the CPU data bus. Receiver-Ready Output (RxRDY) This signal indicates that the received characters have entered the receiver buffer, and further, the receiver-data buffer in the data-bus buffer shown in Fig.2. It is possible to confirm the RxRDY status by using this signal as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing the CPU to read the D, bit of the status information by polling. The RxRDY is automatically reset when a character is read by the CPU. Even in the break state in which the RxD line is held at low, the RxRDY remains active. It can be 'masked by making the RxE( D2 ) of the command instruction O. Transmitter-Ready (TxRDY) This signal shows that the data is ready for transmission. It is possible to confirm the status of serial-data transmission by using it as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing the CPU to read the Do bit of the status information by polling. Since the TxRDY signal shows that the data buffer is empty, it is automatically reset when a transmission character is loaded by the CPU. The TxRDY bit of the status information means that the transmit-data buffer shown in Fig. 2 has become empty, while the TxRDY pin enters the highlevel state only when the transmit-data buffer is empty, TxEN equals '1', and a lowlevel input has been applied to the CTS pin. Status (Do): When transmit-data buffer (TDB) is empty, it becomes '1 '. TxRDY terminal: When (TDB is emptY)'(T xEN=l)'(CTS =0)=1 or resetting, it becomes active. Sync Detect/Break Detect Output-Input (SYNDET/BD) In the synchronous mode this pin is used for input and output operations. When it is specified for the internal synchronous mode by mode setting, this pin works as an output terminal. It enters the high state when a SYNC character is received through the RxD pin. If the M5M82C51 AP has been programmed for double SYNC characters (bi-sync), a high is entered in the middle of the last bit of the second SYNC character. This signal is automatically reset by reading the status information. On designation of the M5M82C51 AP to the external synchronous mode, this pin begins to serve for input operations. Applying a high signal to this pin prompts the M5M82C51 AP to begin assembling data characters at the next rising edge of the RxC. For the width of a high-level signal to be input, a minimum RxC period is required. Designation of the asynchronous mode causes this pin to function as a BD (output) pin. When the start, data, and parity bits and stop bits are all in the low state for two characters period, a high is entered. The BD (break detect) signal can also be read as the D6 bit of the status information. This signal is reset by resetting the chip master or by the RxD line's recovering the high state. • MITSUBISHI "'ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Clear-To-Send Input (CTS) When the T xEN bit (Do) of the command instruction has been set to '1' and the CTS input is low serial data is sent out from the T xD pin. Usually this is used as a clear-to-send signal for the modem. Note: CTS indicates the modem status as follows: ON means data transmission is possible; OFF means data transmission is impossible. Transmitter-Empty Output (TxEMPTY) When no transmisison characters are left in the transmit buffer, this pin enters the high state. In the asynchronous mode, the following transmission character is shifted to the transmit buffer when it is loaded from the CPU. Thus, it is automatically reset. In the synchronous mode, a SYNC character is loaded automatically on the transmit buffer when no transferdata characters are left. In this case, however, the TxEMPTY does not enter the low state when a SYNC character has been sent out, since T xEMPTY = H denotes the state in which there is no transfer character and one or two SYNC characters are being transferred or the state in which a SYNC character is being transferred as a filler. T xEMPTY is unrelated to the T xEN bit of the command instruction. Transmission-Data Output (TxD) Parallel-format transmission characters loaded on the M5M82C5l AP by the CPU are assembled into the format designated by the mode instruction and sent in serial-data form via the T xD pin. Data is output, however, only in cases where the Do bit (TxEN) of the command instruction is '1' and the CTS terminal is in the low state. Once reset, this pin is kept at the mark status (high level) until the first character is sent. ON means the modem can transmit and receive; OFF means it cannot. Request-To-Send Output (RTS) This is a general-purpose output signal but is used as a request-to-send signal for the modem. The RTS terminal is controlled by the D5 bit of the command instruction. When D5 is equal to '1', RTS= l, and when D5 is 0, RTS= H. Command register D5=l~RTS=l Command register D5=0~RTS=H Note: RTS controls the modem transmission carrier as follows: ON means carrier dispatch; OFF means carrier stop. Data-Terminal Ready Output (DTR) This is a general-purpose output signal, but is usually used as a data-terminal ready or rate-select signal to the modem. The DTR pin is controlled by the D, bit of the command instruction; if D,=l, DTR=l, and if D,=O, DTR=H. D, of the command register=l~DTR=l D, of the command register=O~DTR=H Receiver-Clock Input (R;;-C) This clock signal controls the baud rate for the sending in of characters via the RxD pin. The data is shifted in by the rising edge of the RxC signal. In the synchronous mode, the RxC frequency is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode, the frequency is specified as 1, 16, or 64 times the baud rate by mode setting. This relationship is parallel to that of T xC, and in usual communication-line systems the transmission and reception baud rates are equal. The TxC and RxC terminals are, therefore, used connected to the same baud-rate generator. Clock Input (ClK) This system-clock input is required for internal-timing generation and is usually connected to the clock-output (ClK) pin of the 8085A. Although there is no direct relation with the data-transfer baud rate, the clock-input (ClK) frequency is more than 30 times the T xC or RxC input frequency in the case of the synchronous system and more than 4.5 times in the case of the asynchronous system. Reset Input (RESET) Once the USART is shifted to the idle mode by a high-level input, this state continues until a new control word is set. Since this is a master reset, it is always necessary to load a control word following the reset process. The reset input requires a minimum 6-clock pulse width. Data-Set Ready Input (DSR) This is a general-purpose input Signal, but is usually used as a data-set ready signal to test modem status. Its status can be known from the status reading process. The D7 bit of the status information equals '1' when the DSR pin is in the low state, and '0' when in the high state. DSR=l ~D7 bit of status information=l DSR=H~D7 bit of status information=O Note: DSR indicates modem status as follows: PROGRAMMING It is necessary for the M5M82C5l AP to have the control word loaded by the CPU prior to data transfer. This must always be done following any resetting operation (by external RESET pin or command instruction IR). There are two types of control words: mode instructions specifying general operations required for communications and command instructions to control the M5M82C5l AP actual operations. Following the resetting operation, a mode instruction must be set first. This instruction sets the synchronous or asynchronous system to be used. In the sysnchronous system, a SYNC character is loaded from the CPU. In the case of the bi-sync system, however, a second SYNC character must be loaded in succession. loading a command instruction makes data transfer possible. This operation after resetting must be carried out for initializing the M5M82C5l AP. The USART command instruction contains an internal-reset IR instruction (Dsbit) that makes it possible to return the M5M82C5l AP to its reset state. The initialization flowchart is shown in Fig. 3 and the mode-instruction and command-instruction formats are shown in Figs. 4 and 5. • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC 5-47 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSIAP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SINGLE CHARACTER SYNC EXTERNAL SYNC DETECT EVEN PARITY PARITY ENABLE SYNCHRONOUS~~~~~-'~~~~~~---r--~------­ MODEL-__L-~~~__~~~__-L__-L~~ EVEN PARITY PARITY ENABLE CHARACTER LENGTH o0 oI I I 0 I 5 6 7 8 Fig. 3 Initialization flow chart ASYNCHRONOUS MODE~~~~~~~~~L-~~~-=~ 0, Fig. 4 06 05 0, 03 Mode-instruction format 02 0, Do ( C/O=' ) WR =0 I I ENTER HUNT MODE ENTER HUNT MODE II-ENABLE SEARCH FOR SYNC CHARACTERS INTERNAL RESET rlNTERNAL RESET -II-TO INITIALIZATION 1 I I I I TRANSMISSION CARRIER . I CONTROL I-RTS-O REQUEST TO SEND I ERROR RESET r',~CLEAR ALL ERROR FLAGS PE OE. FE) ERROR RESET 1 SEND BREAK I SEND BREAK CHARACTER II-T,D=LOW I I RECEIVER ENABLE l'=ENABLE O=DISABLE Rx ENABLE DATA TERMINAL READY -I DATA-TERMINAL READY ll-DTR=o l A M TRANSMISSION ENABLE T ENABLE I = ENABLE x 0= DISABLE I EH I 0, Fig. 5-48 5 IR I RTSI ER ISBRKI RxE IOTA ITxENI 06 05 0, 03 0, 0, Command-instruction format • .MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC Do - - (C/O=I. WR=O) I 1 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSIAP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Asynchronous Transmission Mode When data characters are loaded on the M5M82C51 AP after initial setting, the USART automatically adds a start bit (low) , an odd or even parity bit specified by the mode instruction during initialization, and a specified numbe( of stop bits (high). After that, the assembled data characters are transferred as serial data via the T xD pin if, transfer is enabled (T xEN = 1· CTS = U, In this case, the transfer data (baud rate) is shifted by the mode instruction at a rate of 1X, 1/16X, or 1/64X the T xC period. If the data characters are not loaded on the M5M82C51 AP, the T xD pin enters a mark state (high). When SBRK is programmed by the command instruction, break characters (low) are output continuously through the T xD pin. Asynchronous Reception Mode The RxD line usually starts operations in a mark state (high), triggered by the falling edge of a low-level pulse when it comes to this line. This signal is again strobed at the middle of the bit to confirm that it is a perfect start bit. The detection of a second low indicates the validity of the start bit (restrobing is carried out only in the case of 16X and 64X) , After that, the bit counter inside the M5M82C51 AP starts operating; each bit of the serial information on the RxD line is shifted in by the rising edge of RxC, and the data bit, parity bit (when necessary), and stop bit are sampled at the middle position. The occurrence of a parity error causes the setting of a parity-error flag. If the stop bit is in the low state, a frame error flag is set. Attention should be paid to the fact that the receiver requires only one stop bit even though the program has designated 1%or 2 stop bits. Reception up to the stop bit means reception of a complete character. This character is then transferred to the receiver-data buffer shown in Fig.2, and the RxRDY becomes active. In cases where this character is not read by the CPU and where the next character is transferred to the receiverdata buffer, the preceding character is destroyed and an overrun-error flag is set. These error flags can be read as the M5M82C51 AP status information. The occurrence of an error does not stop USART operations. The error flags are cleared by the ER( D4 bit) of the command instruction. The asynchronous-system transfer formats are shown in Figs. 6 and 7, Synchronous Transmission Mode In this mode the T xD pin remains in the high state until initial setting by the CPU is completed. After initialization, the state of CTS=L and TxEN =1 enables serial transmission of characters through the T xD pin. Then, data characters are sent out and shifted by the falling edge of the T xC signal. The transmission rate equals the T xC rate. Thus, once data-character transfer starts, it must continue through the T xD pin at the same rate as that of TxC. Unless data characters are provided from the CPU before the transmitter buffer becomes empty, one or two SYNC characters are automatically output from the TxD pin. In this case, it should be noted that the T xEMPTY pin enters the high state when there are no data characters left in the M5M82C51 AP to be transferred, and that the low state is not entered until the USART is provided with the next data character from the CPU. Care should also be taken over the fact that merely setting a command instruction does not effect SYNCcharacter insertion, because the SYNC character insertion is enabled after sending out the first data character. In this mode, too, break characters are sent out in succession from the T xD pin when SBRK is deSignated (D3= 1 ) by a command instruction. CPU-USART (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER) DATA CH~RACTER I ASSEMBLED RECEIPTION FORMAT DATA BITS (5-8) TRANSMITTER DATA OUTPUT (T,D) STD~ (I. 1 5.2) USART-CPU (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER) I DATA Note Fig. 6 Asynchronous transmission format I (transmission) PARIT BIT Fig. 7 • MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC CHARA~TER (5-8) I When the data character is 5. 6, or 7 bits/character length. the unused bits (for USART - CPU) are set to zero. Asynchronous transmission format II (reception) 5-49 II MITsUBlsHI Lsis MSM82CSIAP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Synchronous Reception Mode Character synchronization in this mode is carried out internally or externally by initial-setting designation. Programming in the internal synchronous mode requires that an EH instruction (D 7 = 1, enter hunt mode) is included in the first command instruction. Data on the RxD pin is sampled by the rising RxC signal, and the receiver-buffer contents are compared with the SYNC character each time a bit is input. Comparison continues until an agreement is reached. When the M5M82C51 AP has been programmed in the bi-sync mode, data received in further succession is compared. The detection of two SYNC characters in succession makes the USART end the hunt mode, setting the SYNDET pin to the high state. This reset operation is prompted by the reading of the status information. When the parity has been programmed, SYNDET is not set in the middle of the last data bit but in the middle of the parity bit. In the external synchronous mode, the M5M82C51 AP gets out of the hunt mode when a high synchronization signal is given to the SYNDET pin. The high signal requires a minimum duration of one RxC cycle. In the asynchronous mode, however, the EH signal does not affect the operation at all. Parity and overrun errors are checked in the same way as in the asynchronous system. During hunt-mode operations the parity bit is not checked, but parity checking is carried out even when the receiver is disabled. The CPU can command the receiver to enter the hunt mode, if synchronization is lost. This prevents the SYNC character from erroneously becoming equal to the received data when all the data in the receiver buffer is set to '1' Attention should be paid to the fact that the SYNDET F/F is reset each time status information is read irrespective of the synchronous mode's being internal or external. This, howev- er, does not return the M5M82C51 AP to the hunt mode. Synchronism .detection is carried out even though it is not the hunt mode. The synchronous transfer formats are shown in Figs. 8 and 9. Command Instruction This instruction defines actual operations in the communication mode designated by mode setting. Command instructions include transmitter/receiver enable error-reset, internal-reset, modem-control, enter-hunt and break transmission instructions. The mode is set following the reset operation. A SYNC character is set as required, and the writing of high-level signals on the control/data pin (C/D) that follows it is regarded as a command instruction. When the mode is set all over again from the beginning, the M5M82C51 AP can be reset by using inputting via the reset terminal or by internal resetting based on the command instruction. Note 1: The command error reset (ER), internal reset (IR) and enter-hunt-mode (EH) operations are only effective when the command instruction is loaded, so that these bits need not be returned to '0'. 2: When a break character is sent out by a command, the T xD enters the low state immediately irrespective of whether or not the USART has sent out data. 3: Operations of the USART's receiver section which is always in the enable state cannot be inhibited. The command instruction RxE = 0 does not mean that data reception via the RxD pin is inhibited; it means that the RxRDY is masked and error flags are inhibited. CPU-USART (5~8 BITS/CHARACTER) I DATA CH:fRACTER I ASSEMBLED TxD OUTPUT USART-CPU (5~8 BITS/CHARACTER) I Fig. 8 Synchronous transmission format I (transmission) Note Fig. 5-50 9 • MITsUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC DATA ~;ARACTER I When the data character is 5, 6, or 7 bits/character length, the unused bits (for USART- CPU) are set to zero. Synchronous transmission format II (reception) MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Status Information FE: The CPU can always read USART status by setting the C/O to '1' and RD to '0'. The status information format is shown in Fig. 10. In this format RxRDY, TxEMPTY and SYNDET have the same definitions as those of the pins. This means that these three pieces of status information become '1' when each pin is in the high state. The other status information is defined as follows: DSR: When the DSR pin is in the low state, status information DSR becomes '1'. The occurrence of a frame error in the receiver section makes the status information FE '1 '. The occurrence of an overrun error in the receiver section makes the status information OE '1 '. The occurrence of a parity error in the receiver section makes this status information PE '1 '. This information becomes '1' when the transmit data buffer is empty. Be careful because this has a different meaning from the TxRDY pin that enters the high state only when the transmitter buffer is empty, when the CTS pin is in the low state, and when TxEN is '1 '. OE: PE: T xRDY: 11 I FOR DSR LOW LEVEL 0 FOR DSR HIGH LEVEL SAME DEFINITION AS SYNDET/BD PIN I FE IS SET WHEN A VALID STOP BIT IS NDT DETECTED AT THE END OF EVERY CHAR I ACTER (ASYNC ONLY) IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE COMMAND INSTRUCTION I I FE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5M82C51AP OE IS SET WHEN THE CPU DOES NOT READ A CHARACTER BEFORE THE NEXT ONE BECOMES AVAILABLE IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE COMMAND INSTRUCTION OE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5M82C51AP PE IS SET WHEN A PARITY ERROR IS DETECTED IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE COMMAND INSTRUCTION PE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE MSM82C51AP .I I DSR I 8~~ I D7 Fig. 10 D6 FE D5 I OE D, I PE I T xE D3 D2 I I I T~--j :~Y ~~Y D, SAME DEFINITION AS TxEMPTY PIN I SAME DEFINITION AS RxRDY PIN I 1 FOR TRANSMIT DATA BUFFER IS EMPTY I I Do Status information (C/D=l, RD=O) APPLICATION EXAMPLES Fig. 11 shows an application example for the M5M82C51AP in the asynchronous mode. When the port addresses of the M5M82C51 AP are assumed to be 00 # and 01 # in this figure, initial setting in the asynchronous mode is carried out in the following manner: MYI A,86# Mode setting OUT 01 # MYI A,27# Command instruction OUT 01 # In this case, the following are set by mode setting: Asynchronous mode 6 bits/character Parity enable (even) 1'/2stoP bits Baud rate: 16X Command instructions set the following RTS=l~RTS pin=L RxE=l DTR=l~DTR pin=L TxEN =l When the initial setting is complete, transfer operations are allowed. The RTS pin is initially set to the low-level by setting RTS to '1', and this serves as a CTS input with TxEN being equal to '1 '. For this reason the same definition applies to the status and pin of TxRDY, and '1' is assigned when the transmit-data buffer is empty. Actual transfer of data is carried out in the following way: IN 01 # Status read The IN instruction prompts the CPU to read the USART's status. The result is; if the TxRDY equals '1' transmitter data is sent from the CPU and written on the M5M82C51 AP. Transmitter data is written in the M5M82C51 AP in the following manner: MYI A,20# 2D 16 is an example of transmitter data. USART~(A) OUT 00# Receiver data is read in the following manner: IN 00# (A)~USART In the above example, the status information is read and as a result, the transmitter data is written and read. Interruption processing by using the TxRDY and RxRDY pins is also possible. Fig. 12 shows the status of the TxD pin when data written in the USART is transferred from the CPU. When the data shown in Fig.12 enters the RxD pin, data sent from the M5M82C51 AP to the CPU becomes 2D,6 and bits D6 and D7 are treated as '0'. • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 5-51 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE r~rlDrti~ j RxC C TO EXTERNAL CIRCUIT { x, TxC L BAUD RATE GENERATOR (DIVIDER) RTS RD RD CTS WR WR p-- EXTERNAL CIRCUIT CPU 8085A p---- DSR 101M ADDRESS DECODER c/B I--TO TRANSMISSION FROM RESET IN RESET OUT RESET USART M5M82C51AP DTR CS x, ClK ClK A15-Ag Tx D LlNE{ Rx D 07 . . . . . 00 AD,-ADo 8 8 8 ALE j TO MEMORY AND OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICES Fig. 11 Example of circuit using the asynchronous mode STOP BIT (l. 5 BITS) START Fig. 5-52 12 BIT~ DATA I I----~"'-'---~ If--L--I 1 I II--START PARITY BIT Example of data transmission .• MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC BIT MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Symbol Parameter Vee Power-supply yoltage V, Input Yoltage Vo Output Yoltage Topr Operating free-air temperature range Tstg Storage temperature range Conditions With respect to Vss RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS Limits Unit -0.3-7 V -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 V -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 V -20-75 ·C -65-150 ·C (Ta =-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted.) Limits Symbol Parameter Min Vce Supply Yoltage Vss Power-supply voltage Unit Nom Max 5 5.5 4.5 0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS V V (Ta =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted.) Limits Symbol Parameter Unit Test conditions " - .._ - - " Min Typ Max " V'H High-level input voltage 2 V'L Low-level input voltage -0.3 V aH High-level output voltage IOH=-400"A VOL Low-level output voltage IOL=2.2mA lec Supply current from Vee I'H High-level input current VI=VCC I'L Low-level input current V,=ov laz Off-state input current Vss=OV, v,=ov-Vcc C, Input capacitance GIIO Input/output capacitance Vcc+0.3 V 0.8 V 2.4 V 0.45 V 5 rnA -10 10 f.lA -10 10 /.LA -10 10 f.lA Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms , T8=25'C 10 pF Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mV rms , T8=25'C 20 pF • MITSUBISHI ;"ELECTRIC .- .- 5-53 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE TIMING REQUIREMENTS(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc=5V±tO%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted.) Alternative Symbol Parameter Limits Unit Test conditions Symbol Min Typ Max tce, ) Clock cycle time (Notesl, 2) tCY 320 1350 twe, ) Clock high pulse width t, 120 tce,)-90 tweT) Clock low pulse width tT 90 ns ns ns tr Clock rise time tR 20 ns tf Clock fall time tF 20 ns kHz lX baud rate hx DC 64 16X baud rate fTx DC 310 kHz 64X baud rate fTX DC 615 kHz Transmitter input clock hx frequency tWCTPWL) tWCTPWH) Transmitter input clock low lX baud rate tTPW 12 tC(' ) pulse width 16X, 64X baud rate hpw 1 tce. ) Transmitter input clock high lX baud rate tTPD 15 tC(' ) pulse width 16X, 64X baud rate hPD 3 lX baud rate fRx 16X baud rate 64 kHz fRx 310 kHz 64X baud rate fRx DC 615 Receiver input clock low lX baud rate tRPw pulse width 16X, 64X baud rate Receiver input clock high lX baud rate pulse width 16X, 64X baud rate Receiver input clock fRx frequency tWCRPWU tc (' ) DC DC tW(RPWH) kHz 12 tce. ) t RPW 1 tcC' ) tAPO 15 tRPO 3 tce. ) !~ tSUCA-R) Address setup time before read (CS, C/O) (Note3) tAR 0 ns th(R-A) Address hold time after read (CS, C/O) (Note3) tRA 0 ns tweR) Read pulse width tRR tSUCA-W) Address setup time before write tAW 0 ns theW-A) Address hold time after write tWA 0 ns twew) Write pulse width tww 250 (200) ns tSU(oo~w) Data setup time before write tow 150(100) ns two 20( 0 ) thew-DO) Data hold time after write tSU(ESO~AxC) ESYNOET setup time before RxC 250(200) t ES 18 ns ns tce. ) tSU(C-R) Control setup time before read tCR 20 tce. ) tRv Write recovery time between writes (Note4) tRv 6 tce. ) tSU(Rxo-tS) RxD setup time before internal sampling pulse tSRx 2 !-IS th{tS-RxD) RxD hold time after internal sampling pulse tHRx 2 !-IS Note 5-54 The T xC and RxC frequencies have the following limitations with respect to ClK. For 1X baud rate hx, fRx ;i;1/(30t c e.I). For 16X, 64X baud rate hx, f Rx ;i;1/(4, 5t c e,) Reset p-ulse width=6t c e'l minimum. System clock must be running during reset. CS, C/O are considered as address. This recovery time is for mode initialization only. Write data is allowed only when T xRDY=l. Recovery time between writes for asynchronous mode is 8tCI.), and that for synchronous mode is 16tce.). • MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS (T a=-20~75°C , Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted.) Limits Alternative Symbol Test conditions (Noten Parameter ------ symbol tPZV(R-DQ) Output data enable time after read (Note5) tPVZ{R-DQ) Output data disable time after read ------ tPZV(TxC-TxD) tDF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - = - - - - - -f - - - - - - TXD enable time after falling edge of TxC -------------------- hxADY tPHUW-TxR) Propagation time from write data to TxRDY (Note6) hxRDY CLEAR IpLH(CLB-RxR) Propagation time from center of last bit to RxRDY (Nole6) tRxRDY tPHL(R-RxR} Propagation time from read data 10 RxRDY (:Iear (Note6) tRxRDY CLEAR Propagation time from rising edge of RxC to internal SYNDET (Note6) tiS Propagation time from center of last bit to TxEMPTY (Note6) hxEMPTY Propagation time from rising edge of WR to control (Note6) twc 6 7 8 /.LS 8 tCI .) 400 ns 26 tCI • ) .- ns 26 tpLH ( RxO- SYD) IpLH(cLB-TxE) -- ns 1 400 -- ------~~~----~ ns 100 -- r--- Propagation time from center of last bit to TxRDY clear (Note6) tpHL(w-C) 200(170J 10 tCTx l PLH (cLB-TxR) Note 5 Max CL=150pF tAD ------ -------------- -- Typ - - r-------~ -------------- --------- -- Unit Min Assumes that address is vaild before falling edge of RD. Status-up data can have a maximum delay of 28 clock periods from the event affecting the status. Input pulse level O. 45~2. 4V Reference level Input V ,H =2V, V,L =0. 8V Input pulse rise time 10ns Output VoH =2V, VOL =0. BV Input pulse fall time 10ns M5M82C51 AP is also invested with the extended specification showed in the brackets. tCI. ) 20 tcl. ) 8 tcl. ) 2.4--V o. 45-A;:;~ V- 0::;".::.~A- ..::8_ _ _ TIMING DIAGRAMS System clock (elK) tC( ~) tr If ClK Transmitter clock & data ~."=4[ 10 11 12 13 14 II } tW(1)) 15 16 T xC(16X) ~ __---t-"W-'-(T-'-P-'-W.:cLl-------7>K-------t....W:.:(-"TP....Wc.H:...)------~ T,C(lX) tPZVI TXC-TXD I T,D Receiver clock & data R,D Rx-BIT COUNTER STARTS HERE DATA BIT START BIT DATA BIT RxC(16X) RxC(lX) INTERNAL SAMPLING PULSE tW(¢) • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 5-55 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSIAP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Write control cycle (CPU-USART) U tSU(A_W) j cio t bA tSU(A-W) tWlw) ~. tSU(OQ-wl ) D)-DO (DATA INPUT) l!:hIW-D'i! VALID K tPHL(W-cl ) DTR, RTS Read control cycle (USART -CPU) tSU(C_R) DSR, CTS ) tSU(A-R) thIR-A) ftSUIA-RI th(R_A) c/o .11\ tWIRl ¥ RD tPVZIR_DQI ~ tPZV(R-DQ) D)-DO (DATA OUTPUT) 5-56 j!J ~, • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC VALID MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Write data cycle (CPU--+USART) h(W-A) tSU(A_W) c/o t 1 IhIW- AI ISUIA_wl tW(w) tSU{DQ-wl th(W_DQ} ~ } D7~DO (DATA INPUT) VALID K II TxRDY r Read data cycle (USART--+CPU) tSU(A_R) tSU(A-A} c/o D7~DO (DATA OUTPUT) Rx RDY • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 5-57 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Transmitter control & flag timing (async mode) c/o ] \~~\~[]~~/____~~/____~~L__~ __~I WR-TxEN WR-DATA 1 WR-DATA 2 WR-DATA 3 \ WR-DATA4 _-----""'\ _ - - - - - , R " - - - - - - - - , TxRDY (PIN) Tx RDY (STATUS) TxEMPTY BREAK STATE Note 8: Example format = 7 bits/character with parity & 2 stop bits 9: TxRDY(pin)= 1 -(Transmit-data buller is empty) - (TxEN = 1 ) - (CTS= 0)= 1 10: TxRDY(status)= 1 -(Transmit-data buller is empty) = 1 Receiver control & flag timing (async mode) c/o -.J \L-_ _ _---l\L--LI_ _ _ _ _............/L-J1 RD DATA 1 RD DATA 3 ..J ~ \~_ ___I\----I.l_ ___JI V '" RD ALL 0 DATA \ WR-ER WR-Rx E WR-\jfi! U '1\ BD (PIN) DATA 2 LOST OE (STATUS) tpt.HI r:LO.Rx'R) ~ Rx RDY J:- n S/OIil213(415J61p DATAl p r WoN21*N61p1~ \sJoN213141*lp1~ DATA 2 p DATA 3 p Notell: Example format = 7 bits/character with parity 5-58 • MITSUBISHI ~ELECTRIC t S S \SOI23456P;SOI23456P~ BREAK STATE L-- MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Transmitter control & flat timing (sync mode) o WR DATA 1 WR DATA 2 WR DATA 3 I""""""---~ u WR DATA 4 ~-~ , \ WR DATA 5 1""""""------- I""""""---~ Tx RDY (PIN) Tx RDY (STATUS) TxEMPTY Tx D DATA I Note12: DATA 2 SYNC CH 1 SYNC CH 2 MARK STATE DATA3 DATA4 MARK STATE ~~~~~ DATA 5 SYNC CH 1 SYNC CH 2 11 Example format = 5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters. Receiver control & flag timing (sync mode) INTERNAL SYNC EXTERNAL SYNC MODE MODE :J ,\...______.L......J/L.J1 C/o \ \ fIL.U\. ] C;,;,H,;,,;2"-_ _ _ R_D..,STATUS 1""""""--+---+-- EXTERNAL SYNC (INPUT) ~:~~NAL (OUTPUT) RD DATA WR-EH-RxE WR-EH-RxE SYNDET (PIN) c tPLH(RxC-SYD) tSU(ESD-RxC} SYNDET (STATUS) OE (STATUS) DATA 2 LDST r+--~ Rx RDY RxD - SYNC' SYNC: : DATA 1 DATA2 DATA3 CH 1 CH 2 : : EXITS HUNT MODE SYNDET SET Note13: Example format = j SYNC CH 1 SYNC CH 2 lCHARACTER ASSEMBLY BEGINS 5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters. • MITSUBISHI ;"ELECTRIC 5-59 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS1AFP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE DESCRIPTION The M5M82C51 AFP is a universal synchronous/asynchronous receiver/transmitter (USART) IC chip designed for data communications use. It is produced using the silicon-gate CMOS process and is mainly used in combination with 8-bit microprocessors. PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS RECEIVER;~~~~ • • • 3 26 Baud rate: DC-64K-baud Full duplex, double-buffered transmitter/receiver Error detection: parity, overrun, and framing APPLICATIONS • Modem control of data communications using microcomputers • Control of CRT, TTY and other terminal equipment FUNCTION The M5M82C51 AFP is used in the peripheral circuits of a CPU. It permits assignments, by means of software, of operations in all the currently used serial-data transfer systems including IBM's 'bi-sync'. The M5M82C51 AFP receives para- 2 ~ RTS BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS T~tg~~IIJ~~;: CON~~~C;~~~~ BIDIRECTIONAL DATE BUS V cc (5V) D4- 5 Single 5V supply voltage TTL compatible Synchronous and asynchronous operation Synchronous: 5-8-bit characters Internal or external synchronization Automatic SYNC character insertion Asynchronous system: 5-8-bit characters Clock rate- 1 , 16 or 64 times the baud rate 1 ,1 y., or 2 stop bits False-start-bit detection Automatic break-state detection BLOCK DIAGRAM Rx D ~ (OV)Vss FEATURES • • • 2 - 0 1} 2 -DO 2 ~ 21 ~ 2 ~ CLK RECEIVER· CI,OCK INPUT DATA·TERMINAL READY OUTPUT ~~~g~JT~~;' 0 SR ~~ItysfJpuT RESET RESET INPUT CLOCK INPUT 19 ~ T x 0 6~~~~MJn5~' 18 ~ T,EMPTY ~~'i.~W~Vr~~·T CHIP.S~~~Si %g~~~gIPN'lI~ CONTRREtE;~~~~ READ';!'g5~~~RxROY~ 14 '------~ Outline 17 ~ CTS ~f~t~J~UT 16 - ~~NDETI ~~~KDgm6~ 15 ~ Tx RDY ~~~~~~~~~~T 28P2W lIel-format data from the CPU, converts it into a serial format, and then transmits via the TxD pin. It also receives data sent in via the RxD pin from the external circuit, and converts it into a parallel format for sending to the CPU. On receipt of parallel-format data for transmission from the CPU or serial data for the CPU from external devices, the M5M82C51 AFP informs the CPU using the T xRDY or RxRDY pin. In addition, the CPU can read the M5M82C51 AFP status at any time. The M5M82C51 AFP can detect the data received for errors and inform the CPU of the presence of errors as status information. Errors include parity, overrun and frame errors. M5M82C51 AFP is different from M5M82C51 AP only in the package outline. Refer to the M5M82C51 AP for more details. -----------l RESET INPUT CLOCK INPUT CONTROL/DATA·CONTROL INPUT READ·DATA CONTROL INPUT WRITE·DATA CONTROL INPUT TRANSMITIER·DATA OUTPUT CHlp·SELECT INPUT Tx RDY TxEMPTY DATA·SET READY INPUT TRANSMlnER·READY OUTPUT TRANSMITIER·EMPTY OUTPUT TRANSMITIER·CLOCK INPUT DATA·TERMINAL READY OUTPUT CLEAR-TO·SEND INPUT REQUEST·TO·SEND OUTPUT RxRDY RECEIVER·READY OUTPUT 25 RxC RECEIVER·CLOCK INPUT 16 SYNDET/BD SYNC DETECT/BREAK DETECT BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS RECEIVER·DATA INPUT 5-60 •. MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER DESCRIPTION The M5M82C54P is a programmable general-purpose timer device developed by using the silicon-gate CMOS process. It offers counter and timer functions in systems using an 8-bit parallel-processing CPU. The use of the M5M82C54P frees the CPU from the execution of looped programs, countoperation programs and other simple processing involving many repetitive operations, thus contributing to improved system throughputs. The M5M82C54P works on a single power supply, and both its input and output can be connected to a TTL circuit. M5M82C54P Parameter Clock high pulse width 60ns Clock low pulse width 60ns Clock cycle time PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) vee (5V) 23 - BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS 125ns Propagation time 120ns CS ~~~;.SELECT 18 17 CLOCK INPUT CLKO~ 9 CLK2 CLOCK INPUT ~OUT2 g~~~~R 16 -GATE2 GATE INPUT cg~~~~~ OUTO~ 10 15 - GATEO~ 11 14 ~GATEI 13 ~ OUTI g3¥~JiR GATE INPUT (Ov) GND from read to output RD READ INPUT 21 - 20 - Ao .}ADDRESS 19- A, INPUTS M5MB2C54P-6 55ns -110ns -165ns WR WRITE INPUT 22 - --..----~ 170ns CLK1 CLOCK INPUT GATE INPUT Outline 24P4 FEATURES • • • • Single 5V supply voltage TTL compatible Pin connection compatible with M5L8253P-5 Clock period: M5M82C54P-6 ...................... M5M82C54P ......................... FUNCTION DC~6MHz DC~8MHz • 3 independent bult-in 16-bit down counters • • • 6 counter modes freely assignable for each counter Binary or decimal counts Read-back command for monitoring the count and status APPLICATION Delayed-time setting, pulse counting and rate generation in microcomputers. Three independent 16-bit counters allow free programming based on mode-control instructions from the CPU. When roughly classified, there are 6 modes (O~5). Mode 0 is mainly used as an interruption timer and event counter, mode 1 as a digital one-shot, modes 2 and 3 as rate generators, mode 4 for a software triggered strobe, and mode 5 for a hardware triggered strobe. The count can be monitored and set at any time. Besides the count, the status of the counter can be monitored by Read-back command. The counter operates with either the binary or BCD system. BLOCK DIAGRAM (5V) vecf4[C~= --8--- ---iOv) GND 12 WORD REGISTER 8 tI -.. D/ BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS --~CLK a --~GATE a --(1)llOUT 0 D6 D5 D, 4 CLOCK INPUT GATE INPUT COUNTER OUTPUT CLOCK INPUT GATE INPUT COUNTER OUTPUT READ INPUT CLOCK INPUT WRITE INPUT GATE INPUT CHIP-SELECT INPUT COUNTER OUTPUT INTERNAL "------' _ ._ _ _ _ _ _D_A_T_A :_U_S_ _ _ • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC -----.J 5-61 11 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS CONTROL WORD AND INITIAL-VALUE LOADING Data-Bus Buffer This 3-state, bidirectional,. 8-bit buffer is used to interface the M5M82C54P to the system-side data bus. Transmission and reception of all the data including control words for mode designation and values written in, and read from, the counters are carried out through this buffer. Read/Write Logic The read/write logic accepts control signals (RD, WR) from the system and generates control signals for· each counter. It is enabled or disabled by the chip-select signal (CS); if CS is at the high-level the data-bus buffer enters a floating (high-impedance) state. Read Input (RD) The count of the counter designated by address inputs Ao and A1 on the low-level is output to the data bus. Write Input (WR) Data on the data bus is written in the counter or controlword register designated by address inputs Ao and A1 on the lowlevel. Address Inputs (Ao, Al) These are used for selecting one of the 3 internal counters and either of the control-word registers. Chip-Select Input (CS) A low-level on this input enables the M5M82C54P. Changes in the level of the CS input have no effect on the operation of the counters. Control-Word Register This register stores information required to give instructions about operational modes and to select binary or BCD counting. Unlike the counters, it allows no reading, only writing. Counters 0,1 and 2 These counters are identical in operation and independent of each other. Each is a 16-bit, presettable, down counter, and has clock-input, gate-input and output pins. The counter can operate in either binary or BCD using the falling edge of each clock. The mode of counter operation and the initial value from which to start counting can be designated by software. The count can be read by input instruction at any time, and there is a "read-on-the-fly" function which enables stable reading by latching each instantaneous count to the registers by a special counter-latch instruction. The function of the M5M82C54P depends on the system software. The operational mode of the counters can be specified by writing control words (Ao, A1 = 1, 1) into the controlword registers. The programmer must write out to the M5M82C54P the programmed number-of count register bytes (lor 2) prior to actually using the selected counter. Table 2 shows control-word format, which consists of 4 fields. Only the counter selected by the 0 7 and 0 6 bits of the control word is set for operation. Bits 0 5 and 04 are used for specifying operations to read values in the counter and to Initialize. Bits D3 ~ 0 1 are used for mode designation, and Do for speCifying binary or BCD counting. When Do = 0, binary counting is employed~ and any number from 0000 16 to FFFF16 can be loaded into the count register. The counter is counted down for each clock. The counting of 0000 16 causes the transmission of a time-out signal from the count-output pin. The maximum number of counts is obtained when 0000 16 is set as the initial value. When 0 0=1, BCD counting is employed, and any number from 0000 10 to 999910 can be loaded on the counter. Neither system resetting nor connecting to the power supply sets the control word to any specific value. Thus to bring the counters into operation, the above-mentioned control words for mode designation must be given to each counter, and then 1 ~ 2 byte initial counter values must be set. The following is an example of this programming step. To deSignate mode 0 for counter 1 ,with initial value 825316 set by binary count, the following program is used: MVI A, 70 16 Control word 70 16 OUT n1 is contrOl-ward-register address MVI A, 53 16 Low-order 8 bits OUT n2 is counter 1 address MVI High-order 8 bits OUT "2. n2 is counter 1 address Thus, the program generally has the follbwing sequence: (1) Control-word output to counter i (i=O, 1,2). (2) Initialization of low-order 8 counter bits (3) Initialization of high-order 8 counter bits The three counters can be executed in any sequence. It is possible, for instance, to designate the mode of each counter and then load initial values in a different order. Initialization of the counters deSignated by RL 1 and RL 0 must be executed in the order of the low-order 8 bits and then the high-order 8 bits for the counter in question. 5-62 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC "1 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER Table Basic Functions cs AD WA A, AD 0 I 0 0 a Data bus-Counter 0 I 0 0 I Data bus-Counter 1 0 I a Data bus-Counter 2 I a a I 0 I Data bus-Control-word register 0 a I a Data bus-Counter 0 0 0 I a a I Data bus-Counter 1 0 0 I I a Data bus-Counter 2 0 0 I I I 3-state I X X X X 3-state 0 I I X X 3-state Table I I Function a 2 Control-Word Format II eSC(Select Counter) SCI sca 0 f------- a Select counter a I Select counter 1 1 a ------ a ------- Select counter 2 --~- I I Prohibited combination e RL( Read/Load) All ALa 0 a a ~---- Counter Latch Command - - Read/load low-order 8 bits only I 1---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I a Read/load high-order 8 bits only - - f--- 1 1 Read/load low-order 8 bits and then high-order 8 bits eM(Mode) M2 MI Ma a a 1------ a a - - --- a ModeO 1 Model X I a Mode2 X 1 I Mode3 a a a Mode4 1 Mode5 -------- -- I----~-- 1 1 1--- ----- 1--------- eBCD I~-- f--_ _ _ -+_B_in_a-=ry_c_o_u_nt_e_r_CI_6_b_it_sJ_ _ _ _ __ Binary-coded decimal counter (4 decades) I SCI I sca I RLl I----- sc - + - I RL RLa M2 Ml Ma BCD M ---+BCD-1 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 5-63 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER MODE DEFINITION Mode 0 (Interrupt on Terminal Count) Mode set and initialization cause the counter output to go low-level (see Fig. 1). When the counter is loaded with an initial value, it will start counting the clock input. When the terminal count is reached, the output will go high and remain high until the selected count register is reloaded with the mode. This mode can be used when the CPU is to be interrupted after a certain period or at the time of counting up. Fig. 1 shows a setting of 4 as the initial value. If gate input goes low, counting is inhibited for the duration of the lowlevel period. Reloading of the initial value during count operation will stop counting by the loading of the first byte and start the new count by the loading of the second byte. Mode 1 (Programmable One-Shot) The gate input functions as a trigger input. A gate-input rising edge causes the generation of low-level one-shot output with a predetermined clock length starting from the next clock. Fig. 2 shows an initial setting of 4. While the counter output is at the low-level (during one-shot), loading of a new value does not change the one-shot pulse width, which has already been output. The current count can be read at any time without affecting the width of the one-shot pulse being output. This mode permits retriggering. Mode 2 (Rate Generator) Low-level pulses during one clock operation are generated from the counter output at a rate of one per n clock inputs (where n is the value initially set for the counter). When a new value is loaded during the counter operation, it is reflected on the output after the pulses by the current count have been output. In the example shown in Fig. 3, n is given as 4 at the outset and is then changed to 3. In this mode, the gate input provides a reset function. While it is on the low-level, the output is maintained high; the counter restarts from the initial value, triggered by a rising gate-input edge. This gate input, therefore, makes possible external synchronization of the counter by hardware. After the mode is set, the counter does not start counting until the rate n is loaded into the count register, with the counter output remaining at the high-level. Mode 3 (Square Rate Generator) This is similar to Mode 2 except that it outputs a square wave with the half count of the set rate. When the set value n is odd, the square-wave output will be high for (n+l) 12 clock-input counts and low for (n-1 ) 12 counts. When a new rate is reloaded into the count register during its operation, it is immediately reflected on the count directly following the output transition (high-to-Iow or low-to-high) of the current count. Gate-input operations are exactly the same as in Mode 2. Fig. 4 shows an example of Mode 3 operation. Mode 4 (Software Triggered Strobe) After the mode is set, the output will be high. By loading a 5-64 number on the counter, however, clock-input counts can be started and on the terminal count, the output will go low for one input-clock period and then will go high again. Mode 4 differs from Mode 2 in that pulses are not output repeatedly with the same set count. The pulse output is delayed one clock period in Mode 2, as shown in Fig. 5. When a new value is loaded into the count register during its count operation, it is reflected on the next pulse output without affecting the current count. The count will be inhibited while the gate input is low-level. Mode 5 (Hardware Triggered Strobe) This is a variation of Mode 1. The gate input provides a trigger function, and the count is started by its rising edge. On the terminal count, the counter output goes low for on one clock period and then goes high. As in Mode 1, retriggering by the gate input is possible. An example of timing in Mode 5 is shown in Fig. 6. As mentioned above, the gate input plays different roles according to the mode. The functions are summarized in Table 3. Table 3 I~ Gate Operations Low or going low Rising High Mode 0 Enables counting Disables counting , (1) Initiates counting (2) Resets output after next clock 2 (11 Disables counting (2) Sets output high immediately (11 Reloads counter (2) Initiates counting Enables counting 3 (1) Disables counting (2) Sets output high immediately (1) Reloads counter (2) Initiates counting Enables counting 4 Disables counting 5 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC Enables counting Initiates counting MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER OUT( GATE="H") WR ~ :L-...J GATE :4 OUT Fig. 1 I I I Mode 4 4 I :3 : 2 1 0 I a Fig. 4 Mode 3 elK WR GATE ________~r_~-:--~~--~---------- 3 2 0 LJ OUT OUT GATE 2 OUT Fig. 2 L--J 1 OUT Mode 1 Fig. 5 ~ Mode 4 II GATE WR 4 0 3 OUT(GATE="H") OUT(n=4) GATE ~r---------------------_;:.4....3.....3'--... 3.....;:........:.._2;.......:,1 4 3 2 1 4 3 OUT ~ Mode 2 4 Sometimes the counter must be monitored by reading its count or using it as an event counter. The M5M82C54P offers the following two methods for count reading: Read Operation The count can be read by designating the address of the counter to be monitored and executing a simple I/O read operation. In order to ensure correct reading of the count, it is necessary to cause the clock input to pause by external logic or prevent a' change in the count by gate input. An example of a program to read the counter 1 count is shown below. If RLl, RLO=l, 1 has been specified in the control word, the first IN instruction enables the I'ow-order 8 bits to be read and the second I N instruction enables the highorder 8 bits. IN n2 is the counter 1 address MOV 0, A "2 .... "2 MOV E, A The IN instruction should be executed once or twice by the RLl and RLO designations in the control-word register. 3 OUT(n=4) Fig. 6 COUNTER MONITORING LJ GATE U IN 0 elK elK Fig. 3 h--i GATE Lr-- Mode 5 Read-on-the-Fly Operation This method makes it possible to read the current count without affecting the count operation at all. A special counter-latch command is first written in the control-word register. This causes latching of all the instantaneous counts to the register, allowing retention of stable counts. An example of a program to execute this operation for counter 2 is given below. MVI A, 1000XXXX .... 0 5 = 0 4 = 0 designates counter latching OUT IN "1 .... nl is the control-ward-register address "3 .... n3 is the counter 2 address MOV 0, A IN "3 MOV E, A In this example, the IN instruction is executed twice. Due to the internal logic of the M5M82C54P it is absolutely essential to complete the entire reading procedure. If two bytes are programmed to be read, then two bytes must be read before any OUT instruction can be executed to the same counter. • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 5-65 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER Read Back Command M5M82C54P has a function of reading not only the. count but also status (Read Back Command). The read' back command enables the next four functions. (1) read the current count "on the fly" (2) monitor the current state of the OUT pin (3) monitor the current state of the counter element (whether the count is loaded into the counter element or not) (4) read the control word Read back operation can be specified by writing read back command into the control Word registers (Ao, A, = 1.1). Fig. 7 shows the format of read back command . . Bits D7 and D6 are used for specifying read back command and fixed 1 (D 7 = 1, D6 = 1). Respectively bits D5 (count) and D, (status) are used for reading the count and the status of the counter selected by the D3 - D, bits. Bit Do must be fixed O. Only the count can be read "on the fly" by setting D5 =0 ' and D, = 1 as well as counter latch command above mentioned. If D3 - D, are set 1 all, the counts of three counters are simultaneously latched by one read back command. (By counter latch command, it must be latched for each counter.) Next, by read operation, the latched count is read out. Only the status can be latched by setting D5 = 1 and D, = 0. By read operation, the status shown in Fig. 8 can be 5-66 read. BIT D7 gives the current state of OUT pin. When D7 = 1, OUT = "H", and when D7 =0, OUT =" "L". Bit D6 indicates the current state of counter element. When D6 =1, the initial counter value has not been loaded to counter element. This state is following. (1) The control word is written, but the initial counter value is not loaded (2) The initial counter value is written to count register, and the ClK inputs are not. When D6 = 0, the initial counter value has already been loaded. It is the state when the CLK falls following the rising edge after the initial Vi.lue is written. Bits D5- Do show the current state of the control word regsiter. It is possi ble to read both the count and the status. By setting D5 = and D, = 0, the status can be read first, and the count next. The count and/or the status are unlatched when read, so by the next read operation the current counting value can be read. And they are unlatched too when the control word is set, so the read back command must be set on all such occasions. If multiple read back commands are written before the read operation, only the first one is valid. Thus, the read of the status is effective when the state of output and the timing of count reading can be monitored by software. • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC ° MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER , - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - e Read Back Command (0 7 =1, 0 6 =1 : fixed) , - - - - - - , - - - - - - - - - eCOUNT=O: Latch Count r - - - - - - - - - - - - - e STATUS=O : Latch Status I ~e { CNT2=1 CNT1=1 CNTO=1 Select Counter 2 Select Counter 1 Select Counter 0 ieFixed on 0 _ _ _A _ _ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ I COUNT I STATUS I ~ CNT2 ~ I CNTl ~ I CNTO ~ I Fig. 7 Read Back Command Format II e State of OUT pin OUT o lOUT pin is "H" level Out pin is "L" level e State of counter element CNT I I I I Initial value unloaded Initial value loaded 1 I e State of control word. register (cf. Table 2) ~-----_A~-----_ 0, 06 05 OUT CNT RLl RLO 03 02 0, 00 M2 Ml MO BCO Fig. 8 Status Byte • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 5-67 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Symbol Power supply voltage V, Input voltage Va Output voltage Topr Operating free-air temperature range Tstg Storage temperature range Limits Unit -0.3-7 V -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 V Conditions Parameter Vee With respect to GND -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 V -20-75 'c 'c -65-150 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS (Ta =-20-75°C, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Unit Parameter Min Vee Power supply voltage Vss Supply voltage (GND) r-- - Nom Max 5 5.50 4.50 0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS V V (Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Parameter Unit Test condition Min V'H High-level input voltage 2.0 V'L Low-level input voltage -0.3 V OH High-level output voltage Vss=OV,loH =-400!,A VOL Low-level output voltage vss=OV, I'H High-level input current I'L loz IOl =2. OmA Typ Max Vcc+O.3 V 0.8 V V 2.4 0.45 V Vss=OV, V,=5. 50V ±10 J."A Low-level input current Vss=OV, V,=OV ±10 J."A Off-state output current Vss=OV, VI=O--VCC ±10 J."A 10 mA J."A Icc Power supply current I M5M82C54P Vss=OV, 1=8MHz i M5M82C54P-6 Vss=OV, 1=6MHz Icc Power supply current during STAND BY Vss=OV, other inputs are Vss or Vee 10 Gj Input capacitance VIL=VSS, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25'C 10 pF Gila Input/output capacitance VI/OL =Vss, 1=1 MHz,25mVrms, Ta=25'C 20 pF 5-68 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER TIMING REQUIREMENTS (T a=-20-75'C , Vcc=5V±1 0%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted) Read cycle Alternative Symbol Limits Test condition Parameter symbol ---- Unit Typ Min Max twCR) Read pulse width tRR tSUCS-R) CS setup time before read tSR tSUCA-R) Address setup time before read tAR thCR-A) Address hold time after read 150 c---- -- -- 0 -------~ Read recovery time trecCR) f-----tRA C--------tRV CL=150pF - ns -~ -~ "---- ns ---- ----- 1------- 45 ns ------ "_0- __ -" -- 0 ns 200 ns -- Write cycle Alternative Symbol Limits Test condition Parameter symbol Unit Typ Min Max twL) Clock low puLse width M5M82C54P-6 t PWL 110 125 M5M82C54P t c ( -0) TIMING DIAGRAMS (Reference vollage: High=2.0V, low=0.8V) Read cycle ,,~ / tSU(S'-R) ~ j/' 1\ tSU(A-R) >< AD, A, tPZV(A-Q) I IWIRI r------ ~ IhIR-AI K IpzvlR-al I--- L} ~ tpVZ(R-Q) "'' ' ' 1oV/ Write cycle ~ ~ tSU(S-W) .J/F- ~~ ISUIA-Wl l Iwlwl I J )< tSU(D-W) ----- thlw-Ai K Ihlw-ol ~X X (Recovery time) RD, WR 5-70 I • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4P,·6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER Clock and gate cycle tW(GL) tW(GHJ GATE elK OUT II • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 5-71 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS4FP,-6 CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER DESCRIPTION PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) The M5M82C54FP is a programmable general-purpose timer device developed by using the silicon-gate CMOS process. It offers counter and timer functions in systems using an 8-bit parallel-processing CPU. The use of the M5M82C54FP frees the CPU from the execution of looped programs, countoperation programs and other simple processing involving many repetitive operations, thus contributing to improved system throughputs. The M5M82C54FP works on a single power supply, and both its input and output can be connected to a TTL circuit. Parameter M5M82C54FP M5M82C54FP-6 Clock high pulse width (Min.) 60ns 55ns Clock low pulse width (Min.) 60ns 110ns Clock cycle time (Min.) 125ns 165ns vee (5V) 23 ~ WR WRITE INPUT 22 ~ RD READ INPUT BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS 20 ~ Ao ADDRESS 19 ~ AI JINPUTS 1 CLOCK INPUT CLKO~ 9 C~~~~~~ OUTO~ 10 GATEO~ 11 GATE INPUT 10v) GND 170ns 120ns DJ- 18 ~ ClK2 CLOCK INPUT -~ (Max.) 21 ~ CS ~~~~SElECT 17 ~OUT2 g~¥~JiR r------~----- Access time D4- FEATURES 16 Single 5V supply voltage TTL compatible Pin connection compatible with M5L8253P-5 Clock period: M5M82C54FP-6 .................. · .. M5M82C54FP ....................... • • • • • 3 independent bult-in 16-bit down counters 6 counter modes freely assignable for each counter Binary or decimal counts Read-back command for monitoring the count and status Package in flat small outline package DC~8MHz ~GATEI ~OUTI g8¥~JfR GATE INPUT 24P2W based on mode-control instructions from the CPU. When roughly classified, there are 6 modes (O~5). Mode a is mainly used as an interruption timer and event counter, mode 1 as a digital one-shot, modes 2 and 3 as rate generators, mode 4 for a software triggered strobe, and mode 5 for a hardware triggered strobe. The count can be monitored and set at any time. Besides the count, the status of the counter can be monitored by Read-back command. The counter operates with either the binary or BCD system. Refer to M5M82C54P/P-6 for detail information. M5M82C54FP/FP-6's specification are fully compatible with M5M82C54P/P-6. Only package outline is different. Delayed-time setting, pulse counting and rate generation in microcomputers. FUNCTION Three independent 16-bit counters allow free programming 15V)vccr.c~~-~-I--- ~t' 10v) GND~ [REGISTER I 9 ClK r COUNTER D, 1 0 BIDIRECTIONALl~:' ~ DATA BUS D3 D2 D, Do a 11 GATE 0 ~OUT -J CLOCK INPUT GATE INPUT COUNTER OUTPUT 0 CLOCK INPUT GATE INPUT COUNTER OUTPUT READ INPUT CLOCK INPUT WRITE INPUT GATE INPUT CHIP-SELECT INPUT COUNTER OUTPUT INTERNAL DATA BUS I ---------------.-----1 5-72 14 DC~6MHz APPLICATION BLOCK DIAGRAM GATE INPUT CLOCK INPUT 13 ---.._----, Outline • • • • ~GATE2 15~ClKI • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE DESCRIPTION This is a family of general-purpose programmable input/ output devices designed for use with the 8/16-bit parallel CPU as input/output ports. This device is fabricated using silicon-gate CMOS technology for a single supply voltage. This LSI is a simple input and output interface for TTL circuits, having 24 input/output pins which correspond to three 8-bit input/output ports. PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) ( j PA3 - INPUT/OUTPUT PA,_ PORT A PA,_ I lPAoREAD INPUT RD ~ CHIP FEATURES • • • • • • STh~8+cs~ (ov) GND 35 - RESET 'RESET INPUT PORT ADDRESS { A, ~ INPUTS Ao ~ Single 5 V supply voltage TTL compatible Improved DC driving capability Improved timing characteristics 24 programmable I/O pins Direct bit set/reset capability BI-DIRECTIONAL DATA BUS INPUT/OUTPUT PORT C APPLICATION Input/output ports for MELPS85, MELPS86, MELPS88 microprocessor INPUT/OUTPUT PORT B FUNCTION These PPls have 24 input/output pins which may be individually programmed in two 12-bit groups A and B with mode control commands from a CPU. They are used in three major modes of operation, mode 0 , mode 1 and mode 2 . Operating in mode 0 , each group of 12 pins may be programmed in sets of 4 to be inputs or outputs. In mode 1 , the 24 I/O terminals may be programmed in two 12-bit groups, group A and group B. Each group contains one 8-bit data port, which may be programmed to serve as input or output, and one 4-bit control port used for handshaking and interrupt II Outline 40P4 control signals. Mode 2 is used with group A only, as one 8bit bidirectional bus port and one 5-bit control port. Bit set/ reset is controlled by CPU. A high-level reset input (RESET) clears control register, and all ports are set to the input mode (high-impedance state). BLOCK DIAGRAM 1-----------------; READ INPUT RD WRITE INPUT WR ADDRESS INPUTS JA, t-----= t=: 6 --..<: 8 lAo 9 RESET INPUT RESET CHIP SELECT CS INPUT ~ ~~_IT' CONTROL LOGIC GROUP A CONTROL 8 ~ l~~ ~ 4 I ~ GROUP B CONTROL 8 8 2 (5V) Vee' (OV) H PORT C I MOST SIGNIFI- L GROUP B PORT C LEAST SIGNIFI CANT 4 BITS) 1 17 PC 3 PORT C 16 PC, 15 PC, 14 PCo PB 7 PB6 2 PB5 PB, INPUT/OUTPUT 21 PB 3 PORT B 2 PB, 19 PB, 18 PBo 2 2 GROUP B PORT B (8-BIT) L-.,. GND~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC I PC 5 PC, INPUT/OUTPUT L r 8 PAo :~:l GROUP A Wi r- DATA BUS 31~ BUFFER : 02 3 ~~: 3 4 CANT 4 BITS) 8-BIT INTERNAL DATA BUS :~;1 PA 5 40 PA, INPUT/OUTPUT I jlPORT A 2 ~ ~H I I~; Ig: 30~ ". r I ~: 'J GROUP A PORT A (8-BIT) 8 8 - 2 28~ D5 29)..,.- DATA BUS 8 J3j .Ijg ~ -.-J 5-73 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Basic Operations Table RD (Read) Input At low-level, the status or the data at the port is transferred to the CPU from the PPI. In essence, it allows the CPU to read data from the PPI. A, Ao CS RD WR 0 0 0 0 1 Data bus - Port A Operation 0 1 0 0 1 Data bus - Port B WR (Write) Input 1 0 0 0 1 Data bus - Port C At low-level, the data or control words are transferred from the CPU and written in the PPI. 0 0 0 1 0 Port A - Data bus 0 1 0 1 0 Port B - Data bus 1 0 0 1 0 Port C - Data bus 1 1 0 1 0 Cont~ol X X 1 X X Data bus is in high-impedance state 1 1 0 0 1 illegal condition Ao, A, (Port address) Input These input signals are used to select one of the three ports: port A, port B, and port C, or the control register. They are normally connected to the least significant two bits of the address bus. RESET (Reset) Input At high-level, the control register is cleared. Then all ports are set to the input mode (high-impedance state). CS (Chip-Select) Input At loW-level, the communication between the PPI and the CPU is enabled. While at high-level, the data busis kept in the high-impedance state, so that commands from the CPU are ignored. Then the previous data is kept at the output port. f---- register - Data bus Where, "0" indicates low level "1" indicates high-level Bit Set/Reset When port C is used as an output port, anyone bit of the eight bits can be set (high) or reset (low) by a control word from the CPU. This bit set/reset can be operated in the same way as the mode set, but the control word format is different. This operation is also used for INTE set/reset in mode 1 and mode 2 . Read/Write Control Logic The function of this block is to control transfers of both data and control words. It accepts the address signals (Ao, A" CS), I/O control signals (RD, WR) and RESET signal, and then issues commands to both of the control groups in the PPI. Bit set/reset flag I Active - Bit selection code Data Bus Buffer Port C Bit selected This three-state, bidirectional, eight-bit buffer is used to transfer the data when an input or output instruction is executed by the CPU. Control words and status information are also transferred through the data bus buffer. D, D, D, PC, 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 PC, PC5 PC, Group A and Group B Control PC, Accepting commands from the read/write control logic, the control blocks (Group A, Group B) receive 8-bit control words from the internal data bus and issue the proper commands for the associated ports. Control group A is associated with port A and the four high-order bits of port C. Control group B is associated with port B and the four low-order bits of port C. The control register, which stores control words, can only be written into. PC, PC, PCa 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ,set/reset code Set (high) ID71D61D51D41031D21D,iDoi Fig. 1 Port A, Port B and Port C The PPI contains three 8-bit ports whose modes and input! output settings are programmed by th·e system software. Port A has an output latch/buffer and an input latch. Port B has an I/O latch/buffer and an input buffer. Port C has an output latch/buffer and an input buffer. Port C can be divided into two 4-bit ports which can be used as ports for control signals for port A and port B. The basic operations are shown in Table 1. 5-74 I a Don't care • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC - 1 Reset (low) = 0 J Control word format for port C set/reset MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE BASIC OPERATING MODES The PPI can operate in anyone modes. Mode 0: Basic input/output Mode 1: Strobed input/output Mode 2: Bidirectional bus The mode of both group A and independently. The control word shown in Fig. 2. of three selected basic (group A, group B) (group A, group B) (group A only) group B can be selected format for mode set is PA,-PAo 0, 0, 050, 03 0, 0, Do 11101010101011101 07 06 05 04 03 02 0, Do 111 01010101011111 r - - - - - - - - Mode set flag 1Active PA,-PAo - 1 , - - - - - - - Group A mode set 0: 0" 0, 0 7 06 Os 04 03 02 D, Do 111 01010111 010101 0, 0 Mode ~ Mode 1: 0,. 0, ~ 0, 1 Mode 2: 0" 0, ~ 1, X 07 06 D5 0 4 03 D2 0, Do 111 01010111010llj ,..-_ _ _ _ Port A input/output set I output - 0 _ rnput ~ 1 ~ _ __ Port C (high-order four bits) input/output set I~utput _ rnput ~ ,.---'-.., I I I 10,10,10510,10310" 0,[001 - 0 ~ 1 I PAr-PAo 07 06 Os 04 03 02 01 Do _ 11101010111011101 1. 11 Port B input/output set Port C (low-order four brts) rnput/output set output - 0 input ~ I 1 I 07 06 0 5 04 03 02 0, Do Fig_ 2 0, 0, 05 0, 030, 0, Do 11101010111011llj 11101011101010101 Control word format for mode set. 07 0605 0 4 D3 D2 0, Do 11101011101010lq Mode 0 (Basic Input/Output) This functional configuration provides simple input and output operations for each of the three ports. No "handshaking" is required; data is simply written in, or read from, the specified port. Output data from the CPU to the port can be held, but input data from the port to the CPU cannot be held. Any one of the 8-bit ports and 4-bit ports can be used as an input port or an output port. The diagrams following show the baSic input/output operating modes. PAl-PAD 0 7 0 6 05 0 4 0 3 D2 01 Do 11 I 010111 0I 011 I 11 0, 0, 050, 03 O 0, Do 11101011111010101 0, 06 0, 0, 03 0, 0, Do 111010111110101 n 2 07 06 05 04 03 02 D1 Do 11101010101010101 0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, Dr Do 111010101010101 lj 0 7 06 0 5 0 4 03 D2 0, Do 11101011101011101 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Do 11 I01011 11 I011 10 I • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 0, 0, 0, 0, 030, 0, Do 111010111110111 q 5-75 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 2. Mode 1 (Strobed Input/Output) This function can be set in both group A and B. Both groups are composed of one 8-bit data port and one 4-bit control data port. The 8-bit port can be used as an input port or an output port. The 4-bit port is used for control and status signals affecting the 8-bit data port. The following shows operations in mode 1 for using input ports. ISF STB (Strobe Input) A low-level on this input latches the output data from the terminal units into the input register of the port. In short, this is a clock for data latching. The data from the terminal units can be latched by the PPI independent of the control signal from the CPU. This data is not sent to the data bus until the instruction I N is executed. IBF (Input Buffer Full Flag Output) A high-level on this output indicates that the data from the terminal units has been latched into the input register. IBF is set to high-level by the falling edge of the STB input, and is reset to low-level by the rising edge of the RD input. INTR (Interrupt Request Output) This can be used to interrupt the CPU when an input device is requesting service. When INTE (interrupt enable flag) of the PPI is high-level, INTR is set to high-level by the rising edge of the STB input and is reset to lOW-level by the falling edge of RD input. INTEA of group A is controlled by bit setting of PC 4 . INTEB of group B is controlled by bit setting of PC2. Mode 1 input state is shown in Fig. 3, and the timing chart is shown in Fig. 4. RD ---r----1-----------~ INTR PORT _-+__--1 _________-+::=~==: --+------_/ INPUT :=t;;:A==~=====t===+=== LATCH 00-0, Note 1 Fig. 4 OBF (Output Buffer Full Flag Output) This is reset to low-level by the rising edge of the WR signal and is set to high-level by the falling edge of the ACK (acknowledge input). In essence, the PPI indicates to the terminal units by the OBF signal that the CPU has sent data to the port. STS B ISF B INTRB CONTROL WORD RD CONTROL WORD 07 0 6 05 0, 0, 0, 0, Do 111xlxlxixll111xl Fig. 3 5-76 (Acknowledge Input) INTR (Interrupt Request) 8 1/0 Timing chart Receiving this signal from a terminal unit can indicate to the PPI that the terminal unit has accepted data from a port. MODE 1 (PORT S) 8 When INTE is low-level. INTR is always lOW-level. The following shows operations using mode 1 for output ports. ACI< MODE 1 (PORT A) ------~L~ When a peripheral unit is accepting data from the CPU, seting INTR to high-level can be used to interrupt the CPU. When INTE (interrupt enable flag) is high and OBI" is set to high-level by the rising edge of an ACK signal, then INTR will also be set to high-level by the rising edge of the ACK signal. Also, INTR is reset to lOW-level by the falling edge of the WR signal when the PPI has been receiving data from the CPU. I NTEA of group A is controlled by bit setting of PC6. I NTEB of group B is controlled by bit setting of PC2. Mode 1 output state is shown in Fig. 5, and the timing chart is shown in Fig. 6. Combinations for using port A and port B as input or output in mode 1 are shown in Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. An example of mode 1 input state • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP·S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE MODE 1 (PORT B) OBFs !lCKs INTRs OBF--+---" ACK--~~---~----~ INTR CONTROL WORD CONTROL WORD 0, 06 05 04 03 02 0, Do '-_-+_________--' (Note 2) PORT----~r_-----------­ OUTPUT-----~~------------- Illxlxlxl xillolxl Note 2: O=OUTPUT Fig. 5 Mode 1 output example PORT A (STROBED OUTPUT) PORT B (STROBED INPUT) Fig. 6 Timing diagram PC, IBFs PCa INTRs PORT A (STROBED INPUT) PORT B (STROBED OUTPUT) PCa CONTROL WORD CONTROL WORD O=OUTPUT Fig. 7 When INTE is low-level. then the output of INTR is aways low-level. Mode 1 port A and port B lID example O=OUTPUT Fig. 8 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC Mode 1 port A and port B lID example 5-77 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 3. Mode 2 (Strobed Bidirectional Bus Input! Output) Mode 2 can provide bidirectional operations, using one 8-bit bus for communicating with terminal units. Mode 2 is only valid with group A and uses one 8-bit bidirectional bus port (port A) and a 5-bit control port (high-order five bits of port C). The bus port (port A) has two internal registers, one for input and the other for output. On the other hand, the control port (port C) is used for communicating control signals and bus-status signals. These control signals are similar to mode 1 and can also be used to control inte,rruption of the CPU. When group A is programmed as mode 2, group B can be programmed independently as mode or mode 1. When group A is in mode 2, the following five control signals can be used. a IBF OSF (Output Buffer Full Flag Output) The OBF output will go low-level to indicate that the CPU has sent data to the internal register of port A. This signal lets the terminal units know that the data is ready for transfer from the CPU. When this occurs, port A remains in the floating (high-impedance) state. ACK (Acknowledge Input) DATA FROM TERMINAL UNIT PORT A Fig, 9 DATA FROM CPU ------~C==~<=:::::~--- Mode 2 timing diagram Note 3: INTR=IBF' MASK, STB' FlD + OBF' MASK' ACK' WR A lOW-level ACK input will cause the data of the internal reg- ister to be transferred to port A. For a high-level ACK input, the output buffer will be in the floating (high-impedance) state. RD WR STB (Strobe Input) When the STB input is low-level, the data from terminal units will be held in the internal register, and the data will be sent to the system data bus with an RD signal to the PPI. IBF (Input Buffer Full Flag Output) When data from terminal units is held on the internal register, IBF will be high level. INTR (Interrupt Request Output) This output is used to interrupt the CPU and its operations the same as in mode 1. There are two interrupt enable flags that correspond to INTEA for mode 1 output and mode 1 input. INTEl is used in generating INTR signals in combination with OBF and ACK. INTEl is controlled by bit setting of PC6. INTE2 is used in generating INTR signals in combination with IBF and STB. INTE2 is controlled by bit setting of PC4. Fig. 9 shows the timing diagram of mode 2, and Fig. 10 is an example of mode 2 operation. 1/0 IBFA STB A CONTROL WORD ACK A OBF A 1/0 INTRA PC2~PCO 1 =INPUT o =OUTPUT L-._ _ _ PORT B 1 =INPUT o=OUTPUT L--_ _ _ _~ GROUP B MODE O=MODEO 1 =MODE 1 Fig. 10 5-78 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC An example of mode 2 operation MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 4. Control Signal Read Table In mode 1 or mode 2 when using port C as a control port, by CPU execution of an IN instruction, each control signal and bus status from port C can be read. Mode Mode 1, input .control word formats and operation details for mode 0, mode 1, mode 2 and set/reset control of port C are given in Tables 3, 4, 5 and 6, respectively. Table 3 Read-out control signals A Control Word Tables 5. 2 D7 D6 1/0 1/0 D3 D2 D, Do IBFA INTEA INTRA INTEB IBFB INTRB Mode 1. output OBFA INTEA Mode 2 D, D5 1/0 INTRA INTEB OBFB INTRB 1/0 IBFA INTE2 INTRA OBFA INTE, By group B mode Mode 0 control words 1---- Control words J~ Group A Group B r._D-,-~~._~D-,_~~~_~~~2"~~d~~aI _ Port A~= Por~~;;;;;;-4b,;;! -~CU~;;;~~P~B1 a a a a a a a 80 OUT OUT OUT OUT 1"-.--..- - - - - - -------------'r--.-----a a a a a a 81 OUT OUT IN OUT 1---r----- - - - .-f--- ----------I a a a a a 1 a...- - t--- .---82 OUT OUT OUT IN - - " " - - - . - - - - - - -.. .. IN 1 a a..- a -a- a -1-.. 1 83 OUT OUT IN f------.------.--.--"". r---- --------OUT a a a 1 a a a 88 OUT IN OUT 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - - - ""-- - - - - - - t-------------I------~a a a 1 a a 1 89 OUT IN IN OUT ---~ --.-.--.--.--~---- ---~- ---~--_r-----~ ~------- --~- -~----------t--~--- f-----a-~a·----~- o-1--a---t8-A---0l;T-~IN ------~+-----O-U-T----+----IN-- - - _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - j - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---~------ a a a a 8B OUT IN IN ---~------~--------- IN ~--------- a a a a 90 IN OUT OUT OUT I----------------+----~-----t_---------+_-------~-------a a a 91 IN OUT IN OUT a a a a 92 IN OUT OUT IN I--------------~-+--~----------.--.-----------------+---a 1 a a 1 1 93 IN OUT IN IN I - - - - - - -..- -..-~----_+_- - ----.~--.. -.---.------------~-+_----__l a 1 1 a a a 98 IN IN OUT OUT . IN IN OUT a a a a 99 IN ..- - - -----+-------+-----------------_.._- ._-- ------ - - - - - - a a a a 9A IN IN OUT IN .. -1----IN a a a 9B IN IN IN -------------r-~---+_------+_----------+_---------- ~- ~.- ~- ----~- Note 4: OUT indicates output port, and IN indicates input port. Table 4 Mode 1 control words Control words 07 06 05 ----..-~ I' 04 03 02 01 I 1 a a 1 1 a a 1 a x t A4 OUT a 1 a 1 1 a x 1 1 1 X OBFA I a 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 1 a x 1 I I I AC AD a 1 I OUT PC3 INTRA ~--.--- -OBFA --ACKA I OUT INTRA - - OUT OBFA OBFA I PortB PC;'-I- PC~ _ _ _ _ PC2 --,-AC~FB STBB I IN INTRA A<5Ks ACKA IN INTRA -STBB IBFB 1 ~- OElFs IBFB i Note 5: 6: a 1 1 1 B4 1 INTRB INTRB IN ----~ OUT IN -- -- - - - - IBFA STBALTRA ACKB OBFB INTRB OUT IN OUT IBFA STB A ·1 INTRA -STBB IBFB INTRB IN IN IN IBFA STB A INTRB OUT i BC BD BE X OUT OUT IN B5 B7 1 INTRB f----- f----- II~TRA - - ACKB -OBFB ~- I INTRB --f---- 1---. -ACKA B6 a x -,- '-~ I - -- - - - AE OUT AF X -- I ACK A Group B _. Port C PC7 PC. PC6 PC5 1---.. .. '~G -_.- ~- a 1 1 a .------~-- porte ~- ~- a 1 a Group A L - - - - - - - - - -A5 --I A6 a a 1 1 X GA7O U T ._-_.. I PortA decimal ~~- 1 Hexa- ' Do -- I -.-----~-- -- IN IN BF IBFA STBA I-~ - - INTRA STB B IBFB INTRB IN Mode of group A and group B can be programmed independently. It is not necessary for both group A and group B to be in mode 1. • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC 5-79 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE Table 5 Mode 2 control words Group A Control words D7 D, Ds D, D, D2 D, Do 1 1 X X X 1 1 X X X 1 1 X X X 1 1 X X X 1 1 X X X a a a a a 1 a 1 a a 1 1 1 a X 1 1 X X X 1 Table 6 1 X Group B Port C Hexadecimal Port A co Bidirectional C1 Bidirectional C2 (Ex) PortC Port B PC7 PC6 PCs PC. PC, OBF A ACK A IBFA STBA INTRA OUT OUT bus OBFA ACK A IBFA STBA INTRA IN OUT Bidirectional bus OBFA ACK A IBFA STBA INTRA OUT IN C3 Bidirectional bus OBFA ACK A IBFA STB A INTRA IN IN C4 Bidirectional bus OBFA ACK A IBFA STBA INTRA ACK B [ OBFB [INTRB OUT C6 Bidirectional OBFA ACK A IBFA STB A INTRA STBB bus bus PC2 I PC, I PCa I IBFB I INTRB Port C set/reset control words Port C Control words D7 D, D5 D, D, D2 D, a X X a x x a X X a x X a X X a X X Do Hexadecimal PC7 PC6 PCs PC, Remarks PC, PC2 PC, PCa a a a a a 1 a 1 a a 1 1 1 a a 00 X a a a a a 04 a INTEs set/reset for mode 1 input X 0 1 0 1 05 1 INTEs set/reset for mode 1 output 1 1 0 06 X X X X a 1 01 - a 02 03 1 0 X X X 0 a a X X X 0 1 1 1 07 X X X 1 0 0 0 08 0 INTEA set/reset for mode 1 input 0 X X X 1 0 0 1 09 1 INTE2 set/reset for mode 2 0 X X X 1 0 1 0 OA 0 X X X 1 a 1 1 OB 0 X X X 1 1 a a OC 0 INTEA set/reset for mode 1. output 0 X X X 1 1 0 1 00 1 INTEl set/reset for mode 2 0 X X X 1 1 1 0 OE 0 0 X X X 1 1 1 1 OF 1 Note 7: 8: 5-80 0 1 a 1 -- The terminais of port C should be programmed for the output mode, before the bit set/reset operation is executed. Also used lor controlling the interrupt enabie Ilag(INTE) •. MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC IN MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CSSAP-S CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Symbol 1----Vee ~-- Parameter Conditions -- - - - Unit -V Limits Supply voltage -0.3-7 --- V, Input voltage Va Output voltage T opr Operating free-air temperature range Tstg Storage temperature range -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 With respect to GND V ,-- ---~ -- RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS Symbol Parameter -- Vee Supply voltage GND Supply voltage -~ V -20-75 'C -65-150 'C (T a =-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted) Limits -,----Min Nom 4.5 ---- ,--~ 5 I---~ Unit Max 5.5 V V 0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 (T a =-20-75'C, Vee=5V±10%, GND=OV, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Parameter Test conditions Unit ~==Vv=',HL=====:~=H=i9=h=-I=e=ve=l=in=p=u=t=v=ol=ta=g=e======================:===============--,_-~~~_-,-_~===-_-_=- r-.:._M_20·_.i:3-+--T-y-P-+V--=C~0;.~80.3 -~--Vv~·~l- __ Low-level input voltage ~----'+-:-~-::-~-:-~o-i:-h-v:-~t-1:-:9-:---=(-N-o_t-e~'_o~)~~~-~~~__~-__-~=_=_=-__~~_J_>_:_~=_;~-,-:_:-_~-A_,,_A--~~=_-_-=-_-_-_-=~-~-------==-+t------2=.-4----++------------_~f--_-O-.-,~-__ 5-- ~_--_-~ __ _ lee I GND=OV, All input mode, RESET=OV, Other pins=Vce, Supply current from Vee 1----+---------------------------+-------------- 'a /-lA ------ ----+----+-------- I'L Input leak current GND=OV, V,=OV, Vee ±10 ___~ loz Off-state output current GND=OV, VI=O--VCC ±10 J-lA Cilo Input/output terminal capacitance VIIOL=GND, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, T a=25"C 20 pF I - - - = - = - - + - - - - - - - = - - - - - - - - - - - - - - f - - ---------------+---+-----+--------------~-----_t-I-np-u-t-e-a-p-ac-i-ta-n-c-e--,-----------__+_V,L_=_G_N_D:f,",,' M~z:25m~r_m:!~=_25_o_C__ ___________ ~_~_ Note 9 Current flowing into an IC is positive, out is negative. 10: IOH current must be less than -4mA for each Port pin. TIMING REQUIREMENTS (T a =-20-75'C, Vcc=5V±10%, GND=OV, unless otherwise noted) Alternative Symbol Parameter Limits Test conditions symbol Min Unit Max 300 [200) tWCR) Read pulse width tSUCPE~R) Peripheral setup time before read t'R a the R~PE) Peripheral hold time after read tHR 0 tSU(A-R) Address setup time before read tAR a th(R-A) Address hold time after read tRA 0 tw.01 As 06 Os I I I LTIM 0, 04 ADI SNGL I IC4 I 0, 0, Do J (Note 1) J 1 Note I I I SINGLE CASCADE MODE JI: ICW4 NEEDED 0: NO ICW4 NEEDED I I 8085A ONLY ICW1 .1 VECTOR ADDRESS HIGH-ORDER BITS I (A15- A8)OR INTERRUPT TYPE (T,-T,) I I I I I A15/T71 A14/T61 A13/Tsl A12/T41 Ao 07 06 04 Os AI1IT, AlO Ag 0, 0, 0, I I A8 I Do ICW2 II I I I Ao I S7 0, IRn INPUT HAS A SLAVE IRn INPUT DOES NOT HAVE A SLAVE LO I S6 I I Ss I Os 06 S4 04 I S, s, s, 0, 0, 0, I I So Do I SLAVE IDENTIFICATION CODE ICW3 (MASTER DEVICE) 0 0 0 0 II I AD I 0 0, I o I 06 o Os I o 04 I 0 102 0, 0, I 10, 0, I I 100 I 2 3 4 5 6 0 0 0 I I I 0 I I 0 0 I I 0 I 0 I 0 7 I I I J Do ICW3 (SLAVE DEVICE) JI: SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE LO 0 X NON BUFFERED MODE I 0 BUFFERED MODE/SLAVE I 1 BUFFERED MODE/MASTER NOT SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE J 1: L0: J I: 10: I I Ao I 0 0, I 0 06 I 0 Os I SFNM I BUF 04 0, I M/S 0, I AEOI I ,uPM I 0, Do ICW4 Fig. 3 5-92 Initialization command word format • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC AEOI MODE NORMAL EOI MODE 8086, 8088 MODE 8085A MODE MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER =0 in ICW4. In the slave mode, three bits 102~IOD identify the slave. And then when the slave code released on the cascade lines from the master, matches the assigned 10 code, the vectored address is released by it onto the data bus at the next INTA pulse. M5M82C59AP, the device is ready to accept interrupt requests. There are three types of OCW s; explanation of each follows, and the format of oews is shown in Fig. 4. OCW1 The meaning of the bits of OCWl are explained in Fig. 4 along with their functions. Each bit of 1M R can be independently changed (set or reset) by OeWl. ICW4 Only when IC4 = 1 in ICWl is ICW4 valid. Otherwise all bits are set to zero. When ICW4 is valid it specifies special fully nested mode, buffer mode master/slave, automatic EOI and microprocessor mode. The format of ICW4 is shown in Fig. 3. OCW2 The OeW2 is used for issuing EOI commands to the M5M82C59AP and for changing the priority of the interrupt request inputs. Operation Command Words (OCWs ) OCW3 The operation command words are used to change the contents of IMR, the priority of interrupt request inputs and the special mask. After the ICW are programmed into the The OeW3 is used for specifying special mask mode, poll mode and status register read. , - - - - - - - - . - - , - - - - - - - , - - - , - - - r - - , - - - - - , - - - - - - - - f 1: INTERRUPT MASK SET INTERRUPT MASK RESET 0: OCW1 0 0 1 NON-SPECIFIC EOI 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 ROTATE ON NON-SPECIFIC EOI SETS AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP } AUTOMATIC ROTATION RESET AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP ROTATE ON SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BIT L2-Lol 0 I R I SL } SPECIFIC ROTATION SETS PRIORITY COMMAND (SET LOWEST PRIORITY BIT L2-Loi NO OPERATION ~ I IB } EOI SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BITS L,-Lol ID LEVEL TO BE ACTED UPON EOI Ao I 0 I 0 I L, I I L, 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 I 0 1 0 1 0 I I Lo 7 1 1 1 I Do 05 OCW2 0 1 X NO OPERATION 0 RESET SPECIAL MASK MODE 1 1 SETS SPECIAL MASK MODE 11 I0 0 1 1 I 0 Ao I 0 ESMM I SMM I D, D5 0 I 1 D3 I I P D2 I RR D, I POLL COMMAND NO POLL COMMAND X NO OPERATION 0 SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN IRR 1 SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN ISR I RIS I Do OCW3 Fig. 4 Operation command word format • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 5-93 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER FUNCTION OF COMMAND Interrupt masks The mask register contains a mask for each individual interrupt request. These interrupt masks can be changed by programming using OCWl. Special mask mode When an interrupt request is acknowledged and the ISR bit corresponding to the interrupt request is not reset by EOI command (which means an interrupt service routine is executing) lower priority interrupt requests are ignored. In special mask mode interrupt requests received at interrupt request inputs which are masked by OCWI are disabled, but interrupts at all levels that are not masked are possible. This means that in the mask mode all level of interrupts are possible or individual inputs can be selectively programmed so all interrupts at the selected inputs are disabled. The masks are stored in IMR and special mask is set/reset by executing OCW3. 2. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced the software must check ISR to determine if there are additional interrupts requests to be serviced. If the ISR bit is 0 the EOI command may be sent to the master too. But if it is not 0 the EOI command should not be sent to the master. Poll mode The poll mode is useful when the internal enable flip-flop of the microprocessor is reset, and interrupt input is disabled. Service to the device is a.chieved by a programmer initiative using a poll command. In the poll mode the M5M82C59AP at the next RD pulse puts 8 bits on the data bus which indicates whether there is an interrupt request and reads the priority level. The format of the information on the data bus is as shown below. Buffered mode Binary code of the highest priority The buffered mode will structure the M5M82C59AP to send an enable signal on SP/EN to enable the data bus buffer, when the data bus requires the data bus buffer or when cascading mode is used. In this mode, when data bus output of the M5M82C59AP is enabled, the SP/EN output becomes low-level. This allows the M5M82C59AP to be programmed whether it is a master or a slave by software. The buffered mode is set/reset by executing ICW4. Fully nested mode The fully ne.sted mode is the mode when no mode is specified and is the usual operational mode. In this mode, the priority of interrupt request terminals is fixed from the lowest IR7 to the highest IR o. When an interrupt request is acknowledged the CALL instruction and vectored address are released onto the data b'Js. At the same time the ISR bit corresponding to the accepted interrupt request is set. This ISR bit remains set until it is reset by the input of an EOI command or until the trailing edge of last INTA pulse in AEOI mode. While an interrupt service routine is being executed, interrupt requests of same or lower priority are disabled while the bit of ISR remains set. The priorities can be changed by OCW2. Special fully nested mode The special fully nested mode will be used when cascading is used and this mode will be programmed to the master by ICW4. The special fully nested mode is the same as the fully nested mode with the following two exceptions. 1. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced. this slave is not locked out from the master priority logic. Higher priority interrupts within the slave will be recognized by the master and the master will initiate an interrupt request to the CPU. In general in the normal fully nested mode, a serviced slave is locked out from the master's priority, and so higher priority interrupts from the same slave are not serviced. 5-94 D, When 1=0 (no interrupt request), W2-WO is 111. The poll is valid from WR to RD and interrupt is frozen. This mode can be used for processing common service routines for interrupts from more than one line and does not require any INTA sequence. Poll command is issued by setting P= 1 in OCW3. End of interrupt (EO I) and specific EOI (SEOI) An EOI command is required by the M5M82C59AP to reset the ISR bit. So an EOI command must be issued to the M5M82C59AP before returning from an interrupt service routine. When AEOI is selected in ICW4, the ISR bit can be reset at the trailing edge of the last INTA pulse. When AEOI is not selected the ISR bit is reset by the EOI command issued to the M5M82C59AP before returning from an interrupt service routine. When programmed in the cascade mode the EOI command must be issued to the master once and to corresponding slave once. There are two forms of EOI command, specific EOI and non-specific EOL When the M5M82C59AP is used in the fully nested mode, the ISR bit being serviced is reset by the EOI command. When the non-specific EOI is issued the M5M82C59AP will automatically reset the highest ISR bit of those that are set. Other ISR bits are reset by a specific EOI and the bit to be reset is specified in the EOI by the program. The SEOI is useful in modes other than fully nested mode. When the M5M82C59AP is in special mask mode ISR bits masked in IMR are not reset by EOL EOI and SEOI are selected when OCW2 is executed. • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER Automatic EOI (AEOI) In the AEOI mode the M5M82C59AP executes non-specific EOI command automatically at the trailing edge of the last INTA pulse. When AEOI=l in ICW4, the M5M82C59AP is put in AEOI mode continuously until reprogrammed in ICW4. Automatic rotation The automatic rotation mode is used in applications where many interrupt requests of the same level are expected such as multichannel communication systems. In this mode when an interrupt request is serviced. that request is assigned the lowest priority so that if there are other interrupt requests they will have higher priorities. This means that the next request on the interrupt request being serviced must wait until the other interrupt requests are serviced (worst case is waiting for all 7 of the other controllers to be serviced) . The priority and serving status are rotated as shown in Fig. 5. BEFORE ROTATION (IR3 THE HIGHEST PRIORITY REQUIRING SERVICE) IS 7 ISR STATUS Is,; a I HIGHEST PRIORITY i I AFTER ROTATION (IR3 WAS SERVICED AND ALL OTHER PRIORITIES ROTATED CORRESPONDINGLY) ~ ISR STATUS a ~ I I 1& I~ I~ I~ 1& I~ LOWEST PRIORITY PRIORITY STATUS Fig. 5 Level triggered mode/Edge triggered mode Selection of level or edge triggered mode of the M5M82C59AP is made by ICW1, When using edge triggered mode not only is a transition from low to high required, but the high-level must be held until the first INTA. If the highlevel is not held until the first INTA, the interrupt request will be treated as if it were input on IR7, except that the ISR bit is not set. When level triggered mode is used the functions are the same as edge triggered mode except that the transition from low to high is not required to trigger the interrupt request. In the level triggered mode and using AEOI mode together, if the high-level is held too long the interrupt will occur immediately. To avoid this situation interrupts should be kept disabled until the end of the service routine or until the IR input returns low. In the edge. triggered mode this type of mistake is not possible because the interrupt request is edge triggered. Reading the M5M82C59AP internal status IS, LOWEST PRIORITY PRIORITY STATUS lowest or highest priority. Priority changes can be executed during an EOI command. ! An example of priority rotation In the non-specific EOI command automatic rotation mode is selected when R=l, EOI=l, SL=O in OCW2. The internal priority status is changed by EOI or AEOI commands. The rotation priority A flip-flop is set by R=l, EOI=O and SL=O which is useful when the M5M82C59AP is used in the AEOI mode. Specific rotation Specific rotation gives the user versatile capabilities in interrupt controlled operations. It serves in those applications in wh,ich a specific device's interrupt priority must be altered. As opposed to automatic rotation which automatically sets priorities, specific rotation is completely user controlled. That is, the user selects the interrupt level that is to receive The contents of IRR and ISR can be read by the CPU with status read. When an OCW3 is issued to the M5M82C59AP and an RD pulse issued the contents of IRR or ISR can be released onto the data bus. A special command is not required to read the contents of IMR. The contents of IMR can be released onto the data bus by issuing an RD pulse when Ao = 1. There is no need to issue a read register command every time the IRR or ISR is to be read. Once a read register command is received by the M5M82C59AP, it remains valid until it is changed. Remember that the programmer must issue a poll command every time to check whether there is an interrupt request and read the priority level. Polling overrides status read when P=l, RR=l in OCW3. Cascading The M5M82C59AP can be interconnected in a system of one master with up to eight slaves to handle up to 64 priority levels. A system of three units that can be used with the 8085A is shown in Fig. 6. The master can select a slave by outputting its identification code through the three cascade lines. The INT output of each slave is connected to the master interrupt request inputs. When an interrupt request of one of the slaves is to be serviced the master outputs the identification code of the slave through the cascade lines, so the slave will release the vectored address on the next INTA pulse. The cascade lines of the master are nomally low, and will contain the slave identification code from the leading edge of the first INTA pulse to the trailing edge of the last INTA pulse. The master and slave can be programmed to work in different modes. ICWs must be issued for each device, and EOI commands must be issued twice: once for the master and once for the corresponding slave. Each CS of the M5M82C59AP requires an address decoder. • MITSUBISHI ;"ELECTRIC 5-95 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER 16 ADDRESS BUS CONTROL BUS DATA BUS 8 3 3 3 8 8 cs 8 I INT Ao M5M82C59AP MASTER CS 1 CASo CAS, i Vee 7 6 lcs INT CAS, ! 1l3! r ! I INT Ao CASo CASo SP/EN M, M, M5 M, M, M, M,Mo I Ao CAS, CAS, M5M82C59AP SLAVE SP/EN 7 6 ~ ----- 3 5 4 2 1 0 SP/EN tl!!tl!! GrD CAS, CAS, GlD M5M82C59AP SLAVE 765 4 3 2 1 0 ~!ll!!r! ~------------------------------~y~--------------------------------~-- INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS Fig. 6 Cascading the M5M82C59AP DEN DATA BUS ADDRESS BUS Do -D, (Note 1) ADo- AD, RD OR-I ORC WRORroWC INTA M/TO 8 Do-D, ~ Ao Ao A, A, A, A5 I ,.. ....... ...... y y .... .Joo.. ... .... A" A, - II RB cs = M,"""~[ - - Fig. 7 5-96 OE TO BUS BUFFER iNfA :;:: :;:: <.n REQUEST INPUTS Note 1: 5v WR SP/EN LS30 )0---< INTR INT CD -~ '"0<.n IRo ." IR, IR, IR, IR5 IR, IR, Do-D, of the M5M82C59AP are direct connected with ADo-AD, of the 8086. Example of interface with the 8086 • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION SET Item ~ Instruction code Mnemonic Function Ao 07 06 Os 0, 03 O2 0, A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 As As As As 0 0 0 0 As As As As 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Do ICW4 required? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ICW1 ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI ICWI A B C 0 E F G H I J K L M N 0 P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 17 18 19 ICW2 ICW3 M ICW38 1 1 1 A,s 87 0 A,4 86 0 A13 8s 0 A,2 84 0 A" 83 0 AlO 82 102 Ag 8, 10, As 80 100 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 ICW4 A ICW4 B ICW4 C ICW4D ICW4 E ICW4 F ICW4 G ICW4 H ICW4 I ICW4 J ICW4 K ICW4 L ICW4 M ICW4 N ICW40 ICW4 P ICW4 NA ICW4 NB ICW4 NC ICW4 NO ICW4 NE ICW4 NF ICW4 NG ICW4 NH ICW4 NI ICW4 NJ ICW4 NK ICW4 NL ICW4 NM ICW4 NN ICW4 NO ICW4 NP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 a a a a a a a a a 0 a 0 0 0 a 0 a 0 a a a a a 0 0 1 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 OCWI OCW2 E OCW28E OCW2 RE OCW2 R8E OCW2 R OCW2 CR OCW2 R8 OCW3 P OCW3 RI8 OCW3 RR OCW38M OCW3 RSM 1 0 64 Note: 0 a a a 0 a a 0 a 0 a a a 0 a a a 0 0 a 0 a a a a a a a a a a 0 a a 0 a a a a a a a a a a a 0 a a a a a 0 a a a a a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a a a a M7 0 0 1 1 1 M6 0 1 0 0 a 1 a a 1 a a a 0 1 1 a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 0 a 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a a a 0 1 1 1 1 a a a a 1 1 1 1 0 a a a 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 a a 1 1 a a 1 1 0 a 1 1 a 1 0 1 a 1 a 1 a 1 0 1 a 1 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 0 a a a 0 a a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 0 a 0 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 a M4 M3 M2 M, Mo L2 0 L2 L, La 0 La 0 0 L2 1 0 L, 0 1 1 a a 0 a a a a 0 0 0 0 a Ms 1 1 1 1 0 0 a a 0 0 a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a 0 a a 0 a 0 0 0 a 1 1 1 1 1 a a 0 a 1 1 1 1 a a a a 0 a a a 1 1 a a 1 1 a a 1 1 0 a a L, a a a 1 0 1 a 1 0 1 a I 1 a Intervel Single Trigger N N N N N N N N 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 Y Y Y y y y y y y y 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 E L E L E L E L E L E L E L E L N N y y N N y y N N 4 BUF AEOI 8086 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N y y y y y y y y y y y N N N N N N N N N N y y 1 a a 1 a a a Y Y 8FNM y y La N N 8-bit vectored address Slave connections (master mode) Slave identification code (slave mode) 1 0 1 a - 8 8 8 Y 8 Y M y M y M y M N N N N N N N N y 8 Y 8 y 8 y 8 y M y M Y M y M Y Y N N y y N N y Y N N y y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N y Y N N Y Y N N Y -- . Y . __ N N Y N y N II Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N y N Y N y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y .- Interrupt mask EOI SEOI Rotate o~ Non-Specific EOI command (Automatic rotation) Rotate on Specific EOI command (Specific rotation) Rotate in AEOI Mode (SET) Rotate in AEOI Mode (CLEAR) Set priority without EOl Y: yes, N: no, E: edge, L: level, M: master, S: slave • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 5-97 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Symbol Parameter Vee Power-supply voltage V, Input voltage Va Output voltage Topr Operating free-air temperature range TsIg Storage temperature range Conditions With respect to Vss RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS limits Unit -0.3-7 V -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 V -0. 3-Vee+0. 3 V -20-75 °C -65-150 °C (Ta=-20-75°C, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Parameter Unit Min Vee Supply voltage Vss Supply voltage Nom Max 5.5 5 4.5 V V 0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (T a=-20-75°C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Parameter Unit Test conditions Typ Min V'H High-level input voltage 2 V'L Low-level input voltage -0.3 V OH High-level output voltage VOH(INT) IOH=-400"A 2.4 IOH=-100"A 3.5 IOH=-400"A 2.4 Max Vcc+ O. 3 0.8 Low-level output voltage IOL=2.2mA Icc Standby supply current from Vee Vcc=5.5V, V,=Vcc or GND output open V V V High-level output voltage, interrupt request output VOL V 0.45 V 10 /-lA I'H High-level input current V(==Vcc -10 10 /-lA III Low-level input current V,=OV -10 10 /-lA loz Off-state output current Vss=O, VI=O---..VCC -10 10 /-lA IIH(IR) High-level input current, lnterrupt request inputs Vl=VCC 10 /-lA 'IUIA) Low-level input current, interrupt request inputs V,=OV Ci Input capacitance Vcc=Vss, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C 10 pF Ci/o Input/output capacitance Vcc=Vss, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C 20 pF TIMING REQUIREMENTS /-lA -300 (T a=-20-75°C , Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted) Limits Alternative Symbol Unit Parameter Symbol Typ Min Max 1wcw) Write pulse width tWLWH 290(200) ns 1SUCA-W) Address setup time before write 1AHWL 0 ns Ih(w-Al Address hold time after write tWHAX 0 ns TSUCDO-W) Data setup time before write tOVWH 240(100) ns Ih(w-oQ) Data hold time after write tWHDX 0 ns IW(RI Read pulse width tALRH 235 (200) ns tSU(A-A) Address setup time before read tAHRL 0 ns Ih(R-Al Address hold time after read tRHAX 0 ns tW(IR) Interrupt request input width, low·level time, edge triggered mode tJLJH 100 ns tSU(CAS-INTA) Cascade setup time after INTA (slave) tCVIAL 55 ns IreC(wl Write recovery time tWHRL 190 ns treCCR) Read recovery time tRHRL 160 ns tCHCL 500 ns End of Command to next Command (Not same Command type) Id(Rw) End of INTA sequence to next INTA sequence. 5-98 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS (Ta=-20-75°C, Vcc=5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted) Limits Alternative Symbol Unit Parameter Symbol Typ Min Max 200 [1 70) ns lOa ns 200[170) ns tRLEL 125 ns Propagation time from read to disable signal output tRHEH 150 ns t pLH ( IR-INT) Propagation time from interrupt request input to interrupt request output tJHIH 350 ns tPLV{INTA-CAS) Propagation time from INTA to cascade output (master) tlALGV 565 ns tPZV(CAS_OQ) Data output enable time after cascade output (slave) tCVDV 300 ns tPZV(R-DQ) Data output enable time after read tRLDV tPVZ(R_DQ) Data output disable time after read tRHDZ tPZV(A_OQ) Data output enable time after address tAHDV tPHLCR-EN) Propagation time from read to enable signal output tPLH(R-EN) Note 1 2 M5M82C59AP is also invested with the extended specification showed in the brackets, INTA signal is considered read signal CS signal is considered address signal Input pulse level 0,45-2, 4V 2 4 Input pulse rise time 10ns ' ~2 Input pulse fall time 10ns Reference level Input V'H=2V, VIL =0, 8V 0,45 0,8 Output VoH=2V, VoL =0,8'L_ Load capacitance C L =100pF, where SP!EN pin is 15pF 10 x= 2 0,8 TIMING DIAGRAM Write Mode CS, Ao IJ K } th(W-Al tSU(A-W) ~I-- \ ~ I-- /-- tW{w) ...,~ -- thlw-DQI tSU(DQ-wl ~~ 0,-00 I-- ~K Read Mode CS, Ao )( thlR-Ai tSU{A_R\ tW(Rl \ K .J jI k- tpVZ(R-OQ) tPZV(A-OQ) tpZV{A-OO) mf-- 0,-00 ~\ ~ktpHl(R-ENJ 1// tPLH(R-EN) I \ r- • MITSUBISHI "'ELECTRIC 5-99 MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER Interrupt Sequence IR (Note 1) INT (Note 3) 07- 0 0 tpLV(INTA-CAS) 1< CA&,,-CASo Other Timing WR RO INTA / tdlRw) WR RO INTA Note 1 8086, 8088 mode 2 : 8085A mode 3 : 8086,8088 mode is in high-impedance state, pointer is released during the next INTA. When in single 8085A mode, data ~~eased by all INTAs. When master, CALL instruction is released during the first INTA, high impedance state during the second and third INTA. When slave, high impedance state during the first INTA, vectored address is released during the second and third INTA. 5-100 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC (Note 2) MITSUBISHI LSls MSM82CS9AFP CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER DESCRIPTION The M5M82C59AFP is a programmable LSI for interrupt control. It is fabricated using silicon-gate CMOS technology and is designed to be used easily in connection with an 8085A, 8086 or 8088. PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) CHIP ST~~8t CS~ 1 ~~~f WR ~ 2 CONTROL CONTROL I~~~ FEATURES • • • • • • • Single 5V supply voltage TTL compatible CALL instruction to the CPU is generated automatically Priority, interrupt mask and vectored address for each interrupt request input are programmable Up to 64 levels of interrupt requests can be controlled by cascading with M5M82C59AFP Vee (5V) 27 ~ ~ ~~T~~~tWPUT 26 ~INTA ACKNOWLEDGE RD ~ 3 07- 4 INPUT INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS 19 ~IR, 18 -IRo 17 -INT INTERRUPT ~~~~~~T 16 -SP/EN ~~Hn~~LrrM BUFFER OUTPUT Polling functions Packaged in flat small outline package 15 -.. _ _ _ _ _..r- CAS, CASCADE LINES APPLICATION The M5M82C59AFP can be used as an interrupt controller for CPUs 8085A, 8086 and 8088 FUNCTION The M5M82C59AFP is a device specifically designed for use in real time, interrupt driven microcomputer systems. It manages eight level requests and has built-in features for expandability to other M5M82C59AFP's. The priority and interrupt mask can be changed or reconfigured at any time by the main program. When an interrupt is generated because of an interrupt Outline 28P2W request at 1 of the pins, the M5M82C59AFP based on the mask and priority will output an INT to the CPU. After that, when an INTA signal is received from the CPU or the system controller, a CALL instruction and a programmed vector address is released onto the data bus. Refer to M5M82C59AP for detail information. compatible with M5M82C59AFP's specifications are M5M82C59AP. Only package outline is different. BLOCK DIAGRAM ,..----- - - - - --- - --- - --- - ----, INTERRUPT ACK~OWLEDGE INPUT INTERRUPT REQUEST OUTPUT INTA CONTROL LOGIC BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS 2 WR WRITE CONTROL INPUT INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS 3 RD READ CONTROL INPUT 27 ;1: Ao ADDRESS INPUT ~:;}HI:A::~E:: ~:E:T 15 CAS, '-----{liS SP/EN - - - - --_. - - - - - --- - • MITSUBISHI IIhtt.ELECTRIC ----" SLAVE PROGRAM INPUT! ENABLE BUFFER OUTPUT 5-101 II MITSUBISHI LSls MS8992P CMOS CRT CONTROLLER DESCRIPTION The M58992P is a raster scan type CRT interface device, fabricated using silicon gate CMOS technology. This LSI is a one-chip type high-performance video display generator having the timing signal generator and attribute circuits required for CRT display so as to allow system configuration with a small number of components. FEATURES • • • • • • Single 5V supply voltage. Can generate· video display using simple external circuit 10 programmable display modes Some mode conditionally allows mixed use with other mode. Color display is programmable to use either 8 or 16 colors. The R, G and B Signals are provided as video output signals. • • Can superimpose on TV screen A 16K or 64K DRAM is used as the video RAM under control of the built-in DRAM controller. • The video RAM area can be used concurrently for storage of display data and microprocessor program. Paging and scrolling are possible. Cursor control; blinking, blanking, underline and reverse characters are possible. Light pen input control function is provided. Various interrupts generating function is provided. • • • • APPLICATION PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) (OV)V55 DAD 7 2 DAD.- 3 MULTIPLEXED DADs DRAM DAD, ADDRESS/DATA DAD3 BUS 5 6 DAD 2 - 7 ROW ADDRESS DADo STROBE OUTPUT RAS - 10 ~~~g~~ ~~~~G~S CAS - WRITE ENABLE OU:~:O WE - OUTPUTS 9 I~: : B-15 1- 16 17 CLOCK M 19 MClK - 47 --+ READY READY OUTPUT SYSTEM CLOCK ClK --+ 20 BD~~G~G LIGHT PEN STROBE INPUT BLANK - 21 l TPEN --+ 22 ~~~~~K{6~ RASTER ADDRESS 24 25 26 CODE DATA jCDRD, READ OUTPUTS) CDRD 2 _ 27 OUTPUTS 46 - ~ft~g1~~8fDE CAL T HORIZONTAL HSYNC _ SYNCHRONIZE - OUTPUT VSYNC - ~~~~r~nUTPUT CHIP SELECT INPUT READ INPUT WRITE INPUT 28 DATA BUS 29 30 31 (Ov) v 55 OUTPUT Outline The information or data to be displayed on the screen is written in the video RAM by the microprocessor. The M58992P can read the video RAM in the order of the CRT scan, and can generate synchronization signal for a CRT. • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC RESET RESET INPUT 45 --+ I NTR 44 - loiM IO/MEMORY INPUT RAo _ 23 IRA, RA2 RA3 _ FUNCTION 5-102 ADDRESS BUS 11 12 BURST OUTPUT BRST CLOCK B ~~~~~~6NIZE Display unit using home TV set or monitor TV set 4 64P48 DAD, DAD. DAD, DADo DAD? DAD, DAD3 DAD, Y'-. '-'-. '-. I '- '-. CDRD, CALT CDRD, RAo RA, RA, RA3 CAS RAS '- I WE '-. '-. '-. YY '-. '- '-. BLANK VSYNC BRST HSYNC '-c '- '-c R '- G B '-- '-- ~ IV I ,. "':I 1""- "'-I (")(1) -Ie:: ! A, ) \ A, A, C=;iii A? COLOR INTERFACE ENCODER ~ r-- \ ) A3 A. SYNCHRONIZE 16 8 1 ) J / J ~ :>0 0 VIDEO ADDRESS AND TIMING GENERATOR ::c X I--- START DISPLAY COMMAND COLOR ADDRESS MODE REGISTER REGISTER REGISTER REGISTER I---~ VIDEO AND ATTRIBUTE DATA CONTROLLER 8 8 III (fJ :; III A9 / ." A10 ;; A" '! A12 '/ A'3 ~ A,. ~:; A15 STATUS REGISTER joE ~~GG~~~~NI- LTPEN m (fJ (fJ c As J ~ A, ::10m = \ Ao M DAD BUS COMMAND AND CHARACTER GENERATOR INTERFACE DRAM INTERFACE .. 8 J ." m ::c / 8 MICROPROCESSOR COMMAND DECODER DATA BUS BUFFER L.....- 8 .. INTERNALBUS . .. c I IIIII111 MICROPROCESSOR BUS INTERFACE It III "-./"....-/~"--./'-...-/ D~ D~ D~ D~ D~ D~ D~ D~ WR RD CS loiM RESET CLOCK AND INTERNAL TIMING GENERATOR J (") s:0 (I) (") 1 I I I I --0----@-0 45 I-{ 47 ~ ~ INTR READY ::10 -I CLK BCLK MCLK Vss Vss Vee J (") 0 z -I ::10 0 r r U1 I '::10" Cl W I s: i: ~ CII c: GO ! U) U) (I) N r -a :5 ~ MITSUBISHI LSls MS8992P CMOS CRT CONTROLLER PIN DESCRIPTION Pin DAD7~ DADo Name Multiplexed DRAM address RAS strobe output Column address -~ CAS Input/output Idata bus Row address -~ Input/output strobe output Functions Causes data input from DRAM or data output for writing in DRAM by output of mltiplexed row and col- umn address to DRAM. ~ Output DRAM address input is latched at falling edge of RAS. Output DRAM address input is latched at falling edge of CAS. Output Data from microprocessor is written in DRAM when this signal is "L". ~ WE Write enable output R Video output R G Video output G B Video output B TTL level output of video signals R, G and 8. Output -~ Auxiliary output for R, G and B. By externC\1 Combination with R, G and B, up to 16 colors can be disVideo output luminance I played. 1= "H" indicates high luminance. BRST Burst output Output BClK Clock B Output MClK Clock M Output ClK System clock --BLANK Blanking output lTPEN Light pen strobe input Signal to indicate color burst signal position or sUb-carrier frequency phase-modulated by RGB in case of NTSC system. Frequency at 114 of clock input. Subcarrier frequency in NTSC color system. -- RA3~ RAo --CDRD1 --CDRD2 CAlT Input Output Input Internal timing clock. Indicates DRAM access by the M58992P for display when this signal is "L" in the text 1, text 2, graphic 1, graphic 2, graphic 3 or graphic 5 mode. 14.31818MHz for display using NTSC system. Indicates around the synchronizing pulse in horizontal or vertical blanking period of the M58992P. Signal to latch internal address value. Character generator raster address Output Least significant 4 bits of address for use of character generater to be used in text mode. outputs Signal to control external circuit for input of display code pattern to the M58992P. Code data read outputs Output --- --~ CDRD1 is the timing for direct data input from DRAM to the M58992P, and CDRD2 is the timing for input from character generator. Character code latch output Output Signal to cause external latching of character generator pointer output from DRAM. - --HSYNC ---VSYNC 5-104 Horizontal synchronize 'putput Vertical Open drain output Setting synchronizing signal input mode by command causes no generation of internal synchronizing nal but internal counter reset by external signal. synchronize output • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC sig~ MITSUBISHI LSls MS8992P CMOS CRT CONTROLLER PIN DESCR1P11ON (CONTINUED) Pin Input/output Name Functions 1------1----------1-----_+------------------.-------------------------1 DB7~DBo Data bus Input/output Data bus DB, : MSB -~ WR _._----, Write input Input _. Function t----- CS 101M RD WR r----------------~--~----r---~------- No LSI selection - RD Read input Input DRAM Read -- .- DRAM Write - CS Chip select input Input The M58992P register read -- The M58992P register write - 101M IO/memory input Input The M58992P starts DRAM access or internal register read/write upon CS. f-----+------.----+----~------ INTR Interrupt request output Output ----~.--- .. ---- Interrupt request output generated for any of four reasons in the M58992P can be masked. The status register detects the type of interrupt. The INTR signal is reset upon status read. f------I-------+---~-_+------------------------------------ RESET Reset input Input The M58992P system reset signal to initialize various registers. - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - + - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .- READY Ready output Output Normally "H" signal. Goes to "L" upon selection of DRAM and returns to "H" upon completion of DRAM read/write. This signal provides synchronism with the microprocessor. I-~-~--+--------~I----+------------------------------ Address bus Input - -.... --- Address input on the microprocessor side. A15 is the MSB. Ao to A3 are used for register reading or writing. • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC 5-105 II MITSUBISHI LSls MS8992P CMOS CRT CONTROLLER Table 1 The M58992P display mode list 8X8 dots 2000 16 bits/ FG: aX10 dots 16 colors BG: 8 colors aX8 dots BD: 16 colors allowed. character (8 bits for character and 8'bits for color 1600 Border colo designation, Unused 4000 designa- tion) 2X2 dots 3200 FG: 1 block: blinking possible without flickering. may be dis- Always ignated in possible character Flickering is caused at units. other than blinking. MSB 4 bits, 4 bits/dot BG color 16 colors X30 lines 40 characters X24 lines 80 characters X30 lines 80 characters X24 lines 160H 8000 16 colors BD: Multiple Always 2400 1920 positions Unused etc. 8X10 dots 1 block: Cursor X120V 4800 3840 9600 Unused Always 16000 2Xl dots Possible 160H X240V 19200 without FG : Semi 1 block: 1X1 dot flickering. 16 colors BD: 2 bits/dot Color pallet for FG 320H 16000 X240V 19200 16 colors FG: 1 block: 1X1 dot 16 colors BD: Border 4 bits/dot or, etc. col~ No MS84 bits, 32000 8G color Same as text 3 and 4 modes 16 colors 320H X240V 38400 Unused FG: One 1 block: 1X1 dot BG and FG seleted color 1 bits/dot BD: color de- Same as 16000 signation text 1 and 2 640H 19200 X240V modes 16 colors 1 block: 1X1 dot FG=Foreground 5-106 Same as graphic 3 8G=8ackground Same as 2 bits/dot Color pallet for FG 32000 text 3 and 4 modes BD=Border CLRG1 ....... 3=Color register • MITSUBISHI "'ELECTRIC 640H X240V 38400 APPLICATION MITSUBISHI LSls NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS 1. INTRODUCTION 3. OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION Mitsubishi Electric's microprocessor-support CMOS peripheral LSI devices are compatible with current NMOS peripheral devices, and feature the additional advantages listed below. Fig. 3 illustrates what happens when supply voltage (V cc ) is applied to the circuit shown in Fig. 2, varying input voltage from Vss to Vcc. The Va curve indicates the change in output voltage and supply current (Icc). As illustrated, these characteristics depend on input voltage, so can be better understood by dividing V, into three regions, I ~ ill. I : In this region, only the p-channel transistor T2 is on, so that the Va output voltage becomes Vcc. In this condition, practically no current Icc flows. IT : In this region, Va varies in accordance with V" When V, is increased from region I, the n-channel transistor T, begins to turn on, so that Va gradually decreases and at some point begins to decrease rapidly. The value of V, at this point of rapid Va decrease is known as the circuit threshold voltage. .When this voltage is exceeded, as V, is increased, Va approaches V ss. In the region IT, Va is determined by the ratio of the on resistances of T, and T 2 . Icc is always flowing in this region, and becomes maximum when V, is at the circuit threshold voltage. ill : In this region, since only T, is on, Va becomes the voltage Vss. In this region, as was the case for region I , virtually no Icc current flows. • Compatibility with 8251A, 8254, 8255A, 8237A, 8259A. • Low power dissipation • Wide supply voltage range, Vcc =5V±10% • Wide operating temperature range, T a= - 20~ 75"C • Improved timing conditions Due to these advantageous features, CMOS peripheral devices can be used to replace conventional NMOS devices in their typical applications, and can additionally be used in applications requiring low power dissipation. The following sections describe the basic characteristics of Mitsubishi Electric's CMOS peripheral LSI devices for microprocessor support, and explain precautions and methods of use. 2. BASIC CIRCUITS AND CONSTRUCTION The internal circuitry of CMOS devices consist of both pchannel and n-cha'nnel transistors. There are two types of NMOS transistors. In the depletiontype, drain-to-source remains on even when gate-to-source voltage is OV, and with the enhancement-type device, dropping gate-to-source voltage below the threshold voltage level turns the transistor off. CMOS devices employ the enhancement type, regardless of whether they are p-channel or n-channel devices. Fig. 1 shows the typical inverter, which is the basis of CMOS peripherals and Fig. 2 illustrates its equivalent circuit diagram. vee vss PROCESS TECHNOLOGY Fig.2 Single-stage inverter circuit Silicon Gate N-Well CMOS II ill vee o > .s"'" '5 > '5 c. '5 o Substrate P-(GND) ,\ \ Icc \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Fig.1 \ Single-stage inverter construction " Vee Input voltage V, Fig.3 Single-stage inverter voltage transfer and supply current vs. input voltage characteristics • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 6-3 MITSUBISHI LSls NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS 4. TRANSFER CHARACTERISTICS AND POWER DISSIPATION For COMS devices, the circuit threshold voltage is approximately one-half of Vcc. Contrasted with NMOS logic, where threshold voltage is a fixed level not related to supply voltage, ideal transfer characteristics can be achieved. In order to maintain compatibility with the conventional NMOS devices, transfer characteristics of CMOS peripherals I/O circuits have been establiched at TTL level. Fig. 4 illustrates input voltage V'N versus supply current Icc for MSM82CS5AP-S. Here, when V'N reaches 1.3 to 1.5V, the resulting switch in internal circuits causes a sharp increase in Icc flow. creases power dissipation. The M5M82C5SAP-5 illustrated in Fig. 4 has parallelconnected I/O ports, and is relatively limited in switching operations. However, devices such as the programmable timer MSM82C54P are subjected to constant clock operations, and the current flow for each CMOS circuit must be added to get the total for the device. As shown in Fing. 5, currnet dissipation increases along with increases in operating frequency. 5 Vec=5V DUTY=50% Ta-25"C (PORT-Ao MODE 0 INPUT) 250 V1H min 3.15 Qi V 1H min > ~ V OH min Q) OJ E > V OH min 2.7 2.4 0 2.0 2.0 2 V 1H min V 1H min V1L max 1.5 V1L max 0.45 0.9 0.4 VOL max VOL CMOS peripherals max LSTTL (Note 1) VOL 0.05 max VOL max 0.1 Standard CMOS logic High-speed CMOS 4000B series 74HC series (Note 2) TTL level, Note VOH min=2. 4V Fig.? II V 1L max V1l max 0.8 0.8 TI 2 : JEDEC V ee =4. 5V DC noise margin comparison (V cc =5.0V) 6. FANOUT }IOH=-l~OI'A 5~~~____________~~~~~~~I~o~H= __ -~4rm~A T a=-40, 25, 90'C I Ta =-40'C o" > Ta =25'C Ta =90'C 5 Vee (V) Fig.8 V OH characteristics M5M82C55AP-5 The drive capability of CMOS peripheral devices generally exceeds that of NMOS logic devices. This can be seen in Fig. 8, where drive capability at "H" level is noticeably better than NMOS. This defference between logic types provides a slight difference when actually applied to ~riving a load such as a transistor, and the value of the load resistance can affect fanout capability. This point will be covered in more detail later. For reference purposes, the "L" level drive capability of M5M82C55AP-5 is illustrated in Fig. 9. When driving a MOS-IC with a peripheral LSI, since it is only necessary to drive the input leakage current of the DC-connected IC, fanout capability is quite good. However, where devices having many components (e.g., data bus, etc.) are connected, the stray capacitance of the wiring and device input capacitance (generally about 5pF) must also • MITSUBISHI ;"'ELECTRIC 6-5 MITSUBISHI LSls NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS be driven, so signal switching response is slower. In this case, the load (s) to be driven must be divided (or allocated to several devices) as with previous devices. O.3~-----4-------+------~------+-----~ :; lfj iil ~~~:~i.y l ~8'Z I2t.C ~~~:;~~~~vee=4.5V I O. 2 ~------+-------+------~----;;>"":""';"'Vee=5. 5V Vee =4.5V Vee :5VI Vee -5. ~v f-«« e ~~ 0.1 I T - causing permanent demage to the device.. To prevent gate damage, the diodes and input resistor shown in the diagram form a protection circuit. Since threshold voltage for the input transistor is set at approximately 1.5V, as noted in section 4, input voltage becomes unstable around this level, and a through current starts to flow from Vcc to Vss. In systems where low dissipation current is required, this characteristic can cause problems in the design of the power supply. Where a data bus is left floating, through current is likely to become a particular problem, so bus lines should be fixed at a certain level with a pull-up (or pull-down) circuit having high resistance values. T vee=5vl -.!40.C .------------------------.., Vee =5.5V ! UNIT: v 10L (DATA BUS)(mA) Poly-Si Input Fig.9 10L-VOL V TH =C1. 5V Q9----'lM--+------+ characteristics M5M82C55AP-5 (at Vee =5V) R=cl k!1 7. INPUT CIRCUIT Fig. 10 shows an equivalent circuit diagram of the input circuit for CMOS peripheral devices. The gate oxide layer of the transistors is extremely thin, and high voltages applied directly to the gates are likely to rupture their insulation, Fig.10 CMOS peripheral device input circuit (equivalent diagram) DATA BUS TIMING READ WRITE (j) o ::< Address, CS Address, CS DATA (INPUT) RD z DATA (OUTPUT) WR Address, CS *(j) o ::< Address, CS min200ns DATA (INPUT) RD () '~. max170ns min200ns WR DATA (OUTPUT) - - - - - ' ( \ VALID }- "'--.----- * M5M82C37AP, C51 AP, C55AP-5, C59AP Fig.11 6-6 Bus timing characteristics • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS 8. TIMING CHARACTERISTICS Conditions (al or (el The timing conditions between the system and CMOS eWhen using a dual power supply When dual power supplies serve CMOS logic devices, differences in the rising edge of the power line signal tend to cause latchup. This can be eliminated by using a series connected resistor (R) to limit current flow to a maximum of 10mA. (Refer to Fig. 12) peripheral LSI devices have been improved over their NMOS type counterparts. Improvements include better setup and hold times, and microprocessor interfacing is easier. Fig. 11 summarizes there differences in comparison form. Whereas NMOS devices required ts and th time, these have been eliminated with CMOS peripherals by setting ts and th ta Ons. VCC2 Vee1 9. USAGE PRECAUTIONS (1) vee Dealing with NC input pins Vee R Leaving unused input pins open results in instability input voltage, which in turn can produce errors in output logic levels and increase current dissipation. Unused input pins Vss should therefore be tied to Vee or Vss. (2) Voltage supply lines Power dissipation of CMOS peripherals whose internal Vee VCC2 tance of approx. 0.111 F) wired close between Vee and Vss. Also, when devices such as M5L82C55AP-5 are used with surges, etc. When this happens, a large current flows from Vee to Vss , and if current flow continues, the device will be destroyed. Provision must be made to clear latchup to prevent overcurrents from destroying the device, and that can Vss ,...----Vee power line impedance to filter the spikes. To accomplich this, each device should be fitted with a ceramic capaCitor (having good high frequency characteristics and a capaci- The internal circuitry of CMOS devices often have parasitic bipolar transistors formed in the substrate, and these opearate like thyristors, being triggered by external voltage V, Vee, changes are small such as M5M82C55AP-5 and M5M82C59AP is extremely low. However, the through current spikes that occur during switching are dealt with using the traditional method applied to older ICs; by reducing a high current drive circuit connected to output, power lines should be run independently from the logic system and driver circuit to reduce adverse affect on the logic system. (3) Latchup Input Output Input Output V, >V e Fig.12 Preventing latchup when dual power supplies are used e When using differential circuits When differential circuits are used, it is possible for input voltage to exceed Vee or Vss , which could result in latchup. In this case, use a diode for voltage clamping, combined (a) (b) (c) V,>Vee+V F Vo>Vee+VF V, Vce. Where possible, separate power supplies should be used. If a common power supply must be used, (d) (e) Vo---4>----wv'v----v-o---Ilnput Output-- I ~;";;;:':.::jr::::::~_.J.=_---.:+:::~~Vcc=4. 5V V =5.5V it' cc --,----Lvcc=5V I Vcc =4.5V -2 -3 -4 IOH (rnA) IOL (rnA) 1.=For a base current I. of -lmA, the difference in VOH is approx. 1. 5V. Flg.16 M5L8255AP-5/M5M82C55AP-5 V OH output characteristics comparison • Fig.17 MITSUBISHI ~ELECTRIC M5L8255AP-5/M5M82C55AP-5 characteristics comparison VOL output 6-9 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 1. DESCRIPTION 5. The M5W1791-02P is a floppy disk formatter/controller de- PIN CONFIGURATION (fOP VIEW) vice which accommodates single and double density formats. NC WRITE Co~~~m WR ~ The device is designed for use with microprocessors or mic- CHIP S~~~8t CS ~ READ CO~~~8f RD ~ REGISTER J Ao ~ rocomputers. The device is fabricated with the Nchannel silicon gate Single 5V supply voltage • Accommodate singe and double density formats IBM 3740 single density format BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS IBM system 34 double density format • Selectable sector length (128, 256, 512 or 1024 bytes/ sector) • • Side select compare Single/multiple sector read or write with automatic sector search • Selectable track to track stepping time • • Write precompensation OMA or programmed data transfers • Window extension - READY RE1~~\~Wm ~ WD ~m-1>lrpATA ~ WG ~~~1>~f'A TE ~ 29 ~ TG 43 TG43 OUTPUT 4- D;"0;- • 33 32 31 30 DO EN ~~~NE1!~fl~PUT WPRT ~~rrf PROTECT fP INDEX PULSE INPUT TROD TRACK 00 INPUT WFNFOE ~~~/i~lT 37 36 35 - Do- FEATURES INTERRUPT 38 ~ DTRQ gt~~U~EQUEST S~~~8t 1 A, ~ EOMOS technology is packaged in a 40-pin OIL package. 2. NC 39 ~ INTRQ ~D9~o¥T 28 ~ HOLD ~D~~Jr0AD 27 - RAW READ ~P~TREAD 26 - RCLK FNEtST CLOCK 25 ~ RG READ GATE OUTPUT Vc c(5V) Outline 40P4 NC: NO CONNECTION systems. The hardware of the M5W1791-02P consists of a 3. • • APPLICATION Single or double density floppy disk drive formatter/con- floppy disk interface, a CPU interface and a PLA control logic. The total chip can be programmed by eleven 8-bit troller commands. The floppy disk interface portion performs the 8-inch or mini floppy disk interface communication with floppy disk drive under control of the PLA control logic. The CPU interface portion has five regis- 4. FUNCTION The M5W1791-02P is a floppy disk formatter/controller that ters - command, data, status, track and sector register and communicates with the CPU through the data bus. can be used with most microprocessor or microcomputer These functions are also controlled by the PLA. 6. BLOCK DIAGRAM BIDIRECTIONAL DATI\ BUS WRITE CONTROL INPUT Wii 2 CHIP SELECT INPUT C§ 3 READ CONTROL INPUT Ail • REGISTER SELECT{Ao 5 INPUT A, 6 r----,..·-{;311 WPRT WRITE PROTECT INPUT EARLY OUTPUT EARLY LATE OUTPUT LATE WRITE GATE OUTPUT WG WRITE DATA OUTPUT WD 17 18 30 31 R~:b' I~~~~ 27 RAW READ CLOCK 3 jj5 3 i'ROO r==j=rL:,,:,,~=~3 READY II 23 HOLT , - '-..J2'''9TG 43 2 TEST TEST INPUT I~~b~ 26 CLK . CLOCK INPUT 2. DDEN DOUBLE DENSITY MODE 37~----l>-----------~ SELECT INPUT 33 RG WF/VFOE RESET READ GATE ~~IT.M~gLT RESET INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL OUTPUT 6-10 INDEX PULSE INPUT TRACK 00 INPUT READY INPUT HEAD LOAD TIMING INPUT TG43 OUTPUT HEAD LOAD OUTPUT DIRECTION OUTPUT STEP OUTPUT • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC INTERRUPT REQUEST OUTPUT DATA REQUEST OUTPUT MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 7. PIN DESCRIPTION Pin Input or Name No internal NC NC(pin 1) is not internally connected connection Write control - WR input CS Chip select input - Read control RD Functions output input Input Write signal from a master CPU (Active low). Input Chip select (Active low). Input Read signal from a master CPU (Active low). ._- r--Register select inputs. These inputs select the register under the control of the RD and WR. A o, A, - - Do-D7 Register select Input input Bidirectional In/Oul data bus A, Ao 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 -- - RD WR STATUS REGISTER COMMAND REGISTER TRACK REGISTER TRACK REGISTER SECTOR REGISTER SECTOR REGISTER DATA REGISTER DATA REGISTER Three-state, inverted bidirectional data bus. - - - - t-----------.--- - - STEP Step output Output Step pulse output (Active high). DIRC Direction output Output Direction output. High level means the head is stepping in and low level means the head is stepping out. EARLY Early output Output - -- lATE Output Late output -- 1----RESET This signal is used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted earty. This signal is also used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted late. Reset input (Active low). The device is reset by this signal and automaticaily loads "03" (hexadecimal) into Reset input Input Test input Input the command register. The not-ready-status bit is also reset by this signal. When reset input is made to be high, the device executes restore command even unless READY is active and the device loads "01" (hexadecimal) to the sector register. - - TEST HDlT Head load timing input ---- Input Clock input RG Read gate output Output RClK Read clock input Input Raw read input Input READ HDlD Head load output actuated motors. When the device finds high level on this input, the device assumes that the head is engaged on the media. Active high. -- ClK r---= RAW This input is only used for test purposes, so user must tie it to Vee or leave it open unless using voice coli Input Output Clock input to generate internal timing. 2MHz for 8-inch drives, 1MHz for mini drives. This signal shows the external data separator that the syncfield is detected. This signal is internally used for the data window. Phasing relation to raw read data is specified but polarity (RCLK high or low) is not important. This input signal from the drive shall be low for each recorded flux transition. This output signal controls the loading of the head of the drive. The h~ad must be loaded on the media by this high-level output. • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 6-11 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER Pin Name Input or output Functions TG43 TG 43 output Output This output is valid only during disk readlwrite operation and it shows the position of the head. High level on this output indicates that head Is positioned between track 44 to 76. WG Write gate output Output This signal becomes active before disk write operations are to occur. WD Write data output Output READY Ready input Input This signal consists of data bits and clock bits. It becomes active for every flux transition. Active high. This signal shows the device the drive is ready. In the disk read/write operation except for TYPE 1 command operation, low level Input terminates current operation and the device generates the INTRQ. In the TYPE 1 command operation, this signal is neglected. Not ready bit in the status register is the inverted form of this input. This is a bidirectional signal. It becomes write fault input when WG is active. In the disk write operation, WFIVFOE Write fault Inputl VFO enable InlOut low level signal on this input terminates the write operation and makes INTRQ active. This signal also appears in the status register as the write fault bit. When WG is inactive, this signal works as VFO enable output. VFOE output is also an open drain type, so pull it up to Vee and never input active write fault signal output write WG is inactive. TROO Track 00 Input Input This signal indicates that the head is located on the track 00 to the device. Active low. IP Index pulse input Input This input indicates to the device that an index hole of the diskette has been encountered. --WPRT Write protect input Input write operations, this signal is sampled and an active low signal will terminate the current command and --- Double density Input This input determines the device operation mode. When DDEN=O, double density mode is selected. When DDEN= 1, Single density mode Is selected. Output that data is assembled in the data register. In the disk write mode, it indicates that the data register is DDEN DTRa INTRa NC 6..,...12 mode select input Data request output Interrupt request output No internal connection Low level signal on this inpLlt informs the device that the drive is in the write protected state. Before disk set INTRQ. The write protect status bit in the status register is also set. DTRQ is an open drain output, so pull up to Vce by the 10k resistor. In the disk read mode, DTRQ indicates empty. DTRQ is reset by the read data or write data operation. Output INTRQ is also a open drain output, so pull up to Vee by the 10k resistor. INTRQ becomes active at the completion of any command and is reset when the CPU reads the status or writes the command. NC (pin 40) is not internally connected. •. MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC -- MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 8. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION The following explanation is based on the block diagram is Section 6. The registers which are accessible by the CPU system through the input/output buffer of the M5W1791-02P are the command, status, track, sector and data registers. These are ali 8-bit registers. . The register select inpus Ao and A, select one register under RD, \Nfl and CS control as described in Section 7. 8.1 Retister Descriptions (1) Command Register This register is write-only, so the contents of the command register cannot be read onto the bi-directional data bus. The CPU system writes the command code into this register to be executed by the M5W1791-02P. Except the force interrupt command, the command register should not be loaded while the busy status bit is set. (2) Status Register This is the read-only register and holds the status information about the device and a connected floppy disk drive. The meaning of each status bit is varied by the executing command. (3) Track Register This register is bi-directional, so the CPU system can read or write the data through the data bus. The track register has the track number of the floppy disk's current head position. The type 1 commands have the update flag option according to this register. When this flag is set, the contents of the track register are updated by one for each step. They are incremented when the head is stepped in and decremented when the head is stepped out. When the type 2 command which performs the read/write operation for the floppy disk is executed, the track address of the floppy disk's ID field and the contents of the track register are compared. If they match, M5W1791-02P continues to check whether the sector address is the one appointed by the sector register. When the restore command is performed automatically by the -RESET input transition from "0" to "1" or when the CPU system executes the restore command, FF (HEX) is at first loaded into the track register and every time the step pulse is issued, the value of this register is decremented by one. The contents of the track register are set to 00 (HEX) when the TROO input is activated before the 255th step pulse issued or after the step pulse was generated 255 times. (4) Sector Register This is also a bi-directional register. For disk read or write operation, the CPU system must set the desired sector address into this register. By forcing the RESET input from "0" to "1", M5W1791- 02P also sets 01 (H EX) into the sector register, then begins the restore operation. In the type 2 command execution, the sector address of the disk's 10 field and the contents of the sector register are also compared as mentioned above. When the m flag bit of the type 2 command code is set to perform the multi-sector read/write operation, the sector register value is automatically incremented by one upon completion of the read/write operation of the one sector. When the read address command of the type 3 command has been executed, the track address which is read out from the first encountered 10 field is loaded into the sector register. (5) Data Register This register is bi-directional. During disk data read operation, the data read from the floppy disk is held in this register. During the write operation, byte of data from the CPU system is held. Prior to seek command execution, the desired track position must be written into the data register. By executing the restore command or the RESET input transition from "0" to "1", M5W1791-02P automatically loads 00 (HEX) into the data register. The hardware blocks of access to the user are only the reigsters mentioned above. Descriptions of inaccesible internal hardware blocks follow. 8.2 Control Circuit (1) ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit) This one-bit serial ALU executes the comparisons of the serial data and is used for the modification and comparison of registers. (2) Status Control Logic The status control logic generates the status information for the status register. It is divided into two sections: one reflects the state of the M5W1791-02P and the other reflects the state fo the disk system. Disk states inclued write protect, index pulse, track 00, ready, head loak timing and write fault. (3) Head Control Logic This circuit generates the signal which controls head movement of the floppy disk. It provides the head load signal, direction signal, step signal and TG43 signal. The TG43 output controls the disk's write current. When the type 1 command with the head load flag h at "1" is executed, the head load output is set to "1" at the beginning of the command execution. The command execution where the head load flag h is initially at "0" makes the head load output "0" whether it has been "0" or "1 ". After issuing the step pulses, the M5W1791-02P checks • MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC 6-13 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER the verify flag V in the command code. If V is "0", the command is terminated and the interrupt request output signal is sent. If V is "1", the head load output is set to "1" (if h ="1" , HDlD is already set to "1" at the beginning of this command), and after an internal 15 ms delay (ClK = 2MHz, TEST =1), the head load timing input HOLT is sampled until HDlD andHlDT ="1" (logic true). Then M5W1791-02P updates the TG43 output signal and commences the disk read operation. This means that during the type 1 command, the TG43 signal is not updated unless the V flag is set to "1". The TG43 output is set to "1" when the floppy disk head is positioned beyond the 43rd track. The type 2 and 3 commands confirm the ready input logic high, and after a 15 ms delay (if flag E is set; if E = 0, no internal delay is initiated), HDlT is sampled until HDlD and HDlT = "1" as mentioned above. M5W1791-02P then updates the TG43 output signal and begins the disk read/write operation. If the ready input is low, then the command is terminated and INTRa is generated. The head load output which was set to "1" is reset to "0" under the following two conditions: • If the M5W1791-02P is idle for 15 disk revolutions after the prevous command terminates, the head load signal resets to "0". • If the type 1 command is executed when h = "0", the head is also automatically disengaged. (4) Head Engage Timer/Step Speed Timer The M5W1791-02P can generate an internal 15 ms wait time (ClK = 2MHz) before the head load timing input is sampled. The HDlT signal shows M5W1791-02P that the floppy disk head is completely engaged after loading into the media. The step speed can be selected at 3 ms, 6 ms, 10 ms or 15 ms (ClK = 2M Hz) by the stepping motor rate bits r1 and r0 in the type 1 command. These operations are controlled by the 1 ms timer and presettable 4-bit binary counter inside the M5W1791-02P. This 1 ms timer is disabled by setting the test input TEST to "0", which initiates step pulse intervals of about 400",s in the single-density mode and about 200",s in the doubledensity mode (ClK = 2MHz). The 15 ms wait time is also reduced in the two modes to about 60",s and 30",s, respectively. The test input signal is used only for interfacing with the floppy disk drives and a voice coil motor. Table 8.1 shows the relationship between the stepping motor rate flags and the step pulse intervals. Table 8.1 Step Pulse Intervals (unit: ms) r11 0 elK (MHz) __________ DO EN 0, 0, 1, 1, 6-14 0 1 0 1 lMHz 2MHz 0 3 6 10 15 I 1 3 6 10 15 0 6 12 20 30 1 6 12 20 30 (5) Index Pulse Counter/Se't~ounter/ Step Pulse Counter As mentioned in Section 8.2 (3), the MlilW1791-02P has an index pulse counter that returns the head' load output to "0" in the idle state after command execution. This index pulse counter is used to terminate the command when the M5W1791-02P does not complete it within 5 index pulses. There are 12 reasons why the command may be terminated prematurely: • The synchronize pattern of the 10 field is not found. • The synchronize pattern of the 10 field is too short. • • • • • • • • • • AM1 of the 10 field is not found. AM1 of the ID field is not complete. The 10 track address is not equal to the contents of the track register. The 10 sector address is not equal to the contents of the sector register. The side number of the 10 field is not equal to the side select flag s in the command code when the side comparison flag C is set to "1 ". The 10 field CRC error occurs. The synchronize pattern of the data field is not found. The synchronize pattern of the data field is too short. AM2 of the data field cannot be found. AM2 of the data field not complets. When a CRC error of the data field occurs, an interrupt is generated without a retry. The index counter is also used as the sector counter/ step pulse counter. When this counter is used as a step pulse counter, it counts a maximum of 255 step pulses during the restore command as described in Section 8.1 (3) This counter is used as a sector counter in the type 2 command to count the data length of the data field for the destination sector. In this sense, it is more appropriate to call this counter the data length counter. The M5W1791-02P allows one of four different data length configurations in one sector: 128 bytes, 256 bytes, 512 bytes and 1024 bytes. The data length of the sector to be read or written by the M5W1791-02P is decided by the "sector length" parameter at the 4th byte of the ID field. When the read/write operation is commenced for the desired data field, the M5W1791-02P use's this sector counter to generate the data request signal at specified times in accordance with the ID sector length byte. (6) Interrupt Request Control Logic, Data Request Control Logic The interrupt request output INTRa is an open drain output that notifies the CPU of command termination. Once set, the interrupt request output INTRa is not reset to "0" until the status is read out from the status register or the command is written into the command register by the CPU. ."MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER Refer to Section 11.5 concerning the response of the INTRQ during the type 4 command. The I NTRQ output· is not reset by the reset input signal. This state is undefined'8fter power is applied. The data request control output DTRQ is also an open drain output that requests the CPU to read out the data from the data register or write the data into the data register during the disk read or write operation. The DTRQ output is reset to "0" by writing the data into or reading the data out from the data register. The DTRQ output is changed to "0" by the reset input. (7) Write Control Logic The M5W1791-02P provides frequency-modulated (FM) data in the single-density mode or modified FM (MFM) data in the double-density mode. The data written into the data register from the CPU is sent to the data shift register and then it is modulated by the write control logic in accordance with the modulation type selected by the DDEN input. This modulated data is sent to the write data output WD. The special patterns including the missing clock required for disk formatting are also produced in the write control logic under the control of the write command control circuit. During the disk write operation, M5W1791-02P can predict the occurrence of the peak shift, depending on the previous bit pattern, so the write control logic provides the early and late output signals for write precompensation. (8) Write Track Command Control Logic The internal PlA program controls almost all the operations of the M5W1791-02P. However, when the write track command is executed, the PlA program control speed is too slow to perform the command. Therefore, the write track command control logic implements the write track operation directly. When the CPU writes the data into the data register for disk initialization, the contents are sent to the internal data shift register and the write track command control logic. When a special data byte is sent to the data register from the CPU, the write control logic operates under the control of the write track command control logic the provide the designated write data pattrern. When the other data bytes are written into the data register, they are first sent to the data shift register, then to the write control logic serially to be modulated according to the DDEN input. During the disk read operation, the internal data separator circuit demodulates the raw read data stream and produces the true data bit pattern. This demodulated data bit is shifted into the data shift register in series and transferred to the data register in parallel byte by byte. (2) CRC Logic The CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) circuit generates the cyclic redundancy check code. The polymonial is X'6 X12 + X + 1. + S The CRC code, generated by the CRC circuit from the write data stream, is written onto the floppy disk during the disk write operation. During the disk read operation, the last two CRC bytes read out in the 10 or data field are checked for errors by the CRC logic. (3) Prescaler A pair of internal clocks are required to drive the M5W179102P's logic circuitry. During the disk read operation, these clocks are derived from the read clock input RClK from the differential circuit, the data transfer clock logic and the internal clock control logic. At all times except for disk read operations, such as during type 1 commands or disk write operations, these two internal clocks are produced by the prescaler and the internal clock control logic from the ClK input signal. The prescaler generates the data transfer clock and the data separator clock by dividing the ClK input clock by 2 and 4 in the double density mode and by 4 and 8 in the single density mode. The internal PlA logic is driven by this data separator clock. (4) Differential Circuit, Data Transfer Clock Logic The differential circuit and the data transfer clock logic generate the internal data transfer clock by multiplying the PClK clock input and shaping its waveform. (5) Window Extension Logic When disk read operations are executed in the doubledensity mode, the raw read input occurs in both RClK clock windows. At this time, the window extension logic samples the raw read input at the edge of the internal data transfer clock which is derived from the RClK input to provide that the read clock input RClK window width is extended substantially. 8.3 Internal Control Logic (1) Data Shift Register (6) AM Detector Logic During the disk write operation, the data bytes written into the data register from the CPU are loaded into this register in parallel. The data shift register transfers the serial data to the write control logic for modulation. a signal which has been modulated by either FM or MFM. M5W1791-02P should synchronize the internal data separator clock with the data bit of the input data stream. For this The raw read signal input ""R"'"A;-;W-;-O;:R"'EA~D from the floppy disk is • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 6-15 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER purpose, the AM detector logic is employed to detect the special patterns which contain the missing clocks from' the input raw read stream, (7) Internal Clock Control Logic This logic generates the data transfer clock and data separator clock. (8) Data Separator This separates the data bit from the raw read input signal by using the data separator clock, (9) PLA This is the programmable logic array which controls the M5W1791-02P, The size of this PLA ROM is approximately 230 X 19 bits. 6-16 ," • ,." MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 9. DESCRIPTION OF COMMANDS There are 11 different commands. By setting CS to "0", Ao to "0" and A, to "0" the commands are written inside the M5W1791-02P from the data bus at the rising edge of the Table 9.1 WR signal. The commands are classified into four types: type 1, type 2, type 3 and type 4. List of Commands Command type MSB Command Code a a t--Seek command a a Step command a a Step-in command 1 a Step-out command a 1 f - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ..- - - - 1----------Read sector command 1 a ----_.---Write sector command 1 a _ . _ - - - - ._---- ----------. Restore command f--~--- Type 1 commands Type 2 commands --- t----- Type 3 commands ---------.-,,-- Type 4 commands -- V r, ro 1 h V r, ro 1 u h V r, a u h V r, ro 1 u h V r, ro a m S E C a S E C ao E a a a a a ------0-- h ro --~ 1 m ------- 1 1 --------1 1 1 a a 1 1 -_.. a a a 0 1 Ie 1 Force interrupt command h a - - j - - - - - - - .. Read track command Write track command a 1 1 Read address command LSB a a -~ _ - _ .. _ - _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 E E I, 10 Note 1: Although the codes are written in TRUE form, the M5W1791-02P features a negative logic data bus. This means codes with 0 and 1 reversed are written into the M5W1791-02P. Each command comes with a flag option. These are identified in Table 9.2. • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 6-17 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER Table 9.2 Flag Options ..... Flag Description When h =1: The head is loaded at the beginning of the command execution. h : Head load flag When h =0: The head is loaded when the verify operation starts if the V flag is "1". It is not loaded if the V flag is "0·'. When V = 1: The contents of the track register are compared with the 10 track address after head V : Verify flag Type 1 positioning. The seek error status bit is set if the desired track address is not found by the time the diskette has gone through 6 rotations. When V =0: The track verification is not performed. commands r1, ro : Stepping rate flag The stepping rate is determined by the value of these 2 bits as well as by the elK frequency and TEST input pin. When u = 1: The track register is updated with each step pulse: It is incremented (or u : Update flag decremented) by 1 for each step-in (or step-out) pulse. When u =0: Track register is not updated. When E = 1: Sampling of the head load timing input starts with the 15ms delay after the head load output has been set to "1". An advance is made to the next step when HOLO'HLOT = "1" is Type 2/Type3 Commands E: 15ms delay flag(at 2MHz clock) established. When E =0: Sampling of the head load timing input starts immediately after the head load output has been set to "1 ". An advance is made to the next step when HOLD' HLOT = "1" is established. The "next step" is the TG43 output update. When m = 1: Multi-sector read/write is performed. Upon completion of one sector read/write, the sector register value is incremented by 1, the next sector is sought and read/write is performed m : Multi-sector read/write flag again. Upon completion of the final sector read/write operation, the next sector is not found even when sought and so at the sixth rotation of the diskette the RNF error bit is set and the operation is concluded. This command can also be concluded with the Type 4 command. When m =0: Read/write for single sector is performed. When S =1: "1" is compared with the 10 side number when the C flag is "1". Type 2 commands S : Side select flag When S =0: "0" is compared with the 10 side number when the C flag is "1". No comparison is performed when C =0. C : Side compare flag When C =1: The S flag and 10 side number are compared. When C =0: The 10 side number is not compared. When 80= 1: The deleted data mark "FS·' (hexadecimal) is written into the data field address ao : Data address mark flag mark. When ao =0: The data mark "FB" (hexadecimal) is written into the data field address mark. r-----c-- When 10 =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input rising edge. When h =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input falling edge. When 12 =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" with the index pulse input. Type 4 command I : Interrupt condition flag When 13 =1: The command being executed is terminated and the interrupt request output is set to "H" immediately. When 10 =h =12 =13 =0: No interrupt request is generated but the command being executed is terminated. This command is executed so that the interrupt request output, which has been set by the Type 4 command, is reset by the following command write or status read. 6-18 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 10. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION lists the flag options. The M5W1791-02P is provided with an interface section for the CPU system and an interface section for the floppy disk system. 10.1 CPU System Interface Section The CPU interface section is composed of the input/output buffer, input/output control logic, five internal registers, interrupt request control logic and data request control logic. The CPU reads/writes the contents of the internal registers through the M5W1791-02P's data bus. Upon the completion of each command, and interrupt to the CPU is generated by the interrupt control logic. INTRQ is reset by command register write or status register read. The M5W1791-02P generates the data request output OTRQ for the CPU system using its data request control circuit while reading or writing floppy disk data. The time required to transfer one byte of serial data when ClK is 2MHz is 32,us in the single-density mode and 16,us in the double-density mode. However, the maximum time from when OTRQ is set to "H" until the CPU system reads or writes the data is actually shorter than 32,us (or 161' s) and if the service is not completed whithin this time, the lost data status bit is set. When the CPU system does not respond to the first data request for write sector command or write track command within the required time, the subsequent operation of the commands are theminated and the interrupt request output is set. For instance, the service time Tservice (WR) for DTRQ when a write sector command is being executed in the single-density mode is 23.5,us maximum. This is because it takes 41' s for the DTRQ output to be set after the contents of the data register have been transferred to the data shift register, and 4.5,us at most for the M5W1791-02P to transfer data into the data register which has been written in response to DTRQ. In other words, unless the data is serviced within 23.5,us (i.e. 32 - 4 - 4.5 = 23.5,us), there will no longer be time to begin transfer of data from the next data register to the data shift register. For further details, refer to the section dealing with the description of the commands. 10.2 Floppy Disk Interface Section The floppy disk interface section is composed mainly of the floppy disk head control section which relates to the head pOSitioning control and the floppy disk read/write control section which controls the serial data transfer. (1) Floppy Disk Head Control Section For details on the operation of the floppy disk head control section, refer to Section 8.2 (3) on the read control circuit, Section 8.2 (4) on the head load time timer/stepping rate timer, and Section 8.2 (5) on the index pulse counter/sector counter/step pulse counter as well as to Table 9.2 which (2) Floppy Disk ReadlWrite Control Section The floppy disk read/write control section executes the disk read and disk write operations. The disk read and disk write operations have no direct relation to the read and write commands. For instance, when a write sector command is executed, the disk read operation is performed first to find the desired ID. After the 10 is found, the M5W1791-02P writes the sync pattern, data field address mark, data and CRC, after which the command is terminated. Disk Read Operation The M5W1791-02P is applicable to both the single- and double-density recording formats, and selection between these is performed by the ODEN double-density select input. When the disk read operation starts, the write fault input/ VFOE control output WFIVFOE is set to "l". (This pin is pulled up by a 10-kohm resistance since it serves as an opendrain output during signal output. The pin serves as the VFOE output when the write gate output WG = "l".) This output is kept at "l" until the disk read operation is terminated. The VFOE output can be used as the signal that indicates that the Pll circuit employed as the external RClK generator should enter into lock-in operation from its free-running state. The following description is for the single-density mode which is almost the same as the double-density mode. When the disk read operation starts and the 2-byte 00 (HEX) is found, this is treated as a sync pattern and the read gate output RG is set to "H". Address mark FE, FB or F8 (HEX) are retrieved within the 10-byte period that follows. When the address mark is not found, RG is reset to "l" and a retry is made to retrieve the 2-byte 00 (HEX). If the address mark is found on the 10 field and if the ID track address and sector address (and side number also when side compare bit C = "1") are correct, RG is held at "H" until CRC reading is completed and checked. Whether there is a CRe error or not, RG is then reset to "l". When there is no error, the sync pattern of the data field is retrieved. When ID is not found properly, that is, when AM1 cannot be read properly, the values of the track register and track address do not match, the values of the sector register and sector address do not match, the side select flag of the command and side number do not match (when e = 1), or when there is a eRC error in th ID field, RG is reset to "0" and a retry is made to retrieve the 2-byte 00 (HEX). However, when the read address command is executed, the data is read as far as the CRC byte if the sync pattern and AM1 are found properly, and the command is terminated • MrtsuBISHI .... ELECTRIC 6-19 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER regardless of whether there is a CRC error. When the data address mark is found, RG is held at "1" until the data and the CRC are read and CRC check is performed. RG is then reset to "0" regardless of whether there is a CRC error. If the command is single sector read or if a data field CRC error occurs, the INTRQ interrupt request output is set to "1" and the command is terminated. The CRC error status bit is set with a CRC error. The read gate output is active during reading of the valid data stream from the sync field to the CRC. It is the signal that controls the read data tracking sensitivity for the external PLL RCLK generator circuit. Operation in the double-density mode is the same as that for the single density mode except for the following points. In the double density mode the 4-byte "00" or "FF" (HEX) is treated as the sync pattern and the adress marks "A1" "A1" "A1" "FE", "A1" "A1" "A1" "FB", or "A1" "A1" "A1" "F8" Section 10 dealing with the DesCripJioii of Operation with data request output DTRQ duril}g:i;the :disk write operation. When the data is not written during"tn:e same service period, the command is continued with 00 (HEX) as the data which is written. The lost data status bit is set at this time. DRTQ is not reset if it is not serviced. During the disk write operation, the early output or the late output is made active in accordance with the write data. Both output signals are used when the user provides write pre-compensation for the write data output, and they predict late or early peak shifts of the disk write data which is output at the same time. The TG43 output is used to control the writing current of the floppy disk system. It is "0" at the time when the track register contents are 0 to 43, while it is "1" at 44 or above (up to 255). (HEX) are retrieved within the following 16-byte period. Note that the VFOE output is active when the read track command among the type 3 commands is executed but the RG output remains at "0". Also bear in mind the following pOints relating to the disk read operation. Even during the disk read operation, TG43 is updated in accordance with the track register contents before VFOE is made active. During the disk read or write operations mentioned below (the execution of type 2 and 3 commands), the READY input is checked at the beginning of the command's execution and if the input is not ready, the command is terminated, the interrpt request output is set to "1" and an interrupt is generated (this does not apply to type 1 and type 4 commands). In this case, the not ready status bit is set. Disk Write Operation During the disk write operation, the write gate output WG is first set to "1". This enables the user to apply the write fault input to the write fault inputlVFOE VFO control output pin. Then write data are output from output WD. If the write fault input is made active when WG = "1", the command is immediately terminated, interrupt reqest output INTRQ is set to "1", an interrupt is generated, and the write fault status bit is set. When the disk write operation is about to be suspended by the type 4 command and when the type 4 command is accepted into the M5W1791-02P's command register before the data field AM2 data mark or deleted data mark is written, the command is terminated when the type 4 command is written and an interrupt is generated. The type 4 command, which is written during disk write operation for the data field subsequent to the above mark writing, is also acknowledged immediately and the disk write operation is terminated. The CPU system must write the data into the data register during the service period mentioned at the beginning of 6-20 • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 11. DESCRIPTION OR COMMANDS 11.1 Command Standby Condition After the execution ofa command has been completed, the M5W1791-02P stands by for the next command to be executed. If the head load HDLD has been set to "1" by the previous command and 15 index pulses are counted in the standby condition, the head is unloaded from the media. After this the M5W1791-02P remains into the command standby condition. When a command is written in the command register, the M5W1791-02P comes into operation according to the execution flow for the command. 11.2 Type 1 Commands (1) Restore Command This command is used to position the head to track 00. This command is automatically executed when the reset input is set from "0" to "1". During reset, the h = "0", V = "0" and r" ro ="1,1" flags are set automatically. Refer to Section 8 dealing with the hardware configuration and in particular to Section 8.1 (3) on the track register for details on the execution of the command. When the V flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the head opsitioning operation. 00 (HEX) is automatically set in the data register. (2) Seek Command This command is used to move the head onto the desired track. After the destination track number is written into the data register and the seek command is written into the command register, step pulses are generated until the contents of both the track register and data register match. The direction of head movement is indicated by direction output DIRC. The contents of the track register are updated every time a step pulse is output. When the V flag ="1", the verify operation is perfomed after the head positioning operation. (3) Step Command ates a single step pulse. When the u flag is "1", the contents of the track register are decremented by 1. When the V flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the head pOSitioning operation. 11.3 Type 2 Commands Using the type 2 commands, reading/writing the data in the disk's data field is performed. When the desired sector is found, the data is transferred into/from the CPU system using the data request output DTRQ as the data transfer timing signal. Side number comparison and multi-sector read/write can be performed by setting the command flag. (1) Read Sector Command When the read sector command is executed, once the ID field is found properly, the data is sent from the data shift register to the data register and the M5W1791-02P requests through DTRQ that the CPU system read out the data from the data register. (For details on the service time for DTRQ, refer to Section 10 dealing with the Description of Operation.) Unless the CPU reads out the data within the service time, the next data is written from the data shift register into the data register. The data which has not been read is destroyed and the lost data status bit is set. DTRQ is reset by the data register readout, but when the data has not been read out during the service time, DTRQ remains at "1 ". The length of the data fields in each sector is indicated by the sector length of the disk 10. This value is saved inside the M5W1791-02P and DTRQ is generated for the necessary number of times in accordance with this value. The relationship between the number of data in a single sector and the data byte length is shown below. Table 11.3 Data Byte Length Sector length of the disk ID This generates a single step pulse. Direction output DIRC is not changed. Therefore, the head moves toward the same direction as it did the previous time. When the update flag u is "1", the contents of the track register are updated. When the V flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the head positioning operation. OOH 01H 02H 03H Bytes/sector 128 256 512 1024 bytes bytes bytes bytes When, for instance, the sector length, i.e. the 4th byte of (4) Step-in Command 10 is 00 (HEX), data request output DTRQ is "1" for 128 This command sets direction output DIRC to "1" and generates a single step pulse. When the u flag is "1", the contents of the track regsiter are incremented by 1. When the V flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the head positioning operation. times unless lost data occurs. If, for example, lost data occurs once, DTRQ is "1" for 127 times. For multi-sector read, refer to the section on flag option m in Table 9.2. Depending upon the data address mark of the data field, the record type status bit can be set. When the data mark is FB (H EX), the record type status bit is set to "0" and when the deleted data mark is F8 (HEX), it is set to "1". (5) Step-out Command This command sets direction output DIRC to "0" and gener- • MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC 6-21 II MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER (2) Write Sector Command When the 10 field is found properly upon execution of the write sector command and the CRC check is completed without any errors detected, the M5W1791-02P generates a single data request output DTRQ. In response to this DTRQ, the CPU must write the data into the data register during the a-byte time (1-byte time is 32,us in the single-density mode and 16,us in the double-density mode with ClK = 2M Hz). Whether or not the service has been performed during the specified time is then determined. When the service has not been performed in the specified time, the lost data status bit is set, the execution of the command is terminated and interrupt request output INTRQ is set to "1 ". When the first service has been performed, the data is written after the sync pattern and AM2 have been written. After a lost data check, there is a 1-byte time delay (with the single-density mode), then the write gate output WG is set to "1", the 6-byte sync field 00 (HEX) is written into the disk, and FB or Fa (HEX) is written depending on the value of the command's data address mark flag aQ. DTRQ is generated and data is written in succession until the number per sector indicated by the 10 data length in that sector is reached. In the double-density mode, the write gate output WG is . set to "1" after 12-byte time delay following the lost data check, the 12-byte sync field 00 (HEX) is written, and the 3byte A1 (HEX) is written, after which the same operation is peformed as for the single-density mode. Unless the data are written into the data register from the CPU system within the prescribed service time for the second and further DTRQ data request outputs, data 00 (HEX) is written on the disk and the lost data status bit is set The behavior of the DTRQ output when lost data is generated is the same as that described in the section on the read sector command. Operations for multi-sector writing are the same as those during the read sector command. 11.4 Type 3 Commands Type 3 commands consist of 3 commands: read address, read track and write track. (1) Read Address Command The 6 bytes of the ID field found first are read out with the execution of the read address command. These 6 bytes in order are: 1) track number, 2) side number, 3) sector number, 4) data length and 5) 2-byte CRC. When data is sent to the data register, data request output DTRQ is generated from the M5W1791-02P and the CPU system is requested to read out the data from the data register. If DTRQ is not serviced within the service time, the lost data status bit is set and the next data is written from the data shift register into the data register as with the read sector command. When 6-22 the read address command is executed, the track number which has been read out is also written· into the sector regsiter of M5W1791-02P along with the CRC check. (2) Read Track Command The read track command serves to read .out all the data of an entire track, beginning and ending upon detection of the index pulse. Unlike the read sector or read address commands, all the data including the gaps and sync pattern are read out. The data are synchronized when the index mark, 10 address mark and data address mark are detected. "Data synchronization" refers to reading the data string from the floppy disk in 1-byte units. Read gate output RG, which gives notification that the sync pattern has been detected, is not output with this command. Neither side number comparison nor CRC check is conducted with the read track command. Unless the CPU read out data within the specified service time as with the other disk read command, the data is lost. (3) Write Track Command The write track command formats the tracks on the disk. Disk formatting requires not only that the gaps, sync pattern, 10 and data are written, but also that the marker including the missing clock and the CRC are written . When this command is executed, the first data request output DTRQ is generated after the head has been loaded into the media. In response to this, the CPU must complete the writing of the data whithin the 3-byte time. Unless the data are serviced during this time, the lost data status bit is set, subsequent commands are terminated the interrupt request output INTRQ is set to "1". When the data is serviced during the specified time, data write starts with the arrival of the index pulse. Then the CPU writes the data into the data register in accordance with the data request output When data written by the CPU are values from F5 to FE (HEX), M5W1791-02P performs special processing consisting of writing the markers and generating and writing the CRC. When other .data from 00 to F4 and FF (HEX) are written into the data register, the value is modulated as it is and written onto the disk. The write track command continues until the next index pulse input IP is detected. If the CPU hasn't loaded the data into the data register within the service time, 00 (HEX) is written and the lost data status bit is set Table 11.4 shows the control bytes of the write track command. •. MITSUBISHI ~ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER Table 11.4 Write Track Command Control Bytes Single-density format Data register contents Function Double-density format Data Clock pattern pattern Data written Function Missing clock onto disk -- OO-F4 r---- F5 Data ragister values are written onto the disk without modification. OO-F4 FF Non-usable ~. Data register values are written onto the disk without modification. Marker A1 is written. eRe is preset. OO-F4 ~ .. ------ - - - -~- Not generated A1 Generated -~ F6 Non-usable F7 2 calculated eRe bytes are written. F8-FB Writing as data. Used for writing data address mark. eRe is preset. Marker C2 is written. 2-byte eRe FF 2 calculated eRe bytes are written. F8-FB e7 Writing as data. Used for writing data address mark. eRe is preset. Generated e2 -- 2-byte eRe Not generated F8-FB Not generated ) Fe Index mark Fe is written. Fe 07 Index mark Fe is written. Fe FA Writing as data. FO FF Writing as data. FO Not generated ~ -- Not generated ------~ FE ID address mark is written. eRe is preset. FE e7 10 address mark is written. eRe is preset. FE Not generated FF Writing as data. FF FF Writing as data. FF Not generated Note: Hexadecimal notation is used throughout. 11.5 Type 4 Commands This command generates the interrupt through detection of conditions or generates the unconditional interrupt other commands may be executed only it the M5W1791-02P is in the standby condition (busy status bit is "a"), but the type 4 command may be executed at any time. When a preceding command is being executed, it is suspended and operation is keyed to the flag bit of the type 4 command. Refer to Table 9.2 for the flag bits. Interrupt request output INTRQ generated by the type 4 command is reset by reading the stauts register data or executing a command after the execution of the type 4 command with 10 -1 3 = "0"- • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC 6-23 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER COMMAND STANDBY CONDITION WARM START RESET '0' - '1' COLD START STATUS CLEAR, BUSY STATUS SET NO WHEN WRITE FAULT IS GENERATED TYPE 4 COMMAND IS EXECUTED AT ANY TIME EXCEPT IN COMMAND STANDBY NO COMMAND IS WRITTEN NO COMMAND IS WRITTEN STANDBY FOR NEW COMMAND YES 6-24 '.MITSUBISHI ;"ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER TYPE 1 COMMAND II Notel: 2: The track register, sector register, data register and data shift register are designated TR, SR, DR and DSR, respectively. Information in parentheses indicates the contents of the registers. "H" denotes hexadecimal notation. The 15 ms delay is not applied when the test input TEST is "0". 15 ms is the delay time when clock input elK is 2MHz. • MITSUBISHI "'ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER TYPE 2 COMMAND FROM WARM START 6-26 .JYllfSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER II NO • MITSUBISHI ~ELECTRIC J' 1 SECTOR~ WRITE COMPLETE 6-27 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER . TYPE 3 COMMAND FROM WARM START 6-28 .•.. MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER READ TRACK COMMAND READ ADDRESS COMMAND DR-(DSR) DTRQ-'1' SR-TRACK NUMBER NO •. MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC 6-29 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 12. STATUS The significance of the bits in the status register differs according to the command. The bit 0 of the status register is set during type 1, 2 and 3 commands to indicate the busy status. When this bit is set, the other status bits may be reset or updated. When the type 4 command has been executed, the busy status bit is reset, but whether the remaining status bits are reset or not depends on whether the previous command is being performed or not when the type 4 command is issued. When M5W1791-02P is in standby, the remaining status bits are reset or updates according to the same status bit configuration as the type 1 command. When the type 4 command has been issued during the execution of the pervious command, the remaining status bits show the status of the previous command. Tables 12.1 and 12.2 show the significance of each status bit. Tabl 12.1 Status Composition ~t Command Bit 7 Type 1 command Ni' Read sector Write sector .. o.E ~~ '"'m Co ~ ! Bit 6 Bit 5 ' Bit 4 Not ready Write protect Head loaded Not ready a Record type Not ready Write protect Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit Seek error CRC error Track 00 Index Busy Record not found CRC error Lost data Data request Busy Write fault Record not found CRC error Lost data Data request Busy 0 Record not found CRC error Lost data Data request Busy a a a a a a Lost data Data request Busy a Data request Busy Track 00 Index a Read track Not ready a a Write track Not ready write protect Write fault No preceding Command Not ready Write protect Head loaded Preceding command Same as definition of status bit based on preceding command. Read address Not ready .,. m 6-30 0 -- 1 Co ~ a Bit 3 • MI&tJBISHI .... ELECTRIC 0 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER Tabe 12.2 Command c---. Type 1 Status Register Contents Status bit Status Status Significance 7 Not ready "1" denotes that the disk is not ready. This status is provided by the OR relationship between the READY input inverted signal and the RESET input inverted signal. 6 Write protect "1" denotes that the disk is in the write protect status. This status is the inverted signal of the write protect input WPRT. 5 Head loaded "1" denotes that the head has been loaded onto the disk and stabilized. This status is provided by the AND relationship between the head load output HDLD and head load timing input HDL T. 4 Seek error "1" denotes that the verify opration was not successful. This status is reset at the beginning of the following command execution. 3 CRC error "1" denotes that there is a CRC error in the ID field. This status is reset at the beginning of the next command execution. (Note 1 ) 2 Track 00 -~ 1 Index "1" denotes that the head is on track 00. This status is the inverted signal of the track 00 input TROG. "1" denotes that the index pulse input IP is active. This status is the inverted signal of IP. Type 2/ 0 Busy "1" denotes that the type 1 command is being executed. After the CPU has written the command, a maximum of 24 clocks for single density and 12 clocks for double-denisty are required for the busy status flag to be set. 7 Write protect "1" denotes that the disk is not ready. This status is produced by the OR relationship between the READY input inverted signal and the RESET input inverted signal. 6 Write protect "1" denotes that the disk is in the write protect status. This status is the write protect input WPRT inverted signal. Record type The record type is set during read. "1" denotes that the address mark of the data field was the deleted data mark. "0" denotes that it was the data mark. During write operations, "1" denotes that the command has been suspended by the write fault iflput. This status is reset when the next command execution begins (Note 1 ) Type 3 5 Write fault Note 1 4 Record not found "1" denotes that the deSignated ID has not been properly detected. This status is reset when the next command execution begins. (Note 1 ) 3 CRC error "1" denotes that a CRC error is detected in the ID field or data field. This status is reset when the following command execution begins. (Note 1 ) 2 Lost data "1" denotes that lost data have arisen. This status is reset when the following command execution begins. (Note 1 ) 1 Data request 0 Busy "1" denotes that reading data from writing data to the data register is requested. This status is the same as the data request output DTRQ. -"1" denotes that the command is being executed. After the CPU system has written the command, a maximum of 24 clocks for single-density and 12 clocks for doubledenistyare required until the busy status flag is set. Refer to Table 12. 1 for details when the type 4 command is executed. • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC 6-31 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER DISK FORMATTI~G Disk formatting is performed by the write track command. Formatting examples are giben below for both singledensity 128 bytes/sector based on the IBM 3740 format and double-density 256 bytes/sector based on the IBM system 34 format. 13. Table 13.1 Table 13.2 Disk IBM System 34 Format Transfer byte number 80 12 3 1 50 (Note 1)'12 Disk IBM 3740 Format 3 Transfer byte number 40 6 1 26 (Note 1) ~ 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 6 1 128 1 27 (Note 2) 247 Note 2 6-32 Transfer data (HEX) -- FF 00 FC FF 00 FE 00~4C 00 or 01 01~lA 00 F7 FF 00 FB E5 F7 FF FF 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 12 Significance of transfer bytes I I Gap 4 Sync pattern index mark Gap 1 Sync Pattern 10 address mark Track number Side number Sector number Data length 2-byte CRC write Gap 2 Sync pattern Data mark Data 2-byte CRC write Gap 3 Gap 3 1 256 1 54 (Note 2) 598 Note ·1 2 This sequence is repeated 26 times while the sector number is updated. The formatting of one track is then completed. This is the standard value which keeps sending the FF data until the interrupt request output INTRQ is set. • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC Transfer data (HEX) 4E 00 F6 FC 4E 00 F5 FE 00~4C 00 or 01 01~lA 01 F7 4E 00 F5 FB 40 F7 4E 4E Significance of transfer bytes Gap 4 Sync pattern index mark index mark Gap 1 Sync Pattern 10 address mark 10 address mark Track number Side number Sector number Data length 2-by1e CRC write Gap 2 Sync pattern Data address mark Data mark Data 2-byte CRC write Gap 3 Gap 4 This sequence is repeated 26 times while the sector number is updated. The formatting of one track is then completed. This is the standard value which keeps sending the 4E data until the interrupt request output INTRQ is set. MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 14. TRACK FORMAT Track format is given in Fig. 14. INDEXP~ 10 GAP1 SYNC PATTERN DATA LENGTH CRC 2 BYTES GAP2 E 1ST SECTOR 10 FIELD GAP4 2ND SECTOR DATA FIELD ~ 10 FIELD Fig. 14 15. TYPICAL EXTERNAL READ CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUIT LAST SECTOR GA P 3 -""'---.;.. Track format A read clock must be applied from an external oscillator with the M5W1791-02P. Described below is an example of an external read clock generator circuit used for an 8-inch floppy disk and employing a PLL circuit. The circuit itself is an analog PLL circuit containing a voltage-controlled oscilator (VCO) with a center frequency of 8M Hz. It is applicable to both single- and double-density modes, and is composed of a phase comparator, filter and VCO. Fig. 15.1 shows the phase coimparator and Fig. 15.2 shows the filter and VCO. In Fig. 15.1 the phase of the raw data read from the floppy disk is compared with the phase fo the signal produced by dividing the VCO CLOCK. If, as a result, the phases do not match, the VCO frequency is tracked by the UP or DOWN signal. When VFOE is not active, the reference clock is input. The filter in Fig. 15.2 acquires the required frequency gain characteristics by means of the NF loop RC elements. C, is for tracking the VCO with respect to the relatively low frequency fluctuations in the form of flutter during floppy disk rotation, etc. In contrast, C 2 is for reducing the VCO gain in the event for relatively high frequency fiuctuatiions. A 74S124 is required for the VCO TTL, since the 74LS124 is not sufficient as the 8MHz voltage-controlled oscillation. R" R2 and R3 determine the gain. R, and R2 are resistances from 500 ohms to 3.3 kohms. R3 has a resistance from 2.2 to 4.7 kohms. C 3 has a capacitance of 47pF for generating an 8MHz frequency when VR is set to its center position and the CO NT input is made 1/2Vee , R4 is for setting the operating pOint of TR, and it is provided with a resistance of 50 kohms to 1 Mohm. Care should be taken with parts layout and writing of the VCO circuit, especially for the power supply and ground line of the 74S124. Vee instability causes a marked deterioration in PLL response. In the above example there is no filter or gain switching by read gate output RG. Note: The circuit in the example given above has low sensitivity to elements value, and works stably. However, the actual circuit used should be determined with regard to the whole system, including the floppy disk system. C, has a capacitance of 0.047/1 F to 0.3/1 F while C2 has a value of 0.0011' F to 0.00331' F. • MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC 6-33 II C"l I w .j>. I~..... ~ ." ~ III III (D () 3 Xl/2 M74LS74AP 0 3 "0 III a g REFERENCE CLOCK (0.5MHz) FROM CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR M74LS37P ~UP ,. r'I~ r-_ T- READ DATA R FROM FLOPPY DISK WG FROM M5W1791-02P II WFIVFOE 1 !-IS FOR SINGLE DENSITY 1/2 M74LS123 FROM M5W1791-02P r'I-I (')(1) -Ie RECORDING DENSITY CONTROL nCi5 FROM CPU SYSTEM TO M5W1791-02P ::111m = DDEN T DOWN R ." r o 1/2 M7 4LS7 4AP "a "a M74LS191P D QD C QC !2 (I) B A RCLK =-: TO M5W1791-02P ." o 200ns ::III LOAD i: E VCO CLOCK (SMHz) T U/D ~ '------~c1A ole> 1/2 M74LS123P RAW READ TO M5W1791-02P ,.. -I I: UI ~ :e! ...-1 Z U) (') o ...... (I) -I ::III ... (I) r r rrI ON r ... (I) ::III "iii o i- I:Z: MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER FROM REGULATED 5V POWER SUPPLY C, O.0022,uF 74S124 1kO C, O. 1,uF 4700 R, 100,uH R, 3. 3kO D, C, UP ---AJVIr----K.t--, 47pF 8200 R, DOWN VCO CLOCK --"'Wv----j~-.......-+_--"vVv--4 8 MHz TR2 D, - D TR,. TR, Fig. 15.2 Filter and : lS1588 : 2SC710 veo 16. TYPICAL WRITE PRECOMPENSATION CIRCUIT Fig. 16 gives an example of a write precompensation circuit. The amount of compensation must be set to a value which regulated for the floppy disk system. Clock generator 74S124, for the VCO of the external read clock generator cirucit in Section 15, has 2-channel VCO's so the extra one can be used also. In this case, the write data pulse width of the M74LS153 in Fig. 16 is determined by the clock and if required, it should be converted to the write data pulse width demanded by the floppy disk system using a one-shot multi-vibrator, etc. CLOCK FOR WRITE PRECOMPENSATION M74LS74AP, ETC. a. '" <;> 0; .... ~ '"::;: ::;: 0 cr LL EARLY OUTPUT EARLY (WRITE PRECOMPENSATION PROHIBIT SIGNAL) D, D, D, Do B A LATE OUTPUT WRITE DATA OUTPUTWD Y WRITE DATA OUTPUT S M74LS153P Fig. 16 Write precompensation circuit • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 6-35 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 17. EXAMPLE OF A WRITE GATE OUTPUT AND WRITE FAULTNFO ENABLE CIRCUIT The WFNFOE serves as the write fault input or VFO enable output. dependin'g on the WG output. FROM WG OUTPUT } : > - - - - - - VFOE OUTPUT FROM M5W1791-02P 1 - - - - - WRITE FAULT INPUT FROM FLOPPY DISK SYSTEM ·OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT Fig. 17 Write faultlVFOE control circuit 18. AN EXAMPLE OF THE HEAD LOAD OUTPU AND HEAD LOAD TIMING CIRCUIT The head load timing input is made available after the settling time has elapsed from the head load output. FROM HOLD OUTPUT TO HLDT INPUT 6-36 HOLD OUTPUT '. MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 19 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 19.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Symbol Parameter Vee Supply voltage V, Input voltage Va Output voltage Pd Power dissipation Topr Operating free-air temperature range Tstg Storage temperature range Conditions ------ - -- - - - - - - - - - - Limits Unit -0.5-7 V -0.5-7 V ~ With respect to Vss Ta~25'C -0.5-7 V 350 mW 0-70 'c 'c -65-150 19.2 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS (T a =O-70'C, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Unit Parameter Min Vee Supply voltage Vss Supply voltage V'H High-level input voltage V'L LOW-level input voltage 19.3 Nom Max 5 5.25 4.75 0 V 2 V Vss -Q,5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS V 0.8 V (T a =O-70'C, Vcc =5V±5%, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Test condition Parameter Unit Min V OH High-level output voltage IOH=-200"A VOL Low-level output voltage 10L=1. 8mA lee Supply current Typ Max 2.4 V 0.4 V 70 mA Input current.(HDLT, TEST, WFIVFOE, WPRT, I, V,=Vcc-OV -100 10 J-IA Input current other inputs VI=VCC ....... OV -10 10 J-IA Off-state output current V,~Vcc-OV -10 10 J-IA DDEN) -- loz • MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC 6-37 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1791-02P FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 19.4 TIMING REQUIREMENTS (Ta =O-70·C, Vcc=5V±5%, Vss=OV, unlese otherwise noted) Alternativ~ Symbol Limits Parameter Test conditions symbol lSU(A-R) Unit Min Typ Max Address setup time before read and chip select TSET 50 ns Address hold time after read and chip select THLD 10 ns 280 ns 50 ns 10 ns 200 250 20 100 1600 800 800 1600 40 40 40 450 150 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns tSU(CS-R) th(R_A) th(R_CS) tW(R) Read pulse width TRE Address setup time before write and chip select TSET th(W-A) th(w-cs) Address hold time after write and chip select THLD tW(w) Write pulse width tSU(OQ-w) Data setup time before write thew-DO) Data hold time after ",rite tW(RR) Raw read pulse width tC(RR) Raw read cycle time lSUCA-w) C,=50pF tSU(cs-W) tW(RCLK) Read clock high-level width Read clock low-level width tC{RCLK) Read clock cycle time th(RCLK_RR) Read clock hold time before raw read TWE TDS TDH T pw Tbc Ta Tb Tc TX1 th(RR_RCLK) Read clock hold time after raw read TX2 tW(wo) Write data pulse width Twp Tbc TCD, TCD2 TMR TIP TWF tW(RCLK) tC(wo) Write data cycle time tW(. ) tW(. ) Clock high-level pulse width Clock low-level pulse width tW(RESET) Reset pulse width tW(IP) Index pulse width tW(WF) Write fault pulse width 19.5 SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS (Notel. 2) (Note 3) (Note 4) (Note 4) FM MFM FM MFM 230 200 50 10 10 (Note 5) (Note 5) Test conditidns Parameter tPlH(WG-WO) tPlH(E-WD) Propagation time from early or late to write data Ts MFM (Note 5) 125 Propagation time from write data to early or late Th MFM (Note 5) 125 tPHUWD-l) tPHUWD-WG) Propagation time from write data to write gate Twt tPZV{R_DQ) Output enable time after read tPVZ(R_DQ) Output disable time after read tPHUR-DRO) Propagation time from read to DRO tpHu R-INTRO) Propagation time from read to INTRQ tPHUW-DRQ) Propagation time from write to DRO TDACC TDOH TDRR(RD) TIRR(RD) TDRR(WR) TIRR(WR) TSTP TDIR tPHL(W-INTRO) Propagation time from write to INTRQ tW(STP) Step pulse width tPlH(DIR-STP) Propagation time from direction to step tV(WD-ClK) Write data valid time before clock TWdl tV(ClK-WD) Write data valid time after clock TWd2 Note 1 2 3 4 5 6-38 ---_.Min FM (Note 5) MFM (Note 5) tPlH(l-WO) tPHUWD-E) symbol Twg Propagation time from write gate to write data 500 200 2,3,4 250 250 550 250 ILS 20000 20000 ns ns ILS ILS ILS (T a=O-70·C , Vcc=5V±5% , Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted) Alternative Symbol 250 2000 FM (Note 5) MFM (Note 5) C,-50pF C,-50pF MFM MFM MFM MFM Typ Unit Max 2 1 ILS ILS ns ns 2 1 50 (Note 5) (Note 5) (Note 5) (Note 5) CLK=lMHz CLK=2MHz CLK=1 MHz CLK=2MHz Limrts 2or4 12 200 30 50 50 250 150 250 500 250 500 ILS ILS ns ns ns ns ns ns ILS ILS ns ns ns ns The pulse of RAW READ may be any Width If pulse IS entirely wlthm RCLK. When the pulse occurs m the RCLK Window, RAW READ pulse width must be less than 300 ns for MFM mode and 600 ns for FM mode at CLK=2MHz. Times double for 1MHz. 100 ns pulse width is recommended for the RAW READ pulse in 8 MFM mode. RAW READ cycle time TC(AA) and WD cycle time TC'DfATE TG 43 TG43 OUTPUT HDLD ~D~~dTOAD 27 ~ 26 ~ RCLK FNift?T CLOCK 25 - RG READ GATE OUTPUT RAW READ l~p~lEAD oO~~at EARLY~ 17 LATE ~ 18 ~~~Ot RESET -19 ouMJIf (Ov)v ss 0 --...----~ NC: NO CONNECTION Outline 40P4 systems. The hardware of the M5W1793-02P consists of a floppy disk interface, a CPU interface and a PLA control logic. The total chip can be programmed by eleven 8-bit commands. The floppy disk interface portion performs the communication with the floppy disk drive under control of the PLA control logic. The CPU interface portion has five registers - command, data, status, track and sector register - and communicates with the CPU through the data bus. These functions are also controlled by the PLA. BIDIRECTIONAL DAT~ BUS D, D,DsD,D3D,DIDo 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 WRITE CONTROL INPUT WR CHIP SELECT INPUT C§ READ CONTROL INPUT lii5 REGISTER SELECT{Ao INPUT A, 2 3 4 5 6 ""--"o--{'36 WPRT WRITE PROTECT INPUT INDEX PULSE INPUT TRACK 00 INPUT r===t=~~~~==~3 READY READY INPUT II 23 HDLT HEAD LOAD TIMING INPUT TG43 OUTPUT HEAD LOAD OUTPUT DIRECTION OUTPUT STEP OUTPUT '--t-t--'+'t-~ jj5 'i'ROO EARLY OUTPUT EARLY Q;17H!~rrn LATE OUTPUT LATE 18 WRITE GATE OUTPUT WG 3 WRITE DATA OUTPUT WD 31 RAW R~~6' I~~~~ TEST INPUT 27 RCLK READ CLOCK INPUT CLK CLOCK INPUT DDEN DOUBLE DENSITY MODE()3:1}-----<>-----------~ SELECT INPUT 33 RG WFIVFOE RESET READ GATE ~~ITM~gLT RESET INPUT OUTPUT ENABLE OUTPUT 6-40 6MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC INTERRUPT REQUEST OUTPUT DATA REQUEST OUTPUT MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1793-02P FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 7. PIN DESCRIPTION Pin NC - WR Name NC(pin 1) is not internally connected connection Write control input CS Chip select input Read control input Functions output No internal - RD Input or Input Write signal from a master CPU (Active lOw). Inpul Chip select (Active lowl. Input Read signal from a master CPU (Active low). Register select inputs. These inputs select the register under the control of the RD and Ao. A, Do~D7 Register select input Bidirectional data bus Input - RD WR. - WR A, Ao 0 0 STATUS REGISTER COMMAND REGISTER 0 1 TRACK REGISTER TRACK REG ISTER 1 1 0 SECTOR REGISTER SECTOR REGISTER 1 DATA REGISTER DATA REGISTER InlOut Three-state, non-inverted bidirectional data bus. Step pulse output (Active high). STEP Step output Output DIRC Direction output Output Direction output. High level means the head is stepping in and low level means the head is stepping out. EARLY Early output Output This signal is used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted earty. lATE Late output Output This signal is also used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted late. Reset input (Active low). The device is reset by this signal and automaticaily loads "03" (hexadecimal) into --RESET Reset input Input the command register. The not-ready-status bit is also reset by this signal. When reset input is made to be high, the device executes restore command even unless READY is active and the device loads "01" (hexadecimal) to the sector register. "- -TEST HDlT Test input Head load timing input Input Input ClK Clock input RG Read gate output Output RClK Read clock input Input --- Raw read input Input HDlD Head load output RAW READ Input Output This input is only used for test purposes, so user must tie it to Vce or leave it open unless using voice call actuated motors. When the device finds high level on this input, the device assumes that the head is engaged on the media. Active high. Clock input to generate internal timing. 2MHz for 8-inch drives, 1MHz for mini drives. This signal shows the external data separator that the syncfield is detected. This signal is internally used for the data window, Phasing relation to raw read data is specified but polarity (RCLK high or low) Is not important. This input signal from the drive shall be low for each recorded flux transition. This output signal controls the loading of the head of the drive. The head must be loaded on the media by this high-level output. • MITSUBISHI ..... ELECTRIC 6-41 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1793-02P FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER Name Pin Input or Functions output TG43 TG 43 output Output WG Write gate output Output WD Write data output Output This output is valid only during disk read/write operation and it shows the position of the head. High level on this output indicates that head is posmoned between track 44 to 76. This signal becomes active before disk write operations are to occur. This signal consists of data bits and clock bits. It becomes active for every flux transition. Active high. This signal shows the device the drive is ready. In the disk read/write operation except for TYPE 1 com- READY Ready input Input mand operation, low level input terminates current operation and the device generates the INTRQ. In the TYPE 1 command operation, this signal is neglected. Not ready bit in the status register is the inverted form of this input. This is a bidirectional signal. It becomes write fault input when WG is active. In the disk write operation, --- WFIVFOE Write fault input! VFO enable InlOut low level signal on this input terminates the write operation and makes INTRQ active. This signal also appears in the status register as the write fault bit. When WG is inactive, this signal works as VFO enable -- output. VFOE output is also an open drain type, so pull it up to Vee and never input active write fault signal output write WG is inactive. TROO Track 00 input Input This signal indicates that the head is located on the track 00 to the device. Active low. IP Index pulse input Input This input indicates to the device that an index hole of the diskette has been encountered. --WPRT Write protect Input write operations, this signal is sampled and an active low signal will terminate the current command and --DDEN Double density DTRQ INTRQ NG 6-42 input mode select input Data request output Interrupt request output No internal connection Low level signal on this input informs the device that the drive is in the write protected state. Before disk set INTRQ. The write protect status bit in the status register is also set. Input This input determines the device operation mode. When DDEN=O, double density mode is selected. When DDEN=l, single density mode is selected. DTRQ is an open drain output, so pull up to Vee by the 10k resistor. In the disk read mode, DTRQ indicates Output that data is assembled in the data register. In the disk write mode, it indicates that the data register is empty. DTRQ is reset by the read data or write data operation. Output INTRQ is also a open drain output, so pull up to Vec by the 10k resistor. INTRQ becomes active at the completion of any command and is reset when the CPU reads the status or writes the command. NC (pin 40) is not internally connected. • MITSUBISHI ;"ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls M5W1793-02P FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 8. COMMAND DESCRIPTION There are 11 different commands. By setting CS to "0" ,Ao to "0" and A, to "0", the commands are written into the M5W1793-02P from the data bus at the rising edge of the Table 8.1 WR signal. The commands are classified into four Types Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4. type 1, List of Commands Command type Type 1 commands Command MSB Restore command a Seek cc;>mmand 0 Step command a a h V f, fO 0 1 h V f, fo 0 1 u h V f, fa Slep-in command 0 1 0 u h V f, fa Step-out command 0 1 1 u h V f, fo Read sector command 1 a a m S E C 0 Write sector command 1 0 1 m S E C ao a a 0 E a 0 E 0 Type 2 commands Type 3 commands Type 4 commands LSB Code a a a Read address command 1 1 0 Read track command 1 1 1 Write track command 1 1 1 1 a E 0 a a a Force interrupt command 1 1 0 1 13 12 I, 10 Nole 1: The M5W1793-02P fealufes posilive logic dala bus and so the codes afe wfitten inlo Ihe M5W1793-02P without modificalion. Each command has a flag option. Refer to these options in Table. 8.2. II • MITSUBISHI . ~ELECTRIC 6-43 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1793-02P FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER Table 8.2 Flag Options Flag Description When h =1: The head is loaded at the beginning of the command execution. h : Head load flag When h =0: The head is loaded when the verify operation starts if the V flag is "1". It is not loaded if the V flag is "0". When V =1: The contents of the track register are compared with the 10 track address after head V : Verify flag Type 1 positioning. The seek error status bit is set if the desired track address is not found by the time the diskette has gone through 6 rotations. When V =0: The track verification is not performed. commands n. fO : Stepping rate flag The stepping rate is determined by the value of these 2 bits as well as by the elK frequency and TEST input pin. When u = 1: The track register is updated with each step pulse: It is incremented (or u : Update flag decremented) by 1 for each step-in (or step-out) pulse. When u =0: Track register is not updated. When E =1: Sampling of the head load timing input starts with the 15ms delay after the head load output has been set to "1". An advance is made to the next step when HOLO'HLDT = "1" is Type 2/Type3 Commands E : ISms delay flag(at 2M Hz clock) established. When E =0: Sampling of the head load timing input starts immediately after the head load output has been set to "1 ". An advance is made to the next step when HOLD' HLOT = "1" is estaplished. The "next step" is the TG43 output update. When m =,: Multi-sector read/write is performed. Upon completion of one sector read/write, the sector register value is incremented by 1, the next sector is sought and read/write is performed m : Multi-sector read/write flag again. Upon completion of the final sector read/write operation, the next sector is not found even when sought and so at the sixth rotation of the diskette the RNF error bit is set and the operation is concluded. This command can also be concluded with the Type 4 cOFDmand. When m =0: Read/write for single sector is performed. When S =1: "1" is compared with the 10 side number when the C flag is ",". Type 2 commands S : Side select flag When S =0: "0" is compared with the ID side number when the C flag is ",". No comparison is performed when C =0. C : Side compare flag When C =1: The S flag and ID side number are compared. When C =0: The 10 side number is not compared. When ao= 1: The deleted data mark "FB" (hexadecimal) is written into the data field address ao : Data address mark flag mark. When ao =0: The data mark "FB" (hexadecimal)·is written into the data field address mark. When 10 =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input rising edge. When 1, =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input falling edge. When 1, =1: The interrupt request output is set to "B" with the index pulse input. Type 4 command I : Interrupt condition flag When 13 =1: The command being executed is terminated and the interrupt request output is set to "H" immediately. When 10 = h = 12 = 13 =0: No interrupt request is generated but the command being executed is terminated. This command is executed so that the interrupt request output, which has been set by the Type 4 command, is reset by the following command write or status read. 6-44 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1793-02P FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 9. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 9.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Symbol Parameter Vee Supply vollage V, Input voltage Va Output voltage Pd Power dissipation T opr Operating free-air temperature range Tstg Storage temperature range 9.2 limits Unit -0.5-7 V -0.5-7 V Conditions With respect to Vss -0.5-7 V 350 mW 0-70 ·C -65-150 ·C Ta=25·C RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS -- (T a=0-70·C. unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Parameter Unit Min Vee Supply voltage Vss Supply voltage V ,H High-level input voltage V ,L Low-level input voltage 9.3 Nom Max 5 5.25 4.75 0 V 2 V Vss -O.5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS V 0.8 V (T a =O-70·C, Vcc =5V±5%, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Unit Test condition Parameter Min V OH High-level output voltage IOH=-200I'A VOL Low-level output voltage IOL=1.8mA lee Supply current Typ Max 2.4 V 0.4 V 70 mA Input current,(HDLT. TEST. WFIVFOE, WPRT, I, loz V,=VCC- OV -100 10 IJ-A Input current other inputs VI=VCC--'- OV -10 10 IJ-A Off-state output current VI=VCC--" OV -10 10 IJ-A DDEN) -- • MITSUBISHI ...... ELECTRIC 6-45 MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1793-02P FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 9.4 TIMING REQUIREMENTS (T a =0-70·C, Vcc=5V±5%, Vss=OV, unlese otherwise noted) limits Alternative Symbol Parameter tSU(A_R) Unit Test conditions symbol Min Typ Max Address setup time before read and chip select TSET 50 ns Address hold time after read and chip select THLD 10 ns 280 ns 50 ns 10 ns 200 250 20 100 1600 800 800 1600 40 40 40 450 150 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns /-is ns ns tSU(CS-R) thCR_A) thcR-cs) Read pulse width TRE Address setup time before write and chip select TSET Address hold time after write and chip select THLD tw(w) Write pulse width tSU{OQ_w) Data setup time before write th(W-DQ) Data hold time after write tW(RRl Raw read pulse width tC(RR) Raw read cycle time tW(RCLK) Read clock high-level width tW(RCLK) Read clock low-level width tC(RCLK) Read clock cycle time th(RClK_RR) Read clock hold time before raw read TWE TDS TDH T pw Tbc Ta Tb Te TX1 th(RR-RCLK) Read clock hold time after raw read Txz tW(wo) Write data pulse width Twp tecWD) twc. ) t w (' ) Write data cycle time Tbe TCD , TCDz TMR TIP TWF tW(R) tSU(A-W) CL =50pF tSU(cs-w) thCW_A) thcw-cs) Clock high-level pulse width Clock low-level pulse width tW(RESETl Reset pulse width Index pulse width tW(IP) Write fault pulse width tW(WF) 9.5 SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS (Notel. 2) (Note 3) (Note 4) (Note 4) FM MFM FM MFM 230 200 50 10 10 (Note 5) (Note 5) tPLH(E_WD) tPHL(WD_E) Twg FM (Note 5) MFM (Note 5) Propagation time from early or late to write data Ts MFM (Note 5) 125 Propagation time from write data to early or late Th MFM (Note 5) 125 tPHL(WD-WG) Propagation time from write data to write gate Twt tPZV(R-DOJ Output enable time after read tPVZ(R-DO) Output disable time after read tPHUW-INTRQ) Propagation time from write to INTRQ tW(STP) Step pulse width tPLH(DIR_STP} Propagation time from direction to step TDACC TDOH TDRR(RD) TIRR(RD) TDRR(WR) TIRR(WR) TSTP TDIR tV(WD_CLK) Write data valid time before clock TWd1 tV(CLK.WDJ Write data valid time after clock Twdz tPHUR-DRQ) Propagation time from read to ORO tPHL(R_INTRO) Propagation time from read to INTRQ tPHUW_DRO) Propagation time from write to ORO Note 1 2 3 4 5 6-46 /-is /-is /-is Unit Min Propagation time from write gate to write data tPHUWD-Ll 20000 20000 Test conditidns symbol tPLH(L_WD) 550 250 Umrts Parameter tPLH(WG.WD) 500 200 2,3,4 250 250 (Ta =0-70·C, Vcc =5V±5%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted) Alternative Symbol 250 2000 FM (Note 5) MFM (Note 5) CL =50pF CL =50pF MFM MFM MFM MFM Max 2 1 /-is /-is ns ns 2 1 50 (Note 5) (Note 5) (Note 5) (Note 5) CLK=l MHz CLK=2MHz CLK-l MHz CLK-2MHz Typ 20r4 12 200 30 50 50 250 150 250 500 250 500 /-is /-is ns ns ns ns ns ns /-is /-is ns ns ns ns The pulse of RAW READ may be any Width If pulse IS entirely within RCLK. When the pulse occurs In the RCLK Window, RAW READ pulse width must be less than 300 ns for MFM mode and 600 ns for FM mode at CLK=2MHz. Times double for 1MHz. 100 ns pulse width is recommended for the RAW READ pulse in 8 MFM mode. RAW READ cycle time T CCRR) and WD cycle time TCCWD) is normally 2/-is in MFM and 4/-is in FM. Times double when CLK=l MHz. The polarity of RCLK during RAW READ is not important. Times double when CLK=lMHz. • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI LSls MSW1793-02P FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER 9.6 TIMING DIAGRAM Read Write -16 OR 32;lS -16 OR 32;lS OTRQ OTRQ INTRQ INTRQ Ao, A" Ao, 1. CS CS PO-;-;~~UT) --------- DO-07 (INPUT) Nole 6: 7: maximum value, FM: 27. 5;lS, MFM: 13. 5;lS maximum value; FM: 23. 5;lS, MFM: 11. 5;lS Write data Input data e J:: te(RRl ~tt:;;;;;;--;~===:;['J IW(RCLK) .J1 th(RCLK-AR) __ l\.....J RAW READ RCLK ISERvleE(RD) ISERVICE(WR) ~ It le(RcLK) I WIRCLK ) -( "-- th(RR-ACLKJ tPLH(E-WO) tpHUWD-EJ II 1 L -1 1 t'---tpLH(l-WOJ tpHUWD-Ll CLK~ wo tV(WD-CLKl tV(CLK-WOJ Others 10. OTHERS Refer to the description of M5W1791-02P for further information, • MITSUBISHI "ELECTRIC 6-47 CONTACT ADDRESSES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION FRANCE Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH 65 Avenue de Colmar Tour Albert 1er F-92507 Rueil Malmaison Cedex, France Telex: 202267 (MELCAM F) Telephone: (01) 7329234 Facsimile: (01) 7080405 JAPAN Electronics Marketing Division Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2-3, Marunouchi 2-chome Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100, Japan Telex: 24532 MELCO J Telephone: (03) 218-3473 (03) 218-3499 Facsimile: (03) 214-5570 U.S.A. NORTHWEST Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. 1050 East Arques Ave. Sunnyvale, Ca 94086, U.S.A. Telex: 172296 MELA SUVL Twx: 910-339-9549 Telephone: (408) 730-5900 Facsimile: (408) 730-4972 Overseas Marketing Manager Kita-Itami Works 4-1, Mizuhara, Itami-shi, Hyogo-ken 664, Japan Telex: 526408 KMELCO J Telephone: (0727) 82-5131 Facsimile: (0727) 72-2329 SOUTHWEST Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. 991 Knox St. Torrance, CA 90502, U.S.A. Telex: 664787 MELA TRNC Telephone: (213) 515-3993 Facsimile: (213) 324-6578 HONG KONG Ryoden Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. 22nd fl., Leighton Centre 77, Leighton Road Causeway Bay, Hong Kong Telex: 73411 RYODEN HX Telephone: (5) 7907021 Facsimile: (852) 123-4344 SOUTH CENTRAL Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. 2105 Luna Road, Suite 320 Canollton, TX 75006, U.S.A. Telephone: (214) 484-1919 Facsimile: (214) 243-0207 SWEDEN Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH Lastbilsvagen 6B 5-19149 Sollentuna, Sweden Telex: 10877 (meab S) Telephone: (08) 960468 Facsimile: (08) 966877 NORTHERN Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. 15612 HWY 7 #243 Minnetonka, MN 55345, U.S.A. Telex: 291115 MELA MTKA Telephone: (612) 938-7779 Facsimile: (612) 938-5125 WEST GERMANY Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH Head Quater Gothear Str. 6 4030 Ratingen 1, West Germany Telex: 8585070 MED'D Telephone: (02102) 4860 Facsimile: (02102) 486-115 NORTH CENTRAL Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. 799 North Bierman Circle, Mt. Prospect, IL 60056, U.S.A. Telex: 270636 MESA CHIMPCT Telephone: (312) 298-9223 Facsimile: (312) 298-0567 U.K. Mitsubishi Electric (U.K.) Ltd. Centre Point, (18th Floor) 103 New Oxford st., London WC1, England, U.K. Telex: 296195 MELCO G Telephone: (01) 379-7160 Facsimile: (01) 836-0699 TAIWAN MELCO TAIWAN Co., Ltd. 6th fl., Chung-Ling Bldg., 363, Sec. 2, Fu-Hsing S. Road Taipei, R.O.C. Telephone: (704) 0247 Facsimile: (704) 4244 NORTHEAST Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. 200 Unicorn Park Drive Woburn, MA 01801, U.S.A. Telex: 951796 MELA WOBN Twx: 710-348-1229 Telephone: (617) 938-1220 Facsimile: (617) 938-1075 MID-ATLANTIC Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. Two University Plaza Hackensack, NJ 07601, U.S.A. Telex: 132205 MELA HAKI Twx: 710-991-0080 Telephone: (201) 488-1001 Facsimile: (201) 488-0059 SOUTH-ATLANTIC Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. 6575 The Carners Parkway. Suite 100 Norcross, GA 30092, U.S.A. Twx: 910-380-9555 Telephone: (404) 662-0813 Facsimile: (404) 662-5208 SOUTHEAST Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc. Town Ex. CTR. 6100 Glades Rd. # 210 Boca Raton, FL 33433, U.S.A. Twx: 510-953-7608 Telephone: (305) 487-7747 Facsimile: (305) 487-2046 • MITSUBISHI .... ELECTRIC ITALY Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Cassiopea 1 20041 Agrate Brianza I-Milano Telephone: (039) 636011 Facsimile: (039) 6360120 AUSTRALIA Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. 73-75, Epping Road, North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113 Australia P.O. Box 1567 Macquarie Centre N.S. W. 2113 Australia Telex: MESYD AA 26614 Telephone: (02) 888-5777 Facsimile: (02) 887-3635 MITSUBISHI DATA BOOK MICROPROCESSORS AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS July, First Edition 1985 Editioned by Committee of editing of Mitsubishi Semiconductor Data Book Published by Mitsubishi Electric Corp., Semiconductor Division This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. MITSUBISHI SEMICONDUCTORS MICROPROCESSORS AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS 1985 ~MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFF IC E M ITSU BI5HI DENKI BLDG H-C5267 -C KI-8509 Printed in Japan (ROD) MA RUNOUC HI. TOKYO 100 TE LEX J2453 2 CA BLE M ELCO TOKYO Revised publication , effective Sept. 1985 . superseding public ation H-C5267-B of Ju l. 1985 . Spec ific ation s subj ect to change without noti ce.


Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Create Date                     : 2017:08:15 13:41:42-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:08:15 14:28:13-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:08:15 14:28:13-07:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:8b2ed498-c4cc-0344-a71a-f5ae65536a1a
Instance ID                     : uuid:edf53f07-e068-bc45-aaaa-471e89189d3e
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 344
EXIF Metadata provided by
EXIF.tools

Navigation menu